HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 5797A - Contract - DE Rice Construction Company Inc.- West TX Regional Disposal Facility - 03_26_1998FOR RESOLUTION
# 57�
REFERENCE
PERMANENT MINUTES
DATE: [Vjaech a�, lqjR
�h�u /' # "o
5999 6.5999-A )
04220-1
01
6G31,
7J20 SECTION 04220
r
02
03
CONCRETE MASONRY
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
Construct sample wall for Architect review.
10
1. 4 x 6 FT minimum.
11
2. If not acceptable, construct additional sample
12
walls.
13
3. Sample wall constitutes standard of quality for
14
actual construction.
15
4. Maintain sample wall during construction.
16
5. Remove when directed.
17
6. Sample wall may be built into permanent wall,
18
provided sample area is identifiable during
19
construction.
20
7. Do not proceed with block work until sample wall
21
is approved by Architect.
22
23
B.
Tolerances:
24
1. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines
25
and surfaces of columns, walls and arises:
26
27
a. 1/4 IN in 10 FT.
b. 3/8 IN in a story height not over 20 FT.
28
C. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.
29
2. Maximum variation from plumb for external
30
corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous
31
lines:
32
a. 1/4 IN in any story or 20 FT maximum.
33
b. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.
34
3. Maximum variation from level of grades for
35
exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
36
grooves and other conspicuous lines:
37
a. 1/4 IN in any bay or 20 FT.
38
b. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more.
39
4. Maximum variation from plan location of related
40
portions of columns, walls and partitions:
41
a. 1/2 IN in any bay or 20 FT.
42
b. 3/4 IN in 40 FT or more.
43
5. Maximum variation in cross section of columns and
44
thicknesses of walls from dimensions indicated:
45
a. Minus 1/4 IN.
46
b. Plus 1/2 IN.
47
48
1.02
SUBMITTALS
49
50
A.
Samples:
51
1. Sample wall.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
04220-2
O1 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
02
03
A.
Deliver units on pallets with tight covers or deliver
04
in cubes and store covered on dunnage.
05
06
B.
Protect materials from elements.
07
08
1.04
JOB CONDITIONS
09
10
A.
Protect against weather, when work is not in
11
progress.
12
13
B.
Cover top of walls with waterproof membrane, extend
14
at least 4 FT down both sides of walls; anchor in
15
place.
16
17
C.
Provide cold weather protection; Section 04050.
18
19
20
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
21
22
2.01
MATERIALS
23
24
A.
Concrete masonry units:
25
1. Modular units, ASTM-C90, Type -I.
26
2. Provide aggregate in accordance with ASTM-C33.
27
3. Sizes and shapes as indicated or 'required for
28
conditions.
29
4. Face shell and web thickness: Table 3, ASTM-C90.
30
S. Moisture content: Table 1, ASTM-C90.
31
6. Fire resistive units: ASTM-E119.
32
7. Use bull nose units at external corners and at
33
jambs of openings.
34
8. Provide solid units, or grouted hollow units,
35
under lintels.
36
9. Provide matching concrete bricks as required.
37
10. Do not use chipped, cracked, spalled units
38
exposed in finish work.
39
11. Provide reinforced concrete masonry lintels
40
fabricated from precast or site cast load bearing
41
masonry units, filled and reinforced as
42
indicated.
43
44
B.
Concrete masonry lintels and sills:
45
1. Fabricate concrete masonry lintels and sills in
46
plant or site cast.
47
2. Use concrete having minimum 28 day compressive
48
strength of 3000 PSI.
49
3. Exposed surfaces to have surface texture and
50
color to match adjacent concrete masonry units.
51
4. Fabricate lintels to modular sizes to match
52
coursing.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
04220-3
01
5. Mark tops of lintels with lintel schedule number.
01
02
6. Fabricate lintels by one of following methods:
02
03
a. Use masonry lintel units and reinforced
03
04
concrete fill.
04
05
b. Cast lintels monolithically with
05
06
reinforcement.
06
07
C. Provide vertical dummy joints matching
07
08
pattern of vertical joints and scoring in
08
09
concrete masonry walls in which installed.
09
10
10
11
C.
Masonry accessories: See Section 04150.
11
12
12
13
D.
Mortar and grout: See Section 04110.
13
14
14
15
E.
Sealants: As specified in Section 07900.
15
16
16
17
F.
Concrete fill:
17
18
1. See Section 03300.
18
19
2. Minimum compressive strength, 3000 PSI.
19
20
3. Maximum size of coarse aggregate, 3/8 IN.
20
21
21
22
G.
Reinforcing bars: As specified in Section 03201 and
22
23
indicated on drawings.
23
24
24
25
H.
Precast concrete lintels and accents:
25
26
1. Refer to Section 03450.
26
27
27
28
28
29
PART 3
- EXECUTION
29
30
30
31
3.01
INSPECTION
31
32
32
33
A.
Verify suitability of substrate to accept work.
33
34
34
35
B.
Verify that anchors and flashings are correct.
35
36
36
37
C.
Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate and
37
38
responsibility for performance.
38
39
39
40
3.02
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
40
41
41
42
A.
Build walls to thickness indicated.
42
43
43
44
B.
Build single wythe walls to actual masonry thickness.
44
45
45
46
C.
Build in flashing, reinforcing, weeps and related
46
47
items.
47
48
48
49
D.
Perform cutting with masonry saws.
49
50
50
51
E.
Cut as required to provide pattern indicated.
51
too",,
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase I Construction
04220-4
O1
F.
Use solid units where cutting or laying would expose
02
holes.
03
04
G.
Install in running bond.
05
06
H.
Avoid use of less than half size units.
07
08
I.
Do not install damaged units.
09
10
J.
Do not wet concrete masonry units.
11
12
K.
Build chases and recesses as indicated and required
13
for work of other trades.
14
15
L.
Identify partitions indicated on Drawings as having a
16
required fire or smoke rating.
17
1. Identification: Same as indicated on drawing
18
legend.
19
2. Location: 10 FT on center, both sides of
20
partition, above ceiling line.
21
a. Above access panels in hard ceiling.
22
3. Lettering: 2 IN helvetica, painted with aid of
23
stencils.
24
4. Color: Red.
25
26
3.03
LAYING AND TOOLING
27
28
A.
Lay out walls in advance for uniform and accurate
29
spacing of bond patterns and joints.
30
31
B.
Properly locate openings, movement type joints and
32
offsets.
33
34
C.
Lay masonry units with completely filled bed and head
35
joints.
36
1. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head
37
joints and shove into place.
38
2. Do not slush head joints.
39
40
D.
Maintain nominal 3/8 IN joint widths.
41
1. Cut joints flush where concealed.
42
2. Tool exposed joints.
43
3. Compress mortar in below ground joints..
44
45
E.
During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes,
46
except weepholes, and completely fill with mortar.
47
48
F.
Point up joints at corners, openings and adjacent
49
work to provide neat, uniform appearance.
50
51
G.
Remove masonry disturbed after laying.
52
1. Clean and relay in fresh mortar.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
04220-5
01
2. Do not pound units to fit.
02
3. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean,
03
and reset in fresh mortar.
04
05
H.
Where work is stopped and later resumed, rake back
06
0.5 masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth.
07
1. Remove loose units and mortar prior to laying
08
fresh masonry.
09
10
I.
As work progresses, build in items indicated and
11
specified.
12
1. Fill in solidly with mortar around built-in
13
items.
14
2. Grout fill space between metal frames and
15
masonry.
16
3. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores
17
of hollow masonry units, place layer of metal
18
lath in joint below and fill core with grout.
19
20
3.04
REINFORCING
21
22
A.
Provide continuous: horizontal joint reinforcing, in
23
walls.
24
1. Embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for entire
25
length with minimum cover of 5/8 IN on exterior
26
side of walls and 1/2 IN at other locations.
27
2. Lap reinforcement minimum 6 IN at ends.
28
3. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with
29
reinforcing.
30
4. Make corners and wall intersections by use of
31
prefabricated "L" and 'IT" sections.
32
5. Cut and bend as required.
33
6. Install reinforcing at 16 IN OC vertically.
34
7. Use continuous joint reinforcing for bond tie
35
between wythes.
36
37
B.
Reinforce masonry openings over 12 IN wide, where
38
control and expansion joints are not provided, with
39
horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal
40
joints above lintel and below sill.
41
1. Extend reinforcing minimum of 24 IN beyond jambs
42
of opening.
43
44
C.
At intersecting load bearing walls install rigid
45
steel anchors.not over 16 IN OC vertically.
46
1. Embed ends in mortar filled cores.
47
48
D.
Install horizontal reinforcing bars. at 16 IN O.C.
49
Use 9 GA reinforcement.
50
51
3.05
CONCRETE FILL
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
04220-6
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
A. Where vertical or horizontal reinforcing bars are
required, place and inspect prior to filling
operation.
B. Fill cores.
C. Place in maximum 4 FT lifts.
D. Leave lifts minimum 1-1/2 IN below top of course to
form key with next lift.
3.06 LINTELS, CONTROL JOINTS, FLASHING AND SEALANTS
A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation
joints as indicated.
1. Where not indicated, provide at maximum 24 FT
O.C.
2. Rake out mortar in joint.
3. Locate control joints at points of natural
weakness in masonry.
B. Flashing and weep installation: See Section 04150.
C. Accessories: See Section 04150.
D. Sealant installation requirements:
1. See Section 07900.
2. Remove mortar in joint under relieving lintel and
at ends.
3. Seal joints between CMU's and relieving lintels.
4. Seal expansion and control joints.
E. Provide precast masonry lintels wherever openings
more than 12 IN wide are indicated without other
structural support or other supporting lintels.
1. Thoroughly cure lintels before handling and
installation.
2. See lintel schedule for size and type required.
3.07 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace loose, stained, or damaged units.
1. Provide new units to match.
2. Install in fresh mortar.
3. Point to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Clean in accordance with Section 04510.
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
04510-1
.,
01
OH01,
7J20 SECTION 04510
01
02
02
03
MASONRY CLEANING
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
SUBMITTALS
07
08
08
09
A.
Project information:
09
10
1. Name of listed manufacturer.
10
11
11
12
1.02
JOB CONDITIONS
12
13
13
14
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces and materials below from
14
15
damage due to cleaning operations.
15
16
16
17
17
18
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
18
19
19
20
2.01
MATERIALS
20
21
21
22
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
22
23
1. Masonry cleaner:
23
24
a. Base:
24
25
(1) ProSoCo.
25
`
26
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
26
27
Document 00440.
27
28
28
29
B.
Masonry cleaner:
29
30
1. Type: Detergent cleaning solution.
30
31
a. Sure Klean 101.
31
32
32
33
33
34
PART
3 - EXECUTION
34
35
35
36
3.01
INSPECTION
36
37
37
38
A.
Examine surfaces to be cleaned.
38
39
1. If necessary point with mortar.
39
40
a. Allow 4 days before start of cleaning.
40
41
2. Remove excess mortar using wooden paddles and
41
42
scrapers.
42
43
43
44
B.
Do not proceed with cleaning until unsatisfactory
44
45
conditions have been corrected.
45
46
46
47
C.
Test 4 x 4 FT area of each surface type for
47
48
compatibility with cleaner, using recommended
48
49
dilutions, prior to full scale cleaning operations.
49
50
50
51
D.
Cleaning indicates acceptance of surfaces and
51
52
responsibility for performance.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1-Construction
04510-2
O1
02 3.02 PREPARATION
03
04
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces, not scheduled for
.05
cleaning.
06
07
B.
Prepare surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
08
09
3.03
CLEANING
10
11
A.
Clean surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
12
13
B.
Do not use wire brushes.
14
15
C.
If metal tools are used, use only tools free of rust.
16
17
D.
Thoroughly rinse and pre-soak walls.
18
19
E.
Flush loose mortar and dirt from surface.
20
21
F.
Wet to prevent "runoff" streaking.
22
23
G.
Apply solution using fibered wall washing brush or
24
low pressure spray.
25
26
H.
Scrape off mortar and re -apply cleaning solution.
27
28
I.
After scrubbing, clean thoroughly with high pressure
29
water.
30
31
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05100-1
01
OHO1,
7J20 SECTION 05100
01
02
02
03
STRUCTURAL STEEL
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
06
09
A.
Field verify dimensions before fabricating steels.
09
10
10
11
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
11
12
12
13
A.
Comply with RISC "Specifications for Design,
13
14
Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for
14
15
Buildings" including "Commentary" and AWS "Structural
15
16
Welding Code", except as otherwise indicated.
16
17
17
18
B.
Steel fabricator:
18
19
1. Certified in Category I by AISC Quality
19
20
Certification Program.
20
21
2. Fabricator not certified shall have minimum 10
21
22
years experience.
22
23
23
24
1.03
SUBMITTALS
24
25
25
26
A.
Shop drawings:
26
27
1. Show shop and erection details including cuts,
27
28
copes, connections, holes and welds.
28
29
29
30
30
31
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
31
32
32
33
2.01
MATERIALS
33
34
34
35
A.
Steel, structural shapes and plate: ASTM-A36.
35
36
36
37
B.
Bolts, nuts and washers, high strength: ASTM-A325.
37
38
38
39
C.
Anchor bolts: ASTM-A307. Grade A, nuts: ASTM-A563.
39
40
40
41
D.
Welding rods: AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5, E-70 series.
41
42
42
43
E.
Headed studs and deformed bar anchors:
43
44
1. Studs: ASTM-A108, cold drawn bars, complying
44
45
with AWS Code.
45
46
2. Deformed anchor bars: A.STM-A496.
46
47
47
48
2.02
SHOP PRIMING
48
49
49
50
A.
Prime structural steel work.
50
51
1. Do not prime members or portions of members
51
52
embedded in concrete or mortar or covered with
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05100-2
O1
fireproofing.
02
2. Do not prime contact areas to be welded or
03
bolted.
04
05
B.
Clean steel free of loose mill scale, rust, oil and
06
grease.
07
08
C.
Apply primer to provide minimum dry film thickness of
09
2.0 mils.
10
11
12
PART
3 - EXECUTION
13
14
3.01
ERECTION
15
16
A.
Safety:
17
1. Contractor is solely responsible for safety.
18
Construction means and method and sequencing of
19
work is the prerogative of the Contractor.
20
21
B.
Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC
22
Specifications.
23
24
C.
Use erection equipment suitable and safe for workmen.
25
26
3.02
CLEAN
27
28
A.
Touch-up prime paint after erection.
29
30
B.
Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded
31
areas, and apply same type paint as used in shop.
32
33
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05301-1
01
6I03,
7J20 SECTION 05301
01
02
02
03
METAL ROOF DECKING
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
07
08
08
09
A.
Comply with following:
09
10
1. AISI "Specification for Design of Cold -Formed
10
11
Steel Structural Members".
11
12
2. AWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction".
12
13
3. SDI "Steel Roof Deck Manual".
13
14
14
15
1.02
SUBMITTALS
15
16
16
17
A.
Shop drawings:
17
18
1. Complete layout showing types of deck panels,
18
19
anchorage, supplementary framing, cut openings,
19
20
accessories, and thicknesses.
20
21
21
22
B.
Product data:
22
23
1. Manufacturer's load tables for deck to be
23
24
furnished on this project.
24
25
25
26
27
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
26
27
28
28
29
2.01
MATERIALS -
29
30
30
31
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
31
32
1. Metal roof decking, 1-1/2 IN deep:
32
33
a. Base:
33
34
(1) Epic Metals Corp., Type B.
34
35
(2) United Steel Deck, Type B..
35
36
(3) Vulcraft, Type 1.5B.
36
37
37
38
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
38
39
Document 00440.
39
40
40
41
B.
Metal roof decking: Manufacturer's standard 18 GA
41
42
steel deck.
42
43
1. Standard galvanized coating or coat of baked -on
43
44
rust -inhibitive paint applied to phosphatized
44
45
surfaces.
45
46
2. 2 IN telescoped or nested end laps.
46
47
3. Interlocking male -female type side laps.
47
48
48
49
C.
Steel shapes: ASTM-A36.
49
50
50
51
D.
Sheet metal accessories: Same material and finish as
51
52
deck members.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05301-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
1. Roof sump pans: 14 GA, with sloping sides and
flat bottom 1-1/2 IN below roof deck surface.
2. Cant strips: 20 GA, bent to form 45 degree cant,
minimum 5 IN wide.
3. Ridge and valley plates: Same thickness as deck
units, formed, minimum 4-1/2 IN wide.
4. Metal closure strips: Same thickness as deck
units, formed to provide tight -fitting closures
at open ends and sides of deck.
E. Galvanizing repair paint:
paint, DOD-P-21035.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
High zinc -dust content
A. Install deck and accessories in accord with
manufacturer's recommendations, approved shop
drawings, and as indicated.
B. Install with ribs perpendicular to supports.
1. Where possible, fabricate deck to span four or
more supports.
2. Lap ends 2 IN minimum.
3. Locate laps on supports.
4. Interlock units at sides without stretching,
contracting, or deforming.
C. Weld as follows:
1. At each.interior intermediate support use 5/8 IN
plug welds at 12 IN on center; 2 welds per
support, minimum.
2. At perimeter supports use 5/8 IN plug welds 12 IN
on center.
3. At side laps button punch at 18 IN on center.
4. Plug weld sizes refer to effective fusion
diameters of welds.
5. Perform welding so that weld metal penetrates
layers of deck materials and has good fusion to
supporting members.
D. Neatly cut and fit decking around other work
projecting through or adjacent to decking.
E. Reinforce openings as follows:
1. For openings up to 6 IN: No reinforcing.
2. For openings between.6 and 12 IN: Use 20 GA flat
steel sheet, 12 IN greater in each dimension than
opening. Fusion weld to top of deck at each
corner and midway along each side.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05301-3
O1
3. For openings between 12 and 18 IN: Use 2 x 2 x
02
1/8 IN angle header bridging placed perpendicular
03
to deck ribs.
04
a. Extend angles 18 IN beyond each edge of
05
opening.
06
b.. Fillet weld to bottom surface of each rib.
07
4. For openings between 18 and 36 IN: Frame sides
08
with 3 x 3 x 1/4 IN angles extending to and
09
supported by roof framing members.
10
11
F.
Provide accessories necessary to complete proper
12
installation of deck system.
13
1. Provide metal closure strips at open ends and
14
edges of decking and in voids between decking and
15
other construction.
16
2. Weld into place.
17
18
G.
Remove and replace defective or damaged deck units.
19
20
3.02
CLEAN
21
22
A.
Remove soil, stain, and extraneous materials
23
incidental to decking work, from adjacent surfaces.
24
25
B.
Remove foreign matter and clean deck.
26
27
C.
For decking that will not receive further finish,
28
clean exposed surfaces to a neat and uniform
29
appearance.
30
31
D.
Remove and replace decking that cannot be
32
satisfactorily cleaned.
33
34
E.
Retouch damaged shop painting using same paint as
35
used for shop coat.
36
37
F.
Retouch galvanized surfaces using galvanizing repair
38
paint.
39
40
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05500-1
01
7I30,
7J20 SECTION 05500
02
03
METAL FABRICATIONS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
Materials and operations standards:
10
1. AAMA, Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's
11
Association.
12
2. AISC, American Institute of Steel Construction.
13
3. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
14
4. AWS, American Welding Society.
15
S. F.S., Federal Specifications.
16
6. NAAMM, National Association of Architectural
17
Metals Manufacturers.
18
19
1.02
SUBMITTALS
20
21
A.
Project information:
22
1. Engineering design calculations for components of
23
stairs and landings with design live loads noted,
24
sealed by Professional Engineer licensed in State
25
of Texas, to be reviewed for general compliance
26
with intent of information given in Contract
f 27
Documents.
28
29
1.03
JOB CONDITIONS
30
31
A.
Provide sleeves, embedded anchors and other built in
32
items in time for installation, or pay costs of
33
cutting in items later, and grouting.
34
35
B.
Verify field conditions prior to fabrication.
36
37
38
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
39
40
2.01
MATERIALS
41
42
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
43
1. Materials listed:
44
a. Base: As noted.
45
2. Primer:
46
a. Base:
47
(1) Tnemec.
48
3. Galvanizing repair paint:
49
a. Base:
50
(1) ZRC Products.
51
(2) Tnemec.
52
4. Dissimilar metal protection coating:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05500-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
a. Base:
(1) Tnemec.
5. Coal tar epoxy:
a. Base:
(1) Glidden.
(2) Courtauld Coatings.
6. Grout, non -shrink:
a. Base:
(1) Minwax Construction Products.
(2) Sauereisen.
7. Slip resistant nosings for concrete stairs:
a. Base:
(1) Balco/Metalines.
b. Optional:
(1) Amstep Products.
(2) Wooster Products.
8. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
Document 00440.
B. Structural steel: ASTM-A36.
C. Cast steel: ASTM-A27/A27M, Grade-65-35,_and
ASTM-A148/A148M, Grade-80-50.
D. Structural tubing: ASTM-A500, Grade B.
E. Bolts, nuts and washers, high strength: ASTM-A325
F. Bolts and nuts, unfinished: ASTM-A307, Grade A.
G. Filler metal: AWS Standards, A5.1, E70 series.
H. Steel pipe: ASTM-A53, Types E or S, Grade B.
I. Galvanizing: ASTM-A123 or ASTM-A653/A653M.
J. Aluminum: ASTM-B308/B308M for particular alloy in
standard shapes and extrusions, ASTM-B26/B26M for
castings.
K. Stainless steel: ASTM-A484/A484M and ASTM-A276, Type
302.
L. Anchorage devices, masonry:
1. Standard manufactured items.
2. Lead expansion shields for machine screws and
bolts 1/4 IN and smaller: Head out embedded nut
type.
3. For machine screws and bolts larger than 1/4 IN:
Manufacturers' standard.
4. Bolt anchor expansion shields for lag bolts:
Zinc alloy, long shield anchors.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05500-3
01
5. Bolt anchor expansion shields for bolts: Closed
02
end bottom bearing type.
03
04
M.
Fasteners:
05
1. Galvanized or stainless where built into exterior
06
walls.
07
2. Select fasteners for type, grade and class
08
required.
09
3. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head ASTM-A307,
10
Grade -A.
11
4. Lag Bolts: Square or octagonal head type.
12
5. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel.
13
6. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel.
14
7. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel.
15
8. Lock Washers: Helical spring carbon steel.
16
17
N.
Primer:
18
1. Tnemec P37H-77 Chem -Prime.
19
2. Use primer compatible with finish coats of paint.
20
3. Coordinate metal primer with finish paint
21
requirements specified in Section 09900.
22
23
O.
Galvanizing repair paint:
24
1. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing
25
welds and abrasions in galvanized steel.
26
2. Z R C by ZRC.
27
3. Organic zinc coating, Tnemec 90-97.
28
29
P.
Dissimilar metal protection coating:
30
1. Tnemec Tneme-Tar 413.
31
2. Coal tar epoxy:
32
a. Glidden.
33
b. Porter.
34
35
Q.
Grout, non -shrink:
36
1. Compressive strength: 8,500 PSI at 7 days.
37
2. Non --shrinking.
38
a. Minwax Super Por-Rok.
39
40
R.
Adhesive anchors:
41
1. Where provided by the Engineer.
42
2. HVA adhesive anchor system by Hilti or approved
43
equal.
44
3. Anchor rod assembly.
45
a. ASTM-F593, Type 304 stainless steel with
46
matching stainless steel nuts and washers.
47
48
2.02
FABRICATION
49
50
A.
Form to shapes indicated with straight lines, sharp
51
angles, smooth curves.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05500-4
O1
B.
Drill or punch holes with smooth edges for temporary
02
field connections and attachment of work by other
03
trades.
04
05
C.
Make.permanent shop and field connections with
06
continuous fillet type welds.
07
08
D.
Grind exposed welds smooth.
09
10
E.
Conceal fastenings where practicable.
11
12
F.
Shop fabricate in as large assemblies as practicable.
13
14
G.
Meet requirements specified under Structural Steel
15
for fabricating items of structural nature or use.
16
17
H.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in
18
accord with AWS.
19
20
2.03
SHOP PRIMING
21
22
A.
Galvanize items set in, or on, exterior surfaces.
23
24
B..
Apply shop primer to ferrous metal not indicated to
25
be set in or receive concrete.
26
1. Apply 2 shop coats to metals that will be
27
inaccessible after erection.
28
2. Do not prime stainless steel, aluminum, copper,
29
brass, or bronze unless specifically indicated.
30
31
C.
Remove scale, rust and deleterious materials before
32
priming.
33
1. Clean off rust and loose mill scale:
34
a. Steel, protected: SSPC SP-2, SP-3.
35
b. Steel, exposed to weather: SSPC SP-6.
36
2. Remove contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1.
37
38
D.
Immediately after surface preparation, prime in
39
accord with manufacturer's instructions.
40
1. Provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.5 mil.
41
42
E.
Provide dissimilar metal protection coating:
43
1. When dissimilar metals come in contact.
44
2. When metal or aluminum is anchored to or in
45
contact with concrete or masonry.
46
47
F.
Retouch scraped, abraded, weld burns, and unprimed
48
areas.
49
1. Use primer specified for shop coats.
50
2. Priming does not count as a coat for finish
51
painting.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05500-5
a,
01
2.04
METAL FABRICATIONS - PARTIAL LIST
02
03
A.
Verify completeness of following listing.
04
05
B.
Supply items required to complete construction and
06
installation.
07
08
C.
Anchorage accessories: Required to secure wood to
09
metal, wood to masonry, metals to masonry or
10
concrete, metal to metal or metal to other items.
11
12
D.
Ladders:
13
1. Galvanized steel.
14
2. Side rail dimension of minimum 1/2 x 2 IN.
15
3. Rungs: Minimum 7/8 IN round or square bars.
16
4. Punch rungs through side rails and weld.
17
5. Size to support concentrated moving load of 200
18
LB.
19
6. Minimum clearance from centerline of rung to wall
20
or obstruction: 7 IN.
21
7. Minimum ladder width: 16 IN between side rails.
22
8. Rung spacing: 12 IN O.C.
23
24
E.
Gratings:
25
1. Galvanized steel, nominal 1-1/2 IN thick.
26
2. Support minimum uniform load of 200 PSF.
27
3. Provide individual grating sections sized to
28
allow removal by hand.
29
4. Provide hold down clips.
30
5. Serrated or slip resistant tops.
31
6. Furnish with frames and support items.
32
33
F.
Stairs, steel pan (do not use in dayroom):
34
1. Fabricated as indicated.
35
2. Treads: Minimum 14 GA steel pans with self
36
furring metal lath welded in pan.
37
3. Risers: Minimum 14 GA.
38
4. Landings: Minimum 10 GA pans with angle supports
39
as required, with self furring lath welded in
40
pan.
41
5. Fabricate and design stair and landing assembly
42
to support a 1000 LB concentrated, moving load or
43
100 PSF, whichever requires stronger component.
44
6. Fabricate and design stair components in
45
accordance with NAAMM Metal Stairs Manual.
46
7. Design, fabricate, and install in compliance with
47
applicable codes.
48
8. Form surface with slip resistant materials: See
49
Section 03312.
50
9. Contractor's option: Provide factory
r�l
51
manufactured stair system in lieu of fabricated
52
stairs, subject to review by Architect.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05500-6
O1
02
G. Stairs, steel pan, factory manufactured (do not use
03
in
dayroom); Comply with following minimum
04
requirements:
05
1.
General arrangement with rise, run, landing
06
dimensions, etc., similar to stairs indicated.
07
2.
Design auxiliary framing not indicated and
08
modifications to framing required for stairs.
09
3.
Fabricate and design stair and landing assembly
10
in accordance with NAAMM Metal Stairs Manual and
11
latest AISC Manual of steel construction.
12
4.
Fabricate and design stair and landing assembly
13
to support a 1000 LB concentrated, moving load or
14
100 PSF, whichever requires stronger component.
15
5.
Stringers: Minimum 3/16 IN steel plate.
16
6.
Treads: Minimum 14 GA pans, with self furring
17
lath welded in pan.
18
7.
Risers: Minimum 14 GA.
19
8.
Landings: Minimum 10 GA pans with angle
20
stiffeners as required, with self furring lath
21
welded in pan.
22
9.
Form surface of nosings with slip resistant
23
materials.
24
10.
Provide stairs which will accept concrete fill
25
thickness indicated.
26
11.
Modify standard railings to meet code
27
requirements and details.
28
29
H. Handrails and guardrails (do not use in security
30
areas): 2 IN OD steel pipe.
31
1.
Use galvanized steel pipe for exterior use.
32
2.
Form to profiles indicated.
33
3.
Mount to provide total projection from walls not
34
exceeding 3-1/2 IN.
35
4.
Set mounting brackets and posts maximum 8 FT O.C.
36
5.
Installed handrail or top of guardrail must be
37
capable of withstanding minimum concentrated load
38
of 250 LB applied in any direction at any point.
39
6.
Installed handrail or top of guardrail must be
40
capable of withstanding minimum uniform load of
41
50 PSF applied horizontally and 100 PSF
42
vertically, but not simultaneously with the
43
concentrated load.
44
7.
Infill area of guardrail must be capable of
45
withstanding minimum concentrated load of 200 LB
46
applied horizontally at any point in the system,
47
including intermediate rails or other materials
48
serving the purpose, but not simultaneously with
49
other design loads.
50
8.
Return ends of wall mounted rails to wall.
51
9.
Make rails smooth with no projections preventing
52
a hand from sliding along entire length.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction`
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
05500-7
I. Support angles, members and loose lintels:
1. ASTM-A36/A36M steel.
2. Size as indicated.
3. Galvanize units in or on exterior walls.
4. Prime interior units.
J. Bollards:
1. 6 IN diameter extra strength galvanized steel
Pipe•
2. Size to provide minimum 42 IN projection above
ground, more if so indicated, and minimum 36 IN
embedment into concrete, pier minimum 12 IN
diameter.
3. Fabricate with welded on 1/2 IN diameter anchors.
4. Fill with 3000 PSI concrete with rounded top.
K. Supports:
1. ASTM-A36 steel.
2. Ceiling hung toilet partitions.
3. Other miscellaneous support items.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept
installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
for performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Set work level, true to line, plumb.
B. Shim and grout as necessary.
C. Weld field connections and grind smooth.
D. Where practical, conceal fastenings.
E. Secure metal to wood with lag screws of adequate size
with appropriate washers.
F. Secure metal to concrete with embedded anchors,
setting compounds, caulking and sleeves, or setting
grout.
1. Use expansion bolts, toggle bolts, or screws for
light duty service.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
05500-8
O1
G.
Meet structural requirements for erecting items of
02
structural nature.
03
04
H.
Do not field splice fabricated items unless size
05
requires splicing.
06
07
I.
Weld splices.
08
09
J.
Furnish handrails complete with brackets.
10
1. Wherever pickets or posts are indicated to be set
11
in sleeves, provide galvanized steel sleeves
12
having a minimum wall thickness of 1/8 IN.
13
2. Set pickets or posts in sleeves with non -shrink
14
grout.
15
3. Where setting is required for exterior, hold
16
non -shrink grout back 1/4 IN from surface.
17
4. Fill flush with sealant.
18
19
K.
Provide fabricated items complete with attachment
20
devices as required to install.
21
22
L.
After galvanized units have been erected and anchored
23
apply galvanizing repair paint in accordance with
24
manufacturer's recommendations.
25
1. Surface preparation: Remove contaminates in
26
accord with SSPC SP-1.
27
28
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction.
06000-1
01
7F20,
7J20 SECTION 06000
02
03
CARPENTRY
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
Lumber grading rules and species:
10
1. US Department of Commerce, PS-20-70.
11
2. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
12
3. Southern Forest Products Association (SFPA).
13
14
B.
Plywood grading rules and recommendations:
15
1. For softwood plywood: US Department of Commerce
16
PS-1-83.
17
2. For hardwood plywood: US Department of Commerce
18
PS-51-71.
19
3. American Plywood Association (APA)..
20
21
C.
Factory marking:
22
1. Identify type, grade, moisture content,
23
inspection service, producing mill, and other
24
qualities.
25
2. Marking may be omitted if certificate of
26
inspection is provided for each shipment.
27
a. Mark each piece of fire retardant treated
28
material.
29
30
D.
Standards for fire hazard classification for fire
31
retardant treated material: Underwriters'
32
Laboratories, (UL) and American Wood Preservers
33
Institute (AWPI).
34
1. Test method: ASTM-E84.
35
36
E.
Preservative and pressure treatment standards:
37
American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA).
38
1. Provide continuous monitoring of production and
39
kiln temperatures by third party inspection
40
agency to assure that production methods are same
41
as those used on elevated temperature strength
42
test specimens. Indicate compliance in factory
43
marking.
44
45
1.02
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
46
47
A.
Store in dry, weathertight, ventilated spaces.
48
49
B.
Do not bring items into building until receiving
50
spaces have humidity controlled to between 25% and
51
65%-
5 2
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
06000-2
O1
C.
Stack to provide air circulation.
02
03
D.
Store and protect materials in areas where moisture
04
content can be maintained.
05
06
E.
Time delivery and installation to avoid delaying
07
progress of other work.
08
09
F..
Handle treated material and repair damage in
10
accordance with AWPA-M-4.
11
12
13
PART 2
- PRODUCTS
14
15
2.01
MATERIALS - ROUGH CARPENTRY
16
17
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
18
1. Fire retardant treated lumber:
19
a. Base:
20
(1) Hoover Treated Wood Products.
21
b. Optional:
22
(1) Hickson.
23
2. Fire retardant/preservative treated lumber:
24
a. Base:
25
(1) Hoover Treated Wood Products.
26
27
B.
Lumber for framing, blocking, nailers, furring, cant
28
strips, grounds, and similar members:
29
1. Comply with dry size requirements of PS-20,
30
Douglas fir WWPA No.3, or SFPA No.2.
31
2. Thoroughly seasoned, well fabricated materials of
32
longest practical lengths and sizes.
33
3. Free of non -correctable warp.
34
4. Discard material which would impair quality of
35
work.
36
37
C.
Plywood:
38
1. PS1, exterior type, A-C Grade.
39
2. Provide MDO-EXT-APA Plywood, as indicated.
40
41
D.
Preservative treated material:
42
1. Provide preservative treated materials for
43
material used outside building, in roof, parapets
44
and below grade.
45
2. Treated lumber standard: AWPA C-2.
46
3. Treated plywood standard: AWPA C-9.
47
4. Preservative treatment standard: AWPA P-5.
48
5. Kiln dry to 15 percent moisture content.
49
6. Where possible, precut material before treatment.
50
7. Use salt preservative treatment on material used
51
in conjunction with elastic sheet roofing (ESR).
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
06000-3
01
E.
Fire retardant treated material inside building:
02
1. Provide fire retardant treated materials inside
03
building.
04
2. Treated lumber standard: AWPA C-20.
05
a. Kiln dry to 19 percent moisture content.
06
3. Treated plywood standard: AWPA C-27.
07
a. Kiln dry to 15 percent moisture content.
08
4. Maximum flame spread rating: 25, ASTM-E84.
09
5. Use treatment which will not bleed through or
10
adversely affect bond of applied finish.
11
6. Provide UL label or certificate for each piece of
12
fire retardant treated material.
13
14
F.
Fire retardant treated material, exterior areas and
15
interior wet areas:
16
1. Provide fire retardant treated materials for
17
material used within exterior walls of building,
18
including parapets, within metal roofing systems,
19
and within interior walls of wet areas.
20
a. Type: Hoover, Exterior Fire-X Blue.
21
22
G.
Fire retardant treated material, interior areas.
23
1. Provide fire retardant treated materials for
24
material used within interior walls.
25
a. Type: Hoover, Pyro-Guard.
26
27
H.
Anchorage and fastening materials: Proper type,
28
size, material and finish for application.
29
30
31
PART
3 - EXECUTION
32
33
3.01
PREPARATION - ROUGH CARPENTRY
34
35
A.
verify measurements, dimensions and drawing details
36
before proceeding.
37
38
B.
Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking,
39
grounds and similar supports for attached work.
40
41
C.
Examine conditions under which work is to be
42
installed.
43
44
D.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
45
46
3.02
INSTALLATION - ROUGH CARPENTRY
47
48
A.
Attach work securely by anchoring and fastening as
49
indicated or required to support applied loading.
50
1. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts.
51
2. Nail plywood in accordance with APA
52 recommendations.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
06000-4
O1
3. Countersink nail heads.
02
4. Fill holes with matching filler.
03
04
B.
Set work to required levels and lines, plumb, true.
05
06
C.
Cut and fit accurately.
07
08
D.
Make connections tight.
09
1. Use common wire nails or screws for general work.
10
2. Use finishing nails for finish work.
11
3. Use fasteners of size that will not penetrate
12
members where opposite side will be exposed to
13
view or receive finish materials.
14
4. Install fasteners without splitting wood;
15
predrill as required.
16
5. Do not drive threaded friction type fasteners.
17
6. Tighten bolts and lag screws at installation and
18
retighten as required.
19
7. Use galvanized nails and fasteners.
20
21
E.
Provide wood grounds, nailers, or blocking as
22
required for attachment of other work and surface
23
applied items.
24
25
F.
Form to shapes indicated.
26
27
G.
Provide wood blocking between studs at height of door
28
stop, behind stop, at every door opening.
29
-
30
H.
Grounds: Dressed, key bevelled lumber minimum 1-1/2
31
IN wide of thickness required to bring face of ground
32
even with finish material.
33
34
I.
Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
35
36
J.
Install wood furring plumb and level with closure
37
strips at edges and openings.
38
39
K.
Shim as required.
40
41
L.
Field treat cuts and holes in preservative and fire
42
retardant treated material in accordance with
43
AWPA-M-4.
44
45
M.
Install roofing nailers as indicated:
46
1. Match height of nailers to insulation.
47
2. Anchor nailers to resist force of 111 kg/m.
48
3. Use minimum of 3 anchors for each nailer, with
49
1/2 IN vent spaces nominally 24 IN OC.
50
51
3.03
INSPECTION
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
06000-5
M
O1 A. Examine areas to receive work.
' 02
03 B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
04
05 C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of
06 responsibility for performance.
07
08 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
07176-1
01 6G07, 7J20 SECTION 07176
02
03 WATER REPELLENT COATING - TRANSPARENT
04
05 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07 1.01 DESCRIPTION
08
09 A. Seal surfaces indicated in paragraphs entitled
10 "Installation".
11
12 1.02 SUBMITTALS
13
14 A. Product data:
15 1. Manufacturer's standard catalog cuts indicating
16 material to be used and specified rate of
17 application for surface specified.
18
19 B. Contract closeout information:
20 1. Warranty.
21
22 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
23
24 A. Proceed with work only after substrate construction
25 and penetrating work are complete and defects
26 corrected.
27
28 B. Proceed only when conditions comply with
29 manufacturer's recommendations and allow successful
30 application.
31
32 1.04 WARRANTY
33
34 A. Provide manufacturer's 10-year written warranty of
35 watertightness, and chloride ion protection.
36
37
38 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
39
40 2.01 MATERIALS
41
42 A. Acceptable manufacturers:
43 1. Water repellant coating:
44 a. Base:
45 (1) Harris Specialty Chemicals.
46 b. Optional:
47 (1) Sonneborn Building Products.
48 (2) L&M Construction Chemicals.
49 2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
50 Document 00440.
51
(-"*, 52 B. Transparent sealer for precast concrete and concrete
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07176-2
01
masonry:
02
1. Silane solution, VOC compliant.
03
2. Moisture vapor transmission:
04
a. 51.2 percent minimum when tested in
05
accordance with ASTM-D1653.
06
3. Water absorption:
07
a. 0.53 percent when tested in accordance with
08
ASTM-C642.
09
4. Enviroseal-20.
10
11
C.
Transparent sealer for horizontal concrete:
12
1. Silane solution, VOC compliant.
13
2. Water absorption:
14
a. 0.42 percent when tested in accordance with
15
ASTM-C642.
16
3. Chloride ion penetration resistance:
17
a. Less than 0.52 LB/SY at 1/2 IN level.
18
4. Enviroseal-40.
19
20
21
PART 3
- EXECUTION
22
23
3.01
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
24
25
A.
Assure that substrates are clean and dry.
26
1. Where efflorescence or alkali deposits are
27
present treat with neutralizing compound
28
recommended by manufacturer of substrate.
29
30
B.
Apply by airless spray, brush or roller.
31
32
C.
Protect adjacent areas from water repellant
33
materials.
34
35
D.
Provide adequate ventilation'.
36
37
3.02
INSTALLATION - PRECAST CONCRETE
38
39
A.
Allow concrete and mortar to cure at least 72 hours
40
prior to application.
41
42
B.
Verify caulking and sealant work is complete and has
43
cured a minimum of 12 hours prior to application.
44
45
C.
Apply to exterior precast concrete at rate specified
46
by manufacturer.
47
48
3.03
INSTALLATION - FLAT WORK
49
50
A.
Apply to horizontal concrete surfaces as scheduled.
51
52
3.04
INSTALLATION - CONCRETE MASONRY
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07176-3
O1
02 A. Apply to exterior concrete masonry.
03
04 B. Make mortar repairs at least 72 hours prior to
05 application.
06
07 C. Allow masonry to cure minimum 10 days prior to
08 application.
09
10 D. Apply at rate specified by manufacturer.
11
12 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
'02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
07210-1
O1 7I30, 7J20 SECTION 07210
02
03 BUILDING INSULATION
04
05 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07 1.01 GENERAL
08
09 A. Coordinate this section with insulation listed as
10 provided in Section 13121, Pre -Engineered Buildings.
11
12 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
14 A. Insulation reference standards:
15 1. UL requirements.
16 2. ASTM-0518.
17 3. ASTM-C739.
18 4. ASTM-E84.
19 5. ASTM-E90.
20 6. ASTM-E119.
21 7. ASTM-E970.
22
23 B. Insulation value exterior walls: R-19.
24
25 1.03 SUBMITTALS
26
27 A. Project information:
28 1. Manufacturer of listed products.
29
30
31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
32
33 2.01 MATERIALS
34
35 A. Acceptable manufacturers:
36 1. Rigid extruded polystyrene board insulation:
37 a. Base:
38 (1) Dow Chemical.
39 b. Optional:
40 (1) Tenneco Building Products.
41 (2) UC Industries.
42 2. Blanket or batt insulation:
43 a. Base:
44 (1) Owens-Corning Fiberglas.
45 b. Optional:
46 (1) USG.
47 (2) Schuller International.
48 3. vapor barrier:
49 a. Base:
50 (1) Fortifiber.
51 b. Optional:
52 (1) Alumiseal.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07210-2
O1
4.
Vapor barrier tape:
02
a. Base:
03
(1) Avery Dennison Specialty Tape.
04
5.
Granular insulation:
05
a. Base:
06
(1) Grace (WR) Masonry Products.
07
b. Optional:
08
(1) Other Vermiculite Association Companies.
09
6.
Stud strips:
10
A. Base:
11
(1) Grace (WR) Masonry Products.
12
7.
Adhesives:
13
a. Base:
14
(1) Sonneborn Building Products.
15
b. Optional:
16
(1) GEMCO.
17
8.
Mechanical fasteners:
18
a. Base:
19
(1) GEMCO.
20
9.
Mastic for use with mechanical fasteners:
21
a. Base:
22
(1) GEMCO.
23
10.
Other materials:
24
a. Base:
25
(1) As indicated.
26
11.
Other manufacturers desiring approval, comply
27
with Document 00440.
28
29
B. Insulation, rigid board:
30
1.
Foamed, extruded polystyrene.
31
2..
Compressive strength: Minimum 25 PSI.
32
3.
Water vapor permanence for 1 IN product: 1.00
33
perm, maximum.
34
4.
Water absorption: Maximum 0.15 percent.
35
5.
Thermal resistance: R-value of 5.0 per inch at
36
75 degF mean temperature.
37
6.
Integral high density skin.
38
7.
Styrofoam, Amofoam, or Foamular.
39
8.
Minimum thickness: 2 IN.
40
41
C. Adhesives for adhering polystyrene insulation:
42
1.
Contech PL200 Construction Adhesive, or GEMCO
43
Tuff -Bond No.9.
44
45
D. Insulation, blanket or batt:
46
1.
Inorganic fibers and resinous binders formed into
47
flexible blankets or semi -rigid sheets.
48
2.
Thermal resistance: R-value of 3.7 per inch at
49
75 degF mean temperature.
50
3.
Unfaced.
51
4.
ASTM-E84 flame spread: Not greater than 25.
52
5.
Minimum thickness: 3 IN.
West Texas'Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07210-3
�+•� 01
f 02
E.
Vapor barrier:
03
1.
Two directional, reinforced, foil faced vapor
04
barrier or foil/mylar.
05
2.
Permeance: Not exceeding 0.02 perm.
06
3.
ASTM-E84 flame spread: 25 maximum.
07
4.
Rolls: 50 IN wide.
08
5.
Base: Sisalkraft Pyro-Kure 615.
09
6.
Optional: Alumiseal Zero Perm.
10
11
F.
Vapor barrier tape:
12
1.
Heavy duty 3 IN wide laminate consisting of
13
0.00035 IN aluminum foil, glass fiber reinforced
14
two directional patterned Kraft paper or
15
aluminum/mylar.
16
2.
UL listed class A.
17
3.
Base: FasTape 0820 FR-FSK, or FasTape
18
0821FR-FSK-30.
19
4.
Optional: Zero Perm Pressure Sensitive Tape.
20
5.
If vapor barrier tape fails to adhere to surface,
21
spray on Norton; Spray Trim Adhesive, No.82130-1
22
or a similar product by 3M to augment adhesion of
23
tape.
24
25
G.
Stud strips:
26
1.
"U" shape metal furring channels.
27
2.
1-5/8 IN wide with 5/8 IN serrated edges.
28
3.
Roll formed from 25 GA galvanized steel.
29
4.
Furring channels used in Grace Products Div., W R
30
Grace &, Zonolite Thermo -Stud system.
31
5.
TGIF system by Dow using SM/TG board.
32
6.
Insulation thickness: Minimum 2 IN.
33
34
H.
Exterior
insulation/vapor barrier system.
35
1.
T & G Styrofoam or Foamular applied closely
36
butted over exterior face of studs.
37
2.
38
39
I.
Insulation,
granular: Water resistant vermiculite.
40
41
J.
Mechanical fasteners:
42
1.
Pronged hangers and slotted washers or arrow
43
pointed hangers.
44
2.
Sized to fit insulation thickness.
45
3.
Base: GEMCO (Goodloe E. Moore,); Gemco pronged
46
hanger with WP washer.
47
4.
Optional: Stic-Klip Manufacturing.
48
49
K.
Mastic for use with mechanical fasteners: GEMCO
50
(Goodloe E. Moore.)
51
(-', 52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07210-4
01
PART
3 - EXECUTION
O1
02
02
03
3.01
INSPECTION
03
04
04
05
A.
Verify suitability of substrate to accept
05
06
installation.
06
07
07
08
B.
Installation indicates acceptance of responsibility
08
09
for performance.
09
10
10
11
3.02
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
11
12
12
13
A.
Insulate full thickness over surfaces to be
13
14
insulated.
14
15
15
16
B.
Fit tightly around obstructions, fill voids.
16
17
17
18
C.
Cover penetrations with insulation.
18
19
19
20
D.
Seal joints with sealant or tape as applicable.
20
21
21
22
E.
Seal or tape to abutting materials to maintain vapor
22
23
tightness.
23
24
24
25
F.
Install vapor barrier over exposed insulation.
25
26
26
27
G.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for
27
28
installation unless more stringent requirements are
28
29
specified.
_ 29
30
30
31
H.
If manufacturer's instructions are not available, or
31
32
not applicable, consult manufacturer's technical
32
33
representative for specific recommendations prior to
33
34
installation.
34
35
35
36
I.
Apply single layer to achieve total thickness.
36
37
37
38
J.
Do not use broken or torn pieces of insulation.
38
39
39
40
K.
Install so completed installation is vapor tight.
40
41
41
42
L.
Repair areas as required to insure vapor tight
42
43
integrity.
43
44
44
45
M.
Do not allow foam type insulation to remain exposed
45
46
to inside of building.
46
47
47
48
N.
Provide minimum cover of 1/2 IN gypsum wallboard over
48
49
exposed foam surfaces.
49
50
50
51
3.03
INSTALLATION - BLANKET OR BATT INSULATION AND VAPOR
BARRI51
52
IN EXTERIOR STUD WALL SYSTEMS
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07210-5
01
01
02
A.
Install friction fit between studs.
02
03
03
04
B.
Tightly butt ends.
04
05
05
06
C.
Install vapor barrier to inside of building.
06
07
07
08
D.
Install 50 IN wide vapor barrier vertically.
08
09
09
10
E.
Install in continuous sheets, floor to structure
10
11
above, without horizontal joints.
11
12
12
13
F.
Fold flaps of vapor barrier over studs.
13
14
14
15
G.
Tape flaps to studs and together continuously.
15
16
16
17
H.
Tape bottom and top edges to structure continuously.
17
18
18
19
I.
After installation of conduit, boxes, piping or other
19
20
items within wall system, repair tears or
20
21
penetrations of vapor barrier with vapor barrier
21
22
tape, prior to gypsum wallboard installation.
22
23
23
24
3.04
INSTALLATION - BLANKET OR BATT INSULATION
24
25
25
/�.
26
A.
Set with vapor barrier to inside of building.
26
f
27
1. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces.
27
28
28
29
B.
Secure units using mechanical fasteners.
29
30
30
31
C.
Fill miscellaneous voids indicated to be insulated.
31
32
32
33
D.
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor barrier.
33
34
34
35
E.
Use vapor barrier tape and seal each area of
35
36
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure
36
37
vapor tight installation.
37
38
38
39
3.05
INSTALLATION - GRANULAR INSULATION
39
40
40
41
A.
Pour into cavities or spaces.
41
42
42
43
B.
Completely fill voids.
43
44
44
45
C.
Maintain inspection ports to indicate presence of
45
46
insulation at extremities of each pour space.
46
47
47
48
D.
Seal ports after complete coverage has been
48
49
confirmed.
49
50
50
51
END OF SECTION
51
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07270-1
01
6Al2,
7K20 SECTION 07270
02
03
FIRESTOPPING
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Firestop voids and openings in fire and smoke
10
assemblies, walls, floors, perimeters; unless
11
firestopping is specifically required under other
12
sections.
13
14
B.
Provide firestopping including but not limited to:
15
1. Between edge of floor slab and curtainwall.
16
2. At floor level in stud walls that bypass floors.
17
3. At top of wall below structure.
18
4. At building expansion joints.
19
5. At openings, regardless of size, which are left
20
in fire assemblies.
21
22
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24
A.
Perform testing per:
25
1. ASTM-E814.
26
2. ASTM-E119.
27
3. UL Standard 1479.
28
29
1.03
SUBMITTALS
30
31
A.
Product data:
32
1. UL report with illustration of system and system
33
number.
34
2. Fire and temperature rating data.
35
3. Certification that components are asbestos free.
36
37
38
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
39
40
2.01
MATERIALS
41
42
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
43
1. Forming material:
44
a. Base:
45
(1) Any manufacturer UL listed for system
46
used. See UL "Building Materials
47
Directory".
48
2. Fill, void or cavity materials:
49
a. Base:
50
(1) Any manufacturer UL listed for systems
`
51
used. See UL "Building Materials
52
Directory".
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07270-2
O1
3. Firestop sealant:
02
a. Base:
03
(1) Any manufacturer UL listed for systems
04
used. See UL "Building Materials
05
Directory".
06
4. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
07
Document 00440.
08
09
B.
Forming material:
10
1. Inorganic mineral fibers and binders formed into
11
semi -rigid blankets.
12
2. ASTM-E84 flame spread: Maximum 25.
13
3. ASTM-E119 and ASTM-EB14 tested as component of
14
assembly.
15
4.' Thickness and density as required to maintain
16
fire rating of assembly.
17
5. Retainer: Minimum 20 GA, G60, galvanized
18
closure.
19
20
C.
Fill, void or cavity materials:
21
1. UL listed as component of "Through -Penetration
22
Firestop System".
23
24
D.
Forming materials:
25
1. UL listed as component of "Through -Penetration
26
Firestop System".
27
28
E.
Firestop sealant:
29
1. UL listed as component of "Through -Penetration
30
Firestop System".
31
32
F.
Firestop sealer:
33
1. UL listed as component of "Through -Penetration
34
Firestop System".
35
36
37
PART 3
- EXECUTION
38
39
3.01
INSTALLATION - FORMING OR PACKING MATERIALS
40
41
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's
42
instructions, to maintain fire separations per UL
43
listing.
44
45
B.
Remove or leave in place in accordance with UL
46
system.
47
48
3.02
INSTALLATION - FILL, VOID OR CAVITY MATERIALS
49
50
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's
51
instructions, to maintain fire separations per UL
52
listing.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07270-3
01
01
t 02
3.03
INSTALLATION - FIRESTOP SEALANT OR SEALER
02
03
03
04
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's
04
05
instructions, to maintain fire separations per UL
05
06
listing.
06
07
07
08
3.04
INSTALLATION - OTHER COMPONENTS
08
09
09
10
A.
Install other components, like cover plates,
10
11
retainers, fittings, etc., in accordance with
it
12
manufacturer's instructions, to maintain fire
12
13
separations, per UL listing.
13
14
14
15
3.05
RESPONSIBILITY
15
16
16
17
A.
Contractor is responsible to select a system, or
17
18
combination of systems which, when installed, will
18
19
maintain required fire separation between building
19
20
elements.
20
21
21
22
B.
System must provide the fire (F) and temperature (T)
22
23
rating as required by applicable codes.
23
24
24
25
C.
Contractor's option:
25
26
1. Contractor may close large openings using same
26
27
type of construction as adjacent
27
28
floor/ceiling/wall assembly to maintain fire
28
29
separations. -
29
30
2. Final closure between assembly and penetrating
30
31
element must be accomplished using UL systems as
31
32
indicated above.
32
33
33
34
D.
Perform patching and repair of firestopping systems
34
35
damaged by other trades.
35
36
36
37
END OF SECTION
37
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07411-1
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
4I16, 7K20
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
SECTION 07411
PREFINISHED METAL SIDING
A. This section is for use in conjunction with Sections
07605, Metal Roofing and 13121, Pre -Engineered
Buildings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer or installer
franchised or approved in.writing by manufacturer.
1. Provide structural analysis for canopies and
overhangs with report signed and sealed by
Structural Engineer registered in the State of.
Texas.
B. Design criteria:
1. Deflection:
a. Not exceeding 1/180 at 30 PSF wind load.
b. Test in accordance with ASTM-E72.
2. Air infiltration:
a. No air leakage with 30 PSF wind load and 2 IN
of water pressure.
b. Test in accordance with ASTM-E729.
C. Exterior finish performance criteria:
1. No metal/primer corrosion or delamination under
following conditions:
a. After 1000 hours at 135 degF and 100 percent
relative humidity.
b. After 2-1/2 hours in a 2 PSI, 212 degF
autoclave.
c. After 500 cycles from 0 to 180 degF at
exterior face, holding 15 minutes at each
extreme.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Show all conditions, trims, details and
installation.
2. Coordinate work with all other adjacent and
adjoining trades.
3. Coordinate work with Sections 07605, Metal
Roofing and 13121, Pre -Engineered Buildings.
B. Samples:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07411-2
01
1. 12 x 12 IN for color selection.
02
03
C.
Project information:
04
1. Certification of installer qualifications.
05
2. Test reports.
06
3. Engineer's report.
07
08
D.
Contract closeout information:
09
1. Warranty.
10
11
1.04
WARRANTY
12
13
A.
Provide 15 year warranty, on wall -panels, -flashing
14
and associated work.
15
16
S.
Warranty to cover water integrity of panel system
17
against leaks through wall.
18
19
C.
Warranty signed by Contractor and installer.
20
21
1.05
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
22
23
A.
General Contractor:
-24
1. Prior to beginning of operations, schedule
25
preconstruction conference, at mutually agreeable
26
time, to include:
27
a. Owner.
28
b. Architect.
29
c. General Contractor and/or Construction
30
Manager.
31
d. Siding contractor's superintendent..
32
e. Siding manufacturer's representative.
33
f. Sheet metal contractor performing metal
34
flashing work.
35
g. Pre-engineered building contractor.
36
h. Carpentry contractor.
37
i. Anyone else involved in or performing work
38
effecting siding system.
39
40
B.
Minimum 2 weeks prior to conference, forward
41
pertinent information to General Contractor for
42
review.
43
1. Installation drawings.
44
2. Manufacturer product data.
45
3. Samples of.proposed materials.
46
4. Sample warranty.
47
5. Other pertinent information.
48
49
C.
Minimum meeting -agenda include following discussion:
50
1. Contract Document requirements.
51
2. Plans and elevations.
52
3. Wall and flashing details.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07411-3
01
4. Siding manufacturer's specifications and details.
02
5. Available on site storage.
03
6. Protection from damage by other trades.
04
05
D.
Preconstruction conference will serve to clarify
06
specifications, details, application requirements and
07
what work should be completed prior to beginning of
08
siding operation.
09
10
11
PART 2
- PRODUCTS
12
13
2.01
MATERIALS
14
15
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
16
1. Preformed metal siding:
17
a. Base:
18
(1) Robertson, HH.
19
b. Optional:
20
(1) Smith Steelite.
21
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
22
Document 00440.
23
24
B.
Panels: ASTM-A653/A653M steel sheets, G90 coated.
25
26
27
C.
Design:
1. Vertical laid.
28
2. Nominal 12 IN wide joint spacing.
29
3. Stucco embossed.
30
4. Shiplap, tongue and groove edges which interlock.
31
5. Joints factory caulked or gasketed.
32
6. Use whole lengths on verticals.
33
34
D.
Exterior profile: Minimum 22 GA.
35
36
E.
Exterior finish:
37
1. Minimum 70 percent Kynar 500.
38
2. Color as selected.
39
40
F.
Interior profile: Minimum 22 GA.
41
42
G.
Interior finish: Prime coat of manufacturers
43
standard light color.
44
45
H.
Perimeter trim pieces, flashing and accessories:
46
1. As required to complete entire wall panel
47
installation.
48
2. Shop fabricated corners.
49
3. Match color and finish of wall panels.
50
4. Provide all window and door opening sill, head
51
and jamb trim.
5 2
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07411-4
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
I. Fastening system: Nonferrous.
J. Subgirts and supports: G60 galvanized subgirts and
intermediate support items as required for
installation.
K. Insulation: Fiberglass or mineral fiber.
1. Minimum 1-1/2 IN.
L. Canopies and overhangs:
1. Provide structure and trim.
2. Minimum 22 GA.
3. Finishes to match metal siding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify suitability of substrate to receive
installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
for performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Erect system, per reviewed shop drawings.
B. Erect with concealed fasteners.
C. Use fasteners which lock entire unit to structural
supports and prohibit negative load pulloff under
design loads.
3.03 WATER TEST
A. After completion of walls, perform field water test.
B. Using minimum 5/8 IN ID. Garden hose, with water at
maximum pressure, spray entire surface of exterior
walls.
C. Repair leaks.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Provide required temporary closures and flashings to
maintain weather integrity, during and after
erection.
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07605-1
01
6J31,
7K20 SECTION 07605
02
03
PREFINISHED METAL ROOFING
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
GENERAL
08
09
A.
This section is for use in conjunction with Sections
10
07411, Prefinished Metal Siding or 13121,
11
Pre -Engineered Buildings.
12
13
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14
15
A.
Assure compliance with provisions of following codes
16
and standards:
17
1. AISI "Specification for Design of Cold Formed
18
Steel Structural Members".
19
2. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Steel Roof Decking
20
Design Manual".
21
3. AWS "Sheet Steel in Structures, Specification for
22
Welding" AWS D1.3.
23
4. International Conference of Building Officials
24
( ICBO) .
25
5. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 4th
/1 26
Edition.
27
28
1.03
SUBMITTALS
29
30
A.
Shop drawings:
31
1. Complete layout indicating types of roofing,
32
anchorage, supplementary framing, cut openings,
33
accessories, and deck thicknesses.
34
35
B.
Samples:
36
1. Color samples of finishes.
37
38
C.
Contract closeout information:
39
1. Warranty.
40
41
1.04
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
42
43
A.
Protect materials from rusting, dirt or damage.
44
45
1.05
JOB CONDITIONS
46
47
A.
Do not overload supporting members.
48
49
B.
Until entire assembly is complete, structural
50
elements may not be stable or capable of supporting
51
code or stated design loads.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07605-2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide 15-year warranty signed jointly by roofing
materials manufacturer, installer and Contractor.
B. Warrant watertightness of roof and associated
flashing for a period indicated.
C. Warrant color integrity of finish for same period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL ROOFING
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Metal roofing material:
a. Base:
(1) Berridge Manufacturing.
b. Optional:
(1) Vincent Metals.
2. Galvanizing repair paint:
a. Base:
(1) Tnemec.
b._ Optional:
(1) ZRC Products.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
Document 00440.
B. Metal roofing:
1. Sheet steel, minimum 24 GA, galvanized and shop
finished.
2. ASTM-A653/A653M, Grade -A, with ASTM-A653/A653M
G60 zinc coating.
3. Finish coating:
a. Top side: Minimum 70 percent PVF.
b. Bottom side: Wash coat.
4. Peterson Aluminum, Redi-Roof Standing Seam, 12 IN
spacing.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Nails:. Large head galvanized roofing nails.
B. Screws:
1. Stitch Teks, 12-14 x 3/4 hex washer head with
pilot point galvanized or cadmium plated.
2. Color to match decking.
C. Steel shapes, miscellaneous: ASTM-A36/A36M
galvanized.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07605-3
01
D.
Galvanizing for metal accessories: ASTM-A653/A653M
O1
02
G60.
02
03
03
04
E.
Galvanizing repair paint.
04
05
05
06
F.
Metal closure strips:
06
07
1. ASTM-A653/A653M G60 galvanized sheet steel.
07
08
2. Minimum 26 GA before coating.
08
09
09
10
G.
Wood substrate and battens:
10
11
1. Minimum 5/8 IN thick combination preservative and
it
12
fire treated exterior grade wood and plywood.
12
13
2. See Section 06000.
13
14
14
15
H.
Felt: Minimum Type 2 saturated roofing felt.
15
16
16
17
2.03
FABRICATION
17
18
18
19
A.
Form with flush, telescoped or nested 2 IN end and
19
20
side laps.
20
21
21
22
B.
Form metal closure strips to configuration required
22
23
to provide tight fitting closures at open ends and
23
24
sides.
24
25
25
26
C.
Fabricate roofing in accordance with following SMACNA
26
27
Figures.
27
28
1. Perform fabrication per referenced figure
28
29
designs, in SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal
29
30
Manual.
30
31
2. Design: Standing seam per SMACNA Figures 6-4,
31
32
6-5 and 6-6. 122.
32
33
33
34
34
35
PART,3
- EXECUTION
35
36
36
37
3.01
INSPECTION
37
38
38
39
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which roof decking
39
40
units are to be installed for conditions detrimental
40
41
to proper and timely completion of work.
41
42
42
43
B.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
43
44
44
45
C.
Start of installation constitutes acceptance of
45
46
responsibility for correct installation and
46
47
performance.
47
48
48
49
3.02
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
49
50
50
51
A.
Install roofing and accessories as indicated.
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07605-4
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
B. Do not start placement of roofing until supporting
members are installed complete.
C. Place each panel on supporting structural frame,
adjust to final position, accurately align with ends
bearing on supporting members.
1. Lap units at ends minimum 2 IN.
2. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
3. Place panels flat and square and secure to
framing without warp or excessive deflection.
D. Remove and replace panels:
1. Structurally weak.
2. Unsound.
3. With burn holes.
4. Those Architect declares defective.
E. Cut and fit panels and accessories around other work
projecting through or adjacent to roofing.
1. Make cutting and fitting neat, square and trim.
2. Neatly and accurately reinforce openings except:
a. Circular openings less than 6 IN diameter.
b. Rectangular openings having no side dimension
greater than 6 IN.
3. Reinforce openings between 6 and 12 IN with 20 GA
steel sheet 12 IN greater in each dimension than
opening.
4. Place sheet around opening and weld to top
surface of deck at each corner and each side
midway between each corner.
F. Install metal closure strips as required.
1. Provide where rib openings in top surface of roof
decking occur adjacent to edge and openings.
2. Securely fasten closure strips into position.
G. Install metal closure strips
and edges of roofing, and in
and other construction.
1. Fasten into position to
decking installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF METAL ROOFING
at open uncovered ends
voids between roofing
provide a complete
A. Assure that metal decking is fastened
frame and side laps as'follows:
1. At supports and at ends:
a. For 30 and 36 IN wide panels:
screws per deck unit.
2. At perimeter supports 12 IN OC.
3. At side laps 24 IN OC.
to supporting
Minimum 4
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07605-5
�^ 01
B.
Install wood substrate on metal decking with screws
02
spaced nominal 12 IN OC, with joints nominal 1/16 IN
03
and level.
04
05
C.
Install felt continuous over wood substrate, lapped
06
minimum 6 IN to weather.
07
08
D.
Secure felt with nails, nominal 12 IN OC.
09
10
E.
If metal roofing is not installed immediately after
11
felt, provide temporary weather protection.
12
13
F.
Remove and replace wood substrate and felt in areas
14
where warping exceeding 1:50 occurs.
15
16
G.
Install cleats and battens required.
17
18
H.
Install metal roofing in accordance with referenced
19
figures.
20
21
I.
Perform sealant work required to make installation
22
watertight.
23
24
3.04
CLEAN AND TOUCH-UP
25
26
A.
Clean and retouch scarred areas, welds and rust
27
spots.
28
29
B.
Touch-up damaged galvanized surfaces with galvanizing_
30
repair paint applied in accordance with
31
manufacturer's instructions.
32
33
C.
Touch-up PVF surfaces with material used in shop, as
34
recommended by metal roofing material manufacturer.
35
36
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
07900-1
01
6C15,
7J20 SECTION 07900
02
03
JOINT SEALANTS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Definition:
10
1. Words "calk" and "caulking" mean sealant work.
11
2. "Interior wet areas" means toilets, showers,
12
kitchens and similar areas where sealant is
13
subject to moisture.
14
15
B.
Seal joints which will permit penetration of moisture
16
or air, unless sealing work is specifically required
17
under other sections.
18
19
C.
Work included: Provide and install sealants as
20
follows:
21
1. Flashing reglets and retainers.
22
2. Exterior wall joints.
23
3. Masonry control joints, exterior and interior and
24
between masonry and other materials.
25
4. Flooring joints.
26
5. Isolation joints.
27
6. Joints between paving or sidewalks and building.
28
7. Joints at penetrations of walls, floors and decks
29
by piping and other services and equipment not
30
requiring firestopping.
31
8. Exterior and interior perimeters of exterior and
32
interior door and window frames, louvers,
33
grilles, etc.
34
9. Between cabinets, casework, countertops and back
35
splashes where adjacent to walls.
36
10. Joints between dissimilar materials, to provide
37
visually acceptable closures.
38
11. Solidly bed thresholds at exterior doors.
39
12. Other joints where caulking, sealant or
40
compressible sealant is indicated.
41
42
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
43
44
A.
Sealant materials:
45
1. Sealant specification: ASTM-C920 Type S or M,
46
Grade-NS, minimum Class-25.
47
2. Sealant testing: ASTM-0510; ASTM-C711; ASTM-C719
48
Class-25, Grade-N; ASTM-C792; ASTM-C793;
49
ASTM-C910.
50
3. Sealant use: ASTM-C1193.
51
4. Compressible sealants: ASTM-0509.
52 5. Installer approved by manufacturer.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
07900-2
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. Indicating compliance with quality assurance.
B. Samples:
1. Cured sample of each color for color selection.
C. Project information
1. Manufacturer certification of installer
qualifications.
D. Contract closeout information:
1. Maintenance data.
2. Warranty: Installer.
3. Warranty: Manufacturer.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Perform sealant work only when ambient temperature is
40 degF or higher.
B. Do not apply sealants late afternoons, late fall or
early spring, in cold climates.
C. Apply only to joints free of material which may
inhibit bond.
D. Apply to cementitious materials only when thoroughly
cured and dry.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Installer: Provide written warranty sealant work
will remain free of defects for a period of 2 years:
1. Failure of watertightness or air tightness
constitutes defect.
2. Remove defective work and materials and replace
with new work and materials.
3. Repair other work damaged as a result of
defective sealant work at no additional expense
to Owner.
4. Warranty signed by installer and Contractor.
B. Manufacturer:
1. 'Manufacturers 5 year warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07900-3
01
02
A. Acceptable
manufacturers:
03
1.
Polyurethane sealants:
04
a. Base:
05
(1) Tremco.
06
b. Optional:
07
(1) Mameco.
08
(2) Pecora.
09
(3) Sonneborn Building Products.
10
(4) Sika.
11
2.
Silicone sealants:
12
a. Base:
13
(1) Dow Corning.
14
b. Optional:
15
(1) Pecora.
16
3.
Compressible sealant:
17
a. Base:
18
(1) Polytite Manufacturing.
19
b. Optional:
20
(1) Illbruck.
21
4.
Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
22
Document 00440.
23
24
B. Sealants - General:
25
1.
Provide colors matching materials being sealed.
r!
26
27
2.
Where sealant is not exposed to view, use
manufacturer's standard color which has best
28
performance.
29
3.
Use non -sag sealant in vertical and horizontal
30
joints.
31
4.
Before use of sealant, investigate its
32
compatibility with surfaces, fillers and other
33
materials in joint system.
34
5.
Use only compatible materials.
35
6.
Obtain sealants from manufacturers who will
36
provide manufacturers' field service
37
representatives at project site for purpose of
38
advising and instructing installers.
39
7.
Provide such services, at no expense to Owner.
40
8.
Interior non -wet areas use:
41
a. Polyurethane, or:
42
b. Silicone.
43
9.
For interior wet areas use: Silicone.
44
10.
For exterior use:
45
a. Polyurethane, or:
46
b. Silicone.
47
11.
Use compressible sealant as indicated.
48
49
C. Polyurethane sealants.
50
1.
1, 2, or 3 component.
51
2.
Tremco, (Dymeric) (Dymonic for concealed use
l
52
only) .
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
07900-4
D. Silicone sealants.
1. 1 or 2 component.
E. Sealant, compressible:
1. Provide width of material twice joint width.
2. Foamed polyurethane strip saturated with
polymerized polybutylene waterproofing agent.
3. Coated on front face with non -reactive release
agent that acts as bond breaker, Polytite-B.
4. Adhesive, compressible sealant: As recommended
by sealant manufacturer.
F. Joint cleaner, primer, bond breaker: As recommended
by sealant manufacturer.
G. Sealant backer rod:
1. Rod stock of polyethylene, polyethylene jacketed
polyurethane foam, or other flexible,
non -absorbent, non -bituminous material
recommended by sealant manufacturer to:
a. Control joint depth.
b. Break bond of sealant at bottom of joint.
C. Provide proper shape of sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean joints.
B. Where finish coating or covering is to be applied to
surface (e.g., paint, wall covering, glazed coating),
wait until such coating or covering has been applied
before installing sealant.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Make joints water and air tight.
B. As required by manufacturer, prime joint surfaces.
1. Limit application to surfaces to receive
sealants.
2. Mask off adjacent surfaces.
C. Make depth of sealant not more than one-half width of
joint, but in no case less than 1/4 IN.
D. Subcaulk joints without suitable backstop, to proper
depth.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
07900-5
/^ 01
E.
Install correctly sized backer rods.
01
02
02
03
F.
Apply bond breaker as required or recommended by
03
04
sealant manufacturer.
04
05
05
06
G.
Tool sealants using sufficient pressure to fill
06
07
voids.
07
O8
08
09
H.
Upon completion, leave caulking smooth and even.
09
10
10
11
I.
Install compressible sealant to position at indicated
11
12
depth.
12
13
1. Take care to avoid contamination of sides of
13
14
joint.
14
15
2. Protect side walls of joint (to depth of
15
16
caulking) .
16
17
3. Install with adhesive faces in contact with joint
17
18
sides.
18
19
19
20
J.
Install to completely fill voids.
20
21
21
22
END OF SECTION
22
l0011
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08100-1
01
7F20,
7J20 SECTION 08100
01
02
02
03
METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOWS (HM)
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
07
08
08
09
A.
Door and frame standards:
09
10
1. Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications
10
11
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames"
11
12
(SDI-100-91) .
12
13
13
14
B.
Fire rated doors and frames:
14
15
1. UL tested and listed as fire door assembly, with
15
16
labels.
16
17
2. Comply with NFPA-80.
17
18
3. Provide 450 degF temperature rise doors at
18
19
stairs.
19
20
20
21
1.02
SUBMITTALS
21
22
22
23
A.
Shop drawings:
23
24
1. Door and frame schedule.
24
25
25
26
B.
Project information:
26
27
27
28
1.03
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
28
29
29
30
A.
Deliver materials cartoned or crated.
30
31
31
32
B.
Inspect upon delivery for damage.
32
33
33
34
C.
Repair minor damages provided finish is acceptable to
34
35
Architect; otherwise, remove and replace.
35
36
36
37
D.
Store units off ground in vertical position with
37
38
spacers to allow air circulation.
38
39
39
40
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
40
41
41
42
2.01
MATERIALS - GENERAL
42
43
43
44
A.
Steel sheet and strip: ASTM-A568/A568M.
44
45
45
46
B.
Steel sheet, galvanized: ASTM-A653/A653M, G60
46
47
coating, phosphatized.
47
48
48
49
C.
Supports and anchors:
49
50
1. Not less than 16 GA sheet steel.
50
51
2. Galvanize items to be built into exterior walls
51
52
after fabrication, ASTM-A153, Class B.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
08100-2
D. Inserts, bolts and fasteners:
1. Manufacturer's standard units.
2. Galvanize items to be built into exterior walls
ASTM-A153, Class C or D as applicable.
E. Primer:
1. Rust inhibitive enamel or paint, air drying or
baked.
2. Suitable as base for specified finish paints.
F. Galvanizing repair paint: ZRC primer.
G. Grout: As specified in Section 04110.
H. Glass: As specified in Section 08800.
2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Metal doors and frames:
a. Base:
(1) Steelcraft Manufacturing.
b. Optional:
(1) Ceco Door Products.
(2) Curries.
(3) Pioneer Industries.
(4) American Steel Products.
(5) Republic Builders Products.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
Document 00440.
B. Doors, metal:
1. Hollow metal 1-3/4 IN thick, with full flush face
sheets and flush top closures, with joints
welded, filled and ground.
2. Minimum face sheet thickness:
a. SDI Grade -III, Model 2A: 14 GA.
b. SDI Grade -III, Model 2: 16 GA.
C. SDI Grade -II, Model 2: 18 GA.
3. Exterior:
a. SDI Grade -III, Model 2 except Model 2A where
one or more doors of the door assembly
exceeds 47 IN.`
b. Galvanized, insulated.
4. Fire rated:
a. SDI Grade -II, Model 2.
b. Labeled.
C. Pairs: Labeled without astragal.
5. Interior (except fire rated):.
a. SDI Grade -II, Model 2.
b. Sound insulated.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08100-3
01
02
02
C.
Lites:
03
1.
Use fixed, integral stops on exterior face.
04
2.
Screwless snap -in stops or stops secured with
05
countersunk Phillips head machine screws on
06
interior face.
07
08
D.
Frames, for doors and windows:
09
1.
Hollow metal, types as indicated.
10
2.
Split type frames are not acceptable.
11
3.
Conceal fastenings.
12
4.
Face joints: Face welded and ground smooth.
13
5.
Other joints: Welded, filled and ground smooth.
14
6.
Steel boxes at back of hardware cut-outs, minimum
15
26 GA welded to frame.
16
7.
Exterior to 47 IN wide: Minimum 16 GA galvanized
17
steel.
18
8.
Exterior to and over 4 FT: Minimum 14 GA
19
galvanized steel.
20
9.
Fire rated: UL labeled, comply with NFPA-80.
21
10.
Interior: 16 GA minimum steel.
22
23
E.
Silencers: Provide:
24
1.
3 on strike jamb of single frames.
25
2.
2 per door on head of double door frames.
26
3.
Space per manufacturer's recommendations.
?
27
4.
Use plastic plugs to keep holes clear during
28
construction.
.29
30
F.
Anchors:
31
1.
Jamb anchors:
32
a. Minimum of 3 anchors of type appropriate to
33
wall construction per jamb; minimum 16 GA
34
wide corrugated steel.
35
b. Provide anchors in accordance with
36
manufacturer's recommendations on fire rated
37
doors.
38
2.
Floor anchors: Two 12 GA, adjustable, 3 IN wide,
39
flanged floor clips, punched for anchoring with
40
no exposed fasteners.
41
3.
Provide removable spreaders at bottom of door
42
frames.
43
44
G.
Louvers in interior doors:
45
1.
Sight -proof.
46
2.
Inverted V or Y shaped blades, 18 GA steel.
47
3.
Space blades for minimum 20 percent free air.
48
49
2.03
FABRICATION
50
51
A.
General:
*,
52
1.
Fabricate rigid, neat in appearance and free from
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
08100-4
defects.
2. Form to indicated sizes and profiles.
3. Fit and assemble in shop, wherever practical.
4. Mark work that cannot be fully assembled in shop,
to assure proper assembly at site.
5. Weld joints continuously, dress exposed joints
smooth and flush.
6. Fit doors to SDI-100 and NFPA clearances.
B. Prepare for finish hardware:
1. In accordance with hardware schedule, templates
provided by hardware supplier, and ANSI/DHI-A115
series "Specifications for Door and Frame
Preparation".
2. Locate finish hardware in accordance with
SDI-100.
C. Clean off mill scale and foreign materials, touch-up
damaged galvanized surfaces.
D. Shop prime.
1. Do not prime over code labels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine structure, substrates, and conditions under
which work is to be installed for conditions
detrimental to correct and timely completion.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
for performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls
and ceilings.
B. Plumb, align, and brace securely until permanently
anchored.
C. After completion of walls, remove temporary braces
and spreaders.
D. coordinate building in of anchors and frame grouting
with other trades.
E. Install fire rated frames in accordance with NFPA-80.
F. In closed steel stud partitions, attach studs to wall
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08100-5
01
anchors with self tapping screws.
02
03
G.
Grout all frames in masonry walls, and frames of
04
doors swinging singly or in pairs 4 FT and wider.
05
1. Grout frames full at head and jambs.
06
07
H.
Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or
08
damaged areas of prime coat.
09
10
I.
Touch up prime coat with compatible primer.
11
12
J.
Leave smooth for finish painting.
13
14
K.
Seal frames to walls.
15
16
L.
Install silencers.
17
18
M.
Leave work complete and in proper operating
19
condition.
20
21
N.
Remove and replace defective work.
22
23
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
08365-1
O1
9J01;
7J20 SECTION 08365
02
03
OVERHEAD DOOR
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
SUBMITTALS
08
09
A.
Shop drawings.
10
11
B.
Project information:
12
1. Certificate of UL construction.
13
2. Owner instruction report.
14
15
C.
Contract closeout information:
16
1. Operating and maintenance data.
17
18
1.02
JOB CONDITIONS
19
20
A.
Coordinate electrical hookups with Division 16.
21
22
B.
Verify structural door framing for acceptability.
23
24
C.
Correct deficiencies.
25
26
27
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
28
29
2.01
MATERIALS
30
31
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
32
1. Overhead doors:
33
a. Base:
34
(1) Atlas Door.
35
b. Optional:
36
(1) Cookson.
37
(2) Cornell Iron Works.
38
(3) Raynor Garage Doors.
39
(4) Overhead Door.
40
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
41
Document 00440.
42
43
B.
Door, overhead:
44
1. Coiling, steel, with G90 galvanized insulated
45
slat type.
46
2. Thickness: 1-1/2 IN (R-9.09) insulated.
47
3. Curtain: Minimum 20 GA flat slats, interlocking,
48
with end locks.
49
4. Wind load resistance: 20 PSF.
50
5. Manufacturer's standard weatherseal.
51
6. Weatherstripping at hood: Neoprene.
52 7. Weatherstripping at jambs: Neoprene guide
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08365-2
01
sealing strip.
02
8. Air infiltration: Maximum 1
CFM/FT of perimeter.
03
9. Finish:
04
a. Parts galvanized with finish
coat of epoxy
05
modified polyester; baked
on curtain and
06
hood.
07
10. Mounting: Face of wall.
08
11. Counterbalanced with helical
springs.
09
10
C. Guides: Manufacturer's standard,
galvanized.
11
12
D. Locking: Slide bolts, to accept
cylinder keyed to
13
building's keying system.
14
15
2.02 OPERATION
16
17
A. Operation: Chain.
18
1. Counterbalanced with helical
springs.
LU
21
PART
3 - EXECUTION
22
23
3.01
INSPECTION
24
25
A.
Verify suitability
of substrate and opening to accept
26
installation.
27
28
B.
Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate and
29
responsibility for
performance.
30
31
3.02
INSTALLATION
32
33
A.
By manufacturer or
authorized representative.
34
35
B.
Prior to occupancy,
adjust door for smooth operation.
36
37
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08700-1
01
7I30,
7J20 SECTION 08700
02
03
FINISH HARDWARE
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
Finish designations and standards: Builders Hardware
10
Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Standard 1301.
11
12
B.
Installer qualifications: Supervised or inspected by
13
certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
14
15
1.02
SUBMITTALS
16
17
A.
Product data:
18
1. Complete hardware schedule by door.
19
a. Complete list of products and model numbers.
20
b. Certification that items bear UL label where
21
required.
22
23
B.
Contract closeout information:
24
1. Operating and maintenance data.
25
a. Parts catalog for each product furnished.
26
b. Keying records.
27
2. Owner instruction report.
28
3. Six months maintenance report.
29
4. Letter stating extra material has been delivered.
30
5. Document from AHC stating all hardware is
31
properly installed.
32
33
1.03
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
34
35
A.
Tag or package each item identified to hardware
36
schedule.
37
38
B.
Include installation instructions.
39
40
C.
Deliver hardware items at times and to locations as
41
directed.
42
43
D.
Check hardware against schedule, reorder missing
44
items.
45
46
E.
Control items before and after installation so
47
completion will not be delayed by hardware losses.
48
49
F.
Protect finishes by temporary coverings as required.
50
51
G.
Deliver extra hardware to Owner, boxed and
52
identified.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08700-2
O1
02 H. Deliver master and sub master keys to Owner, boxed
03 and identified.
04
05 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
06
07 A. Coordinate installation with finishing operations.
08
09
10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
11
12 2.01 MATERIALS
13
14 A. Acceptable manufacturers:
15 1. Locks and latches:
16 a. Base:
17 (1) Schlage Lock.
18 b. Optional:
19 (1) Sargent Manufacturing.
20 (2) Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware.
21 2. Door closers:
22 a. Base:
23 (1) LCN Closers.
24 3. Hinges:
25 a. Base:
26 (1) Hager Hinge.
27 b. Optional:
28 (1) Stanley Hardware.
29 (2) McKinney/Parker.
30 4. Door stops:
31 a. Base:
32 (1) Glynn -Johnson.
33 b. Optional:
34 (1) Ives, HB.
35 (2) Sargent Manufacturing.
36 (3) Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware.
37 5. Kickplates, door pulls, pushplates and bars:
38 a. Base:
39 (1) Quality, NT Hardware.
40 b. Optional:
41 (1) Baldwin Hardware.
42 (2) Burns Manufacturing.
43 ( 3 ) Hager Hinge.
44 (4) Hiawatha.
-45 (5) Rockwood Manufacturing.
46 ( 6 ) Trimco
47 6. Automatic and manual flush bolts; and
48 coordinators:
49 a. Base:
50 (1) Door Controls.
51 b. Optional:
52 (1) Glynn -Johnson.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08700-3
O1
7.
Thresholds, weatherstripping, smoke gaskets:
02
a. Base:
03
(1) Reese Enterprises.
04
b. Optional:
05
(1) Pemko Manufacturing.
06
8.
Exit devices:
07
a. Base:
08
(1) Von Duprin.
09
9.
Key cabinet:
10
a. Base:
11
(1) Lund Equipment.
12
b. Optional:
13
(1) Telkee.
14
10.
Pivots:
15
a. Base:
16
(1) Rixson-Firemark.
17
11.
Other materials:
18
a. Base: As indicated.
19
12.
Other manufacturers desiring approval comply
20
with Document 00440 and submit samples of both
21
specified item and proposed item for comparison.
22
23
B. Hardware - general:
24
1.
Provide hardware for fire rated openings in
25
compliance with UL, NFPA-80 and CFR Part 36 (ADA)
26
guidelines.
27
a. This requirement takes precedence over other
28
requirements for such hardware.
29
b. Provide only hardware which has been tested
30
and listed by UL for types and sizes of
31
doors.
32
2.
Furnish items of hardware for proper door swing.
33
3.
Provide strikes with curved lips.
34
4.
Provide extended lips when necessary.
35
5.
Provide strike boxes.
36
6.
Provide templates to door and frame suppliers.
37
7.
Provide lock devices which allow doors to be
38
opened from inside room without a key.
39
8.
Provide doors to loading platforms, boiler and
40
mechanical rooms, stages, utility stairs, and
41
electrical closets with knurling inside of lever.
42
9.
Provide dustproof strikes for doors with
43
automatic or manualflushbolts or other bolts to
44
floor.
45
10.
Finishes:
46
a. Locks: 626.
47
b. Door pulls, push bars, pushplates: 630.
48
C. Kickplates: 630.
49
d. Exit Devices: 626.
50
e. Hinges: 626.
51
f. Door stops, holders, dead locks, mortise
52
bolts, pivots, door edgings and miscellaneous
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08700-4
01
hardware: 626.
02
g. Patient latches: 628.
03
h. Exposed arms and covers of closers: 689.
04
05
C. Fasteners:
06
1.
Manufacture hardware to conform to templates.
07
2.
Generally, prepare for Phillips oval head machine
08
screw installation.
09
3.
Exposed screws to match hardware finish or, if
10
exposed in surfaces of other work, to match
11
finish of other work as closely as possible.
12
4.
For mineral core doors use screws with threads to
13
head to apply hinges.
14
5.
Provide concealed fasteners unless thru bolted.
15
6.
Through bolt closers on labeled doors.
16
7.
Provide non -corrosive fasteners.
17
18
D. Locks and latches:
19
1.
ANSI/BHMA-A156.13, Grade-1.
20
2.
Mortise with antifriction latchbolt with 3/4 IN
21
throw and deadbolt with 1 IN throw.
22
3.
Sectional trim unless otherwise specified.
23
4.
2-3/4 IN backset.
24
5.
Schlage "L Series".
25
a. 03 design.
26
6.
Function as indicated in accordance with
27
ANSI/BHMA-A156.2.
28
29
E. Door closers:
30
1.
Model:
31
a. LCN 4011 or 4111.
32
2.
Size door closers to comply with manufacturer's
33
recommendations for door sizes, locations, and
34
accessibility requirements for opening force.
35
3.
Closers adjustable to 3 second closing speed from
36
70 DEG opening to 3 IN from latch.
37
4.
Supply arms, brackets, and plates, as required.
38
5.
Mount on room side of corridor doors, unless
39
conditions expressly prohibit such mounting.
40
6.
Closers with integral back checks.
41
7.
Entrance and vestibule doors: Delayed action
42
closer and overhead stop.
43
B.
Other exterior outswinging doors: Closer with
44
limiting cushion stop.
45
46
F. Hinges:
47
1.
Flat button tips on hinges.
48
2.
Hinges for door widths and types:
49
a. Exterior outswinging: Type-1 NRP.
50
b. Exterior inswinging: Type-1.
51
C. Interior greater than 36 IN wide: Type-2.
52
d. -Interior less than or equal to 36 IN:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08700-5
01
Type-3.
02
e. Interior for wet areas (doors to showers,
03
kitchens, etc., which swing in): Type-1.
04
3. Following table refers to manufacturer's numbers
05
that are considered equal.
06
Hager Stanley McKinney
07
08
Type-1 BB1199 FBB199 T4B3386
09
Type-2 BB1168 FBB168 T4B3786
10
Type-3 BB1174 FBB179 TB3713
11
12
4. Hinge quantities per door leaf:
13
a. Less than or equal to 90 IN in height: 3
14
hinges.
15
b. Greater than 90 IN, less than or equal to 120
16
IN in height: 4 hinges.
17
5. Size hinges to door size and weight, and to clear
18
trim and allow 180 degree door swing.
19
6. Hinge sizes:
20
a. 4.5 x 4.5 IN:
21
(1) 1-3/4 IN thick doors.
22
b. 5 x 5 IN:
23
(1) Doors greater than 1-3/4 IN thick.
24
(2) Doors greater than 36 IN wide.
25
(3) Doors greater than 90 IN high.
26
27
G. Door stops:
28
1. Wall mounted: Glynn Johnson WB60X or WB60XT.
29
2. Where door swings more than 105 degrees without
30
encountering a wall or door has mechanical
31
pushbutton lockset:
32
a. Doors up to 45 IN wide: Overhead stop 450
33
series.
34
b. Doors 'over 45 IN wide: Overhead stop 90
35
series.
36
3. Where exterior door does not have a closer or
37
does not swing against a wall: Overhead stop 90
38
series.
39
40
H. Kickplates:
41
1. 8 IN high x 2 IN less door width.
42
2. Bevel 3 edges of plates.
43
3. 0.050 IN thick stainless steel.
44
45
I. Door pulls, pushplates and bars:
46
1. Pushplate: Quality 40, 4 x 16 IN.
47
2. Pull: Quality 161, 8 IN.
48
3. Provide cutouts as required for cylinders.
49
50
J. Thresholds, size for frame depth:
51
1. Reese S200 series.
52
2. Provide required bolt cutouts.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
08700-6
3. Mill finish aluminum.
K. Hardware, miscellaneous:
1. Standard items by Emhart, Ives, or Sargent.
L., Flush bolts, automatic:
1. Door Controls, 842 for hollow metal, or 942 for
wood doors.
2. Glynn Johnson, FB7 for hollow metal, or FB8 for
wood doors.
M. Flush bolts, manual (mortise):
1.' Door Controls, 780F for hollow metal, or 790F for
wood doors.
2. Glynn Johnson, FB6 for hollow metal, FB6W for
wood doors.
N. Floor strikes, dustproof: Glynn Johnson DP-2.
O. Door coordinators:
1. Door Controls, 600 series; or Glynn Johnson, COR
series.
2. If coordinator is provided for door which has
stop which lacks enough surface area to allow
proper mounting; provide shims, bars, etc., as
required.
3. Provide solid shim or other fascia piece which
will result in surface being flush with edge of
coordinator.
4. Provide filler sections as required to finish
opening.
P. Exit devices: Von Duprin, type and function
indicated.
1. At exposed rods, furnish Von Duprin RG-27 latch
guard.
Q. Astragal: Flat steel, UL listed for labeled doors.
R. Weatherstripping:
1. At jambs and head: Surface mounted, adjustable,
mounted on stops; Reese 775D.
2. At bottoms of doors: Reese 712D.
3. Meeting edges pairs exterior doors: Reese
M35DUR.
4. Head drip on doors other than main entrance
doors: Reese R201DUR.
S. Smoke gaskets:
1. Standard smoke rated units by Reese 897.
2. Provide for doors in smoke and fire rated walls.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08700-7
01
T.
Key cabinet: Size to permit minimum 100 percent
01
'02
expansion of system.
02
03
03
04
2.02
EXTRA MATERIAL AND TOOLS
04
05
05
06
A.
Provide extra material and tools to Owner for
06
07
maintenance purposes.
07
08
1. Locks.
08
09
2. Closers.
09
10
3. Patient latches.
10
11
11
12
B.
Verify requirements with Owner.
12
13
13
14
C.
Provide 1 set of lock tools.
14
15
15
16
2.03
OPERATION - KEYING
16
17
17
18
A.
Establish keying system with Owner.
18
19
19
20
B.
Provide and set up complete visible card indexed
20
21
system with key tags and control slips.
21
22
22
23
C.
Tag and identify keys and install in key cabinet.
23
24
24
25
D.
Provide 3 keys for each lock or cylinder.
25
26
26
27
E.
Master key and key in groups as directed.
27
28
28
29
F.
Key to existing master key system. -
29
30
30
31
G.
Provide construction master keys for exterior doors.
31
32
32
33
H.
At substantial completion, replace cylinders used for
33
34
construction keying with permanent cylinders.
34
35
35
36
2.04
HARDWARE SETS
36
37
37
38
HW-01: Hinges
38
39
Lockset, office F04
39
40
Stop
40
41
41
42
HW-02: Hinges
42
43
Lockset, office F04
43
44
Stop
44
45
Closer
45
46
46
47
HW-04: Hinges
47
48
Lockset, storeroom F07
48
49
Stop
49
50
Closer
50
51
Kickplate
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08700-8
01
HW-05:
Hinges
01 ;^
02
Lockset,
privacy F19
02
03
Stop
03
04
04
05
HW-06:
Hinges
05
06
Lockset,
privacy F19
06
07
Stop
07
08
Closer
08
09
09
10
HW-07:
Hinges
10
11
Lockset,
classroom F05
11
12
Stop
12
13
13
14
HW-08:
Hinges
14
15
Lockset,
classroom F05
15
16
Stop
16
17
Closer
17
18
Kickplate
18
19
19
20
HW-09:
Hinges
20
21
Latchset,
passage F01
21
22
Stop
22
23
23
24
HW-10:
Hinges
24
25
Latchset,
passage F01
25
26
Stop
26
27
Closer
27'
28
Kickplate
28
29
_ 29
30
HW-11:
Hinges
30
31
Lockset,
store lock F14
31
32
Stop
32
33
33
34
HW-13:
Hinges
34
35
Closer
35
36
Push 4 x
16 IN
36
37
Pull
37
38
Stop
38
39
Kickplate
39
40
Deadbolt,
Schalge B-663P.
40
41
Cylinder
41
42
42
43
HW-15:
Hinges
43
44
Closer
44
45
Push 4 x
16 IN
45
46
Pull
46
47
Stop
47
48
Kickplate
48
49
49
50
HW-25:
Hinges
50
51
Lockset,
classroom F05, strike
in top of bottom leaf 51
52
Lockset,
classroom F05, strike
in frame of bottom leaf52,,1
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08700-9
F '
l ',
M
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
2 Stops
HW-26: Hinges
Exit device 9975L-F
Closer
Stop
Kickplate
Cylinder
HW-29: Hinges
Closer
Exit device 99EO
Kickplate
Weatherstripping
Threshold
HW-30: Hinges
Closer
Exit device 99L
Kickplate
Weatherstripping
Threshold
Cylinder
HW-32: Hinges
Closer
Lockset, classroom F05
Kickplate
Weatherstripping
Threshold
HW-33: Hinges
Closer
Lockset, storeroom F07
Kickplate
Weatherstripping
Threshold
HW-34:
HW-35:
HW-36:
HW-37:
HW-40: Hinges
2 Closers
Flushbolts, automatic (inactive leaf)
Lockset, storeroom F07
2 Kickplates
2 Stops
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08700-10
O1
Astragal
02
Coordinator
03
04
05
HW-41:
Hinges
06
2 Closers
07
Auto flush bolts (inactive leaf)
08
Lockset, classroom F05
09
2 Kickplates
10
2 Stops
11
Coordinator
12
13
HW-42:
Hinges
14
Manual flush bolts
15
Lockset, classroom F05
16
2 Stops
17
18
HW-43:
Hinges
19
2 Closers
20
Auto flush bolts (inactive leaf)
21
Latchset, passage FO1
22
2 Stops
23
24
HW-45:
Hinges
25
2 Closers
26
Exit device 9947EO F
27
Exit device 9947L F
28
2 Stops
29
Cylinder
30
2 Kickplates
31
32
HW-46:
Hinges
33
2 closers
34
Exit device 9927BEL-F-LBR
35
Exit device 9927EO-F-LBR
36
2 Stops
37
Cylinder
38
2 Kickplates
39
40
HW-47:
Hinges
41
2 Closers
42
Exit device 9975L F
43
Auto flush bolts (inactive leaf)
44
Cylinder
45
2 Stops
46
2 Kickplates
47
Coordinator
48
49
HW-48:
50
51
HW-49:
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08700-11
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
HW-50: Cylinder to suit
HW-52: Hinges
2 Closers
2 Exit devices 3327L
2 Cylinders
Mullion 5254
2 Stabilizers 154
Threshold
Weatherstripping
HW-54: Hinges
2 Closers
2 Exit devices 9947L
2 Cylinders
Weatherstripping
Threshold
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. verify suitability of substrate to accept
installation.
B. Installation constitutes responsibility for
performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions, supervised or inspected by
an AHC.
B. Fit hardware before final door finishing.
C. Permanently install hardware after finishing
operations are complete.
D. Use SDI mounting heights for hardware.
E. Install hardware with fasteners concealed where not
required by code to be exposed.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware to
ensure proper operation or function.
1. Lubricate moving parts with lubricant recommended
by manufacturer.
2. Replace units which cannot be adjusted and
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
CAI YI�Z��
O1 lubricated to operate smoothly.
02
03 B. Approximately six months after substantial
04 completion, check and readjust to assure proper
05 function of doors and hardware.
06 1. Clean and lubricate operational items.
07 2. Replace items which have deteriorated or failed.
08 3. Prepare a written report of current and
09 predictable problems in operation of hardware.
10 4. Report visit and furnish copy of report to Owner
11 with copy to Architect.
12
13 C. When hardware is installed more than one month prior
14 to final acceptance or occupancy, during week prior
15 to acceptance or occupancy, make a final check and
16 adjustment of hardware items.
17 1. Clean and lubricate as necessary to assure proper
18 function and finish.
19 2. Adjust door control devices to compensate for
20 operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
21
22 D. Instruct Owner's personnel:
23 1. Operating and maintenance procedures.
24 2. Key control system.
25
26 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase-1 Construction
08800-1
O1
7F20,
7J20 SECTION 06800
02
03
GLASS AND GLAZING
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
Glass standards:
10
1. Flat glass ASTM-C1036.
11
2. Flat glass, heat treated (coated/uncoated)
12
ASTM-C1048.
13
3. F.S.DD-M-00411B(1) Mirrors, Glass.
14
4. NFPA-80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows.
15
5. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
16
"SIGMA Specifications for Sealed Insulating Glass
17
Units".
18
19
B.
Glazing standards:
20
1. Flat Glass Marketing Association "Glazing
21
Manual".
22
2. SIGMA "Glazing Recommendations for Sealed
23
Insulating Glass Units".
24
25
1.02
SUBMITTALS
26
27
A.
Samples:
28
1. 12 IN x 12 IN, of each specified type of glass.
29
30
B.
Contract closeout information:
31
1. Warranty.
32
33
1.03
JOB CONDITIONS
34
35
A.
Do not proceed with installation under adverse
36
weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or
37
above manufacturer's recommended limitations.
38
39
1.04
WARRANTY
40
41
A.
Written 5 year warranty signed by installer to cover
42
weather tightness of installation including air and
43
water integrity.
44
45
B.
Written 5 year warranty signed by manufacturer or
46
fabricator of insulating glass units against failure.
47
1. Failure: Thermal failure of insulating units, or
48
obscured vision.
49
50
51
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08800-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Insulating glass and
fabricators:
a. Base:
(1) Viracon.
b. Optional:
insulating spandrel glass
(1) Guardian Industries.
(2) Interpane Glass.
2. Wired glass:
a. Base:
(1) Globe Amerada Glass.
b. Optional:
(1) Pilkington.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
Document 00440.
B. Glass materials:
1. Comply with indicated standards.
2. See Glass Types Schedule for listing of types.
3. Materials specified in Glass Types Schedules are
minimum acceptable products.
4. Single manufacturer produce individual glass
types used in fabrication of insulating units.
5. Manufacturer or fabricator determine if materials
should,be heat strengthened or fully tempered at
non -hazardous locations that do not require
safety glazing and provide accordingly.
6. Monolithic glass Low-E coating to be soft film.
7. Low-E coatings used as part of insulating units
to be sputtered on surface two or three as
specified.
C. Glazing compounds:
1. Nonsag, nonstain type.
2. Pigmented to match frame units not requiring
painting.
3. Compatible with adjacent surfaces.
4. For use in setting glass: One or two part
polyurethane or silicone sealant.
5. Sealant tape: Butyl rubber sealant tape or
ribbon having a continuous neoprene shim.
6. Gaskets:
a. Polyvinyl chloride or neoprene.
b. Extruded, flexible, of profile and hardness
required to receive glass and provide a
watertight installation.
D. Installation setting blocks and spacers:
1. Neoprene, compatible with sealants used.
2. Setting blocks: 80-90 durometer.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08800-3
01
3. Spacers: 40-50 durometer.
01
r
02
4. Compressible filler stock: Closed cell jacketed
02
03
rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam.
03
04
04
05
E.
Insulating glass spacers:
05
06
1. Aluminum, desiccant filled.
06
07
a. Finish: Mill.
07
08
08
09
F.
Shims, clips, springs, angles, beads, attachment
09
10
screws and other miscellaneous items: As indicated
10
11
or required.
11
12
12
13
2.02
GLASS TYPES SCHEDULE
13
14
14
15
A.
Glass Type 1:
15
16
1. Clear float, 6 mm thick.
16
17
17
18
B.
Glass Type 2:
18
19
1. Clear, tempered tongless float, 6 mm thick.
19
20
20
21
C.
Glass Type 3:
21
22
1. Color tint to be selected, float, 6 mm thick.
22
23
2. Low emissivity.
23
24
24
25
D.
Glass Type 4:
25
26
27
1. Color tint to be selected, tempered float, 6 min
thick.
26
27
28
2. Low emissivity.
28
29
29
30
E.
Glass Type 7:
30
31
1. Wired glass, 6 mm thick, colorless, transparent
31
32
polished, wired glass.
32
33
33
34
F.
Glass Type 9:
34
35
1. Float Glass Mirror; nominal 1/4 IN thick.
35
36
2. Color: Clear.
36
37
37
38
G.
Glass Type 11:
38
39
1. Insulating glass; two, sheets of 6 mm thick glass,
39
40
hermetically sealed together at edges with
40
41
spacers and sealant, with 1/2 IN dehydrated air
41
42
space.
42
43
2. Outside glass: Type 3.
43
44
3. Inside glass: Type 1.
44
45
45
46
H.
Glass Type 12:
46
47
1. Insulating glass; two sheets of 6 mm thick glass,
47
48
hermetically sealed together at edges with
48
49
spacers and sealant, with 1/2 IN dehydrated air
49
50
space.
50
51
2. Outside glass: Type 4.
51
52
3. Inside glass: Type 2.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08800-4
O1
02
03
PART 3
- EXECUTION
04
05
3.01
INSPECTION
06
07
A.
Examine framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing,
08
stop design, and conditions under which glazing is to
09
be installed.
10
11
3.02
INSTALLATION
12
13
A.
Do not install glass with edge damage.
14
15
B.
Contractor is responsible for correct glass size for
16
each opening, within tolerances and dimensions
17
established.
18
19
C.
Comply with recommendations of manufacturers, except
20
where more stringent requirements are indicated.
21
22
D.
As a minimum, comply with FGMA Glazing Manual and
23
SIGMA Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating
24
Glass Units.
25
26
E.
Install sealants as recommended by sealant
27
manufacturer.
28
29
F.
Install setting blocks in adhesive or sealant.
30
31
G.
Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and
32
spacing, for glass size, except where gaskets are
33
used for glazing.
34
35
H.
Provide 1/8 IN minimum bite of spacers on glass.
36
37
I.
Use thickness equal to sealant width.
38
39
J.
Prevent sealant exudation from glazing channels.
40
1. Leave void at heel (or 'install filler) at jambs
41
and head.
42
2. Do not leave void (or install filler) at sill.
43
44
K.
Miter cut and bond gasket ends together at corners.
45
46
L.
Immediately after installation, attach crossed
47
streamers to framing held away from glass.
48
49
M.
Do not apply anything to surfaces of.glass.
50
51
N.
Install spandrel units from exterior of building.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08800-5
r" 01
O.
Remove and replace damaged glass.
02
03
P.
Install mirrors with Mirror Mastic adhesive applied
04
to back of mirror and pressed against substrate.
05
06
3.03
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
07
08
A.
Maintain glass reasonably clean during construction,
09
so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action
10
and will not contribute to deterioration of other
11
materials.
12
13
B.
Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 7
14
days prior to final completion of work in each area.
15
16
C.
Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations.
17
18
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
06950-1
eo"`,
01
6G07,
7J20 SECTION 08950
02
03
TRANSLUCENT PANEL SYSTEMS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
Design criteria:
10
1. Design translucent panel system to be a complete,
11
self supporting assembly.
12
2. Design panels and framing systems to resist
13
following loadings, with maximum deflection of
14
L/240:
15
a. Roof:
16
(1) Wind load of 25 PSF, horizontally.
17
(2) Live load of 40 PSF, vertically.
18
b. Walls: Wind load of 25 PSF.
19
3. Roof "U" value: 0.40.
20
4. Wall "U" value: 0.40.
21
22
B.
Test methods:
23
1. "U" value: Test in accordance with ASTM-C236,
24
giving results for overall thermal value;
25
calculated values are not acceptable.
f
26
27
2. Material properties: Methods as specified.
28
C.
Testing - general:
29
1. Testing performed by independent testing agency.
30
2. Reports on products equivalent to those used on
31
this project.
32
33
D.
Installer qualifications: Manufacturer, or approved
34
by manufacturer.
35
36
1.02
SUBMITTALS
37
38
A.
Shop drawings:
39
1. Elevations, sections and details for review of
40
support system to building frame.
41
selection with interiors.
42
43
B.
Samples:
44
1. Complete range of color samples for selection.
45
46
C.
Project information:
47
1. Structural calculations made in connection with
48
design or detailing for review of interface
49
between translucent panel system and building
50
structural frame.
51
2. Certified test reports indicating conformance to
52
material properties and design criteria
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08950-2
O1
specified.
02
3. Certification of installer qualifications.
03
04
D.
Contract closeout information:
05
1. Warranty.
06
07
1.03
PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
08
09
A.
Deliver products in protective cartons and store to
10
protect from damage.
11
12
1.04
WARRANTY
13
14
A.
Written warranty'of weathertightness for 5 years,
15
signed jointly by manufacturer and installer.
16
17
18
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
19
20
2.01
TRANSLUCENT PANEL SYSTEM
21
22
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
23
1. Translucent panel system:
24
a. Base:
25
(1) Kalwall.
26
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
27
Document 00440.
28
29
B.
Translucent panels: Factory fabricated sandwich
30
panels of inner and outer face sheets bonded under
31
heat and pressure to core.
32
1. Light transmission: 20 percent.
33
12. Shading coefficient: .30.
34
3. Face sheet color:
35
a. Exterior face: White.
36
b. Interior face: Mid White.
37
4. Grid design: Staggered.
38
5. Grid size: 12 IN x 24 IN.
39
6. Panel: Flat.
40
a. Panel thickness: 2-3/4 IN.
41
b. Panel length and width as indicated.
42
43
C.
Panel framing system: Extruded aluminum, clamping
44
type framing at roof and wall panel joints and edges,
45
with sealant tape between frame and panel at inner
46
and outer face.
47
1. Corners: Mitered and heli-arc welded.
48
2. Finish: Mill finished aluminum.
49
3. Provide overlapping type connection at horizontal
50
joints on sloping surfaces.
51
4. Clamp fasteners: Stainless steel.
52
5. Anchor panel framing to building structure.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
08950-3
01
6. Factory pre -assemble framing and panels as far as
01
02
practical.
02
03
03
04
D. Flashing: Section 07600.
04
05
05
06
E. Windows: Fixed.
06
07
07
08
2.02 MATERIALS
08
09
09
10
A. Face sheets: Fiberglass reinforced polymer resin
10
11
manufactured specifically for this use.
11
12
1. Uniform in color.
12
13
a. Color change of exterior sheet: Not more
13
14
than 3.0 Adams units, when tested in
14
15
accordance with ASTM-D2244 (Delta E) for 5
15
16
years outdoors in South Florida, at 7 DEG
16
17
facing south.
17
18
b. Darkening of exterior sheet: Not more than
18
19
0.2, when tested in accordance with
19
20
ASTM-D2244 (Delta L) for 2 weeks at 150 degF.
20
21
2. Flammability of interior sheet:
21
22
a. Flame spread: Not more than 25 when tested
22
23
in accordance with ASTM-E84.
23
24
b. Smoke developed: Not more than 300, when
24
25
tested in accordance with ASTM-E84.
25
26
c. Burn extent: Not more than 1 IN, when tested
26
27
in accordance with ASTM-D635.
27
28
3. Weatherability:
28
29
a. overall degradation factor: 10 or less, when
29
30
tested in accordance with ASTM-D3841, Method
30
31
B.
31
32
b. Protective surfacing: Acrylic, 1.2 mils
32
33
thick, minimum; factory applied, field
33
34
refinishable.
34
35
4. Flatness: Free of imperfections which impair
35
36
bonding.
36
37
5. Thickness:
37
38
a. Exterior sheet: 0.70 IN.
38
39
b. Interior sheet': 0.45 IN.
39
40
c. Thickness tolerance: Plus/minus 10 percent,
40
41
max.
41
42
6. Impact strength: Resist 60 FT -LB, when tested in
42
43
accordance with SPI Shatter Resistance Test.
43
44
44
45
B. Grid core:
45
46
1. Structural aluminum members, 6063-T6 alloy.
46
47
2. Width of bonding face: 7/16 IN, minimum.
47
48
3. Dimensional tolerances: Face to face dimension
48
49
and difference in plane of faces at intersections
49
50
restricted to maximum allowable to provide full
50
51
bonding face surface to contact face sheets.
51
52
4. Jointing: Mechanically interlocked.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1.7
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
08950-4
C. Adhesive for bonding face sheets to core:
1. Heat and pressure type, approved by ICBO for
sandwich panel adhesive.
2. Tensile strength: 700 PSI, when tested in
accordance with ASTM-C297; test before and after
2 exposures to 6 cycles of aging conditions
prescribed by ASTM-D1037.
3. Shear strength: 500 PSI, when tested in
accordance with ASTM-D1002; average result of
separate exposures to:
a. Relative humidity: 50 percent at 73 degF.
b. Accelerated aging in accordance with
ASTM-D1183.
C. Temperature: 182 degF.
d. Full cycle soak.
e. Oxygen: 500 hours.
D. Insulation: Translucent fiberglass batt insulation
inserted in voids of core grid as necessary to
provide specified "U". value.
E. Sealant tape: Factory applied; manufacturer's
standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept work.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate and
responsibility of performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation by experienced installers in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
recommendations and approved shop drawings.
3.03 WATER TEST
A. Water test completed installation with a minimum 5/8
IN water hose and nozzle with water turned on full
and sprayed over complete surface.
B. Correct leaks.
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01 �.
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
i
09110-1
O1
7F20,
7J20 SECTION 09110
O1
02
02
03
NON -LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING SYSTEMS
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
07
08
08
09
A.
Wherever a fire resistanceclassification is
09
10
indicated for walls or partitions, provide studs and
10
11
accessories of type tested and listed for
11
12
construction indicated.
12
13
13
14
B.
Installation in accordance with: ASTM-C754.
14
15
15
16
C.
Studs: ASTM-C645.
16
17
17
18
D.
Galvanizing: ASTM-A653/A653M.
18
19
19
20
1.02
SUBMITTALS
20
21
21
22
A.
Project information:
22
23
1. Manufacturer of listed products.
23
24
24
25
25
26
PART.2
- PRODUCTS
26
27
27
28
2.01
MATERIALS
28
29
29
30
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
30
31
1. Non -load bearing framing components:
31
32
a. Base:
32
33
(1) Unimast.
33
34
b. Optional:
34
35
(1) Dale/Incor.
35
36
(2) Dietrich Industries.
36
37
(3) Domtar Gypsum.
37
38
(4) National Gypsum.
38
39
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
39
40
Document 00440.
40
41
41
42
B.
Metal studs, screw type: Roll formed channel studs
42
43
and tracks.
43
44
1. Thickness: 25 GA.
44
45
a. At jambs of openings: Two 20 GA studs.
45
46
b. Where partition height requires heavier
46
47
section, to accommodate span within L:240
47
48
deflection at load of 5 PSF, use heavier
48
49
stud.
49
50
2. Sizes: As indicated.
50
51
3. Flanges: Minimum 1-1/4 IN wide.
51
52
4. Galvanized: ASTM-A653/A653M, G60.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase.1 Construction
09110-2
O1
02
C.
Furring channels:
03
1. 25 GA, screw type.
04
2. ASTM-A653/A653M, G60.
05
3. Hat shaped sections.
06
07
D.
Wire ties: 18 GA, soft annealed, galvanized.
08
09
E.
Fasteners for runners: Power driven type, to
10
withstand minimum 190 LB shear when driven.
11
12
F.
Closure: When continuous vapor barrier is required,
13
provide continuous 20 GA galvanized closure to tape
14
vapor barrier to.
15
16
17
PART
3 - EXECUTION
18
19
3.01
INSPECTION
20
21
A.
Examine supporting structure and conditions under
22
which system will be installed.
23
24
B.
Correct conditions detrimental to proper
25
installation.
26
27
C.
Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
28
for performance.
29
30
3.02
INSTALLATION
31
32
A.
Provide continuous runner tracks sized to match
33
studs.
34
1. Align runners accurately at both floor and top.
35
2. Secure runner tracks to structure not over 24 IN
36
on center.
37
3. Secure at corners and ends.
38
39
B.
Where partitions abut horizontal or vertical
40
structural elements, provide slip or cushion type
41
joint between partition and structure.
42
43
C.
Where partition is fire or smoke rated, extend to
44
structure above, with fire and smoke resistant joint
45
treatment, see Section 07270.
46
47
D.
Space studs maximum 16 IN on center.
48
1. Provide additional studs at corners, partition
49
intersections and terminations of partitions, and
50
at both sides of control joints.
51
52
E.
Positively attach studs to runners with 3/8 IN self
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09110-3
01
tapping pan head screws or stud clinching tool on
02
both flanges of each stud, top and bottom, or as
03
required by fire resistance design.
04
05
F. At openings provide 2 full length studs, toe to toe,
06
at each jamb.
07
1. Securely attach jamb studs to door frames.
08
2. Install cut -to -length section of runner at wall
09
areas above and below openings.
10
a. Split flanges and bend webs at ends.
11
b. Overlap and screw attach to jamb studs.
12
3. Install cut to length intermediate studs between
13
jamb studs at head and sill sections at same
14
spacing as full length studs.
15
4. To provide for control joints at openings,
16
install additional stud, maximum 1/2 IN from jamb
17
studs.
18
a. Do not fasten extra stud to track or jamb
19
stud.
20
21
G. Install screw type metal furring channel system
22
directly attached to walls, as indicated.
23
1. Install channels at maximum 16 IN OC.
24
2. Provide additional framing at openings, cutouts,
25
corners and control joints.
26
3. Fasten to masonry walls with cut nails.
27
4. Fasten to concrete with power driven fasteners.
28
5. Space fasteners not more than 24 IN OC, staggered
29
on opposite flanges of hat channels.
30
31
H. Align stud openings to facilitate running of wires
32
and conduit.
33
34
I. Install snap on framing clips for structural steel
35
members in accordance with manufacturer's
36
recommendations.
37
1. When sprayed fireproofing is being used, install
38
clips on steel before spraying is performed.
39
40
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09227-1
01
7I30,
7K20 SECTION 09227
02
03
EXTERIOR STUD WALL SYSTEM
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
Provide engineering design performed by registered
10
Professional Engineer, licensed in State of Texas.
11
12
B.
Design criteria, responsibility of Professional
13
Engineer:
14
1. Design exterior stud wall system to satisfy
15
requirements of applicable building codes.
16
2. Use stud depths indicated on Drawings.
17
3. Select stud thickness and spacing using metal
18
stud properties only, not including interior
19
finish, exterior sheathing and finish. Limit
20
lateral deflection of wall system due to wind or
21
earthquake:
22
a. Maximum deflection: L/360.
23
4. Size and define framing around openings.
24
5. Define size, thickness, and spacing of studs
25
between openings.
26
6. Develop details defining method of fastening
27
through system.
28
7. Review and professionally seal submittals.
29
30
C.
Interior and exterior finish may be used to provide
31
lateral stability for studs.
32
33
1.02
SUBMITTALS
34
35
A.
Shop drawings:
36
1. Provide complete building elevations defining
37
size and location of system components.
38
a. Coordinate size of openings and support
39
requirements for items installed in openings,
40
with Contractor.
41
2. Detail connections.
42
43
B.
Project information:
44
1. Catalog data indicating cross sectional
45
properties.
46
2. Deflection calculations.
47
3. Certification exterior stud wall system has been
48
designed, to satisfy specified design criteria,
49
sealed by registered Professional Engineer.
50
51
52
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
09227-2
O1
02 2.01 MATERIALS
03
04
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
-05
1.
Exterior stud wall system:
06
a. Base:
07
(1) Unimast.
08
b. Optional:
09
(1) National Gypsum.
10
(2) Dale/Incor.
11
(3) Dietrich Industries.
12
2.
Galvanizing repair coating:
13
a. Base:
14
(1) Tnemec.
15
b. Optional:
16
(1) ZRC Products.
17
3.
Moisture barrier:
18
a. Base:
19
(1) DuPont.
20
b. Optional:
21
(1) Tenneco.
22
4.
Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
23
Document 00440.
24
25
B. Exterior
stud wall system:
26
1.
Exterior studs:
27
a. Galvanized steel studs, runner channels and
28
track, bracing, and accessories,
29
ASTM-A653/A653M minimum G60 galvanized.
30
b. Select members in accordance with design
31
criteria.
32
C. Stud depth(s): As indicated on Drawings.
33
d. Span(s): As indicated on Drawings.
34
e. Stud spacing: 16 IN OC, use closer spacing,
35
minimum 12 IN OC, as needed to satisfy load
36
deflection criteria.
37
f. Stud, runner, and deep leg runner thickness:
38
18 GA, use heavier thickness as needed to
39
satisfy load deflection criteria.
40
g. Deep leg runners:
41
2.
Leg length: 2 IN.
42
a. Runner fasteners: Power driven fasteners to
43
withstand minimum 190 LB shear and bearing.
44
3.
Gypsum wallboard: See Section 09250.
45
4.
Fasteners: Sized as required.
46
a. Screws: Cadmium plated or stainless.
47
b. Clips: Galvanized or zinc.
48
5.
Gypsum sheathing accessories: Galvanized, or
49
zinc.
50
6.
Moisture barrier:
51
a. Tyvek; Dupont.
52
b. Amowrap; Tenneco
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09227-3
01
7. Seaming tape:
02
a. DuPont Contractor Tape.
03
b. 3M 8086 Contractor Sheathing Tape.
04
8. Galvanizing repair coating: Tnemec 1190-93" or
05
ZRC Chemical Products, "ZRC Compound"
06
07
08
PART 3 - EXECUTION
09
10
3.01 INSPECTION
11
12
A. Examine substrate for suitability to accept work.
13
14
B. Start of work constitutes acceptance of substrate and
15
responsibility for performance.
16
17
3.02 ERECTION
18
19
A. Studs and runners:
20
1. Align outside deep leg runner track accurately
21
according to exterior wall layout.
22
2. Fasten 12 IN OC, or as needed to satisfy design
23
criteria.
24
3. Position studs vertically in inside deep leg
25
runners at required spacing.
26
4. Install minimum of 2 studs each side of openings;
if
27
use more required to meet loadings.
28
S. Anchorage:
29
a. Top:
30
(1) Allow 3/4 IN clearance between top of
31
inside deep leg runner and outside deep
32
leg runner.
33
(2) Do not fasten inside deep leg runner to
34
outside deep leg runner.
35
(3) Fasten studs to inside deep leg runner.
36
b. Bottom:
37
(1) Anchor each stud at bottom to runners
38
with two, 3/8 IN minimum, type 5-12 pan
39
head screws.
40
6. Where stud design is outside edge of floor slab,
41
provide galvanized connectors that satisfy
42
loading requirements and allow individual floor
43
movement to occur without affecting stud system
44
integrity.
45
7. As required to meet design requirements, shop
46
weld assemblies.
47
8. Retouch burned off or abraded galvanizing with
48
galvanizing repair coating.
49
9. Double up vertical studs at openings.
50
10. Form boxed beams from studs turned on long axis
51
at horizontal head opening conditions.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
09227-4
B. Gypsum wallboard: Installed in Section 09250.
C. Install moisture barrier on outside face of
sheathing, horizontally.
1. Lap each sheet minimum 4 IN over moisture barrier
below.
2. Stagger end joints.
3. Mechanically fasten to sheathing, with maximum
fastener spacing of 24 IN OC.
4. Fasten bottom edges against displacement.
5. Tape at seams, vertical breaks or overlaps.
6. Control joints:
a. Lap each sheet minimum 6 IN over moisture
barrier below at horizontal joint.
b. Provide 6 IN strip at vertical joint.
D. Sheathing at parapet walls:
1. Apply minimum 1/2 IN preservative treated plywood
at roof side of all parapet walls.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect erected wall and openings with temporary
covers until finish, roofing, flashing, and windows
are installed.
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09250-1
01
7F20,
7J20 SECTION 09250
02
03
GYPSUM WALLBOARD (GB)
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
ASTM Standards:
10
1. ASTM-C36: Gypsum Wallboard.
11
2. ASTM-C442: Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard.
12
3. ASTM-C475: Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum
13
Wallboard.
14
4. ASTM-0557: Adhesives.
15
5. ASTM-C630: Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
16
6. ASTM-C840: Application and Finishing of Gypsum
17
Board.
18
7. ASTM-C841: Installation of Interior Lathing and
19
Furring.
20
8. ASTM-C1002: Steel Drill Screws for Application
21
of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases.
22
9. ASTM-E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of
23
Building Materials.
24
10. ASTM-E90: Sound Transmission Testing.
25
11. ASTM-E119: Fire Tests of Building Construction.
26
27
B.
Gypsum Association:
28
1. GA-216 Recommended Specifications.
29
30
C.
Fire resistant materials and assembly standards:
31
1. Provide materials, accessories and application
32
application procedures which have been tested in
33
accordance with ASTM-E119.
34
2. Listed by UL, or other approved testing
35
laboratory, for type of construction and rating
36
indicated.
37
38
1.02
SUBMITTALS
39
40
A.
Project information:
41
1. Manufacturer certification sound insulation
42
thickness and density is suitable for wall system
43
STC rating required.
44
45
1.03
JOB CONDITIONS
46
47
A.
Coordinate installation with work of other trades to
48
allow time for correct installation of their work.
49
50
B.
Assure areas to receive gypsum wallboard installation
51
and finishing are maintained between 50 and 70 degF.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09250-2
O1
02
PART 2 -
PRODUCTS
03
04
2.01 MATERIALS
05
06
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
07
1.
Gypsum wallboard and accessories:
08
a. Base:
09
(1) USG.
10
b. Optional:
11
(1) National Gypsum.
12
(2) Domtar Gypsum.
13
(3) Georgia Pacific.
14
2.
Foam tape:
15
a. Base:
16
(1) Norton Performance Plastics.
17
3.
Insulation, sound:
18
a. Base:
19
(1) Owens-Corning Fiberglas.
20
(2) Schuller International.
21
4.
Suspended ceiling system:
22
a. Base:
23
(1) USG.
24
b. Optional:
25
(1) National Gypsum.
26
(2) Chicago Metallic.
27
5.
Sound sealants:
28
a. Base:
29
(1) Pecora.
30
b. Optional:
31
(1) Tremco.
32
6.
Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
33
Document 00440.
34
35
B. Gypsum wallboard (GWB):
36
1.
Furnish in maximum available lengths, consistent
37
with installation requirements, bevel edged,
38
square ends.
39
2.
Regular board:
40
a. 5/8 IN thick.
41
b. Use where other types are not required.
42
3.
Fire rated board (Type X):
43
a. 5/8 IN thick.
44
b. Use for fire rated walls, fire rated ceilings
45
and joint backing at fire rated ceilings.
46
4.
Gypsum shaft wall liner panel, Type X: 1 IN x 24
47
IN.
48
5.
Cementitious backer board (CBB):
49
a. 5/8 IN thick, aggregate portland cement
50
board.
51
b. 1/2 IN thick, UL listed aggregate portland
52
cement board.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09250-3
01
c. Install vapor retarder prior to installation
02
of cementitious backer board.
03
d. Provide at toilet room walls and in walls
04
behind plumbing fixtures.
05
e. Use water resistant joint compound and tape
06
where high build glazed coating finish is
07
specified.
08
6. Exterior ceiling board (ECGWB):
09
a. 1/2 IN thick or 5/8 IN -with fire resistant
10
core at rated assemblies.
11
12
C.
Backing for control and expansion joints:
13
1. Fire rated board.
14
15
D.
Joint Compound: ASTM-C475. As recommended by
16
wallboard manufacturer.
17
18
E.
Joint Tape: As recommended by wallboard
19
manufacturer.
20
21
F.
Adhesive: As recommended by wallboard manufacturer.
22
23
G.
Gypsum wallboard accessories: Galvanized for general
24
use, zinc for wet and exterior areas.
25
1. Corner bead:
26
a. Manufacturer's standard with perforated
27
flanges.
28
2. Trim bead:
29
a. Manufacturer's standard.
30
3. Control or expansion joints:
31
a. Manufacturer's standard.
32
33
H.
Screws:
34
1. Self -tapping, bugle head, length to penetrate
35
framing member minimum 5/8 IN.
36
2. Type S for gypsum wallboard to metal and type G
37
for gypsum wallboard to gypsum wallboard.
38
39
I.
Sealants and caulking:
40
1. Other than sound caulking below.
41
2. See Section 07900.
42
43
J.
Foam tape:
44
1. PVC 1/2 x 1/4 IN: With pressure sensitive
45
adhesive; Norseal.
46
2. EPDM 1/2 x 1/4 IN: With pressure sensitive
47
adhesive; Cellular rubber by Gasket Dynamics.
48
49
K.
Insulation, sound:
50
1. Commercial sound blanket, ASTM-C665, Type I.
51
2. Thickness and density required to achieve STC
(OmN,
52
indicated for sound rating of wall system.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09250-4
01
02
L.
Caulking, sound:
03
1. AC-20-FTR Acrylic Latex by Pecora.
04
2. Acoustical sealant by Tremco.
05
06
M.
Suspension wire: Soft annealed, galvanized.
07
1. Thickness: 8 GA.
08
09
N.
Tie wire: Soft annealed, galvanized 18 GA.
10
11
O.
Carrying channels: Cold rolled 1-1/2 IN.
12
13
P.
Furring channels and metal studs: See Section 09110.
14
15
Q.
Metal furring channel ceiling system.
16
1. Suspension wire, 8 GA.
17
2. Tie wire.
18
3. Carrying channel.
19
4. Furring channel.
20
5. Provide trim pieces to trim out exposed gypsum
21
wallboard edges at light penetrations.
22
23
R.
Firestopping: See Section 07270.
24
25
S.
Sealer for moisture resistant gypsum wallboard.
26
1. Manufacturer's standard compound.
27
2. Use.at joints, cut edges and screw penetrations.
28
29
-
30
PART
3 - EXECUTION
31
32
3.01
INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
33
34
A.
Examine supporting structure and conditions under
35
which wallboard is.to be installed.
36
37
B.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
38
39
3.02
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
40
41
A.
Erect wallboard vertically with edges over supporting
42
members.
43
44
B.
Secure to each support or framing member with screws.
45
46
C.
Bring boards into contact but do not force into
47
place.
48
49
D.
Fit neatly and carefully.
50
51
E.
Stagger edge joints on opposite side of partition so
52
they occur on different framing members.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09250-5
O1
'
02
F.
Proceed with attachment from center of board toward
03
ends and edges.
04
05
G.
Make cuts neatly.
06
07
H.
Install sound insulation in walls to top of partition
08
where sound rated walls are indicated.
09
1. Install as necessary to achieve sound rating.
10
2. Pack spaces around electric boxes and other
11
penetrations to maintain full sound reduction.
12
3. Provide sound Caulking material for rating
13
required.
14
15
I.
Seal ends, cutouts and screw penetrations of moisture
16
resistant boards with sealer.
17
18
J.
Erect tile backer board per manufacturer's
19
instructions.
20
21
3.03
INSTALLATION - SINGLE LAYER SYSTEM
22
23
A.
Set screws between 3/8 to 1/2 IN from edges.
24
1. Space maximum of 8 IN OC at edges and, 12 IN OC
25
in field of board.
26
2. Where wallboard butts at wall/ceiling juncture,
27
- hold screws back 6 IN from edges.
28
3. Use closer screw spacing if required by UL.
29
30
B.
Drive screws so head rests in slight dimple without
31
cutting face paper or fracturing core.
32
33
3.04
INSTALLATION - TWO LAYER SYSTEM
34
35
A.
Space screws in base layer maximum of 8 IN OC at
36
edges, and 12 IN OC in field of board.
37
38
B.
Screw apply finish layer.
39
40
C.
Stagger joints not less than one support from first
41
layer.
42
43
3.05
INSTALLATION - SHAFTWALL
44
45
A.
Install shaft walls in compliance with UL and Gypsum
46
Association description.
47
48
B.
Provide shaft wall systems which permit entire
49
erection procedure from outside shaft.
50
51
C.
Provide special metal runner angles and channels, and
"\.
52
studs or splines spaced per manufacturer's
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09250-6
01
requirements.
02
03
D.
Provide number, type and thickness of wallboard
04
layers including air spaces and insulation as
05
required to achieve indicated ratings for.fire
06
resistance and sound reduction.
07
08
E.
Comply with requirements for thickness of metal and
09
thickness of wall, for heights of wall indicated.
10
11
F.
Use maximum practical board lengths.
12
13
G.
Bring boards into contact but do not force into
14
place.
15
16
H.
Fit neatly and carefully.
17
18
I.
Seal perimeter and openings with acoustical sealant.
19
20
3.06
INSTALLATION - CEILING
21
22
A.
Install in compliance with manufacturer's
23
recommendations.
24
1. Furring ceiling support system.
25
2. Gypsum wallboard.
26
27
B.
Provide required items to support and trim out neatly
28
flush or recessed mechanical and electrical items.
29
30
3.07
CONTROL JOINTS
31
32
A.
Install control joints to provide following maximum
33
unjointed lengths or areas:
34
1. Partitions and soffits: 30 FT maximum straight
35
run.
36
2. Frames:
37
a. Single door: Latch side of jamb from head of
38
opening to top of partition.
39
b. Pair of doors: Each side of jamb from head
40
- of opening to top of partition.
41
C. Pair of doors, cross corridor: Not required.
42
d. Cased opening: Each side of jamb from head
43
of opening to top of partition.
44
e. Window opening: Each side of jamb from head
45
of opening to top of partition.
46
3. Ceilings: 50 FT with perimeter relief, maximum
47
30 FT without perimeter relief in one direction,
48
and at change of direction or irregular shapes.
49
4. Ceiling area: Maximum 2500 SF, with perimeter
50
relief, maximum 900 SF, without perimeter relief.,
51
52
B.
Calk control joints behind base flush.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09250-7
01
1. Use color to match base color as closely as
02
possible.
03
04
C.
Install suitable backing material to maintain
05
required rating where control or expansion joints
06
occur in fire or sound rated assemblies.
07
08
D.
Install corner bead where partition or ceiling abuts
09
structural element or dissimilar wall or ceiling.
10
11
3.08
WALLBOARD FINISHING
12
13
A.
Perform finishing in accordance with ASTM-C840.
14
1. Finish: Level 5:
15
a. Apply a thin skim coat of joint compound over
16
entire surface of board and joints.
17
b. Exercise care to avoid laps or tool marks
18
which might indicate through finishes.
19
20
B.
Securely attach continuous corner beads to external
21
corners in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
22
23
C.
Where wallboard abuts dissimilar surfaces securely
24
attach continuous trim beads in accordance with
25
manufacturers directions.
26
1. Where bead abuts exterior metal window frames or
27
other metal components, separate from other
28
material by use of foam tape.
29
2. Install accessories.
30
31
D.
Apply joint treatment compound full height of
32
partition in accordance with manufacturer's
33
directions.
34
35
E.
Fill joints, screw heads and internal corners with
36
compound.
37
38
F.
Have wall primed by painter.
39
40
G.
After painter has applied primer to wallboard
41
surfaces, repair and refinish areas which indicate
42
defects.
43
44
H.
If wallboard is damaged, or surfaces are roughened,
45
repair, or remove and replace, to satisfaction of
46
Architect, at no additional cost to Owner.
47
48
3.09
CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD FINISHING
49
50
A.
Seal entire surface of backerboard with thinned
51
ceramic tile mastic to manufacturer's
52
recommendations.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09250-8
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
B. Embed joint tape over joints and treat fasteners with
approved joint compound.
C. Flat trowel minimum two coats until surface is smooth
and free of voids.
1. Do not apply ready -mix compounds.
3.10 PARTITION IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify partitions indicated on Drawings as having a
required fire or smoke rating.
1. Identification: Same as indicated on drawing
legend.
2. Location: 10 FT on center, both sides of
partition, above ceiling line.
a. Above access panels in hard ceiling.
3. Lettering: 2 IN helvetica, painted with aid of
stencils.
4. Color: Red.
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09310-1
01 7F201 7J20 SECTION 09310
02
03 CERAMIC TILE (CT)
04
05 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09 A. Tile grading and certification: ANSI-A137.1.
10
11 B. Tile installation standards:
12 1. Tile Council of America/Ceramic Tile Institute
13 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
14 2. American National Standards Institute
15 Specifications For The Installation Of Ceramic
16 Tile, as indicated.
17
18 1.02 SUBMITTALS
19
20 A. Samples:
21 1. Full range palette of colors of each type of tile
22 required, for color selection by Architect.
23
24 B. Contract closeout information:
25 1. Maintenance data.
26 2. Letter stating extra material has been delivered.
27
28 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
29 _
30 A. Deliver materials and store on site in original
31 containers with seals unbroken and grade labels
32 intact until use.
33
34 B. Provide grade identification on each container.
35
36 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
37
38 A. Assure temperature is maintained at minimum 50 degF
39 during tile work and for minimum of 7 days after
40 completion.
41
42
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
45 2.01 MATERIALS
46
47 A. Acceptable manufacturers:
48 1. Ceramic tile:
49 a. Base:
50 (1) American Olean Tile.
51 b. Optional:
52 (1) Dal -Tile.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09310-2
O1
(2) United States Ceramic Tile.
02
2.
Adhesives, mortars, grouts and leveling compounds
03
(except combination waterproofing and adhesive):
04
a. Base:
05
(1) Bostik.
06
b. Optional:
07
(1) Laticrete International.
08
(2) Mapei.
09
3.
Combination waterproofing and adhesive:
10
a. Base:
11
(1) Mapei.
12
b. Optional:
13
(1) Bostik.
14
4.
Expansion joint strips: and edge strips:
15
a. Base:
16
(1) Schluter Systems.
17
5.
Leveling compound:
18
a. Base:
19
(1) Ardex.
20
6.
Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
21
Document 00440.
22
23
B.
Ceramic tile, glazed:
24
1.
Standard grade glazed ceramic units.
25
2.
5/16 IN thick.
26
3.
Size(s): 4-1`/4 x 4-1/4 IN at walls, 2 x 2 IN at
27
floors.
28
4.
Cushion edge.
29
5.
Trim shapes same material and finish as tile.
30
6.
Bullnose for caps and corners.
31
32
C.
Adhesives for ceramic tile:
33
1.
Dry -set portland cement mortars: ANSI-A118.1.
34
2.
Latex-portland cement mortars: ANSI-A118.4.
35
3.
Organic adhesives: ANSI-A136.1; type 1.
36
37
D.
Combination waterproofing and adhesive:
38
1.
Mapei, "Planicrete W".
39
2.
Bostik, "Hydroment Ultra -Set".
40
41
E.
Grout:
42
1.
Bostik, Hydroment tile grout.
43
2.
Mix in accordance with manufacturer's
44
instructions using acrylic latex additive.
45
3.
Color as selected.
46
47
F.
Leveling compound:
48
1.
Ardex.
49
2.
As required; use where necessary to obtain
50
satisfactory installation.
51
52
G.
Sealant:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09310-3
O1
1. One or two component, non -sag, polyurethane or
01
02
silicone sealant.
02
03
2. As specified in Section 07900.
03
04
04
05
H.
Edge strips (for thinset applications).
05
06
1. Aluminum edge strip.
06
07
2. Furnish and install at exposed edges where there
07
08
is a change in floor elevation or a change of
08
09
material.
09
10
10
11
I.
Expansion joint strips:
11
12
1. Surface expansion joint:
12
13
a. Rigid PVC.
13
14
b. Thickness: As required.
14
15
c. Color: Gray.
15
16
2. Screed expansion joint:
i6
17
a. Flexible PVC.
17
18
3. Control joint:
18
19
a. PVC.
19
20
b. Colors to be selected.
20
21
21
22
J.
Mortar for mortar setting bed:
22
23
1. 1 part Portland cement, 1/5 part lime and 6 parts
23
24
sand with sufficient water for workability.
24
25
2. Water: Potable.
25
26
3. Cement: ASTM-C150, Type I.
26
27
4. Lime: Hydrated, ASTM-C207, Type S.
27
28
5. Sand: ASTM-C144.
28
29
29
30
K.
Reinforcing:
30
31
1. Wire mesh:
31
32
a. 2 x 2 IN, 16 GA galvanized, welded wire mesh.
32
33
b. Use in floors.
33
34
2. Metal lath:
34
35
a. Galvanized, expanded metal, 3.4 LB/SY.
35
36
b. Do not use rib lath.
36
37
c. Use on walls.
37
38
38
39
2.02
SCHEDULE OF CERAMIC TILE
39
40
40
41
A.
Colors:
41
42
1. Allow for two (2) colors to be selected from
42
43
manufacturer's standards for both floor
43
44
(including base) and wall tiles.
44
45
45
46
2.03
EXTRA MATERIAL
46
47
47
48
A.
Extra tile:
48
49
1. Upon completion of work, deliver extra tile of
49
50
same size, pattern and color as used on job to
50
51
Owner for use in repair and maintenance work.
51
52
2. Furnish tile in original boxes, properly marked.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09310-4
01
3. Provide 5 SF of each type and color of floor and
02
wall tiles.
03
4. Provide 5 LF of each type and color of base.
04
05
06
PART 3
- EXECUTION
07
08
3.01
INSPECTION
09
10
A.
Examine substrates and conditions under which tile is
11
to be installed.
12
13
B.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
14
15
C.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of
16
surface and responsibility for performance.
17
18
3.02
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
19
20
A.
Setting:
21
1. Place tile in grid pattern.
22
2. Align tile joints on adjoining walls.
23
3. Lay out and center tile fields in both directions
24
in each space or on each wall area.
25
4. Avoid use of tile less than 1/2 size.
26
5. Adjust tile to minimize cutting.
27
6. Provide uniform joint widths insofar as
28
practicable.
29
30
B.
Install expansion joints as indicated and:
31
1. Place joints 24 to 36 FT OC or on column lines
32
each way (whichever is smaller).
33
2. Apply over construction or expansion joints in
34
backing.
35
3. Apply where backing material changes.
36
4. Apply where floors abut vertical surface.
37
38
C.
Maintain nominal 1/4 IN wide joint at perimeter of
39
tiled floor areas and caulk with sealant.
40
41
D.
Remove mortar waste immediately and do not allow it
42
to come in contact with aluminum edge strips.
43
44
E.
Install edge strips as recommended by manufacturer.
45
46
3.03
INSTALLATION - THINSET
47
48
A.
Provide leveling beds as required.
49
50
B.
Install in accordance with: ANSI-A108.5
51
"Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland
52
Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar".
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09310-5
01
1. Optional procedure over gypsum wallboard back-up:
01
02
ANSI-A108.4 "Installation of Ceramic Tile With
02
03
Water Resistant Organic Adhesive."
03
04
04
05
C.
Install metal edge strips at locations where there is
05
06
a change in material of adjacent finish floor to
06
07
manufacturer's recommendations.
07
08
08
09
3.04
INSTALLATION OF TILE OVER WATERPROOFING
09
10
10
11
A.
Install in accordance with: ANSI-A108.5
11
12
"Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland
12
13
Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar
13
14
14
15
B.
Extend combination waterproofing and adhesive up
15
16
walls and curbs a minimum of 6 IN.
16
17
17
18
3.05
PROTECTION
18
19
19
20
A.
Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other
20
21
non -staining covering during construction to prevent
21
22
damage.
22
23
23
24
B.
Protect floors, subject to traffic, with plywood over
24
25
Kraft paper.
25
26
26
�`. 27
END OF SECTION
27
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09510-1
`
O1
7I30,
7J20 SECTION 09510
Q1
02
02
03
ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE MATERIALS (ACT)
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
07
08
08
09
A.
Standard for suspension systems: ASTM-C635
09
10
10
11
B.
Standard for installation: ASTM-C636.
11
12
12
13
1.02
SUBMITTALS
13
14
14
15
A.
Samples:
15
16
1. For color and pattern selection.
16
17
17
18
B.
Contract closeout information:
18
19
1. Maintenance data.
19
20
2. Letter stating extra material has been delivered.
20
21
21
22
1.03
JOB CONDITIONS
22
23
23
24
A.
Carefully coordinate ceiling layout with other work
24
25
which penetrates acoustical ceiling systems.
25
26
26
27
B.
Specifically coordinate with sprinkler head spacing.
27
28
28
29
C.
Install acoustical material after floor and wall
29
30
finishes.
30
31
31
32
32
33
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
33
34
34
35
2.01
MATERIALS - ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
35
36
36
37
A.
Suspension systems - General:
37
38
1. Heavy duty systems, ASTM-C635.
38
39
2. Main runner jointing by spliced, interlocking
39
40
ends, tab locks, pin locks, or other suitable
40
41
connections.
41
42
3. Cross runners interlocking with main runners.
42
43
4. Provide types indicated.
43
44
44
45
B.
Acceptable manufacturers:
45
46
1. Steel:
46
47
a. Base:
47
48
(1) Chicago Metallic.
48
49
b. Optional: .
49
50
(1) Armstrong World Industries.
50
51
(2) USG.
51
52
2. Aluminum:
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09510-2
01 a. Base:
02 (1) Armstrong World Industries.
03 3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
04 Section 00440.
05
06 C. Hangers:
07 1. Galvanized, soft annealed steel wire for general
08 use.
09 2. Monel hanger wire for use in wet areas; pools,
10 laundries, showers, kitchens, etc.
11
12 D. Trim: Provide moldings wherever ceiling meets walls,
13 partitions, other vertical elements, and other types
14 of ceilings or ceiling fixtures; where ceiling
15 mounted fixtures have integral flange trim, no
16 additional trim is required.
17
18 E. Suspension systems - types:
19 1. CG-1: Exposed grid, nonrated:
20 a. Product: 520 Series, Chicago Metallic.
21 b. Description: Galvanized single web steel,
22 main and cross runners.
23 C. Finish on exposed surfaces: Smooth, flat
24 white.
25 2. CG-2: Exposed grid - fire rated:
26 a. Product: 250 Series Chicago Metallic.
27 b. Description: Galvanized double web steel,
28 main and cross runners.
29 c. Finish on exposed surfaces: Smooth,- flat
30 white.
31 d. Components: UL labeled.
32
33 2.02 MATERIALS - CEILING TILES (ACT)
34
35 A. Acceptable manufacturers:
36 1. Ceiling Tile - Cast Perlite:
37 a. Base:
38 (1) Eurostone.
39 b. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply
40 with Document 00440.
41 2. General performance description:
42 a. Scheduled finish to be integral.
43 b. Light reflectance: Not less than 0.75.
44 c. Noise absorption: 0.50 - 0.60.
45 d. Class A incombustible units.
46 (1) 0 Flame spread.
47 (2) 0 Smoke developed.
48 (3) 0 Fuel contributed.
49 e. Size: 24 IN x 24 IN.
50 f. Edges uniformly fabricated, true, square.
51 g. Sizes as required to fit scheduled suspension
52 system.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09510-3
01
h. Lay -in style: Minimum 7/8 IN thick.
01
02
i. Standard tile size(s): See Reflected Ceiling
02
03
Plan (s) .
03
04
04
05
2.03
EXTRA MATERIAL
05
06
06
07
A.
Provide Owner with one carton of each type and
07
08
pattern of material for maintenance purposes.
08
09
09
10
B.
Provide in sealed labeled boxes to facilitate
10
11
identification.
it
12
12
13
13
14
PART 3
- EXECUTION
14
15
15
16
3.01
INSPECTION
16
17
17
18
A.
Verify suitability of substrate to accept
18
19
installation.
19
20
20
21
B.
Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
21
22
for performance.
22
23
23
24
3.02
PREPARATION
24
25
25
26
A.
Consult other trades involved before start of ceiling
26
27
work, to determine areas of potential interference.
27
28
28
29
B.
Do not start installation until interferences have
29
30
been resolved.
30
31
-
31
32
3.03
INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
32
33
33
34
A.
Install suspension system in accordance with
34
35
ASTM-C636 and manufacturers' instructions.
35
36
36
37
B.
Grid layout: See Reflected Ceiling Plans where
37
38
provided.
38
39
1. Install grid square with room and with grid
39
40
center lines or acoustical panel center lines
40
41
coinciding with center lines of room, each
41
42
direction.
42
43
a. Acoustical panel dimension at perimeter
43
44
walls: Not less than 6 IN.
44
45
b. In case of conflict with lighting plan
46
contact Architect.
.45
46
47
47
48
C.
Do not use defective or damaged materials.
48
49
49
50
D.
Provide hangers and inserts necessary to support
50
51
acoustical ceilings.
51
52
1. Provide in time to avoid delay in progress of
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09510-4
01
work.
02
2. Locate and align hangers and inserts correctly.
03
3. Coordinate location and alignment with work of
04
other trades.
05
4. Provide supplementary rough suspension system and.
06
trapezing where necessary to support acoustical
07
ceilings beneath pipes, ducts, equipment, etc.
08
5. Do not suspend any part of suspension system or
09
acoustical ceilings from ducts, pipes, conduit,
10
equipment, etc.
11
12
E.
Space hangers to prevent loads from items in or on
13
ceiling from causing eccentric deflection and
14
rotation.
15
1. Provide additional hangers to support lighting
16
fixtures.
17
2. Provide additional hangers within 6 IN of end of
18
main runners.
19
3. Do not bear runners on walls or partitions.
20
21
F.
Install moldings where ceilings meet walls,
22
partitions, other vertical elements, and other types
23
of ceilings.
24
1. Support runners and border units on moldings.
25
2. Secure moldings to wall construction by fastening
26
through holes drilled in web.
27
3. Space holes not more than 3 IN from each end and
28
at each stud.
29
4. Draw up fasteners tight against vertical
30
surfaces.
31
5. Miter cut inside and outside corners.
32
6. Level to a tolerance not more than 1 in 1000.
33
7. Install with leg supporting bottom flange of
34
runners.
35
36
G.
Leave suspension system ready to accept installation
37
of acoustic materials.
38
39
3.04
CLEANING
40
41
A.
Perform cleaning and replacement of defective units
42
in time to avoid delay in progress of work and before
43
final completion of work.
44
45
B.
Carefully clean soiled surfaces.
46
47
C.
Remove and replace irregular, discolored, defective
48
or damaged components at no additional expense to
49
Owner.
50
51
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09660-1
01
7F20,
7J20 SECTION 09660
02
03
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING (RVT) (RB)
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
Tile standard: ASTM-F1066, Composition 1,
10
non -asbestos.
11
12
B.
Construct sample inside and outside corner.
13
1. Include minimum 4 FT straight base each direction
14
from corner.
15
2. If not acceptable construct additional corners.
16
a. Stress whitening and cracking will not be
17
acceptable.
18
b. Color and height variation will not be
19
acceptable.
20
3. Sample corners constitute standard of quality for
21
actual construction.
22
4. Maintain sample corners during construction.
23
5. Remove when directed.
24
6. Sample corners may be built into permanent
25
construction provided sample area is readily
26
identifiable during construction.
' 27
7. Do not proceed with base installation until
28
sample corners are approved by Architect.
29
_
30
1.02
SUBMITTALS
31
32
A.
Samples:
33
1. Full range of colors of each type tile required
34
for color selection.
35
2. Sample of base.
36
3. Sample corners: See Quality Assurance.
37
38
B.
Contract closeout information:
39
1. Maintenance data.
40
2. Letter stating extra material has been delivered.
41
42
1.03
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
43
44
A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened
45
containers indicating name, brand, color and pattern.
46
47
B.
Store at minimum 70 degF for 72 hours before
48
installation.
49
50
1.04
JOB CONDITIONS
51
52 A. Maintain work spaces at 65-85 degF with maximum 75
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09660-2
01
percent humidity 72 hours prior, during, and after
02
installation.
03
04
B.
Protect adjacent work from damage.
05
06
C.
Install after wall finishes.
07
08
D.
Install prior to carpet and acoustical material.
09
10
E.
Schedule installation to minimize accumulation of air
11
contaminants that cannot be removed prior to
12
occupancy.
13
14
F.
Air out construction with 100 percent outside air.
15
1. Do not recirculate prior to occupancy.
16
2. Ventilate during installation. Seal return air
17
ducts and use direct exhaust to outdoors.
18
19
PART 2
- PRODUCTS
20
21
2.01
MATERIALS
22
23
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
24
1. Resilient tile (RVT):
25
a. Base:
26
(1) Armstrong World Industries.
27
b. Optional:
28
(1) Azrock Industries.
29
(2) Mannington Commercial Resilient.
30
(3) Tarkett.
31
2. Resilient base (RE):
32
a. Base:
33
(1) Armstrong World Industries.
34
b. Optional:
35
(1) Johnsonite.
36
(2) Mannington Commercial Resilient.
37
(3) Mercer Products.
38
(4) NAFCO.
39
(5) VPI Floor Products.
40
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
41
Document 00440.
42
43
B.
Resilient tile (RVT): 12 x 12 x 1/8 IN square.
44
1. Static coefficient of friction: 0.6.
45
2. Provide minimum two (2) colors from standards.
46
3. Pattern and colors to be selected.
47
48
C.
Resilient base (RB):
49
1. Vinyl top set, coved type.
50
2. 1/8 x 4 IN, 1/4 IN wide at bottom.
51
3. Field formed external and internal corners.
52
4. Provide continuous rolls, minimum 95 FT long.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09660-3
01
5. Color to be selected.
01
02
02
03
D.
Leveling compound: As recommended by manufacturer
03
04
compatible with adhesives.
04
05
05
06
E.
Adhesives and primers: As recommended by
06
07
manufacturer.
07
08
08
09
2.02
EXTRA MATERIAL
09
10
10
11
A.
One full carton of each type, color and pattern of
11
12
material for maintenance.
12
13
13
14
B.
50 LF of each color and type of base for maintenance.
14
15
15
16
C.
Provide materials in clearly labeled containers.
16
17
17
18
18
19
PART
3 - EXECUTION
19
20
20
21
3.01
INSPECTION
21
22
22
23
A.
Verify substrates are clean, free from moisture, or
23
24
materials which may affect adhesion.
24
25
25
26
27
B.
Carefully examine surfaces for defects and
irregularities.
26
27
28
28
29
C.
Installation constitutes acceptance of surfaces.
29
30
30
31
3.02
PREPARATION
31
32
32
33
A.
Fill cracks, joints, etc., in floors with water
33
34
resistant non crumbling patching compound.
34
35
35
36
B.
Trowel level.
36
37
37
38
C.
Where resilient flooring abuts other finish flooring
38
39
materials and finished surfaces do not align, feather
39
40
leveling compound for approximately 12 IN so finished
40
41
surfaces will align.
41
42
42
43
3.03
INSTALLATION
43
44
44
45
A.
Do not start until work of other trades is complete.
45
46
46
47
B.
Coordinate with other floor, wall and ceiling work.
47
48
48
49
C.
Apply primer and adhesive as recommended by
49
50
manufacturer.
50
51
51
52
D.
Lay in patterns selected by Architect.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09660-4
01
1. Alternate tile 90 degrees if pattern is
02
directional.
03
2. Bond tile to floor, flush, tight, and in true
04
alignment with adjacent tiles and with finished
05
surface.
06
3. Fit neatly into breaks and recesses, against
07
walls, around pipes, and other obstructions.
08
4. Install edging strips where tile edge is exposed
09
or where flooring terminates.
10
5. Lay out tile to avoid less than 1/2 the at
11
permanent walls.
12
6. Perform cutting or drilling of tile as required.
13
14
E.
Where tile color changes or floor finish material
15
changes to sheet vinyl or sheet rubber, install
16
accent/feature strips in door openings directly under
17
door when in closed position.
18
19
F.
Roll entire floor.
20
21
G.
Install stair treads in adhesive recommended by tread
22
manufacturer.
23
1. Roll to assure adhesion.
24
25
H.
Install base after wall material has dried out
26
thoroughly.
27
1. Provide base at intersections of floor and
28
vertical surfaces in areas scheduled to receive
29
base, where intersection is exposed to view.
30
2. Set base straight and true.
31
3. Fit into breaks and recesses.
32
4. Scribe to trim at doors and door frame.
33
5. Make joints tight.
34
6. Install with top and bottom edge in firm contact
35
with wall and floor.
36
7. Install corners as recommended by manufacturer.
37
38
3.04
ADJUST AND CLEAN
39
40
A.
Immediately after application and rolling, remove
41
surplus adhesive.
42
43
B.
Damp mop entire floor.
44
45
C.
Clean floors in accordance with manufacturer's
46
recommendations.
47
48
D.
Leave floors smooth and clean.
49
50
E.
Protect with non -staining building paper as may be
51
necessary to prevent dirt and damage.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09660-5
01 F. Protect traffic areas with fiberboard or plywood. 01
02 02
03 G. Prior to final walk through: 03
04 1. Wash, wax and buff floors and base. 04
05 2. After thorough cleaning, apply two coats of wax 05
06 recommended by flooring manufacturer. 06
07 3. Buff after each coat. 07
08 08
09 END OF SECTION 09
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09761-1
01
6G07,
7J20 SECTION 09761
02
03
SPECIAL FLOOR TREATMENT (CS)
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
Applicator must be a licensee of manufacturer, or
10
approved in writing.
11
12
1.02
JOB CONDITIONS
13
14
A.
Install only when surface and ambient temperatures
15
are between 95 and 60 degF.
16
17
B.
Install prior to other finishes.
18
19
C.
Provide adequate ventilation during installation.
20
21
D.
Post and enforce No Smoking signs.
22
23
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
24
25
2.01
MATERIALS
26
27
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
28
1. Sealing compound:
29
a. Base:
30
(1) L&M Construction Chemicals.
31
b. optional:
32
(1) Sonneborn Building Products.
33
(2) Harris Specialty Chemicals.
34
(3) Hillyard.
35
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
36
Document 00440.
37
38
B.
Sealing compound:
39
1. Water based acrylic cure, sealer and dustproofer.
40
2. ASTM-C309, TT-C-800A.
41
3. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer.
42
4. L&M, Dress & Seal WB 30.
43
44
45
PART
3 - EXECUTION
46
47
3.01
INSPECTION
48
49
A.
Verify suitability of substrate to accept
50
installation.
51
52
B.
Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09761-2
01
for performance.
02
03
3.02
PREPARATION
04
05
A.
Verify that concrete was steel troweled and hair
06
broomed and is free of fins, ridges or voids.
07
08
B.
Assure that curing agents used are compatible with
09
coating system or completely removed.
10
11
C.
Concrete must be cured for minimum of 28 days, with
12
moisture content not exceeding 8 percent.
13
14
D.
Remove surface contamination by cleaning or if
15
necessary by sandblasting.
16
17
E.
Patch holes or voids.
18
19
F.
Rout out cracks exceeding 1/16 IN wide and calk.
20
21
G.
Calk non-moving joints up to 1 IN wide with suitable
22
backer and sealant.
23
24
H.
Do not calk or overcoat joints where movement exceeds
25
25 percent or joints over 1 IN wide.
26
27
I.
These joints must receive other joint treatment to
28
assure watertightness.
29
30
J.
Install test patch.
31
32
K.
If test patch indicates lack of adhesion, install
33
primer.
34
35
3.03
INSTALLATION
36
37
A.
Apply by airless spray, long handled roller or brush.
38
39
B.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's
40
recommendations; minimum 2 coats.
41
42
C.
Apply first coat at not over 400 SF/GAL.
43
44
D.
Apply subsequent coat at a coverage rate not over 400
45
SF/GAL.
46
47
E.
Allow no traffic on sealed surface for 72 hours after
48
application.
49
50
3.04
PATCHING AND CLEANING
51
52
A.
Patch areas which fail to match adjacent work.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09761-3
rdd
01 01
02 B. Clean surface "broom clean" after completion of work. 02
03 03
04 C. Remove debris resulting from these operations. 04
05 05
06 END OF SECTION 06
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09900-1
01
7I30,
7J20 SECTION 09900
02
03
PAINTING (PNT)
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Definitions:
10
1. "Paint" and "painting" refer to applied coatings,
11
except Section 09815 and Section 07176.
12
2. Finished room or space: One that has finish
13
called for on Room Finish Schedule.
14
3. Mechanical work (and equipment): Work included
15
in Division 15.
16
4. Electrical work (and equipment): Work included
17
in Division 16.
18
19
B.
Work included:
20
1. Exterior surfaces scheduled to be painted, unless
21
indicated to be painted under other sections.
22
2. Interior surfaces in finished rooms or spaces,
23
unless indicated not to be painted or indicated
24
to be painted under other sections.
25
3. Mechanical and electrical work:
26
a. Exterior equipment and items.
27
b. Interior mechanical and electrical equipment
28
not completely factory finished.
29
C. In finished rooms and spaces with finished _
30
ceilings: Exposed ductwork, piping,
31
insulated piping, cdnduit, busways, raceways,
32
and associated accessories.
33
34
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
35
36
A.
American Society for Standards and Testing:
37
1. ASTM-D3134.
38
39
B.
American Woodworking Institute:
40
1. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards; Section
41
1500.
42
43
1.03
SUBMITTALS
44
45
A.
Product data:
46
1. Manufacturer's data for each paint type to be
47
applied indicating conformance to specifications.
48
a. Name of material.
49
b. Contents by volume.
50
51
B.
Samples:
52
1. Manufacturers complete range of colors for
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09900-2
O1
selection.
02
2. Gloss samples.
03
04
C.
Project information:
05
1. Letter stating VOC compliance of materials to
06
local regulations.
07
08
D.
Contract closeout information:
09
1. Maintenance data.
10
11
1.04
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
12
13
A.
Deliver in original labeled containers.
14
15
B.
Protect from freezing or damage.
16
17
C.
Store materials in place designated by Owner or
18
Architect.
19
20
D.
Keep storage neat and clean.
21
22
E.
Repair damage thereto or to surroundings.
23
24
F.
Remove rags and waste from building daily.
25
26
G.
Avoid danger of fire.
27
28
1.05
JOB CONDITIONS
29
30
A.
Install when temperature and humidity conditions
31
approximate conditions that will exist when building
32
is occupied. Maintain conditions after installation.
33
34
B.
Install prior to adhesively applied flooring and wall
35
covering.
36
37
C.
Install prior to carpet and acoustical material.
38
39
D.
Schedule installation to minimize accumulation of air
40
contaminants that cannot be removed prior to
41
occupancy.
42
43
E.
Air out construction with 100 percent outside air.
44
1. Do not recirculate prior to occupancy.
45
2. Ventilate during installation. Seal return air
46
ducts and use direct exhaust to outdoors.
47
48
F.
Maintain a rough schedule indicating when painter
49
expects to complete respective coats of paint for
50
various areas.
51
52
G.
Keep schedule current as job progress dictates.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09900-3
01
01
02
02
03
PART 2 -
PRODUCTS
03
04
04
05
2.01 MATERIALS
05
06
06
07
A. Acceptable
manufacturers:
07
O8
1.
Provide paint as product of one manufacturer as
08
09
far as possible.
09
10
2.
Contractor may propose products for use, produced
10
11
by an approved manufacturer when he believes
11
12
proposed product is equivalent to product listed
12
13
in specification.
13
14
3.
Architect must agree that proposed product is
14
15
equivalent.
15
16
4.
If Architect does not agree that proposed product
16
17
is equivalent, Contractor will provide product
17
18
listed in specification.
18
19
5.
Paints, stains, and coatings listed are Sherwin
19
20
Williams unless noted otherwise.
20
21
6.
Use comparable quality paints by approved
21
22
manufacturer.
22
23
7.
Paints:
23
24
a. Base:
24
25
(1) Sherwin Williams.
25
26
b. Optional:
26
27
(1) ICI Paint Stores.
27
28
(2) PPG Architectural Finishes.
28
29
(3) MAB Paints and Coatings.
29
30
(4) Diamond Vogel Paint.
30
31
(5) Moore, Benjamin.
31
32
(6) Tnemec.
32
33
8.
Stains:
33
34
a. Base:
34
35
(1) Sherwin Williams.
35
36
b. Optional:
36
37
(1) ICI.
37
38
(2) PPG Architectural Finishes.
38
39
9.
Structural steel paint (primed in Section 05120):
39
40
a. Base:
40
41
(1) Tnemec.
41
42
b. Optional:
42
43
(1) Sherwin Williams.
43
44
10.
Galvanized metal cleaners:
44
45
a. Great Lakes.
45
46
11.
Other manufacturers desiring approval comply
46
47
with Document 00440.
47
48
48
49
B. Paints
and stains: As specified in paragraphs "Paint
49
50
Systems: Exterior" and "Paint Systems: Interior".
50
51
1.
Use best quality by approved manufacturers.
51
52
2.
Unspecified products: Use best quality by
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
reputable, recognized manufacturers.
02
3. Colors: As noted in color schedule and as
03
indicated in Section 15190.
04
a. Architect reserves right to select accent
05
colors from entire range of manufacturer's
06
colors, including deep colors.
07
b. Architect reserves right to require that one
08
or more walls in a room or space be painted a
09
contrasting accent color, except in janitor's
10
and electric closets and other small
11
miscellaneous rooms and spaces.
12
4. Following is a listing of surfaces and type of
13
paint to be applied.
14
5. Finish coats shall have a gloss rating of 12 to
15
24 at 60 degree angle, ASTM-D523.
16
6. Submit gloss samples for approval prior to use.
17
7. Add flatteners if necessary to achieve specified
18
gloss.
19
20
21
PART 3
- EXECUTION
22
23
3.01
INSPECTION
24
25
A.
Examine surfaces carefully for defects which cannot
26
be corrected and might prevent satisfactory results.
27
28
B.
Commencing of work in a specific area constitutes
29
acceptance of surfaces, and responsibility for
30
performance.
31
32
3.02
PREPARATION - GENERAL
33
34
A.
Assure that surfaces are clean and dry.
35
36
B.
Assure that surfaces are free of foreign materials
37
which will affect adhesion or appearance.
38
39
C.
Remove mildew and neutralize surface.
40
41
D.
Eliminate efflorescence before painting.
42
43
E.
Before painting, test surfaces with moisture meter.
44
45
F.
Paint when moisture is within paint manufacturer's
46
acceptable limits.
47
48
3.03
PREPARATION - EXISTING SURFACES
49
50
A.
Wherever existing work is cut, patched, or added to,
51
touch up to match new work as closely as possible.
52
1. Check compatibility of new coating to previously
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09900-5
O1
painted surfaces by applying test patch. Allow
02
to dry and test adhesion before continuing
03
painting work.
04
05
B.
Put existing work scheduled for repainting in
06
condition to provide good adhesion and to receive
07
paint.
08
1. Wash thoroughly surfaces to be repainted with
09
abrasive kitchen cleaner or sand to
10
manufacturer's recommendations.
11
2. Remove residue from cleaning and abrading
12
procedures.
13
3. Spot prime bare areas.
14
15
C.
Where a wall or ceiling is disturbed and patched,
16
repaint entire wall or ceiling.
17
18
D.
On surfaces to be refinished remove hardware,
19
accessories, plates, surface mounted lighting
20'
fixtures, and similar items not to be coated, or
21
provide protection during preparation and coating
22
operations.
23
24
3.04
MATERIAL PREPARATION
25
26
A.
Mix and prepare materials per manufacturers
27
specifications.
28
29
B.
Stir, agitate or blend materials to produce a mixture
30
of uniform density as required for application of
31
materials.
32
33
3.05
PREPARATION - WOOD
34
35
A.
Sandpaper smooth, then dust.
36
37
B.
After priming coat has dried, seal knots, pitch and
38
resinous sapwood.
39
40
C.
Putty nail holes and minor defects, to match wood
41
color.
42
43
3.06
PREPARATION - FERROUS METAL SURFACES AND HOLLOW METAL
44
45
A.
Follow requirements of SSPC SP1 and SP3.
46
47
B.
Wire brush, or grind as necessary to remove shoulders
48
at edge of sound paint to prevent telegraphing.
49
50
C.
Touch up damaged shop coats.
51
52
D.
For surfaces with touched up shop coat, omit first
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
t
O1
coat.
02
03
3.07
PREPARATION - GALVANIZED METAL SURFACES AND NONANODIZED
04
ALUMINUM
05
06
A.
Follow requirements of SSPC SP1.
07
08
B.
Treat surfaces with galvanized surface cleaner.
09
10
3.08
PREPARATION - GYPSUM WALLBOARD
11
12
A.
Repair minor irregularities left by finishers.
13
14
B.
Exercise care to avoid raising nap of paper.
15
16
C.
Apply prime coat.
17
18
D.
Notify gypsum wallboard finisher to repair and
19
refinish areas which indicate defects after
20
application of primer.
21
22
E.
Reprime refinished areas.
23
24
3.09
PREPARATION - CONCRETE, MASONRY, STUCCO OR PLASTER
25
26
A.
Repair minor defects.
27
28
B.
Remove oil from concrete by washing with xylol.
29
30
C.
Block filler:
31
1. Apply to level out substrate.
32
2. Apply in 2 coats applied at right angles to each
33
other.
34
3. Provide complete cover with manufacturers
35
recommended coating system.
36
37
D.
Squeegee finish top coat of filler.
38
39
E.
Obtain architect's approval of finish for surfaces to
40
receive high build glazed coatings.
41
42
3.10
APPLICATION - GENERAL
43
44
A.
Paint surfaces as specified in paragraphs "Schedule -
45
Interior Paint Systems" and "Schedule - Exterior
46
Paint Systems".
47
48
B.
Provide complete coverage and hide.
49
1. Paint systems are to cover.
50
2. When color or undercoats show through, apply
51
additional coats at no additional cost until
52
paint film is of uniform finish and color. .
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
. Phase 1 Construction
09900-7
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
C. Employ only skilled mechanics.
D. Mix and apply as recommended by manufacturer.
E. If Architect so directs, do not apply succeeding
coats until he has an opportunity to observe previous
coat.
F. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates,
fixtures, finished work, and similar items; or
provide ample in -place protection.
G. Upon completion of painting, carefully replace
removed items and/or remove protection.
H. Apply materials under adequate illumination.
I. Evenly spread and smoothly flow on for full, smooth
cover.
J. Assure that coats are dry,before recoating.
K. Touch up suction or hot spots in plaster, gypsum
wallboard, concrete block, and concrete before
painting.
L. Touch up abraded areas of shop prime coats before
subsequent coats are applied.
M. Back prime wood trim with penetrating sealer.
3.11 APPLICATION - INTERIOR
A. Finish door edges same as faces of doors.
B. Finish closets, semi -exposed surfaces behind grilles,
radiation, etc., to match nearest adjoining surfaces.
3.12 APPLICATION - EXTERIOR
A. Do not paint when surface temperature is below 50
degF, while surface is damp, or during cold, rainy or
frosty weather.
B. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun.
3.13 SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
A. Anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate,
glass, copper, bronze or similar materials.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
09900-8
O1
B.
Moving parts of valves, operating units, mechanical
02
and electrical parts, such as valve and damper
03
operators, sending devices, motor and fan shafts.
04
05
C.
Code labels, such as UL, FM.
06
07
D.
Equipment identification or rating plates.
08
09
E.
Items having complete factory finish with exception
10
of:
11
1. Electrical panels.
12
2. Control cabinets.
13
3. Exterior mechanical equipment.
14
4. Exterior electrical equipment.
15
5. Similar surfaces in finished areas.
16
17
3.14
PROTECTION AND CLEANUP
18
19
A.
Protect adjacent work against damage by painting and
20
finishing work.
21
22
B.
Clean, repair or replace, and repaint damaged work as
23
directed by Architect.
24
_.
25
C.
Provide "WET PAINT" signs.
26
27
D.
Remove temporary protective wrappings, after
28
completion of operations.
29
30
E.
Clean paint spattered surfaces.
31
32
F.
Use care not to damage finished surfaces.
33
34
G.
Remove surplus materials, scaffolding and debris.
35
36
H.
Leave areas broom clean.
37
38
3.15
SCHEDULE - INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
39
40
A.
Concrete and concrete block walls, semi -gloss finish:
41
1. First coat: Latex block filler, ProMar Block
42
Filler; B25W25.
43
2. Second coat: Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, ProMar
44
200; B31W200 Series.
45
3. Third coat: Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, ProMar 200;
46
B31W200 Series.
47
48
B.
Concrete and concrete block walls, high humidity and
49
wet areas:
50
1. First coat: Epoxy ester masonry filler/sealer,
51
B61W2.
52
2. Second coat: Tile -Clad High Solids B62WZ Series.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09900-9
r
01
3.
Third coat:
Tile -Clad High Solids B62WZ Series.
01
02
02
03
C.
Gypsum wallboard,
PLATE:
03
04
1.
First coat:
Loxon Interior Acrylic Primer.
04
05
2.
Second coat:
Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B70
05
06
Series with
Semi -gloss hardener B60V2525.
06
07
3.
Third coat:
Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B70
07
08
Series with
Semi -gloss hardener B60V25.
08
09
09
10
D.
Gypsum wallboard
or plaster surfaces, PNTSR:
10
11
1.
First coat:
Loxon Interior Wall Primer.
11
12
2.
Second coat:
EverClean Latex Satin.
12
13
3.
Third coat:
EverClean'Latex Satin.
13
14
14
15
E.
Metal
doors and
frames:
15
16
1.
First coat:
Acrylic, DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish
16
17
B66.
17
18
2.
Second coat:
Pro Classic Waterborne Acrylic
18
19
Semi -Gloss.
19
20
3.
Third coat:
Pro Classic Waterborne Acrylic
20
21
Semi -Gloss.
21
22
22
23
F.
Metal guardrails
and handrails:
23
24
1.
First coat:
Acrylic, DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish
24
25
B66.
25
26
27
2.
Second coat:
Gloss Enamel,
ProClassic Waterborne Interior
B21 Series.
26
27
28
3.
Third coat:
ProClassic Waterborne Interior Gloss
28
29
Enamel, B21
Series.
29
30
30
31
G.
Galvanized metals:
31
32
1.
Clean with Great
Lakes "Clean-n-Etch".
32
33
2.
First coat:
ProClassic Waterborne Interior Gloss
33
34
Enamel, B21
Series.
34
35
3.
Second coat:
ProClassic Waterborne Interior
35
36
Gloss Enamel,
B21 Series.
36
37
37
38
H.
Manufacturer or
shop primed metals:
38
39
1.
First coat:
Primer as specified elsewhere.
39
40
2.
Second coat:
DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66W200
40
41
Series.
41
42
3.
Third coat:
DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66W200
42
43
Series.
43
44
44
45
I.
Piping and ductwork in mechanical rooms: See 15190.
45
46
46
47
J.
Other metals:
47
48
1.
First coat:
Acrylic, DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish
48
49
B66.
49
50
2.
Second coat:
DTM Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating,
50
51
B66W200 Series.
51
52
3.
Third coat:
DTM Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating,
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09900-10
O1
B66W200 Series.
02
03
K.
Pipe and duct insulation:
04
1. First coat: Latex Wall Primer, ProMar 200.
05
2. Second coat: Metalatex Semi -Gloss B42 Series.
06
3. Third coat: Metalatex Semi -Gloss B42 Series.
07
a. Colors: Section 15190.
08
09
L.
Wood, exposed:
10
1. First coat: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd
11
Undercoater.
12
2. Second coat: ProClassic Waterborne Interior
13
Acrylic Semi-Glos"s Enamel.
14
3. Third coat: ProClassic Waterborne Interior
15
Acrylic Semi -Gloss Enamel.
16
17
M.
Wood, concealed:
18
1. First coat: Wall and Wood Primer B49WZ2.
19
2. Second coat: Latex Wall Paint, flat ProMar 200.
20
3. Third coat: Latex Wall Paint, flat, ProMar 200.
21
22
3.16
SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
23
24
A.
Concrete and concrete block, (satin finish):
25
1. First coat: Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42W46.
26
2. Second coat: A-100 Flat Latex House & Trim, A6
27
Series.
28
3. Third coat: A-100 Flat Latex House & Trim, A6
29
Series.
30
31
B.
Structural steel (primed in Section 05120):
32
1. First coat: Epoxy polyamide, Tnemec Series 66
33
High Build Epoxoline.
34
2. Second coat: Aliphatic polyurethane, Tnemec
35
Series 74 Endura-Shield.
36
37
C.
Metals, galvanized, (semi -gloss finish):
38
1. Clean with Great Lakes "Clean-n-Etch".
39
2. First coat: DTM Acrylic Coating, B66W200 Series.
40
3. Second coat: DTM Acrylic Coating; B66W200
41
Series.
42
43
D.
Ferrous metals not galvanized, (not primed in Section
44
05120) :
45
1. First coat: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer,
46
B50Z Series.
47
2. Second coat: Industrial Enamel, B54Z Series.
48
3. Third coat: Industrial Enamel, B54Z Series.
49
50
E.
Wood (painted):
51
1. First coat: A-100 Latex Exterior Wood Primer,
52
B42W41.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
09900-11
01 2. Second coat: Latex House and Trim Paint, flat,
02 A-100.
03 3. Third coat: Latex House and Trim Paint, flat,
04 A-100.
05
06 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
10162-1
01 2B07, 7J20 SECTION 10162
02
03
METAL TOILET PARTITIONS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
SUBMITTALS
08
09
A.
Shop drawings.
10
11
B.
Samples:
12
1. Full range of colors for selection.
13
14
1.02
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
15
16
A.
Deliver anchorage items in time to allow
17
installation.
18
19
1.03
JOB CONDITIONS
20
21
A.
Verify dimensions by field measurements before
22
fabrication, wherever possible without delaying
23
project.
24
25
26
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
27
28
2.01
MATERIALS - GENERAL
29
30
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
31
1. Toilet partitions:
32
a. Base:
33
(1) Sanymetal Products.
34
b. Optional:
35
(1) Global Steel Products.
36
(2) Accurate Partitions.
37
(3) General Partition Manufacturing.
38
(4) American Sanitary Partition.
39
(5) Weis-Robart Partitions.
40
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
41
Document 00440.
42
43
B.
Toilet partitions:
44
1. Formed metal type.
45
2. Floor supported, floor braced.
46
3. Complete with all accessories.
47
48
C.
Toilet partition panels, pilasters and doors:
49
1. Steel sheet formed over core material.
50
2. Steel sheet ASTM-A568/A568M.
51
a. ASTM-B633 Type RS galvanizing on each face.
52
b. Prepare for painting in accordance with
West Texas Region Disposal Facility.
Phase 1 Construction
10162-2
01
ASTM-D2092, method A (zinc phosphate).
02
C. Provide materials selected for their surface
03
flatness and smoothness.
04
d. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam
05
marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration,
06
or other surface imperfections on finished
07
units not acceptable.
08
e. Provide steel sheets of following minimum
09
thicknesses:
10
(1) Toilet compartment doors: 22 GA.
11
(2) Compartment door moldings: 20 GA.
12
(3) Compartment partitions and moldings: 20
13
GA.
14
(4) Urinal partitions and moldings: 20 GA.
15
(5) Concealed reinforcing for anchors: 12
16
GA.
17
(6) Pilasters: 16 GA.
18
(7) Pilaster interlocking moldings: 18 GA.
19
(8) Divider or entrance screens: 16 GA.
20
(9) Screen interlocking moldings: 18 GA.
21
3.
Panel core material: Vermin and moisture
22
resistant, sound deadened, double faced
23
honeycomb, impregnated Kraft paper.
24
25
D. Accessible stalls:
26
1.
Minimum 5 FT wide or as indicated.
27
2.
Doors:
28
a. Swing out.
29
b. Opening: Minimum 32 IN wide clear.
30
31
E. Doors:
32
1.
1 IN thick.
33
2.
For 32 IN or wider stalls (except accessible
34
stalls): Minimum 26 IN wide.
35
3.
For stalls less than 32 IN wide: Minimum 24 IN
36
wide.
37
38
F. Pilasters, floor braced:
39
1.
Minimum 1-1/4 IN thick.
40
2.
Galvanizing steel anchorage devices.
41
3.
Complete with threaded rods, lock washers,
42
leveling adjustment nuts and shoes.
43
44
G. Screens, wall hung:
45
1.
Minimum 1 IN thick.
46
2.
Size as indicated.
47
3.
Same construction and finish as toilet
48
compartments.
49
4.
Provide extra heavy stirrups for securing to
50
walls.
51
52
H. Pilaster shoes:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10162-3
01
1. AISI Type.302/304 stainless steel.
02
2. 20 GA, 3 IN high.
03
04
I.
Stirrup brackets:
05
1. Manufacturer's heavy duty design for attaching
06
panels to walls and pilasters.
07
2. Chromium plated brass or Type 302 stainless
08
steel.
09
10
J.
Latch and strike keeper:
11
1. Chromium plated brass or stainless steel slide
12
latch, concealed in door or surface mounted.
13
2. Wrap around type strike/keeper designed to
14
properly receive and hold latch.
15
16
K.
Bumper coat hook:
17
1. Rubber tipped combination bumper and coat hook.
18
2. Provide one for each compartment.
19
20
L.
Paper holders: As specified in Section 10800.
21
22
M.
Anchorages and fasteners:
23
1. Exposed fasteners: Manufacturer's theft proof,
24
stainless steel or brass, finish to match
25
hardware.
26
2. Concealed anchors: Galvanized steel, hot dip
27
coated after fabrication complying with
28
ASTM-A385.
29
30
2.02
FABRICATION
31
32
A.
Preassemble units in shop to greatest extent possible
33
to minimize any field cutting and assembly of units.
34
35
B.
Fabricate system in accordance with manufacturer's
36
specifications.
37
38
C.
Pressure laminate face sheets to core material.
39
1. Seal edges with continuous locking strip.
40
2. Miter, weld and grind smooth al corners, or cap
41
with manufacturer's standard stainless steel edge
42
and corner fittings.
43
44
D.
Provide concealed reinforcement for installation of
45
hardware, fittings, brackets, and required
46
accessories.
47
48
E.
Reinforce for attachment of grab bars, as required.
49
50
F.
Finishing:
51
1. After fabrication, clean steel surfaces to remove
52
processing compounds and other contaminants.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10162-4
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
2. Pretreat with a phosphate coating..
3. Apply baked on rust inhibiting primer.
4. Apply 2 finish coats of thermosetting acrylic
enamel, applied and baked in accordance with
paint manufacturer's instructions to provide
minimum 1.5 mil dry film thickness.
5. Colors as selected from manufacturer's full color
range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept
installation.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
for performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in a rigid, straight, plumb and level manner,
to indicated lay out.
B. Clearances:
1. Between pilasters and panels: Maximum 1/2 IN. -
2. Between panels and walls: Maximum 1 IN.
C. Secure to walls with minimum of 2 stirrup brackets
near top and bottom of panel.
1. Locate brackets so holes occur in masonry or tile
joints.
2. Use manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices,
as indicated on shop drawings.
D. Floor supported partitions:
1. Secure pilasters to floor with specified
anchorage devices.
2. Level, plumb and tighten.
3. Set tops of closed doors level with tops of
pilasters.
4. Set anchors with minimum 2 IN penetration into
floor.
5. Calk pilaster and shoe to floor.
E. Wall mounted screens:
1. Attach with heavy duty concealed anchoring
devices.
2. Provide wall channels, wall plates and studs as
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10162-5
01
recommended by manufacturer to suit wall
01
02
construction.
02
03
3. Set units in accordance with manufacturer's
03
04
instructions to support units and resist impact.
04
05
05
06
3.03
ADJUST AND CLEAN
06
07
07
08
A.
Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation
08
09
after installation.
09
10
1. Set hinges on in -swing doors to hold unlatched
10
11
doors open approximately 30 degrees.
11
12
2. Set hinges on out -swing doors to return to fully
12
13
closed position.
13
14
14
15
B.
Protect until time of acceptance by Owner.
15
16
16
17
C.
Replace damaged work as directed.
17
18
18
19
D.
Perform final adjustments just prior to final
19
20
inspection.
20
21
21
22
E.
Clean exposed surfaces, hardware, fittings and
22
23
accessories and touch up minor scratches and other
23
24
imperfections using materials and methods recommended
24
25
by manufacturer.
25
26
26
27
END OF SECTION
27
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10200-1
01
7I30,
7J20 SECTION 10200
01
02
02
03
LOUVERS AND VENTS
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
07
O8
08
09
A.
Air Movement and Control Association certification.
09
10
10
11
1.02
SUBMITTALS
11
12
12
13
A.
Shop drawings.
13
14
14
15
B.
Samples:
15
16
1. Finishes.
16
17
17
18
1.03
JOB CONDITIONS
18
19
19
20
A.
Coordinate with mechanical ductwork as required.
20
21
21
22
22
23
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
23
24
24
25
2.01
MATERIALS
25
26
26
27
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
27
28
1. Louvers:
28
29
a. Baser
29
30
(1) Airolite.
30
31
b. Optional:
31
32
(1) Airline Products.
32
33
(2) Construction Specialties.
33
34
(3) Industrial Louvers.
34
35
(4) Reliable Products.
35
36
(5) Ruskin Manufacturing.
36
37
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
37
38
Document 00440.
38
39
39
40
B.
Louvers:
40
41
1. Depth: 4 IN thick.
41
42
2. Fixed, stormproof, drainable with horizontal and
42
43
vertical gutter system, horizontal continuous
43
44
blade appearance, back braced.
44
45
3. Factory paint finished steel.
45
46
4. Maximum pressure drop: 0.10 IN of water at 900
46
47
FPM.
47
48
a. Minimum free area: 45 percent.
48
49
b. Beginning point of water penetration: 0.01
49
50
OZ/SF at 750 FPM, 0.08 IN water.
50
51
51
�.
52
C.
Bird screen:
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10200-2
O1
1. 1/2 IN square mesh, 16 GA aluminum.
02
2. Install in manufacturer's standard folded frame.
03
04
D.
Sealant: See Section 07900 for materials.
05
06
E.
Accessories: Fabricate anchors, reinforcing, and
07
required ancillary items of compatible material.
08
09
F.
Finish:
10
1. PVF coating, color as selected.
11
12
G.
Blank off plates: Galvanized steel sheet, minimum 16
13
GA.
14
15
H.
Insulated blank off plates: 2 sheets of galvanized
16
16 GA steel with isocyanurate or phenolic foam 2 IN
17
thick core, with edges sealed.
18
19
I.
Paint plates flat,black prior to installation.
20
21
22
PART
3 - EXECUTION
23
24
3.01
INSPECTION
25
26
A.
Verify suitability of openings to accept units.
27
28
B.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
29
30
C.
Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
31
for performance.
32
33
3.02
INSTALLATION
34
35
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's
36
recommendations.
37
38
B.
Install anchoring and bracing accessories as
39
required.
40
41
C.
Install required blank off plates.
42
43
D.
Seal perimeter joints watertight.
44
45
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10260-1
O1
6F06,
7J20 SECTION 10260
02
03
CORNER GUARDS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
SUBMITTALS
08
09
A.
Samples:
10
1. Material samples of full range of standard and
11
custom range of for selection of colors.
12
2. After color selection furnish two 12 IN
13
long/square samples of each selected color.
14
15
B.
Contract closeout information:
16
1. Maintenance data.
17
18
1.02
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
19
20
A.
Schedule delivery of anchorage components as required
21
for installation.
22
23
24
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
25
26
2.01
MATERIALS
f
27
28
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
29
1. Materials listed: _
30
a. Base:
31
(1) Construction Specialties.
32
b. Optional:
33
(1) Balco/Metalines.
34
(2) Pawling.
35
(3) IPC Door & Wall Protection Systems.
36
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
37
Document 00440.
38
39
B.
Plastic corner guards:
40
1. "Acrovyn", rigid vinyl/acrylic.
41
2. Nominal wall thickness: 0.078 IN.
42
3. Impact resistance ASTM-D256: 18 LB/IN width.
43
4. Flame spread, ASTM-E84: Under 25; smoke: under
44
450.
45
5. Finish in pebble grain.
46
6. Color as selected from manufacturer's standard or
47
custom range.
48
7. Furnish with strippable protective coating.
49
8. Retainers: Continuous extruded aluminum fastened
50
at maximum spacing of 18 IN OC.
51
9. Type: SM-20.
52
10. Length: 48 IN.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10260-2
O1
11. End cap: Provide on units not full height.
02
03
04
PART
3 - EXECUTION
05
06
3.01
INSPECTION
07
08
A.
Verify suitability of substrate to accept
09
installation.
10
11
B.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
12
13
C.
Start of installation indicates acceptance of
14
responsibility for performance.
15
16
3.02
INSTALLATION - CORNER GUARD_
17
18
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's
19
recommendations.
20
21
B.
Install with suitable fasteners to provide adequate
22
anchoring.
23
24
C.
Terminate cornerguard at top of base material and
25
install end cap.
26
27
D.
Snap on covers over brackets and retainers.
28
29
E.
Install end caps.
30
31
F.
Just prior to acceptance of building, strip off
32
protective coverings and clean.
33
34
G.
Remove and replace defective, misaligned or damaged
35
units.
36
37
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10444-1
01
7F20,
7K20 SECTION 10444
01
02
02
03
SIGNS
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
07
08
08
09
A.
ADA Accessibility Guidelines, 1991.
09
10
10
11
B.
Applicable local codes and statutes as required.
11
12
12
13
1.02
SUBMITTALS
13
14
14
15
A.
Samples:
15
16
1. Color and font for approval.
16
17
17
18
18
19
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
19
20
20
21
2.01
MATERIALS
21
22
22
23
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
23
24
1. Signs:
24
25
a. Base:
25
26
(1) Mohawk Sign Systems.
26
t 27
b. Optional:
27
28
(1) ASI Sign Systems.
28
29
(2) Best Manufacturing.
29
30
(3) Innerface Architectural Signage.
30
31
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
31
32
Document 00440.
32
33
33
34
B.
Signs: Three-ply plastic laminate, 1.5 IN wide x
34
35
length required for script.
35
36
1. Nominal letter height: 3/4 IN.
36
37
2. Letters and numbers: Raised 1/32 IN.
37
38
3. Upper case.
38
39
4. Letter style: Sans serif.
39
40
S. Braille: Grade-2.
40
41
6. Color: As selected.
41
42
a. Characters: Dark.
42
43
b. Background: Light.
43
44
7. Finish: Nonglare.
44
45
8. Proportion:
45
46
a. Width -to -height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1.
46
47
b. Stroke -width -to -height ratio between 1:5 and
47
48
1:10.
48
49
9. Bevel edges.
49
50
50
51
C.
Directional and identification signs for
51
52
communications systems: International symbols.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10444-2
a1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
D. Adhesive: 3M double -coated urethane foam tape.
1. 4032 for smooth surfaces.
2. 4016 for rough surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Location:
1. Single doors: Install on wall adjacent to latch
side of door.
2. Double doors: Install on nearest adjacent wall.
B. Mount 5 FT above finish floor to centerline of sign.
C. Mount using adhesive tape.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A. Provide signs as follows:
1. "Mechanical Room" at each mechanical space door.
2. "Men" at each men's toilet. .
3. "Women" at each women's toilet.
4. "Janitor" at each janitors closet.
5. "Electrical" at each electrical closet.
6. "Not an Exit": 10 signs.
B. Provide international accessibility symbols at:
1. Accessible entrance.
2. Accessible exit.
3. Accessible routes.
4. Accessible toilets.
5. Accessible telephones.
6. At inaccessible elements, provide directional
signage to indicate route to nearest accessible
element.
C. Provide directional and identification signs for:
1. Volume control telephones.
2. Text telephones.
3. Assistance listening systems.
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10520-1
01
6J31,
7J20 SECTION 10520
02
03
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES (FEC)
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
08
09
A.
Deliver cabinets in time to allow installation.
10
11
B.
Deliver and install filled and charged extinguishers
12
just prior to building occupancy.
13
14
15
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
16
17
2.01
MATERIALS
18
19
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
20
1. Fire extinguishers, cabinets, and fire.blankets:
21
a. Base:
22
(1) JL Industries.
23
b. Optional:
24
(1) Larsen's Manufacturing.
25
(2) Potter Roemer.
26
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
�~
27
Document 00440.
28
29
B.
FEC-1:
30
1. Fire extinguisher cabinet Model Ambassador
31
1015B20.
32
2. Surface mounting.
33
3. 22 GA steel box.
34
4. Slim line 1-1/4 IN flat trim.
35
5. Door with glass insert, maximum glass size: 25
36
SQ IN.
37
6. Provide FIRE EXTINGUISHER decal for each cabinet.
38
7. Finish: Electric statically applied white epoxy.
39
8. Hardware: Standard pull handle.
40
41
C.
Wall brackets:
42
1. Bracket type to fit specified extinguisher, with
43
correct mounting accessories to fit substrate.
44
2. Furnish bracket for each extinguisher not in
45
cabinet.
46
47
D.
Fire extinguishers, general purpose:
48
1. Steel bodied, UL Rated, 4A-60BC, with metal top
49
(head) and valve.
50
2. Cosmic Model-10E.
51
3. Provide hose and horn on each.
52
4. Furnish one for each extinguisher cabinet (FEC),
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10520-2
O1
each hose cabinet (FHC) and fire extinguisher
02
(FE) location.
03
5. Finish: Red, in accordance with OSHA
04
requirements.
05
6. Provide FIRE EXTINGUISHER decal for each
06
extinguisher.
07
08
09
PART 3
- EXECUTION
10
11
3.01
INSPECTION
12
13
A.
Verify suitability of substrates to accept
14
installation.
15
16
B.
Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
17
for performance.
18
19
3.02
INSTALLATION
20
21
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's
22
instructions.
23
24
B.
Provide required closures.
25
26
C.
Install with extinguisher top not over 60 IN, above.
27
floor.
28
29
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10800-1
01
6F06,
7K20 SECTION 10800
02
03
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES (TA)
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
08
09
A.
Product data:
10
1. Manufacturer's standard catalog cuts of
11
accessories specified.
12
13
B.
Contract closeout information:
14
1. Letter stating that extra material has been
15
delivered.
16
17
1.02
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
18
19
A.
Deliver anchorage items in time to allow
20
installation.
21
22
23
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
24
25
2.01
MATERIALS
26
27
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
28
1. As noted for individual items.
29
2. Not all manufacturers are approved for each item.
30
3. Provide equipment from one manufacturer as far as
31
is practicable.
32
4. Toilet and bath accessories:
33
a. Base:
34
(1) American Specialties.
35
b. Optional:
36
(1) Bobrick Washroom Equipment.
37
(2) Bradley.
38
(3) General Accessory Manufacturing (GAMCO).
39
(4) McKinney/Parker.
40
(5) Tubular Specialties Manufacturing (TSM).
41
5. Other manufacturers of a complete line of
42
stainless steel accessories desiring approval
43
comply with Document 00440.
44
45
B.
Toilet accessories:
46
1. Stainless steel.
47
2. Exception: TA-2 and TA-3, aluminum or Zamac
48
coated.
49
50
C.
Grab bars:
51
1. 1-1/2 IN OD, satin stainless steel.
52
2. Concealed mounting.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10800-2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
-13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
10.
1/1-2 IN clearance between bar and wall.
Modify manufacturer's standard units if required.
Fully weld bars to flanges.
Provide anchoring devices to withstand minimum
concentrated load of 250 LB.
Mounting devices for gypsum wallboard:
a. American Specialties 7002C.
b. Bobrick Type 256.
c. Bradley Type 899-014, 899-015.
d. TSM BP-10A.
e. GAMCO C1.
f. McKinney/Parker 9680.
Mounting devices for concrete block walls:
a. American Specialties 7002C.
b. Bobrick Type 257.
c. Bradley Type 899-016.
d. TSM TB-6, TB-8, SP-4C.
e. GAMCO C4.
f. McKinney/Parker 9590.
Mounting devices for toilet partitions:
a. American Specialties 7002MP.
b. Bobrick Type 258.
c. Bradley Type 899-021.
d. TSM BP-2.
e. GAMCO C2.
f. McKinney/Parker 9592 or 9594.
Mounting on other surfaces: As recommended by
manufacturer.
2.02 TOILET ACCESSORIES (TA NUMBERS)
A. TA-1, Robe Hook:
1. Model:
a. American Specialties 7340-S.
b. Bobrick B-671.
c. Bradley 9114.
d. TSM 806S.
e GAMCO 5153.
2. Provide one for every water closet.
3. Mount 5 FT-6 IN AFF.
B. TA-2, Toilet Tissue Dispenser (Double, Non -controlled
Delivery):
1. Model:
a. American Specialties 0264-1A.
b. Bobrick B-2740.
c. Bradley 5241-50.
d. McKinney/Parker 1031D LCD.
2. Provide one for every water closet.
3. Mount 24 IN AFF.
C. TA-4, Feminine Napkin -Tampon Dispenser (25 cent
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
10800-3
01
Operation):
02
1.
Model:
03
a. American Specialties 0864.
04
b. Bobrick B-282.
05
c. Bradley 426.
06
2.
Provide one in every female public toilet room.
07
3.
Mount with coin slot 42 IN AFF.
08
09
D. TA-5,
Feminine Napkin Disposer:
10
1.
Model:
11
a. American Specialties 0852.
12
b. Bobrick B-270.
13
c. Bradley 4781-15.
14
d. TSM 5134.
15
e. McKinney/Parker 626.
16
2.
Provide one adjacent to every female water
17
closet.
18
3.
Mount with bottom of unit 18 IN AFF.
19
20
E. TA-7,
Paper Towel Dispenser (Multi -fold):
21
1.
Model:
22
a. American Specialties 0210.
23
b. Bobrick B-262.
24
c. Bradley 250-15.
25
d. GAMCO TD-2.
26
e. McKinney/Parker 610.
27
f. TSM 5230.
28
2.
Provide one in every toilet room.
29
3.
Provide one at every lavatory and/or sink not in
30
toilet room.
31
4.
Mount with slot 48 IN AFF.
32
33
F. TA-9,
Liquid Soap Dispenser (with all purpose valve):
34
1.
Model:
35
a. American Specialties 0342.
36
b. Bobrick B-112.
37
c. Bradley 6542.
38
d. GAMCO G-58.
39
e. McKinney/Parker 304-H.
40
f. TSM SD-19.
41
2.
Provide one at every hand sink.
42
3.
Mount right side over sink.
43
44
G. TA-10,
Mop and Broom Rack (36 IN, 4 Holders):
45
1.
Model:
46
a. American Specialties 0796B.
47
b. Bobrick B-223 x 36.
48
c. Bradley 9954.
49
d. GAMCO MS-2A.
50
e. McKinney/Parker 233.
51
f. TSM 892.
52
2.
Provide one in every janitor closet or as
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 _
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
'24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
10800-4
indicated.
3. Mount 5 FT AFF.
H. TA-20, Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Disposal:
1. Model:
a American Specialties 0469.
b. Bobrick B3944.
c. Bradley 234.
d. GAMCO TW-1.
e. TSM 5200-12.
2. Provide one in each multiple washroom.
3. Mount with towel slot 48 IN AFF.
I. TA-26, Grab Bar, 36 IN Horizontal:
1. Model:
a. American Specialties 3201-11AC".
b. Bobrick B-6206.
c. Bradley 8120 001.
d. GAMCO 150C-36.
e. McKinney/Parker 9604 F36.
f. TSM CS-1/36.
2. Provide as indicated.
3. Mount 33 IN AFF.
J. TA-30, Grab Bar, 48 IN Horizontal:
1. Model:
a. American Specialties 3201-A.
b. Bradley 812 001.
c. GAMCO 150C-48.
d. McKinney/Parker 9604 F.
e. TSM CS-1/48.
2. Provide as indicated.
3. Mount 33 IN AFF.
K. TA-35, Unframed Mirror, wall to wall width as
indicated, height - from top of counter backsplash to
7 FT - 0 IN AFF:
1. Glass Type 9 per Section 08800.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept
installation.
B. Where item is mounted on or in a toilet partition,
verify suitable interior reinforcing is in place.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
for performance.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase'1 Construction
10800-5
O1
01
02
3.02
INSTALLATION
02
03
03
04
A.
Coordinate accessory locations to fit spaces.
04
05
05
06
B.
Coordinate items to avoid mounting conflicts.
06
07
07
08
C.
Provide additional accessories indicated on drawings.
08
09
09
10
D.
Mount accessible items in accordance with ADA.
10
11
11
12
E.
Mount at height indicated.
12
13
13
14
F.
Mount items with theft -resistant fasteners.
14
15
15
16
END OF SECTION
16
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11005-1
01
93A13 SECTION 11005
02
03
EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS
04
05
PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01 SUMMARY
08
09
A. Section Includes:
10
1. Requirements of this Section apply to all
11
equipment provided on the Project including that
12
found in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16,
13
even if not specifically referenced in individual
14
"Equipment" articles of those Specifications.
15
16
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily
17
limited to:
18
1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and
19
Conditions of the Contract.
20
2. Division 1 - General Provisions.
21
3. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic
22
Requirements.
23
4. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements.
24
25
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
26
27
A. Referenced Standards:
28
1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association
29
(ABMA) .
30
2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA).
31
3. American Society for Testing and Materials
32
(ASTM) :
33
a. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless
34
Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
35
4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
36
(IEEE) :
37
a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase
38
Induction Motors and Generators.
39
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
40
(NEMA) :
41
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
42
b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and
43
System.
44
c. MG 1, Motors and Generators.
45
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
46
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
47
48
B. Miscellaneous:
49
1. A single manufacturer of a "product" to be
50
selected and utilized uniformly throughout
51
Project even though:
52
a. More than one manufacturer is listed for a
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11005-2
O1
given "product" in Specifications.
01
02
b. No manufacturer is listed.
02
03
2. Equipment, electrical assemblies, related
03
04
electrical wiring, instrumentation, controls, and
04
05
system components shall FULLY comply with
05
06
specific NEC area and NEMA 250 and ICS-6
06
07
designations.
07
08
08
09
1.03
DEFINITIONS
09
10
10
11
A.
Product: Manufactured materials and equipment.
11
12
12
13
B.
Major Equipment Supports- Supports for Equipment:
13
14
1. Located on or suspended from elevated slabs with
14
15
supported equipment weighing 2000 LBS or greater,
15
16
or:
16
17
2. Located on or suspended from roofs with supported
17
18
equipment weighing 500 LBS or greater, or:
18
19
3. Located on slab -on -grade or earth supported with
19
20
equipment weighing 5000 LBS or more.
20
21
21
22
C.
Equipment: One or more assemblies capable of
22
23
performing a complete function. Mechanical,
23.
24
electrical, instrumentation or other devices
24
25
requiring an electrical, pneumatic, electronic or
25
26
hydraulic connection. Not limited to items listed
26
27
under "Equipment" article within specifications.
27
28
28
29
D.
Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is
29
30
the person actually installing or applying the
30
31
product in the field at the Project site.
31
32
1. Installer or applicator are synonymous.
32
33
33
34
1.04
SUBMITTALS
34
35
35
36
A.
Shop Drawings:
36
37
1. General for all equipment:
37
38
a. See Section 01340.
38
39
b. Acknowledgement that products submitted
39
40
comply with the requirements of the standards
40
41
referenced.
41
42
c. Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling,
42
43
and installation instructions.
43
44
d. Equipment identification utilizing numbering
44
45
system and name utilized in Drawings.
45
46
e. Equipment installation details:
46
47
(1) Location of anchorage.
47
48
(2) Type, size, and materials of construction
48
49
of anchorage.
49
50
(3) Anchorage setting .templates.
50
51
(4) Manufacturer's installation instructions.
51
52
f. Equipment area classification rating.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11005-3
(00,11 01 g. Shipping and operating weight.
02
h. Equipment physical characteristics:
03
(1) Dimensions (both horizontal and vertical).
04
(2) Materials of construction and construction
05
details.
06
i. Equipment factory primer and paint data.
07
j. Manufacturer's recommended spare parts list.
08
k. Equipment lining and coatings.
09
1. Equipment utility requirements include air,
10
natural gas, electricity, and water.
11
2. Mechanical and process equipment:
12
a. Operating characteristics:
13
(1) Technical information including applicable
14
performance curves showing specified
15
equipment capacity, rangeability, and
16
efficiencies.
17
(2) Brake horsepower requirements.
18
(3) Copies of equipment data plates.
19
b. Piping and duct connection size, type and
20
location.
21
c. Equipment bearing life certification.
22
d. Equipment foundation data:
23
(1) Equipment center of gravity.
24
(2) Criteria for designing vibration, special
25
or unbalanced forces resulting from
26
equipment operation.
{ 27
3. Electrical and control equipment:
28
a. Electric motor information:
29
(1) Nameplate data.
30
(2) Service factor on motors 1/2 HP and above.
31
(3) Motor enclosure type.
32
(4) NEMA frame size.
33
(5) NEMA design code.
34
(6) Insulation type.
35
(7) Locked rotor current.
36
(8) Efficiency and power factor at full load,
37
3/4 load, and no load.
38
b. Control panels:
39
(1) Panel construction.
40
(2) Point-to-point wiring diagrams.
41
(3) Scaled panel face and subpanel layout.
42
(4) Technical product data on panel components.
43
(5) Panel and subpanel dimensions and weights.
44
(6) Panel access openings.
45
(7) Nameplate test.
46
(8) Panel anchorage.
47
48
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
49
1. See Section 01340.
50
51
C. Miscellaneous Submittals:
52
1. Sample form letter for equipment field
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11005-4
certification.
2. Certification that equipment has been installed
properly, has been initially started up, has been
calibrated and/or adjusted as required, and is
ready for operation.
3. Certification for major equipment supports that
equipment foundation design loads shown on the
Drawings or specified have been compared to
actual loads exhibited by equipment provided for
this Project and that said design loadings are
equal to or greater than the loads produced by
the equipment provided.
4. Field noise testing reports if such testing is
specified in narrow scope sections.
5. Field vibration testing reports if vibration
testing is specified in narrow scope sections.
6. Notification, at least 1 week in advance, that
motor testing will be conducted at factory.
7. Certification from equipment manufacturer that
all manufacturer -supplied control panels that
interface in any way with other controls or
panels have been submitted to and coordinated
with the supplier/installer of those interfacing
systems.
8. Motor test reports.
9. Certification prior to Project closeout that
electrical panel drawings for
manufacturer -supplied control panels truly
represent panel wiring including any field -made
modifications. -
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the
the following manufacturers are
1. Motors:
a. Baldor.
b. Reliance Electric.
c. General Electric.
d. Franklin.
Contract Documents,
acceptable:
B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with
Specification Section 01640.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Electric Motors:
1. Provide motors designed and applied in compliance
with NEMA, IEEE, and the NEC for specific duty
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
01
imposed by driven equipment.
01
02
2.
Where used in conjunction with adjustable speed
02
03
drives, provide motors fully compatible with the
03
04
variable speed controllers.
04
05
3.
Where frequent starting applications are
05
06
specified, design for frequent starting duty
06
07
equivalent to duty service required by driven
07
08
equipment.
08
09
4.
Rate for continuous duty at 40 DegC ambient.
09
10
Design in accordance with the NEMA Standards for
10
11
Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise
11
12
above 40 DegC ambient on continuous operation or
12
13
intermittent duty at nameplate horsepower.
13
14
5.
Design for full voltage starting.
14
15
6.
Design bearing life based upon actual operating
15
16
load conditions imposed by driven equipment.
16
17
7.
Size for altitude of Project.
17
18
8.
Size motors so that, under maximum continuous
18
19
load imposed by driven equipment, motor nameplate
19
20
horsepower for continuous operation is minimum of
20
21
15 percent more than driven load or provide motor
21
22
with 1.15 service factor in which case maximum
22
23
continuous load imposed shall not exceed
23
24
nameplate horsepower rating of motor.
24
25
9.
Provide encapsulated windings in wet/corrosive
25
26
and for outdoor applications.
26
27
a. Provide encapsulation using a silicone or
27
28
epoxy seal after the windings have been dried
28
29
to less than 1 percent moisture.
29
30
10.
Furnish with clamp -type grounding terminals
30
31
inside motor conduit box.
31
32
11.
Furnish with oversized external conduit boxes.
32
33
12.
Furnish with stainless steel nameplates with
33
34
information to include all data as required by
34
35
paragraph 430-7 of the National Electric Code,
35
36
NFPA 70.
36
37
13.
Use of manufacturer's standard motor will be
37
38
permitted on integrally constructed motor driven
38
39
equipment such as appliances and hand tools
39
40
specified by model number in which a redesign of
40
41
complete unit would be required in order to
41
42
provide a motor with other features as may be
42
43
specified herein.
43
44
14.
Electric motors less than 2 HP.
44
45
a. Single phase, 60 HZ, suitable for supply
45
46
voltage shown on Drawings.
46
47
b. Totally enclosed non -ventilated (TENV) or
47
48
totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFL).
48
49
c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings
49
50
conforming to AFBMA Standards.
50
51
d. Specially insulated for use in damp locations
51
52
below 20 DegC.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11005-6
O1
15. Motor efficiencies:
01
02
a. Provide motor having following minimum
02
03
efficiencies. 1) Horizontal induction
03
04
motors:
04
05
05
06
3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM
06
07
a==x=xx====c= s===x===a= x==amxaxxa x=x====x==
07
08
HP TEFC TEFC TEFC TEFC
08
09
09
10
1 71.0 78.5 75.5 67.5
10
11
1.5 80.0 81.5 81.5 69.5
11
12
2 81.5 81.5 84.0 72.0
12
13
13
14
16. Measure efficiencies by IEEE 112 - Method B.
14
15
15
16
2.03 COMPONENTS
16
17
17
18
A. Gear Drives and Drive Components:
18
19
1. Size drive equipment capable of supporting full
19
20
load including losses in speed reducers and power
20
21
transmission.
21
22
2. Provide nominal input horsepower rating of each
22
23
gear or speed reducer at least equal to nameplate
23
24
horsepower of drive motor.
24
25
3. Design drive units for 24 HR continuous service,
25
26
constructed so oil leakage around shafts is
26
27
precluded.
27
28
4. Utilize gears, gear lubrication systems, gear
28
29
drives, speed reducers, speed increasers and
29
30
flexible couplings meeting applicable standards
30
31
of American Gear Manufacturers Association.
31
32
5. Gear reducers:
32
33
a. Provide gear reducer totally enclosed and oil
33
34
lubricated.
34
35
b. Utilize antifriction bearings throughout.
35
36
C. Provide worm gear reducers having a service
36
37
factor of at least 1.20.
37
38
d. Furnish other helical, spiral bevel, and
36
39
combination bevel -helical gear reducers with
39
40
a service factor of at least 1.50.
40
41
41
42
2.04 ACCESSORIES
42
43
43
44
A. Guards:
44
45
1. Provide each piece of equipment having exposed
45
46
moving parts with full length, easily removable
46
47
guards, meeting OSHA requirements.
47
48
2. Interior applications:
48
49
a. Construct from expanded galvanized steel
49
50
rolled to conform to shaft or coupling
50
51
surface.
51
52
b. Utilize non -flattened type 16 GA galvanized
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11005-7
01
steel with nominal 1/2 IN spacing.
02
c. Connect to equipment frame with hot -dip
03
galvanized bolts and wing nuts.
04
3. Exterior applications:
05
a. Construct from 16 GA stainless steel or
06
aluminum.
07
b. Construct to preclude entrance of rain, snow,
08
or moisture.
09
c. Roll to conform to shaft or coupling surface.
10
d. Connect to equipment frame with stainless
11
steel bolts and wing nuts.
12
13
B.
Anchorage:
14
1. Cast -in -place anchorage:
15
a. Provide ASTM F593, Type 316 stainless steel
16
anchorage for all equipment.
17
b. Configuration and number of anchor bolts
18
shall be per manufacturer's recommendations.
19
c. Provide two nuts for each bolt.
20
2. Drilled anchorage:
21
a. Epoxy grout per Section 03308.
22
b. Threaded rods same as cast -in -place.
23
24
C.
Data Plate:
25
1. Attach a stainless steel data plate to each piece
26
of rotary or reciprocating equipment.
27
2. Permanently stamp information on data plate
28
including manufacturer's name, equipment
29
operating parameters, serial number and speed.
30
31
D.
Lifting Eye Bolts or Lugs:
32
1. Provide on all equipment 50 LBS or greater.
33
2. Provide on other equipment or products as
34
specified in the narrow specifications.
35
36
2.05
FABRICATION
37
38
A.
Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment in
39
accordance with modern engineering and shop
40
practices.
41
42
B.
Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and
43
gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time,
44
can be installed in field.
45
46
C.
Furnish like parts of duplicate units to be
47
interchangeable.
48
49
D.
Ensure that equipment has not been in service at any
5o
time prior to delivery, except as required by tests.
51
52
E.
Furnish equipment which require periodic internal
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11005-8
01
inspection or adjustment with access panels which
01
02
will not require disassembly of guards, dismantling
02
03
of piping or equipment or similar major efforts.
03
04
Quick opening but sound, securable access ports or
04
05
windows shall be provided for inspection of chains,
05
06
belts, or similar items.
06
07
07
08
F.
Provide common, lipped base plate mounting for
08
09
equipment and equipment motor where said mounting is
09
10
a manufacturer's standard option. Provide drain
10
11
connection for 3/4 IN PVC tubing.
11
12
12
13
G.
Machine the mounting feet of rotating equipment.
13
14
14
15
H.
Fabricate equipment which will be subject to
15
16
Corrosive Environment in such a way as to avoid back
16
17
to back placement of surfaces that can not be
17
18
properly prepared and painted. When such back to
18
19
back fabrication can not be avoided, provide
19
20
continuous welds to seal such surfaces from contact
20
21
with corrosive environment. Where continuous welds
21
22
are not practical, after painting seal the back to
22
23
back surfaces from the environment in accordance with
23
24
Section 07900.
24
25
25
26
2.06
SHOP OR FACTORY PAINT FINISHES
26
27
27
28
A.
Electrical Equipment:
26
29
1. The standard factory -applied paint coating
29
30
system(s) of the approved manufacturers of the
30
31
following equipment are acceptable:
31
32
a. Panel boards.
32
33
b. Electrical panels.
33
34
C. Safety switches.
34
35
d. Motor starter equipment.
35
36
36
37
B.
Other Equipment: In accordance with Section 09905.
37
38
36
39
39
40
PART 3
- EXECUTION
40
41
41
42
3.01
INSTALLATION
42
43
43
44
A.
Install equipment as shown on Drawings and in
44
45
accordance with manufacturer's directions.
45
46
46
47
B.
Utilize templates for anchorage placement for
47
48
slab -mounted equipment.
48
49
49
50
C.
For equipment having drainage requirements such as
50
51
seal water, provide 3/4 IN PVC or clear plastic
51
52
tubing from equipment base to nearest floor or
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
equipment drain. Route clear of major traffic areas
02
and as approved by Engineer.
03
04
D. DO NOT construct foundations until major equipment
05
supports are approved.
06
07
E. Extend all non -accessible grease fittings using
08
stainless steel tubing to a location which allows
09
easy access of fittings.
10
11
F. Construct subbases, either concrete, steel or cast
12
iron, level in both directions. Particular care
13
shall be taken at hold-down bolt locations so these
14
areas are flat and level.
15
16
G. Machine Base:
17
1. Mount machine bases of rotating equipment on
18
subbases in manner that they are level in both
19
directions according to machined surfaces on
20
base. Use machinist level for this procedure.
21
2. Level machine bases on subbases and align
22
couplings between driver and driven unit using
23
steel blocks and shims.
24
a. Size blocks and shims to provide solid
25
support at each anchor bolt location. Area
26
size of blocks and shims shall be
27
approximately 1-1/2 times area support
28
surface at each anchor bolt point.
29
b. Provide blocks and shims at each anchor bolt.
30
Blocks and shims that are square shape with
31
"U" cut out to allow blocks and shims to be
32
centered on anchor bolts.
33
c. After all leveling and alignment has been
34
completed and before grouting,tighten anchor
35
bolts to proper torque value.
36
d. Do not use nuts below the machine base on
37
anchor bolts for base leveling.
38
39
H. Couplings:
40
1. Align in the annular and parallel positions.
41
a. For equipment rotating at 1200 rpm or less,
42
align both annular and parallel within 0.001
43
IN tolerance for couplings 4 IN size and
44
smaller. Couplings larger than.4 IN size:
45
Increase tolerance 0.0005 IN per inches of
46
coupling diameter, i.e., allow 6 IN coupling
47
0.002 IN tolerance, and allow a 10 IN
48
coupling 0.004 IN tolerance.
49
b. For equipment rotating at speeds greater than
50
1200 rpm allow both annular and parallel
51
positions within a tolerance rate of 0.00025
52
IN per inch coupling diameter.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11005-9
O1
02
03.
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11005-10
2. If equipment is delivered as a mounted unit from
factory, verify factory alignment on site after
installation and realigned if necessary.
3. Check surfaces for runout before attempting to
trim or align units.
I. Grouting:
1. After machine base has been shimmed, leveled,
couplings aligned and anchor bolts tightened to
correct torque value, a dam or formwork shall be
placed around base to contain grouting. Extend
dam or formwork at least 1/2 IN above the top of
leveling shims and blocks.
2. Saturate top of roughened concrete subbase with
water before grouting. Add grout until entire
space under machine base is filled to the top of
the base underside. Puddle grout by working a
stiff wire through the grout and vent holes to
work grout in place and release any entrained air
in the grout or base cavity.
3. When the grout has sufficiently hardened, remove
dam or formwork and finish the exposed grout
surface to fine, smooth surface. Cover exposed
grout surfaces with wet burlap and keep covering
sufficiently wet to prevent too rapid evaporation
of water from the grout. when the grout has
fully hardened (after a minimum of 7 days)
tighten all anchor bolts and recheck
driver -driven unit for proper alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION CHECKS
A. For all equipment specifically required in detailed
specifications, secure services of experienced,
competent, and authorized representative(s) of
equipment manufacturer to visit site of work and
inspect, check, adjust and approve equipment
installation. In each case, representative(s) shall
be present during placement and startup of equipment
and as often as necessary to resolve any operational
issues which may arise.
B. Secure from equipment manufacturer's
representative(s) a written report certifying that
equipment:
1. Has been properly installed and lubricated.
2. Is in accurate alignment.
3. Is.free from any undue stress imposed by
connecting piping or anchor bolts.
4. Has been operated under full load conditions and
that it operated satisfactorily. Secure and
deliver a field written report to Owner
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
i8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11005-11
01
immediately prior to leaving jobsite.
01
02
02
03
C.
No separate payment shall be made for installation
03
04
checks. All or any time expended during installation
04
05
check does not qualify as O&M training or instruction
05
06
time when specified.
06
07
07
08
3.03
IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND HAZARD WARNING SIGNS•
08
09
09
10
A.
Identify equipment and install hazard warning signs
10
11
in accordance with Section 10400.
11
12
12
13
3.04
FIELD PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
13
14
14
15
A.
For required field painting and protective coatings,
15
16
comply with Section 09905.
16
17
17
18
3.05
WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATION
18
19
19
20
A.
Clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
20
21
21
22
B.
Terminate motor circuit conductors with copper lugs
22
23
bolted to motor leads.
23
24
24
25
C.
Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with
25
26
electrical tape, 150 percent of insulation value of
26
27
conductor.
27
28
28
29
D.
Connections to carry full ampacity of conductors
29
30
without temperature rise.
30
31
31
32
E.
Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
32
33
33
34
3.06
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
34
35
35
36
A.
Furnish equipment manufacturer services as specified
36
37
in the individual equipment specifications.
37
38
38
39
B.
Inspect wire and connections for physical damage and
39
40
proper connection.
40
41
41
42
C.
Check rotation of motor before connection to driven
42
43
equipment, before couplings are bolted or belts
43
44
installed. Before motor is started to check
44
45
rotation, determine that motor is lubricated.
45
46
46
47
D.
Subbase that supports the equipment base and that is
47
48
made in the form of a cast iron or steel structure
48
49
that has supporting beams, legs and cross member that
49
50
are cast welded or bolted, shall be tested for a
50
51
natural frequency of vibration after equipment is
51
52
mounted. Keep the ratio of the natural frequency of
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11005-12
01 the structure to the frequency of the disturbing
02 force out of the range from 0.5 to 1.5.
03
04 3.07 DEMONSTRATION
05
06 A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Section
07 01650.
08
09 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11060-1
01
96A09
SECTION 11060
01
02
02
03
PUMPING EQUIPMENT: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
SUMMARY
07
08
08
09
A.
Section Includes:
09
10
1. Pumping equipment.
10
11
11
12
B.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily
12
13
limited to:
13
14
1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and
14
15
Conditions of the Contract.
15
16
2. Division 1 - General Provisions.
16
17
3. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements.
17
18
4. Section 11063 - Pumping Equipment: Horizontal
18
19
End Suction Centrifugal.
19
20
20
21
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
21
22
22
23
A.
Referenced Standards:
23
24
1. Hydraulic Institute (HI):
24
25
a. Standards for centrifugal, rotary and
25
26
reciprocating pumps.
26
27
27
28
B.
Fully coordinate all mechanical seal systems
28
29
specified to ensure pump and seal compatibility.
29
30
30
31
1.03
DEFINITIONS
31
32
32
33
A.
The abbreviations are defined as follows:
33
34
1. IPS: Iron Pipe Size.
34
35
2. NPSHR: Net Positive Suction Head Required.
35
36
3. TDH: Total Dynamic Head.
36
37
4. TEFL: Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled.
37
38
38
39
B.
Pump Service Category - Pump or pumps having
39
40
identical names (not tag numbers) used for specific
40
41
pumping service.
41
42
42
43
1.04
SUBMITTALS
43
44
44
45
A.
Shop Drawings:
45
46
1. See Section 11005.
46
47
2. Product technical data including:
47
48
a. Performance data and curves with flow (gpm),
48
49
head (FT), horsepower, efficiency, NPSH
49
5o
requirements, submergence requirement.
50
^
51
b. Pump accessory data.
51
{
52
c. Bearing supports, shafting details and
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11060-2
O1 lubrication provisions.
02 d. Solids passage information.
03 3. Certifications:
04 a. Certified pump performance curves as
05 described in Article 2.04.
06 b. Statement relative to installation and
07 start-up per paragraph 3.02-A.4.
08 4. Test reports:
09 a. Factory hydrostatic test.
10
11 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
12 1. See Section 01340.
13
14
15 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
16
17 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
18
19 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
20 the following manufacturers are acceptable:
21 1. Mechanical seals:
22 a. Chesterton.
23 b. Garlock.
24
25 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with
26 Specification Section 01640.
27
28 2.02 ACCESSORIES
29
30 A. See Section 11005.
31
32
B. Each Unit:
33
1.
Lifting eye bolts or lugs.
34
2.
Plugged gage cock connection at suction and
35
discharge nozzles.
36
3.
Tapped and plugged openings for casing and
37
bearing housing vents and drains.
38
4.
Fittings for properly adding flushing .lubricant.
39
S.
Pressure relief fittings for grease lubrication.
40
41
C. Packing
Seal:
42
1.
Provide unless mechanical seal specified in
43
narrow -scope pump sections.
44
2.
Minimum of five rings graphite impregnated
45
synthetic packing.
46
3.
Provide minimum 1/4 IN DIA supply tap and 1/2 IN
47
DIA minimum drain tap.
48
4.
Provide split teflon or bronze water seal ring.
49
5.
Adjustable split follower cast iron or bronze
50
gland.
51
52
D. Mechanical Seals:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11060-3
01
1. Provide as specified in the narrow -scope pump
01
02
sections.
02
03
2. Provide rotating balanced O-ring type.
03
04
3. Provide oil lubrication - cooling with oil
04
05-
reservoir.
05
06
4. Materials:
06
07
a. Metal parts except springs: 316 stainless
07
08
steel.
08
09
b. Springs: Hastelloy C.
09
10
C. Seal faces: Unfilled carbon graphite versus
10
11
silica -free Grade 99.5 ceramic.
11
12
d. Elastomers: Viton.
12
13
13
14
2.03
FABRICATION
14
15
15
16
A.
Pump Support:
16
17
1. Design base to support weight of drive, shafting
17
18
and pump.
18
19
2. Comply with HI vibration limitations.
19
20
3. Mount horizontal pump, motor and coupling on
20
21
single piece drip lip type baseplate.
21
22
4. Mount vertical pumps on single piece pedestal
22
23
baseplate.
23
24
5. Fabricate to withstand all operating loads
24
25
transmitted from the pump and drive.
25
26
26
27
2.04
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
27
28
28
29
A.
If specifically required in the individual pump
29
30
specification sections, provide factory tests:
30
31
1. All units:
31
32
a. Hydrostatic test at 150 percent of shutoff
32
33
head for a minimum of 5 minutes.
33
34
2. Adjustable speed units:
34
35
a. Head (FT) verses flow (gpm) pump curves: (1)
35
36
Maximum, minimum and two equally spaced
36
37
intermittent speeds. (2) Efficiencies along
37
38
each curve. (3) Brake horsepower along each
38
39
curve.
39
40
3. Constant speed units:
40
41
a. Head (FT) versus flow (gpm) pump curves: (1)
41
42
Efficiencies along curve. (2) Brake
42
43
horsepower along each curve.
43
44
4. Results certified by a registered professional
44
45
engineer.
45
46
46
47
B.
Statically and dynamically balance each pump per HI
47
48
standards.
48
49
49
50
50
51
PART
3 - EXECUTION
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
11060-4
3.01 INSTALLATION
O1
02
A. See Section 11005.
03
04
B. Submersible Units:
05
1. Assemble connecting piping with gaskets in place
06
and minimum of four bolts per joint installed and
07
tightened. Test alignment by loosening flange
08
bolts to see if there is any change in
09
relationship of piping flange with equipment
10
connecting flange. Realign as necessary, install
11
flange bolts and make equipment connection.
12
2. Field paint units as defined in Section 09905.
13
3. Provide pressure gage on discharge of all pumps
14
and on suction of all non -submersible units.
15
16
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
17
18
A. Provide services of equipment manufacturer's field
19
service representative(s) to:
20
1. Inspect equipment covered by these
21
Specifications.
22
2. Supervise pre -start adjustments and installation
23
checks.
24
3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform
25
operational checks.
26
4. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's
27
equipment has been installed properly, started up
28
and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel.
29
5. Instruct Owner's personnel for the specified
30
minimum number of hours at jobsite per Section
31
01060 on operation and maintenance of each of
32
following pumping equipment:
33
34
END OF SECTION
35
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11063-1
01 93G02 SECTION 11063
02
03 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: HORIZONTAL END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL
04
05
06
PART
1 - GENERAL
07
O8
1.01
SUMMARY
09
10
A.
Section Includes:
11
1. Horizontal end suction centrifugal pumps at
12
non -potable water plant.
13
14
B.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily
15
limited to:
16
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract
17
Forms, and Conditions of the Contract.
18
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
19
3. Section 11060 - Pumping Equipment: Basic
20
Requirements.
21
4. Section 01650 - System Start Up
22
23
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
24
25
A.
Referenced Standards:
26
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):
27
a. Steel Products Manual.
28
2. American Society for Testing and Materials
29
(ASTM) :
30
a. A48, Standard Specification For Gray Iron
31
Castings.
32
33
B.
See Section 11060.
34
C.
Qualifications:
35
1. Pump manufacturer shall furnish a qualified field
36
representative to inspect all pumps installed
37
pursuant to this Section. Field representative
38
shall advise the Contractor and Owner during
39
startup as specified in Section 01650.
40
41
1.03
SUBMITTALS
42
43
A.
Shop Drawings:
44
1. Requirements in Section 11060.
45
46
B.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
47
1. See Section 01340.
48
49
50
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
` 51
52
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
O8,
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
'2 3
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11063-2
01
01
02
A.
Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
02
03
the following manufacturers are acceptable:
03
04
1. Self -priming centrifugal pumps:
04
05
a. Gorman Rupp.
05
06
b. Crane.
06
07
c. Crown.
07
08
d. ITT Marlow.
08
09
09
10
B.
Submit requests for substitution in accordance with
10
11
Specification Section 01640.
11
12
12
13
2.02
MATERIALS
13
14
14
15
A.
Non -potable water pumps:
15
16
1. Pump volute casing: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Grade 30.
16
17
2. Impeller: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Grade 30 or
17
18
ductile iron, Grade 60-40-18.
18
19
3. Cover plate: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Grade 30.
19
20
4. Wear plate: Steel, AISI 1015 or cast iron, Grade 30.
20
21
5. Shaft: Steel, AISI 4140.
21
22
6. Shaft sleeves: Stainless steel, AISI 304.
22
23
23
24
2.03
EQUIPMENT
24
25
25
26
A.
Performance and Configuration Requirements:
26
27
1. Non -potable water self -priming pumps:
27
28
a. Design condition: 600 gpm at 40 FT TDH.
28
29
b. Shutoff condition: 70 FT TDH.
29
30
C. Pump configuration: Horizontal with
30
31
baseplate.
31
32
d. Maximum pump speed: 1750 rpm.
32
33
e. Max. motor horsepower: 10.
33
34
f. Drive type: Constant speed.
34,
35
g. Drive configuration: Flexible coupled.
35
36
h. Minimum solids passage: 1 IN.
36
37
i. Suction size: 6 IN DIA minimum.
37
38
j. Discharge size: 6 IN DIA minimum.
38
39
39
40
2.04
ACCESSORIES
40
41
41
42
A.
See Section 11060.
42
43
1. Provide mechanical shaft seal with oil reservoir.
43
44
44
45
2.05
FABRICATION
45
46
46
47
A.
General:
47
46
1. Equip with removable cover plates allowing
46
49
complete access to pump interior.
49
50
2. Fit with replaceable wear plates.
50
51
3. Assure entire rotating assembly including
51
52
bearings, shaft seal, and impeller may be removed
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11063-3
01
as a unit without disturbing pump volute or
01
02
piping.
02
03
03
04
B.
Impeller:
04
05
1. Two or three -vane, semi -open, non -clog type with
05
06
integral pump out vanes on the back shroud.
06
07
2. Provide for external adjustment of the impeller
07
08
to the wear plate.
08
09
09
10
C.
Shaft and Sleeve:
10
11
1. Size shaft to transmit full drive output.
11
12
2. Accurately machine and construct shaft.
12
13
3. Contain shaft within bearing pedestal of ample
13
14
size to contain ball thrust bearing and radial
14
15
bearing of adequate size to withstand all imposed
15
16
loads.
16
17
4. Incorporate shaft sleeve to protect shaft from
17
18
pumped liquid.
18
19
19
20
D.
Bearings:
20
21
1. Oil lubricated.
21
22
22
23
E.
Rotation:
23
24
1. Pump rotation to conform with piping arrangement
24
25
shown on Drawings.
25
f
26
26
27"
2.06
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
27
28
28
29
A.
All Pumps:
29
30
1. Hydrostatically test volute at 150 percent of
30
31
shut off head.
31
32
a. Furnish documentation of test.
32
33
33
34
B.
Factory test one pump of each service category:
34
35
1. Measure head (FT) versus flow (gpm).
35
36
2. Furnish characteristic curve and include
36
37
efficiency and horsepower.
37
38
3. Certify curves by registered professional
38
39
engineer.
39
40
40
41
2.07
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
41
42
42
43
A.
Extra Materials:
43
44
1. Furnish the Owner the following extra parts for
44
45
each pump service category:
45
46
a. Shaft sleeve: One set.
46
47
b. Bearings: One set.
47
48
c. Gaskets: One full set.
48
49
d. Spare mechanical seal: One set.
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
PART
3 - EXECUTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11063-4'
O1
02 3.01 INSTALLATION
03
04 A. Comply with requirements of Sections 11060 and 01650.
05
06 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
07
08 A. See Section 11060.
09
10 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility.
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11066-1
01
95G19
SECTION 11066
01
02
02
03
PACKAGE HYDROPNEUMATIC PRESSURE SYSTEM
03
04
04
05
05
06
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
07
08
1.01
SUMMARY
08
09
09
10
A.
Section Includes:
10
11
1. Hydropneumatic pressure system for maintenance
11
12
and gate house facilities.
12
13
13
14
B.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily
14
15
limited to:
15
16
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract
16
17
Forms, and Conditions of the Contract.
17
18
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
18
19
3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.
19
20
4. Section 11060 - Pump Equipment: Basic
20
21
Requirements.
21
22
5. Section 15060 - Pipe and Fittings: Basic
22
23
Requirements.
23
24
6. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements.
24
25
25
26
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
26
I�
27
27
28
A.
See Section 11060.
28
29
29
30
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
30
31
31
32
A.
Provide Package Hydropneumatic Pressure System:
32
33
1. Integrated operating system.
33
34
2. Single source coordination responsibility for
34
35
tank, controls and sensors through the system
35
36
supplier.
36
37
3. System to include but not necessarily be limited
37
38
to:
38
39
a. Plain steel tank, minimum volume = 420
39
40
gallons, nominal.
40
41
b. Level and pressure controls sufficient to
41
42
maintain minimum 40 psi (max. 60 psi).
42
43
c. Intake and discharge piping.
43
44
44
45
1.04
SUBMITTALS
45
46
46
47
A.
Shop.Drawings:
47
48
1. See Section 11060.
48
49
2. Product technical data including:
49
50
a. Furnish specific electrical ladder, or
50
51
elementary wiring diagrams verifying
51
(
52
interlock arrangements between individual
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11066-2
valves, sensors and air level controls.
Acknowledge assigned or designated tag
numbers.
b. Furnish water system isometric drawing
acknowledging valves, piping, equipment, and
related work.
C. Supply receiving tank tapping diagrams.
3. Certifications.
4. Test reports.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
the following manufacturers or suppliers are
acceptable:
1. Hydronics.
2. Oslin Nation.
3. Syncroflo.
B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with
Specification Section 01640.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Performance and Configuration Requirements:
1. Hydropneumatic system shall be designed to supply
a minimum of 100 gal between high and low
pressure settings (60 to 40 PSI).
2. Motorized valve shall open at 40 PSI and close at
60 PSI.
3. Make up air shall be added to tank only at full
level.
B. Equipment:
1. Tank:
a. Provide nominal 420 GAL cast iron or
fabricated steel tank:
1) 4 OZ hot -dipped galvanized coating.
b. 1 IN tap for suction.
C. 1 IN DIA bottom drain tap.
d. Tap as required for level sensors and air add
lines.
2. Level Control and Valves:
a. Tank with integrally mounted probe -type
non -modulating, two position on -off control
with required connections to system controls.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11066-3
01
b. Electrical blow in solenoid valve to add air
02
pressure as required after tank high level is
03
reached.
04
C. Observe Drawings for specific piping and
05
valve details.
06
d. Provide and install Consolidated Electric
07
A600 probe type, air add, electric valve
O8
activating controls or approved equal.
09
10
D. Provide piping in accordance with Section 15060.
11
12
E. Provide valves in accordance with Section 15100.
13
14
F. Miscellaneous Hardware and Spare Parts:
15
1. Machine bolts, nuts, and cap screws of high
16
strength application with hex heads. Do not use
17
hardware requiring special tools or wrenches.
18
2. Stainless steel data plate:
19
a. Attach to tank.
20
b. Include permanently stamped information on
21
data plate consisting of:
22
1) Manufacturers name.
23
2) Tank size and type.
24
3) Serial number.
25
4) Capacity and pressure rating.
26
5) Other pertinent information.
27
28
29
PART 3 - EXECUTION
30
31
3.01 INSTALLATION
32
33
A. See Section 11060.
34
35
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
36
37
A. See Section 11060.
38
39
END OF SECTION
W
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
11654-1
`
01
90H30
SECTION 11654
01
02
02
03
SHOP EMERGENCY AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
03
04
04
05
05
06
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
07
08
1.01
SUMMARY
08
09
09
10
A.
Section Includes:
10
11
1. Shop equipment and furnishings; emergency and
11
12
safety equipment:
12
13
a. Emergency and safety equipment.
13
14
b. Engine -driven pump(s).
14
15
c. Engine -driven ventilation blower(s).
15
16
d. Engine -driven generator(s).
16
17
e. Engine -driven air compressor(s).
17
18
f. Oil -fired heater(s).
18
19
g. First aid and safety equipment.
19
20
h. Safety tools (non -sparking, non-magnetic).
20
21
21
22
B.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily
22
23
limited to:
23
24
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract
24
25
Forms, and Conditions of the Contract.
25
r`.
26
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
26
27
3. Section 10400 - Identification, Stenciling, and
27
28
Tagging Systems.
28
29
4. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.
29
30
30
31
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
31
32
32
33
A.
Referenced Standards:
33
34
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
34
35
a. { ), {
35
36
Title).
36
37
2. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FMRC):
37
38
a. { ), (
38
39
Title).
39
40
40
41
B.
Standards:
41
42
1. Manufacturer or supplier model or catalog numbers
42
43
are provided to establish the minimum quality and
43
44
functional requirements.
44
45
45
46
1.03
SUBMITTALS
46
47
47
48
A.
Shop Drawings:
48
49
1. See Section 01340.
49
50
2. Product technical data including:
50
51
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet
51
52
requirements of standards referenced.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11654-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
01
c. Technical information covering the equipment
02
furnished.
03
04
B.
Warranties: Provide copies of equipment warranties
05
and list of service sources.
06
07
C.
Submit all system components information in a single
08
coordinated transmittal. Partial submittals will not
09
be accepted.
10
11
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
12
1. See Section 01340.
13
14
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
15
16
A.
Delivery and Inventory: Notify the Engineer at least
17
30 days prior to intended date of delivery of
18
emergency and safety equipment to the facility. Upon
19
delivery, work with the Owner's Designated
20
Representative to inventory and check operation of
21
the delivered material. Remove from the Project site
22
any items found to be damaged, broken, or not in
23
conformance with these Specifications, and replaced
24
at no cost to the Owner.
25
26
27
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
28
29
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
30
31
A.
Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
32
the following manufacturers are acceptable:
33
1. Engine -driven pumps:
34
a. Homelite Textron.
35
b. Gorman -Rupp.
36
2. Engine -driven ventilation blowers:
37
a. Homelite Textron.
38
b.
39
3. Engine -driven generators:
40
a. Homelite Textron.
41
b. Onan.
42
4. Engine -driven air compressors:
43
a. Ingersol Rand.
44
b. Campbell Hausfeld.
45
S. Oil -fired heaters:
46
a. John Deere.
47
b.
48
6. First aid and safety equipment:
49
a. Mine Safety Appliance Co.(MSA).
50
b.
51
7. Safety tools (non -sparking, non-magnetic):
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
11654-3
01
a. Ampco Metal.
02
b. Cabot Corporation (Berylco).
03
04
2.02 MINIMUM DESIGN CRITERIA
05
06
A. Engine -Driven Pumps:
07
1. Centrifugal trash pump. Supply one portable
08
engine -driven trash pump same as or equal to
09
Homelite Model 160TP4. Provide unit complete
10
with heavy-duty 16 HP, 4 cycle, gasoline engine
11
drive, suction strainer, and heavy duty pneumatic
12
tired dolly. Pump to have 4 IN suction and
13
discharge and be capable of pumping 600 gpm at
14
120 FT total head. Provide unit with 25 FT of 4
15
IN rubber suction hose and 50 FT of 4 IN mill
16
discharge hose. Provide all fittings necessary
17
for complete ready -to -use unit.
18
2. Diaphragm pump. Supply one portable
19
engine -driven diaphragm pump same as or equal to
20
Homelite Model 111DP3. Provide unit complete
21
with heavy-duty 3 HP, 4 cycle, gasoline engine
22
drive, suction strainer and semi -pneumatic tired
23
dolly. Pump to have 3 IN suction and discharge
24
and be capable of pumping 80 gpm at 50 FT of
25
total head. Provide unit with 25 FT of 3 IN
26
rubber suction hose and 50 FT of 3 IN mill
27
discharge hose. Provide all fittings necessary
28
for complete ready -to -use unit.
29
30
B. Engine -Driven ventilation Blower:
31
1. Supply one portable engine -driven ventilation
32
blower same as or equal to Homelite-111B.
33
a. 3 HP, 4 cycle, gasoline engine.
34
b. variable fresh -air output: 500 to 1428 cfm.
35
2. Provide unit with one 8 IN x 15 FT collapsible
36
duct, one collapsible duct carrier, one 8 IN x 15
37
FT polyester.duct and necessary duct clamps.
38
39
C. Emergency Engine -Driven Generator:
40
1.
41
42
D. Emergency Engine -Driven Air Compressor:
43
1. Supply one portable engine -driven air compressor
44
same as or equal to Ingersol Rand 3B50G30.
45
Supply unit complete with:
46
a. 5 HP, 4 cycle, gasoline engine.
47
b. 30 GAL ASME and National board rated and
48
labeled air tank.
49
c. Compressor rated at 9.3 cfm at 90 psi and
50
10.0 cfm at 40 psi. v-twin cylinder, single
51
stage.
52
d. Provide completely portable unit with
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11654-4
01
semi -pneumatic tires and T-handle.
01
02
02
03
E. Emergency Oil -Fired Heater:
03
04
1.
Supply one portable oil -fired heater same as or
04
05
equal to John Deere Model A350.
05
06
a. Heating capacity: 350,000 BTU.
06
07
b. Air flow: 1600 cfm.
07
08
C. Fuel: Kerosene or #1 fuel oil.
08
09
d. Power: 120 V AC, 60 HZ.
09
10
e. Design features: Self-lubricating air
10
11
compressor; stainless steel combustion
11
12
chamber; low-pressure siphon type fuel
12
13
system; flame out protection with manual
13
14
reset.
14
15
f. Temperature control: Integral room
15
16
thermostat.
16
17
17
18
F. First Aid and Safety Equipment:
18
19
1.
MSA-12038: Industrial first aid kit Type D, 36
19
20
unit; one each.
20
21
2.
MSA-460236: Chemical splash, goggle with yellow
21
22
rim and hydron coated lens, foam filter; two
22
23
each.
23
24
3.
MSA-456574: Sightguard faceshield assembly with
24
25
seatband and sparkguard; two each.
25
26
4.
MSA-456576: Sightguard visors for faceshield
26
27
assembly, 0.040 IN clear; 4 each.
27
28
S.
MSA-95635: Mark IV ear muffs; two each.
28
29
6.
MSA-85267: Wrist type rescue harness; two each.
29
30
7.
MSA-74653: Lowering/suspension harness; one
30
31
each.
31
32
8.
MSA-89220: "Explosimeter" combustible gas
32
33
indicator complete with carrying straps. Provide
33
34
unit with following accessories; one each:
34
35
a. 5 FT sampling tube for combustible gas
35
36
indicator.
36
37
b. Tube: 3 FT hollow prove for combustible gas
37
38
indicator.
38
39
c. Charcoal cartridges for combustible gas
39
40
indicator.
40
41
d. Calibration test kit for combustible gas
41
42
indicator, aerosol type.
42
43
9.
MSA-468841: Oxygen indicator, MSA Model 245R.
43
44
Provide unit with following accessories; one
44
45
each:
45
46
a. Tube sampling adapter.
46
47
b. 5 FT sampling line with couplings.
47
48
c. One replacement cell.
46
49
d. One replacement battery.
49
50
10.
MSA-474000: Minigard II gas indicator
50
51
(combustible gas and oxygen). Provide unit with
51
52
following accessories; one each:
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase-1 Construction
11654-5
01
a.
Single unit charger.
02
b.
Aspirator bulb with tubing.
03
c.
Sampling and calibration adapter.
04
d.
10 FT sampling line with couplings.
05
e.
3 FT plastic sampling probe.
06
f.
Complete calibration kit.
07
11. MSA-470600:
Mini H(2)S hydrogen sulfide
08
indicator.
Provide unit with following
09
accessories;
one each:
10
a.
Remote sampling adapter.
11
b.
10 FT sampling line.
12
C.
Calibration check kit complete with gas
13
cylinder.
14
d.
Spare battery.
15
12. MSA-476152:
Portable indicator/alarm for
16
oxygen, hydrogen sulfide, combustible gas (Model
17
361).
Provide unit with following accessories;
18
one
each:
19
a.
Charger: 120 V, 60 HZ.
20
b.
10 FT sampling hose with couplings.
21
C.
3 FT plastic sampling probe.
22
d.
Calibration check kit complete with gases
23
required for full instrument calibration.
24
25
G. Safety
Tools (Non -Sparking, Non -Magnetic):
26
1. General:
27
a.
Provide only tools produced from non-ferrous
'
28
alloys approved for non -sparking use by the
29
United States Government and Factory Mutual
30
Research Corporation (FMRC):
31
2. Tool
kit, Ampco M-50. Provide tool kit
32
consisting
of following items:
33
a.
One hexagon wrecking bar: 36 IN oa x 7/8 IN.
34
b.
One adjustable wrench: 10 IN.
35
c.
One adjustable wrench: 12 IN.
36
d.
One adjustable wrench: 15 IN.
37
e.
One ball peen hammer: 1 LB.
38
f.
One ball peen hammer: 2 LB.
39
g.
Three scaling hammers: 1 LB.
40
h.
One sledge hammer: 5 LB.
41
i.
Three deck scrapers: 12 IN overall.
42
j.
Three scraper blades: 4 IN wide.
43
k.
Three ship scrapers: 4 IN triangular blade.
44
1.
One standard screwdriver: 8 IN blade.
45
m.
One standard screwdriver: 12 IN blade.
46
n.
Two scoop shovels: D-handle.
47
o.
One cold chisel: 5/8 x 6-1/2 x 3/4 IN.
48
p.
One cold chisel: 7/8 x 8 x 1 IN.
49
q.
One pipe wrench: 10 IN.
50
r.
One pipe wrench: 14 IN.
51
s.
One pipe wrench: 18 IN.
52
t.
One wood case.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
11654-6
01
3. Tool
kit, Ampco M-49. Provide took kit .
02
consisting of the following items; one each:
03
a.
12-point box wrench:
5/16 x 3/8 IN.
04
b.
12-point box wrench:
7/16 x 1/2 IN.
05
C.
12-point box wrench:
9/16 x 5/8 IN.
06
d.
12-point box wrench:
3/4 x 7/8 IN.
07
e.
Phillips screwdriver: 7-1/2 IN.
08
f.
Screwdriver: 9-3/4
IN.
09
g.
Adjustable wrench:
10 IN.
10
h.
Combination pliers:
6-1/2 IN.
11
i.
Combination pliers:
8 IN.
12
j.
Groove joint pliers:
9-1/2 IN.
13
k.
Knife: 3-1/8 IN blade.
14
1.
Putty knife: 7-1/2
IN.
15
M.
Claw hammer: #2.
16
n.
Pipe wrench: 14 IN.
17
o.
Shoe handle brush:
3 x 8 IN.
18
p.
12 IN deck scraper:
1-7/8 IN blade.
19
q.
Metal box: 6 x 6 x
18 IN.
20
21
22 PART 3 - EXECUTION
23
24 3.01 INSTALLATION
25
26 A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's
27 instructions.
28
29 B. Comply with Section 11005.
30
31 C. Comply with Section 10400 for (identification and
32 tagging) (and for) (warning or caution signs).
33
34 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
12340-1
01 7F20, 7K05 SECTION 12340
02
03 ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK (AC) PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED
04
05 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07 1.01 DESCRIPTION
08
09 A. Work includes:
10 1. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
11 services for laminate faced architectural
12 casework (AC) as indicated in the A7 series
13 drawings,.plans and elevations, both plastic
14 laminate and wood veneer faced, standard and
15 custom configurations as indicated.
16 2. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
17 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
18 provide supplementary or miscellaneous items,
19 appurtenances and devices incidental to or
20 necessary for a sound, secure and complete
21 installation, including, but not limited to
22 accompanying countertops and brackets, nurse
23 stations and other surrounds.
24 4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
25 5. Architectural casework (AC) elevations as
26 indicated in the Contract Documents are covered
27 in this section.
28
29 B. See drawings for types of countertops required.
30
31 C. Definitions:
32 1. Refer to Fabrication requirements in Part II of
33 this specification.
34 a. Exposed surfaces: Surfaces visible after
35 installation.
36 b. Concealed surfaces: Surfaces not visible
37 after installation.
38 C. Semi exposed surfaces: Surfaces not meeting
39 the definition of exposed or concealed,
40 including the interiors of drawer and door
41 components.
42
43 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
44
45 A. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer, or
46 manufacturer's authorized representative.
47
48 B. Construction details, fastening, tolerances and
49 workmanship: Architectural Woodworking Institute
50 (AWI) Premium grade standards, with exceptions
51 indicated.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-2
O1 1.03 SUBMITTALS
02
03
A.
Shop drawings:
04
1. Plan of casework at 1/8 IN = 12 IN or larger.
05
2. Elevations of casework at 1/4 IN = 1 FT or
06
larger.
07
08
09
B.
Contract closeout information:
10
1. Operating and maintenance data.
11
2. Warranty.
12
13
1.04
JOB CONDITIONS
14
15
A.
Verify dimensions at site.
16
17
B.
Verify locations of items furnished in other
18
sections.
19
20
C.
If necessary to vary from arrangement indicated
21
because of structural, mechanical, electrical or
22
other considerations, make such variations only after
23
approval of Architect.
24
25
1.05
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
26
27
A.
Store in dry, weathertight, ventilated, temperature
28
and humidity controlled spaces.
29
30
B.
Stack to provide air circulation.
31
32
C.
Time delivery and installation to avoid delaying
33
progress of other work.
34
35
1.06
WARRANTY
36
37
A.
Manufacturer to provide 5 year warranty against
38
defects in materials and workmanship, such as but not
39
limited to delamination, swelling, or warping.
40
41
42
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
43
44
2.01
GENERAL
45
46
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
47
1. Plastic laminate and wood veneer faced casework:
48
a. TMI Systems Design.; Dickinson, ND
49
(701/225-6716).
50
b. LSI.of America.; Minneapolis, MN
51
(612/559-4664).
52
c. Calmar Manufacturing.(Tru-Bilt); Calmar, IA
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-3
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
(319/562-3261).
d. Subject to compliance to the Contract
Documents, the following are approved as an
acceptable optional manufacturer:
e. The successful bidder, no later than the shop
drawing submittal, shall provide the
following:
(1) Sample of finished base cabinet unit, 18
IN wide minimum, with one drawer, door
and shelf, complete with hardware
conforming to requirements.
(2) Catalog of standard units (detailing
construction and assembly of components.
(3) If not acceptable, construct additional
sample cabinets.
(4) Sample cabinet constitutes standard of
quality for actual construction.
(5) Maintain sample at job office during
construction, as a basis for Architect's
acceptance of the remainder of the work.
2. Plastic laminate:
a. Base:
(1) Formica.; Wayne, NJ (201/890-9400).
(2) Nevamar.; Odenton, MD (301/569-5000).
(3) Wilson Art.; Columbus, OH
(614/876-1515).
3. Plastic overlay panel products:
a. Base:
(1) Simpson Timber.; Shelton, WA
(206-426-3381) .
(2) Selply.; White City, OR (503-826-2239).
(3) Casework Manufacturer.
4. Cabinet hardware:
a. Base:
(1) Accuride;-Santa Fe Springs, CA
(213/903-0226) .
(2) Epco; Flint, MI (313/767-2050).
(3) Hafele; Archdale, NC (919/431-3831).
(4) Julius Blum.; Stanley, NC
(800/438-6788).
(5) Knape & Vogt; Grand Rapids, MI
(616/459-3311) .
(6) Grant; West Hyack, NY (914/358-4400).
(7) National Lock.; Mauldin, SC
(803/297-6655).
(8) Simplex Access Controls.;
(919/725-1331). Winston-Salem, NC.
(9) Stanley Hardware; New Britain, CT
(800/854-7762).
(10) Stylmark; Minneapolis, MN
(800/328-2495).
(11) HEWI; Lancaster, PA (717/293-3270).
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
12340-4
01
(12)
LSI; Minneapolis, MN (612/559-4664).
02
(13)
TMI Systems Design.; (701/225-6716)
03
Dickinson, ND.
04
(14)
Rockford Process Control.;
05
(815/966-2000) Rockford, IL.
06
(15)
U.S. Futaba.; Santa Ana, CA
07
(800/821-4007).
08
(16)
Rohm & Haas, Philadelphia, PA
09
(215/592-3000).
10
(17)
Weber Knapp Company, Jamestown, NY
11
(716/484-9135).
12
(18)
Corbin Cabinet Lock Div.; New Britain,
13
CT (203/229-6199).
14
(19)
Schlage Lock.; San Francisco, CA
15
(415/468-1942) .
16
(20)
Olympus Lock.; Seattle, WA
17
(800/525-0954)
18
(21)
Sugatsune America, (Lamp); Carson, CA.
19
(800/562-5267).
20
(22)
Bull Dog Lock.; Chicago, IL.
21
(312/561-0821).
22
(23)
Colson Caster Corporation; Jonesboro,
23
AR. (800/643-5515).
24
(24)
PX Industries; Farmingdale, NY.
25
(800/225-0396)
26
S. Stains
and varnishes:
27
a. Base:
28
(1)
Pratt and Lambert.; Buffalo, NY
29
(716/873-6000).
30
b. Optional:
31
(1)
Sherwin-Williams.; Cleveland, OH
32
(800/336-1110).
33
(2)
Glidden Paint; Cleveland, OH
34
(216/344-8206).
35
(3)
Fuller -O'Brien Paints.; (415/761-2300)
36
San Francisco, CA.'
37
6. Plastic
laminate countertops:
36
a. Base:
39
(1)
VT Industries.; Holstein, IA
40
(712/368-4381).
41
7. Solid surface
material:
42
a. Base:
43
(1)
EI DuPont De Nemours; (Corian).
44
b. Optional:
45
(1)
Formica. (Surell); Wayne, NJ
46
(201/890-9400).
47
(2)
Nevamar. (Fountainhead); Odenton, MD
48
(301/569-5000).
49
(3)
Wilson Art. (Gibraltar); Columbus, OH
50
(614/876-1515).
51
(4)
Avonite,; Belen, NM. (800/866-8324).
52
8. Wood moulding:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase'1 Construction
12340-5
01
a. Base:
01
02
(1) Southern Architectural Woodwork,
02
03
Columbia, SC.
03
04
(2) Custom Woodworks Limited, Sioux City,
04
05
IA.
05
06
9. Acoustical wall covering:
06
07
a. Base:
07
08
(1) Eurotex, Philadelphia, PA
08
09
(800/523-0731).
09
10
10. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply
10
11
with Section 00440.
11
12
12
13
2.02 MATERIALS
13
14
14
15
A. Plastic laminate faced casework:
15
16
1. Fixed factory built particleboard core casework
16
17
finished on exterior with high pressure laminate.
17
18
Interior of plastic laminate faced units with
18
19
plastic overlay. Provide units complete with
19
20
hardware, countertops and subbases, in sizes and
20
21
configurations indicated. Refer to Fabrication
21
22
requirements in Part II of this specification.
22
23
a. Style:
23
24
(1) Reveal overlay, with square cornered
24
25
doors and drawer fronts overlapping case
25
26
27
front with minimum reveal at plastic
laminate casework.
26
27
28
(2) Plastic laminate doors and drawer fronts
28
29
shall be edged with 3 mm PVC banding,
29
30
machine applied using waterproof hot melt
30
31
adhesive. Machine profile exposed edges
31
32
with 1/8 IN radius.
32
33
b. Jointing:
33
34
(1) Cabinet body construction shall be 3/4
34
35
IN thick particleboard core joined with
35
36
10 mm diameter industrial grade hardwood
36
37
dowels, securely glued and clamped under
37
38
pressure during assembly.
38
39
39
40
B. Plastic laminate: NEMA LD3-1991 high pressure
40
41
laminate.
41
42
1. Countertops and backsplashes, and their edges:
42
43
Grade-GP50, 0.050 IN thick.
43
44
2. Formed surfaces: Post form Grade-PF42.
44
45
3. Other exposed surfaces: Grade-GP28, 0.028 IN
45
46
thick.
46
47
4. Provide backer sheet on each plastic laminated
47
48
item.
48
49
a. Semi -exposed cabinet liner: Grade-CL20,
49
50
0.020 IN thick; color to match plastic
50
51
overlay.
51
52
b. Concealed backer sheet: Grade-BK20, 0.020 IN
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-6
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
thick.
5. Color: as selected by Architect from laminate
manufacturer's full line.
a. See color schedule for selections (Section
09000) .
b. Allow for 5 different cabinet face
5 different countertop colors.
6. Color of laminate on countertop edges:
surface of the item.
7. Color of other plastic laminate edges:
to match plastic overlay, as selected
Architect.
8. See "Fabrication -Case Components"
requiring plastic laminate finish.
colors and
Same as
Black or
by
for components
C. Plastic overlay: Resin impregnated 80 gram paper
overlay, glued and press cured onto substrate.
1. Conform to NEMA LD3.3 wear resistance Grade-GP28
requirements for "General Purpose" decorative
board (not "Light Duty" liner type).
2. Finish: Satin.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard color line of dove grey,
frosty white and light beige.
4. Material: Polyester or Melamine; phenolic resin
may be used on concealed surfaces.
5. Substrates: As indicated below; see
"Fabrication- Case Components" for components
requiring plastic overlay finish.
D. Hardwood:
1. Solid, S4S.
2. Type: Quarter sawn red oak.
3. Grade: AWI Premium grade.
E. Particleboard: ANSI-A208.1, mat formed, 45 PCF
density.
1. Type 1-M-3 for general use.
F. Wood moulding:
1. Type: Red oak for transparent finishes.
2. Type: Softwood or birch for opaque finishes.
3. Grade: AWI Premium grade.
4. Sizes and Profile: As detailed on drawings.
G. Varnish and stain:
1. Finish components in the factory to AWI finish
system TR-4 conversion varnish with a gloss level
15 degrees to 20 degrees.
2. Color of finished components will be determined
by veneer selection, designer supplied color chip
and/or finish sample from wood sample.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-7
01
-01
02
H. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Meet or exceed ANSI
02
03
1037-87. Exterior grade, 48 PCF density,
03
04
formaldehyde free.
04
05
1. Base: Medite Corporation "MEDEX"; Medford, OR.
05
06
(800/ 676-3339).
06
07
a. Core material for counters, backsplash, and
07
08
sidesplashes with sinks.
08
09
09
10
I. Plywood: PS1-83, softwood plywood, Grade-NN.
10
11
11
12
J. PVC edge banding (doors and drawer fronts and
12
13
removable panels):
13
14
1. Machine applied with waterproof hot -melt
14
15
adhesive.
15
16
a. Thickness: 3 mm.
16
17
b. Color: As selected by Architect, to match
17
18
laminate. Allow for 5 different colors.
18
19
19
20
K. PVC edge banding (case body & components):
20
21
1. Machine applied with waterproof hot -melt
21
22
adhesive.
22
23
a. Thickness: 1 mm.
23
24
b. Color: To match case, as selected by
24
25
Architect.
25
26
26
27
L. PVC edge banding (all shelves in plastic laminate
27
28
clad units) :
28
29
1. Machine applied with waterproof hot -melt _
29
30
adhesive.
30
31
a. Thickness: 1 mm.
31
32
b. Color: To match case, as selected by
32
33
Architect.
33
34
C. Shelves: Apply to all 4 edges.
34
35
35
36
2.03 HARDWARE
36
37
37
38
A. Hardware for hinged doors:
38
39
1. Hinges:
39
40
a. Institutional (hospital tip), 5 knuckle, wrap
40
41
around type (screwed to back of door and side
41
42
of divider/end), with barrel only projecting
42
43
beyond face of cabinet. (used on plastic
43
44
laminated faced units).
44
45
(1) Not less than 2-3/4 IN long.
45
46
(2) Minimum 8 screws per hinge.
_ 46
47
(3) Shall pass ANSI/BHMA-A156.9 Grade-1
47
48
requirements.
48
49
(4) For doors up to 48 IN high: 2 hinges.
49
50
(5) For doors over 48 IN high: 3 hinges.
50
51
(6) Finish: Epoxy Powder Coat.
51
52
(7) Color: Architect to select, to match
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-8
01
PVC edging selected.
02
2.
Pulls:
03
a. Wire type (for use on plastic laminate faced
04
doors/drawers).
05
(1) 4 IN centers.
06
(2) Finish: Epoxy Powder Coat.
07
(3) Colors Architect to select, to match
08
PVC edging selected.
09
3.
Catches: Magnetic, adjustable, 6-7 LB pull; or
10
roller type; provide 40 LB unit on doors over 4
11
SF.
12
4.
Locks: Provide as noted on architectural
13
drawings.
14
5.
Elbow catch: Provide at doors with locks.
15
6.
Door stops: Metal slide type with positive stop.
16
7.
Door Bumpers: Provide on backside of doors.
17
18
B. Hardware for drawers:
19
1.
Slides:
20
a. 100 LB capacity, nylon wheels/rollers,
21
stainless steel or polymer ball bearings,
22
positive closing and pull out stops, drawer
23
removable without use of tools; file drawers:
24
Full extension.
25
b. File drawers: Full extension.
26
c. Optional drawer slides: Blum Metabox System.
27
2.
Pulls:
28
a. Same as door pulls specified above.
29
3.
Lock: Provide as noted on architectural
30
drawings.
31
4.
For file drawers:
32
a. File drawers shall include a pair of 14 GA
33
steel pendaflex file suspension rails, epoxy
34
coated in dove grey, frosty white or light
35
beige to match drawer body color.
36
37
C. Locks:
38
1.
Heavy duty institutional pin tumbler type; latch
39
or cam suitable for application.
40
a. Provide 2 keys for each lock.
41
b. Master key and grand master key as directed.
42
c. Finish: As selected by Architect.
43
d. Provide 20 extra locks.
44
2.
Cipher type:
45
a. Manufacturer: Simplex Access Controls.
46
b. Finish: Satin chrome.
47
C. Provide with no less than 2000 combinations.
48
49
D. Shelf supports (drilled hole type):
50
1.
Shall be injection molded polycarbonate, clear
51
color to blend with selected interior finish,
52
friction fit into cabinet end panels and vertical
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-9
01
dividers, readily adjustable on 1 1/4 IN centers.
02
Provide non -tip feature and allow for field
03
fixing of shelf if desired. Structural test
04
shall indicate loading of shelf to 1500 LBS, 375
05
LBS per support. No substitutions.
06
07
E.
Shelf supports (for wall mounted shelves):
08
1.
Finish: Enamel, Anochrome or anodized aluminum.
09
2.
Standards: Heavy duty slotted steel.
10
3.
Shelf brackets: Boltless, steel or aluminum,
11
shelf depths as indicated.
12
4.
Shelf rests: Anchor shelf to bracket.
13
14
F.
Clothes rod:
15
1.
Concealed locations: Chrome plated or stainless
16
steel tube, 1 IN diameter minimum, with supports
17
at 36 IN maximum spacing. Base: K-V 660SS with
18
764 and 766 flanges and 1195 supports. For
19
wardrobes less than 24 IN. Deep, use K-V KV1
20
ANO.
21
2.
Exposed locations: HEWI 33.2030.
22
23
G.
Coat
hook:
24
1.
Concealed locations: Match hooks in toilet
25
accessories spec (10800) single, double or
26
ceiling style as indicated.
27
2.
Exposed locations: HEWI 501.
28
29
H.
Catches for removable panels:
30
1.
Bull Dog flush recessed catch (4 per panel).
31
32
I.
Grommets for cords:
33
1.
Manufacturer: Doug Mockett & Company.
34
2.
Model: SG-3.
35
3.
Finish: Black or putty as selected by Architect.
36
4.
Provide cap with 5/6 IN cord slot.
37
5.
Provide as indicated on Drawings and at each
38
location with undercounter electrical or systems
39
outlet, cord drop location, and keyboard drawer
40
location.
41
42
2.04
FABRICATION - DEFINITIONS
43
44
A.
Definitions:
45
1.
Exposed surfaces: Surfaces visible when doors
46
and drawers are closed:
47
a. Door and drawer fronts, and their edges.
48
b. Exposed ends.
49
c. Bottom of wall case.
50
d. Countertop and backsplash and their exposed
51
edges.
52
e. Face of cabinet body not covered by doors or
West Texas Region Disposal"Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-10
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
drawer fronts.
f. Toe strip not to be covered by separate base.
g. Wall mounted adjustable shelves and their
edges.
h. Interior of open cabinets, including
shelving.
i. Interior of cabinets with glass doors.
2. Concealed surfaces: Surfaces not visible after
installation:
a. Solid top panels.
b. Security panels.
c. Locking rails.
3. Semi -exposed surfaces: Other surfaces not
exposed or concealed, and:
a. Interior of closed cabinets.
b. Top of wall and tall cases.
c. Drawers.
2.05 FABRICATION - PLASTIC LAMINATE CASE COMPONENTS
A. Finishes for non -fire -rated cabinets.
1. Exposed surfaces:
a. Plastic laminate.
2. Semi -exposed surfaces:
a. Plastic overlay.
3. Edges of doors and drawer fronts:
a. 3 mm PVC edge banding on laminate doors and
drawer fronts.
4. Edges of case body members:
a. 1-mm PVC edge banding.
5. Edges of shelves:
a. 1 mm PVC edge banding (4-sides).
B. Case body members with back exposed.
1. Sides, back, doors, and drawers:.
a. Particleboard with plastic overlay (1-side),
3/4 IN.
2. Semi -exposed members:
a. Particleboard with plastic overlay (2-sides),
3/4 IN.
3. Exposed edges of particleboard:
a. 1 mm PVC edge banding.
4. Top panels:
a. Particleboard with plastic overlay (2-sides),
3/4 IN.
5. Security panel:
a. Particleboard with plastic overlay (2-sides)
1/2 IN.
6. Drawer lock rails:
a. Particleboard with plastic overlay (2-sides)
3/4 IN.
7. Base:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-11
01
a. Plywood or particleboard, 3/4 IN.
f 02
b. Intermediate reinforcing 24 IN on O.C.
03
04
C.
Unexposed case back:
05
1. Particleboard with plastic overlay (2-side), 1/2
06
IN.
07
08
D.
Shelves:
09
1. Semi -exposed:
10
a. Particleboard, 3/4 IN.
11
b. Particleboard, 1 IN for over 30 IN. between
12
supports.
13
c. With plastic overlay (2-sides).
14
2. Exposed:
15
a. Particleboard, 3/4 IN.
16
b. Particleboard, 1 IN for over 30 IN between
17
supports.
18
c. With plastic laminate (2-sides).
19
20
E.
Doors: Doors not to exceed 25 IN in width.
21
22
F.
Drawers:
23
1. Sub -front, sides and back:
24
a. Particleboard with plastic overlay (2-side),
25
1/2 IN.
26
b. Exposed top edge drawer finished with 1 mm
27
PVC banding.
28
2. Bottom:
29
a. Particleboard with plastic overlay (2-side),
30
1/2 IN.
31
b. Over 18 IN wide provide intermediate
32
reinforcing rails.
33
34
G.
Case base: Integral or separate base for each unit.
35
36
H.
Small compartment dividers: 1/4 IN Clear acrylic
37
panel.
38
39
I.
Filler panels and scribe pieces:
40
1. Particleboard with plastic laminate exposed
41
surfaces, plastic overlay semi or concealed
42
surfaces, 3/4 IN.
43
44
2.06
FABRICATION - CONVENTIONAL JOINTING
45
46
A.
Case body:
47
1. Sides, dividers, bottom, and tops members:
48
a. Dowel with 10 mm fluted hardwood dowels.
49
Provide minimum of 6 dowels at each joint for
50
24 IN deep cabinets and a minimum of 4 dowels
51
for 12 IN deep cabinets.
f 52 b. Glue joints.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-12
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
2. Back:
a. Dado into sides, bottom, and top. Locate
dado 3/4 IN in from back face of cabinet or
on -set type, lead in at finished ends,
screwed at the top and bottom, stapled at the
sides.
b. Glue joints.
3. Compartment dividers & lock rails:
a. Doweled.
4. Base:
a. Integral or separate, to receive base
material to match adjacent walls, unless
noted otherwise.
5. Blind -fasten to bottom of case body when
separate.
B. Drawers with subfront:
1. Sub -front, sides and back:
a. Doweled corners.
b. Glue joints.
2. Bottom: Dado into 4 sides and glued or screwed
to the bottom with the use of bottom supporting
drawer slide hardware.
3. Front:
a. Secured from subfront side with no less than
four screws after adjustments.
C. Use no blocking or fasteners in exposed or
Semi -exposed locations.
2.07 FABRICATION - MECHANICAL FASTENERS
A. Countertop joints:
1. Provide joint connectors every 6 IN OC.
B. Predrill and countersink screw holes before
installation.
C. Do not use mechanical -fasteners or blocking in
exposed locations. When fasteners are required on
exposed surfaces color, materials and finish to be
approved by Architect.
2.08 FABRICATION - COUNTERTOPS.
A. Plastic laminate countertops:
1. Countertops with integral backsplash.
a. Particleboard or Medium Density Fiberboard
1-1/4 IN top, or 3/4 IN with 1/2 IN build
down.
b. Particleboard backsplash with scribe piece 1
IN to be glued and secured to back edge of
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1;Construction
12340-13
M
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
NP
3.
4.
countertop.
c. Cove radius 1/4 IN maximum.
d. Countertop plastic laminate front edge
applied before countertop. Laminate applied
to top edge of backsplash last.
e. Laminate backer sheet on underside of
countertop.
f. Laminate backer sheet on backside of
backsplash.
g. All edges of raw particleboard to be sealed
with polyurethane before assembly.
h. 3 mm PVC banding at front edge nurse stations
and island counters.
i. Provide 1-1/2 IN radius on exposed outside
corners. (not required at 3 mm PVC
applications)
Side backsplash:
a. Provide laminate backer sheet on hidden
surfaces before applying plastic laminate.
b.. Laminate front edge and sides before top
laminate.
c. All edges of raw board to be sealed with
polyurethane before assembly.
d. Secure to top and side wall.
Joints in plastic laminate:
a. Not closer than 24 IN to sinks.
Joints in counter length:
a. Factory fitted, splined, glued, and
mechanically fastened.
B. Stainless steel tops:
1. Fabricate tops with seamless marine edges 3/16 IN
high with 16 GA reinforcing channels welded to
bottom.
2. Coat underside with sound deadening mastic.
3. 1-1/4 IN deep front edge, with 1/2 IN return to
form edge frame.
4. Joints:
a. Welded, unless indicated otherwise.
5. Integral sink:
a. Welded to top, ground and polished to match.
b. Provide bowl size and depth as indicated on
A7 series elevations or if no note indicated
provide 16 x 16 x 7-1/2 IN.
6. Backsplash:
a. Integral 4 IN high; provide wherever top
abuts wall, unless otherwise indicated on
architectural drawings.
2.09 FABRICATION - CASE CONFIGURATION
A. Plastic laminate faced units:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-14
01
1. Provide reveal, approximately 1/8 IN, at top of
02
doors and drawer fronts, and between doors and
03
drawer fronts in same unit; reveal approximately
04
7/16 IN at sides.
05
06
B.
Provide reveal 1/8 IN x 1/8 IN (black) in upper edge
07
of exposed sides of wall case when plastic laminate
08
soffits provided.
09
10
C.
Toe space:
11
1. 4 IN high by approximately 3 IN deep; provide on
12
front of each base unit unless noted on
13
architectural drawings.
14
15
D.
Pairs of sliding doors:
16,
1. Equal width; overlap approximately 1 IN.
17
18
E.
Countertop:
19
1. Veneer faced units:
20
a. Overhang 1-1/8 IN beyond doors, drawer fronts
21
and exposed ends.
22
2. Plastic laminate units':
23
a. Overhang 3/4 IN beyond doors, drawer fronts
24
and exposed ends.
25
26
F.
Hardware mounting:'
27
1. Drawers:
28
a. Center pull in front, horizontally.
29
b. No more than 4 IN from top.
30
2. Drawers with 2 pulls:
31
a. Set pulls at 1/4 points.
32
b. No more than 4 IN from top.
33
3. Framed glass doors:
34
a. Center pull in corner of frame.
35
4. Swinging doors:
36
a. Set pull in swing side corner, vertically; at
37
top of base units; at bottom of wall units.
38
39
G.
Exposed adjustable shelves:
40
1. Use drilled hole supports only (32 mm centers).
41
42
H.
Semi -exposed adjustable shelves:
43
1. Use drilled hole supports (32 mm centers).
44
a. Depth: 1/2 IN less than inside cabinet
45
depth.
46
b. Width: 1/8 IN, maximum, less than inside
47
cabinet width.
48
49
I.
Provide doors at locations requiring access to
50
electrical devices, as indicated on drawings.
51
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-15
01
PART 3
- EXECUTION
02
03
3.01
INSPECTION
04
05
A.
Examine conditions under which products are to be
06
installed.
07
08
B.
Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
09
for performance.
10
11
3.02
INSTALLATION
12
13
A.
Manufacturer to provide printed instructions or
14
drawings on wall blocking locations and type required
15
to General Contractor.
16
17
B.
Use manufacturer's printed instructions or drawings
18
in cases where items or details are not indicated.
19
20
C.
Provide trim, fillers, closures, stands, supports,
21
sleeves, collars, escutcheons, ferrules, brackets,
22
braces or other miscellaneous items required for
23
complete installation.
24
25
D.
Caulk all casework and countertops to walls, to seal
26
joints.
27
1. Caulk color to match laminate color.
28
29
E.
Caulk all window sills to walls and window frames to
30
seal joints.
31
1. Caulk color to match laminate color.
32
33
F.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items.
34
35
G.
Seal all sink cutouts.
36
37
H.
Install extra locks as directed; deliver unused locks
38
to Owner.
39
40
3.03
ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING
41
42
A.
Test and adjust items of equipment for satisfactory
43
operation.
44
45
B.
Adjust hinges for proper door alignment.
46
47
C.
Adjust drawer guides for proper drawer front
48
alignment and operation.
49
50
D.
Adjust countertops to a level position and align to
51
adjacent unit.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12340-16
01 E. Repair damage to casework or countertops to appear in
02 original new condition.
03
04 F. Repair damage to premises as a result of
05 installation
06
07 G. Remove debris left by this installation.
08
09 H. Clean casework and countertops after above items have
10 been completed.
11
12 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
12512-1
01
6G07,
7K05 SECTION 12512
01
02
02
03
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
GENERAL
07
08
08
09
A.
Provide at all exterior window openings (not
09
10
including translucent panels).
10
11
11
12
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
13
13
14
A.
Install test set of blinds in a prototype opening.
14
15
1. Operate not less than 100 complete operating
15
16
cycles, or longer as directed by Architect.
16
17
2. Remove test set of blinds and protect from dirt
17
18
and damage until final installation.
18
19
19
20
1.03
SUBMITTALS
20
21
21
22
A.
Samples:
22
23
1. For color anodized units, submit 3 color range
23
24
samples.
24
25
25
26
1.04
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
26
27
27
28
A.
Provide anchorage items required to be built in for
28
29
installation. _
29
30
30
31
1.05
JOB CONDITIONS
31
32
32
33
A.
Field verify dimensions as required.
33
34
34
35
35
36
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
36
37
37
38
2.01
MATERIALS
38
39
39
40
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
40
41
1. Horizontal louver blinds:
41
42
a. Base:
42
43
(1) Hunter Douglas Window Fashions.
43
44
b. Optional:
44
45
(1) Levolor Home Fashions, Contract
45
46
Division.
46
47
(2) Bali Window Treatments.
47
48
48
49
B.
Blinds, horizontal louver: Adjustable blinds with
49
50
headrail, slats, bottom rail, lift cord, tilter,
50
51
hardware and installation brackets:
51
/1
52
1. Hunter Douglas Window Fashions, Flexalum.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12512-2
01
2. Slats may be tilted to any angle.
02
3. Slats may be fully raised and lowered.
03
4. Slats may be locked in any intermediate position.
04
5. Finish color: To be selected from manufacturer's
05
standards.
06
.6. Provide bottom rail hold down brackets.
07
7. Provide with tilter at left, lift cord at right.
08
8. Design so there is no visible sag after continued
09
use.
10
11
C.
Headrail: "U" shaped steel channel 1 IN high and
12
1-1/2 IN deep, fabricated from 0.025 IN thick sheet
13
steel with rolled edges at top, with 2 metal end
14
stiffeners, with adjustable tab to assure secure
15
installation and eliminate lateral movement.
16
1. Provide plastic grommets to protect cords and
17
slat supports through bottom of headrail with
18
round edges to prevent wear and discoloration.
19
2. Operating hardware mechanically locked into
20
headrail.
21
3. Prime coat.
22
4. Finish coat: Baked enamel.
23
24
D.
Bottom rail: Completely enclosed tubular shape,
25
minimum 0.010 IN thick treated steel.
26
1. Prime coat: Chromate epoxy primer.
27
2. Finish coat: Baked enamel.
28
3. Form bottom rail after coating with locking
29
groove to receive dust cover. -
30
4. Use thermoplastic protective caps in bottom of
31
rail to secure tape ends and protect window sill.
32
5. Hold down bracket pins molded on rail end covers.
33
34
E.
Slats: Aluminum slats, nominal 1 IN wide.
35
1. Thickness before coating: 0.008 IN.
36
2. Prime coat.
37
3. Baked enamel finish coating.
38
4. Total coating thickness: 1 mil.
39
40
F.
Operating hardware, located in headrail:
41
1. Tilt rod, with cradle at each slat support.
42
2. Tape drum for each slat support.
43
3. Lift cord lock, with lift cord.
44
4. Tilter mechanism, with operator.
45
46
G.
Cradle: Support tilting rod, provide smooth bearing,
47
and center tape drum over ladder hole.
48
49
H.
Tape drum: Provide smooth rolled -edge hole each side
50
to attach slat support.
51
52
I.
Lift cord lock: Low friction type.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12512-3
01
1.
Crash proof type that locks automatically upon
02
release of cord.
03
2.
Provide cord separator to prevent cords from
04
twisting.
05
06
J.
Lift
cord: Braided with polyester jacket and rayon
07
center
core.
08
1.
Size of cord: NR 2-1/2.
09
2.
Detachable.
10
3.
Sufficient length to properly control raising or
11
lowering of blind.
12
4.
Equipment lift cord with tassel; ring pull with 4
13
IN cord, when intermediate locking is not
14
allowed.
15
16
K.
Tilter:
17
1.
Tilt rod with worm gear.
18
2.
Gear case: Enclosed type with precision gear.
19
3.
Gear factory lubricated.
20
4.
Hold slats at any angle and prevent movement of
21
slats due to vibration.
22
23
L.
Operating wand: Length of transparent extruded
24
plastic
rod with multi -sided cross section measuring
25
approximately 3/8 IN across points.
26
1.
Hang wand vertically by its own weight.
27
2.
Convenient length for easy operation.
28
3.
Easily detachable.
29
30
M.
Tilt
rod: Steel, painted with chromate primer, 1/4
31
IN,
in cross section; support weight of blind on tilt
32
rod.
33
34
N.
Slat
supports: Braided ladder tape.
35
1.
Assure proper control and adequate overlap of
36
slats.
37
2.
Distance between end ladder and end of slats not
38
over 6 IN; distance between ladders not over 22
39
IN.
40
3.
Tape material: Polyester yarn.
41
a. Vertical component: Between 0.045 and.0.066
42
IN diameter; provide maximum strength and
43
flexibility with minimum stretch.
44
b. Horizontal component, or rungs: Not less
45
than 4 threads braided into verticals.
46
C. 15 rungs/FT equally spaced for proper
47
support.
48
4.
Tape clip: Metal clip or barb machine clinched
49
to end of each slat support to lock in holes of
50
drum.
51
52
O.
Installation brackets: Minimum 0.042 IN thick steel,
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
12512-4
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
brackets with hinged covers allowing easy blind
removal.
1. Prime coat: Epoxy.
2. Finish coat: Polyester baked enamel in color to
match headrail.
3. Mark left and right to facilitate installation.
4. Provide intermediate support brackets for blinds
over 60 IN wide; maximum spacing for intermediate
support brackets 48 IN OC.
5. Provide extension brackets to suit installation
indicated.
6. Hold down brackets: Sill or jamb type as
required.
7. Provide headrail pocket support brackets to suit
installation indicated.
P. Accent channels: Side channels and bottom channels.
1. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's
standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which
materials are to be installed.
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility
for performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and reviewed shop drawings.
B. Position units plumb and true.
C. Anchor securely in place with proper clips, brackets
and bolts for mounting.
D. Provide adequate clearance between sash and blinds to
permit unencumbered operation.
E. Isolate metal parts from concrete and mortar to
prevent galvanic action.
F. Clean components.
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13121-1
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
1D15, 7K05
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
SECTION 13121
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS
A. This section is for use in conjunction with Sections
07411, Prefinished Metal Siding and 07605,
Prefinished Metal Roofing.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Building shall be rigid frame type building.
1. Provide structure for all miscellaneous canopies
and overhangs indicated.
B. Related sections:
1. General requirements: Division 1.
2. Foundations and floors: Division 2 and Division
3.
3. Doors and windows: Section 08100.
4. Prefinished metal siding: Section 07411.
5. Louvers: Section 10200.
6. Prefinished metal roofing: Section 07605.
7. Bridge crane: Section 14305.
C. Work furnished but not installed:
1. Anchor bolts.
1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design criteria - general:
1. Structural design of pre-engineered buildings and
their components is responsibility of
manufacturer.
2. Furnish drawings and calculations for buildings
sealed by a Professional Structural Engineer,
registered in State of Texas.
3. Review of drawings or calculations by Architect
does not relieve manufacturer of responsibility
for adequacy of structural design.
4. Assure completed building is free of excessive
noise from wind induced vibrations under ordinary
weather conditions.
B. Standards for design:
1. Uniform Building Code (UBC) (hereinafter referred
to as Code).
2. American Institute of Steel Construction "Steel
Construction Manual".
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13121-2
O1
3.
American Iron and Steel Institute "Cold Formed
02
Steel Design Manual".
03
4.
Aluminum Association "Aluminum Construction
04
Manual".
05
S.
American Welding Society "Code for Welding in
06
Building Construction".
07
6.
Structural Steel Painting Council Standards.
08
09
C. Design criteria — structural:
10
1.
Provide structural components and other building
11
elements of a design and strength to safely
12
support all dead loads in addition to following
13
collateral loads in combination with snow and
14
wind loads required by Code.
15
a. Roof panels:
16
(1) 50 psf uniformally distributed live
17
load.
18
(2) 200 LB concentrated live load (over 1 x
19
1 FT area) located at the center of
20
maximum roofing (panel) span.
21
b. Auxiliary loads:
22
(1) Other superimposed loads shall be
23
considered as part of the design
24
requirements and combined with the normal
25
design loads.
26
(a) Overhead bridge crane: 10 ton.
27
(b) Refer to Section 14305 for bridge
28
crane requirements.
29
(c) Refer to Section 14300 for hoists for
30
bridge crane requirements.
31
32
2.
Design for load combinations as required by Code.
33
In addition, wind forces on affected elements
34
shall be greater force determined with hangar
35
doors in open or closed position.
36
3.
Deflection criteria: Observe following maximum
37
deflections in design of frame and components.
38
a. Lateral deflection of main frame at peak due
39
to wind: Height/400.
40
b. Limit deflection of all building components
41
and elements to L/240.
42
c. Camber Main frame members as required to
43
prevent ponding of water and for proper door
44
operation.
45
4.
Section properties of girts and purlins not
46
considered fully effective unless they have outer
47
stiffening elements bent sharply through minimum
48
60 Deg angle.
49
5.
Capacity of sections with outer stiffening
50
elements bent at angles between 45 and 60 Deg
51
will be considered to be no more than 85 percent
52
of capacity calculated assuming outer stiffening
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13121-3
01
element was bent through a 90 Deg angle.
02
6. Girts and purlins with stiffening elements bent
03
at less than 45 Deg not acceptable.
04
7. Girts and purlins with outer stiffening elements
05
damaged in handling shall be effectively restored
06
to intended shape or replaced.
07
8. Design all supporting members to support all
08
loads imposed upon them. Make adequate provision
09
to support imposed loads having components not
10
lying in plane of web members.
11
9. Standing seam roofs with concealed fasteners do
12
not provide lateral support to open web support
13
members.
14
10. Provide sufficient lateral support to develop
15
full allowable stresses utilized in design of
16
such members.
17
11. Lateral support elements must provide adequate
18
strength and stiffness for this function.
19
12. In addition to design loads established by Code,
20
design roof panels to support walking weight of a
21
275 LB person at any location, without damage to
22
panels or fasteners.
23
24
1.04
SUBMITTALS
25
26
A.
Shop drawings:
27
1. All data and drawings necessary to clearly
28
describe design loadings, materials, sizes,
29
layouts, construction details, fasteners, and
30
erection.
31
32
B.
Samples:
33
1. Color samples of finishes, for selection.
34
35
C.
Project information:
36
1. Complete structural calculations.
37
38
D.
Contract closeout information:
39
1. Operating and maintenance data.
40
2. Warranty.
41
42
1.05
JOB CONDITIONS
43
44
A.
Turn over anchor bolts and anchor bolt details, and
45
sill locks to Contractor, in time for installation.
46
47
1.06
WARRANTY
46
49
A.
Manufacturer's building warranty, warranting building
50
against defects in composition of building materials,
51
workmanship and faults inherent in building design
52
for period of one year from date of substantial
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13121-4
O1
completion of building.
02
03
B.
Roof panels (per Section 07605): Durability of roof
04
panels due to rupture, structural failure or
05
perforation warranted for a period of 15 years with
06
no proration.
07
08
C.
Wall and roof panels (per Sections 07411 and 07605):
09
1. Warrant exterior color finish for panels for 10
10
years against blistering, peeling, cracking,
11
flaking, checking and chipping.
12
2. Color change not to exceed 5 NBS units in same
13
period.
14
15
16
PART 2
- PRODUCTS
17
18
2.01
MAIN FRAME AND SKIN TYPE BUILDINGS
19
20
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
21
1. Pre-engineered buildings:
22
a. Base:
23
(1) Behlen Manufacturing.
24
(2) Varco-Pruden Buildings.
25
(3) American Buildings.
26
(4) Butler Manufacturing.
27
(5) Steellox Systems.
28
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
29
Document 00440.
30
31
B.
Anchor bolts:
32
1. ASTM-A307, of proper size, number and length to
33
adequately resist all applicable design loads at
34
base of columns and frames.
35
2. Building manufacturer furnish all bolts required
36
to Contractor for installation.
37
38
C.
Fasteners: Non -corroding; use elastomeric washers
39
with fasteners exposed to weather.
40
41
D.
Steel sheet for roof and wall panels:
42
1. ASTM-A653/A653M.
43
2. Galvanized: Hot dip galvanized in accord with
44
ASTM-A653/A653M, G90.
45
3. Aluminized: Hot dip coated with aluminum,
46
minimum weight of 0.60 OZ, tested in accord with
47
ASTM-A428.
48
49
E.
Roof panels:
50
1. Refer to Section 07605.
51
2. Minimum 24 GA.
52
3. Aluminized or Galvalume steel.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13121-5
01
4.
Standing seam interlocking rib configuration.
02
5.
Furnish sheets of length sufficient to cover
03
entire length of any unbroken roof slope up to 40
04
FT.
05
6.
Seal all interlocking ribs and transverse end
06
laps according to manufacturer's instructions,
07
with a flexible sealant, factory applied whenever
08
possible.
09
7.
Seams continuously locked and/or crimped together
10
by mechanical means during erection.
11
.8.
Fasten roof panels to purlins or secondary
12
support members with a clip concealed between
13
interlocking ribs and set on top of thermal
14
spacer to minimize thermal conductivity with
15
purlins.
16
9.
Allow through penetration of roofing surface by
17
exposed fasteners only at terminal locations of
18
roof panels.
19
10.
Provide connections which allow for expected
20
thermal expansion.
21
22
F. Wall
panels:
23
1.
Refer to Section 07411.
24
2.
Minimum 22 GA, galvanized steel with factory
25
applied color coating.
26
3.
Provide panels of .length to cover entire wall
27
height.
28
4.
Covering width and configuration of panel:
29
Building manufacturer's standard panel.
30
5.
Provide all top, bottom and intermediate panel
31
closures, and all flashings, fascias and trim;
32
building manufacturer's standard, compatible with
33
material furnished as wall panels.
34
6.
Color coating:
35
a. Minimum 70 percent Kynar 500.
36
b. Factory applied to thoroughly cleaned and
37
pre-treated sheet prior to fabrication.
38
C. Color as selected by Architect from
39
manufacturer's standard colors.
40
7.
Provide screws with heads colored to match
41
panels.
42
43
G. Wall liner panels:
44
1.
Minimum 26 GA, galvanized steel panels, with
45
white (or light color) paint finish.
46
2.
Provide panels in non -finished rooms up to 8 FT
47
AFF, or to first girt above 8 FT, whichever is
48
higher.
49
50
H. Insulation:
51
1.
Vinyl faced non-combustible batt type.
52
2.
4 IN thick, minimum R value of 19 at walls, 27 at
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13121-6
01
roof .
02
3.
Neatly tape or neatly double fold and staple all
03
joints at maximum 8 IN OC.
04
4.
Place_ roof insulation over roof support members.
05
5.
Separate roof support member from roof panel,
06
except at each concealed structural fastener,
07
with spacer of material having minimum density of
08
2 PCF, and a maximum flame spread rating of 25.
09
6.
Vapor resistant membrane: Vinyl with foil scrim;
10
Perm rating of not more than 0.02; laminated to
11
insulation as a composite unit.
12
7.
UL label fire hazard classification flame spread
13
rating of 25 or less as a tested assembly.
14
8.
Provide intermediate fasteners to prevent
15
sagging.
16
9.
Refer to Section 09227 for exterior stud wall
17
framing.
18
19
I. Roof vent curbs:
20
1.
Provide curbs for roof mounted equipment
21
indicated.
22
2.
Verify size.
23
3.
Provide with a horizontal flanged top projecting
24
minimum of 6 IN above weather surface plane.
25
4.
Base to fit roof slope and be compatible with
26
roofing panels to which it is flashed, sealed and
27
fastened.
28
5.
Fabricate of sheet aluminum with a minimum of
29
0.08 IN thickness or galvanized steel sheet of
30
minimum 14 GA.
31
6.
All exterior seams continuously welded.
32
7.
Insulate curbs with rigid, moisture resistant
33
insulation, minimum 1-1/2 IN thick.
34
35
J. Roof jacks:
36
1.
Provide for pipe penetrations indicated.
37
2.
EPDM rubber with an aluminum sealing ring base.
38
3.
Minimum projection of 8 IN above weather surface
39
of roof, with configuration of flanges matching
40
roof panel.
41
4.
Seal flange -to -panel joint with elastomeric
42
sealant.
43
5.
Fasten to provide complete support and
44
weatherseal.
45
46
K. Gutters and downspouts:
47
1.
Aluminum or zinc coated steel, finish to match
48
panels.
49
2.
Minimum thickness 24-GA, sized to water volume.
50
3.
Provide expansion joints when building gutter
51
length exceeds 150 FT.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13121-7
f
r",.
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
L. Trim:
1. Provide all trim pieces required to make building
weathertight and to trim cut edges of panels.
2. Provide angle trim around all openings for other
work.
3. Provide closure pieces fitting panel
configuration.
M. Sealants used in wall and roof systems:
1. Manufacturer's standard for area to be sealed.
2. Provide continuous sealant in roof panel side
ribs, roof panel and laps, ridge cover, curbs,
base of wall, exposed joints of roof accessory
openings, and between roof panel and wall
flashing at eaves.
N. Miscellaneous framing for overhangs and canopies:
1. Provide as indicated.
0. Exterior stud wall framing at openings, etc.
1. Provide per Section 09227.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Completely fabricate and prepare all materials for
shipment knocked down including all crating and
bundling.
B. Fabricate all parts of buildings true to dimension, _
so that in erection all parts will fit together
easily.
C. Provide building with dimensions and roof slope as
indicated.
D. Frame may be prepunched to receive fasteners, or
holes for fasteners may be drilled in field.
2.03 SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean ferrous surfaces of oil, grease, loose rust,
loose mill scale, and other foreign substances.
B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive
primer.
C. Prime all structural components except anchor bolts
and fasteners.
1. Prime in accord with manufacturer's standards.
2. Shop paint, in standard color, items not exposed
to view.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13121-8
O1
02
PART
3 - EXECUTION
03
04
3.01
ERECTION
05
06
A.
Erection of metal buildings, hangar doors,
07
accessories, insulation and interior finish, if
08
applicable, performed by one of following:
09
1. Authorized dealers, or:
10
2. Building manufacturer's crews, or:
11
3. Other erectors authorized by manufacturer as
12
trained and qualified to erect building.
13
4. Manufacturer inspect work and certify
14
correctness.
15
16
3.02
FIELD PAINTING
17
18
A.
Immediately upon detection, wire brush and touch up
19
abraded or corroded spots on painted surfaces with
20
same material used for shop coat.
21
22
B.
Touch up with manufacturer recommended paint.
23
24
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13440-1
01
94B23 SECTION 13440
01
02
02
03
INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS CONTROL: BASIC REQUIREME2JTS
03
04
04
05
05
06
PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07
07
08
1.01 SUMMARY
08
09
09
10
A. Section Includes:
10
11
1. Basic requirements for complete instrumentation
11
12
system for process control.
12
13
13
14
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily
14
15
limited to:
15
16
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract
16
17
Forms, and Conditions of the Contract.
17.
18
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
18
19
3. Section 10400 - Identification, Stenciling, and
19
20
Tagging Systems.
20
21
4. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable - 600 Volt and
21
22
Below.
22
23
23
24
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24
25
25
26
A. Referenced Standards:
26
27
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineer (ASME):
27
f
28
a. B31.1, Power Piping.
28
29
b. SEC II -A SA-182, Specification for Forged or
29
30
Rolled Alloy Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged
30
31
Fittings, and Valves and Parts for
31
32
High -Temperature.
32
33
C. SEC II -A SA-479, Specification for Stainless
33
34
and Heat -Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes for
34
35
Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels.
35
36
2. American Society for Testing and Materials
36
37
(ASTM):
37
38
a. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and
38
39
Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
39
40
General Service.
40
41
b. A276, Specification for Stainless and
41
42
Heat -Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.
42
43
c. A479, Standard Specification for Stainless
43
44
and Heat -Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes for
44
45
use in Boilers and other Pressure Vessels.
45
46
d. B16, Standard Specification for Free -Cutting
46
47
Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for Use in Screw
47
48
Machines.
48
49
e. B68, Standard Specification for Seamless
49
50
Copper Tube, Bright Annealed.
50
51
f. B75, Standard Specification for Seamless
51
_
52
Copper Tube.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13440-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
g. B124, Standard Specification for Copper and
Copper -Alloy Forging Rod, Bar, and Shapes.
h. B283, Standard Specification for Copper and
Copper -Alloy Die Forgings (Hot -Pressed).
i. B453, Standard Specification for
Copper -Zinc -Lead Alloy (Leaded -Brass) Rod.
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(IEEE):
a. 518, Guide for the Installation of Electrical
Equipment to Minimize Electrical Noise Inputs
to Controllers from External Sources.
b. C62.41, IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in
Low -Voltage AC Power Circuits.
4. Instrument Society of America (ISA):
a. 55.1, Instrumentation Symbols and
Identification.
b. 55.2, Binary Logic Diagrams for Process
Operations.
C. 55.3, Graphic Symbols for Distributed
Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic
and Computer Systems.
d. 55.4, Standard Instrument Loop Diagrams.
e. 520, Specification Forms for Process
Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary
Elements and Control Valves.
f. RP7.1-56, Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure
Test.
5. National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST)
B. Qualifications:
1. Instrumentation subcontractor:
a. Financial capability.
b. Maintain a qualified technical staff.
c. Have design capability.
d. Have competent service, startup, and
authorized training personnel.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Instrument Air Header: The segment of air supply
piping and tubing which transports air from the
compressed instrument air source through the branch
isolation valve of any takeoff (branch) line.
B. Branch Line: The segment of air supply piping and
tubing which transports air from the outlet of the
air header branch isolation valve through an air
users isolation valve.
C. Calibrate: To standardize a device so that it
provides a specified response to known inputs.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
�1.
13440-3
r
O1
01
02
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
02
03
03
04
A. Control System Requirements:
04
05
1. This Specification Section 13440 provides the
05
06
general requirements for the instrument and
06
07
control system.
07
08
2. The instrument and control system consists of aXl
08
09
primary elements, transmitters, switches,
09
10
controllers, computers, recorders, indicators,
10
11
panels, signal converters, signal boosters,
11
12
amplifiers, special power supplies, special or
12
13
shielded cable, special grounding or isolation,
13
14
auxiliaries, software, wiring, and other devices
14
15
required to provide complete control of the plant
15
16
as specified in the Contract Documents.
16
17
17
18
B. Unless otherwise required for instrument
18
19
compatibility, electric control signals shall be 4 to
19
20
20 milliampere, 24 V DC.
20
21
21
22
C. All signals shall be directly linearly proportional
22
23
to measured variable unless specifically noted
23
24
otherwise.
24
25
25
26
D. Single Instrumentation Subcontractor:
26
27
1. Furnish and coordinate instrumentation system
27
28
through a single instrumentation subcontractor.
28
29
The instrumentation subcontractor will be
29
30
responsible for functional operations of all
30
31
systems, performance of control system
31
32
engineering, supervision of installation, final
32
33
connections, calibrations, preparation of
33
34
drawings and operation and maintenance manuals,
34
35
startup, training, demonstration of substantial
35
36
completion and all other aspects of the control
36
37
system.
37
38
38
39
1.05 SUBMITTALS
39
40
40
41
A. Shop Drawings:
41
42
1. See Section 01340.
42
43
2. Product technical data including:
43
44
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet
44
45
requirements of standards referenced.
45
46
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
46
47
(1) Loop diagrams per ISA 55.4. (a) Each
47
48
loop diagram and description on a separate
48
49
8-1/2 x 11 IN sheet. (b) Each sheet shall
49
50
contain the following minimum information.
50
51
(2) All loop devices clearly identified. (3)
51
52
Identification of the loop and each loop
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13440-4
O1
component, including connections to such
01
02
things as recorders and computers. Numbering
02
03
and tagging must agree with the P&ID. (3)
03
04
All interconnections with identifying numbers
04
05
for: (a) Electrical cables. (b) Conductor
05
06
pairs. (c) Pneumatic or hydraulic tubing.
06
07
(4) Identification of connections including:
07
08
(a) Junction boxes. (b) Terminals. (c)
08
09
Bulkheads. (d) Ports. (e) Programmable
09
10
logic controller input/ output connections.
10
11
(f) Grounding systems. (5) Signal levels and
11
12
ranges. (6) Device location. (7) Energy
12
13
sources designating voltage, pressure, and
13
14
other applicable requirements. (8) Enough
14
15
process lines and equipment to clearly show
15
16
the process side of the loop and provide
16
17
clarity of control action. This includes:
17
18
(a) What is being measured. (b) What is
18
19
being controlled. (c) Other information
19
20
required to complete the process loop. (9)
20
21
Reference to supplementary records and
21
22
drawings to show inter -relation to other
22
23
control loops. (10) Controller action. (11)
23
24
Control valve action upon electronic,
24
25
hydraulic, or pneumatic failure. (12)
25
26
Complete calibration information including
26
27-
set points for alarm or shut down. (a)
27 -�
28
Instrument component technical brochures.
28
29
(b) Instrument data sheets:
29
30
1) ISA S20 or approved equal.
30
31
2) Separate data sheet for each type of
31
32
instrument. (c) Process connected
32
33
instrument installation details
33
34
containing the following minimum
34
35
information:
35
36
1) Bill of materials providing as a minimum
36
37
the following information: (1) Tube
37
38
material and size. (2) Connection size.
38
39
(3) Fitting size, material, and rating.
39
40
(4) valve type and material. (5)
40
41
Instrument description. (6) Pipe stand
41
42
size and material. b) Tube slope
42
43
requirements. c) Minimum clearances. d)
43
44
Required elevations and dimensions. 5)
44
45
Comprehensive set of point-to-point
45
46
wiring diagrams showing all
46
47
interconnections between packaged systems
47
48
or equipment control panels, motor
48
49
control centers, instrumentation and all
49
50
other electrical equipment as required to
50
51
depict a complete and functional
51
52
plant -wide electrical control system.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13440-5
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
tke
Instrumentation'"wiring already shown on
loop diagrams need not be included on
point-to-point wiring diagrams. a)
Diagrams shall provide the following
minimum information: (1) Terminal block
identification (includes terminals on
remote equipment furnished by Others).
(2) Wire size. (3) Wire type. (4) Wire
color. (5) Wire shielding and insulation
type. (6) Conductor quantities and
associated conduit size. (7) Ground
points. (8) Interconnection requirements
to existing systems or equipment
furnished by Others. b) Diagrams shall
be provided on Drawings of sufficient
size so as to minimize the number of
drawings. (1) Maximum drawing size 24 x
36 IN. (2) Minimum drawing size: 11 x
17 IN. 6) Electrical schematic control
diagrams. Diagrams shall include: a)
Terminal identification. b) Unique
identification of all control devices and
contacts. (1) Utilize Owner's device
identification numbers where applicable.
c) wire identification. d) Equipment
identification. e) Indication of remote
and local devices and wiring. f)
Overcurrent protection indication. g)
Voltage. h) All control logic. 7) Panel
fabrication drawings. 8) Scaled floor
plan layouts of control room. 9) PLC/DCS
equipment drawings. 10) Graphic layouts.
11) Graphic component construction. 12)
Nameplate layout drawings.
3. Drawings, systems, and other elements are
represented schematically in accordance with ISA
55.1 and 55.3. The nomenclature, tag numbers,
equipment numbers, panel numbers, and related
series identification contained in the Contract
Documents shall be employed exclusively
throughout submittals.
4. Provide circuit diagrams and certification with
the shop drawing indicating how voltage transient
protection requirements are met.
5. Warranties: Provide copies of warranties and
list of factory authorized service agents.
6. Testing reports:
a. Source quality control reports.
7. Provide PLC programming (ladder diagrams, etc.).
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
13440-6
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
'0 8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
O1
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
02
03
A.
Do not remove shipping blocks, plugs, caps, and
04
desiccant dryers installed to protect the
05
instrumentation during shipment until the instruments
06
are installed and permanent connections are made.
07
08
09
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
10
11
2.01
TUBING AND FITTINGS
12
13
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
14
1. Subject to compliance with the Contract
15
Documents, the following manufacturers are
16
acceptable:
17
a. Tube fittings: 1) Parker CPI. 2) Swagelok.
18
19
B.
Submit requests for substitution in accordance with
20
Specification Section 01640.
21
22
C.
Instrument Tubing and Fittings:
23
1. Material:
24
a. Tubing: ASTM A269, Grade TP 316 stainless
25
steel.
26
b. Straight fittings: 316 stainless steel per
27
ASME SA-479 or ASTM A276.
28
C. Shaped bodies: ASME SA-182 F316 stainless
29
steel.
30
2. Design and fabrication:
31
a. Tubing: 1) Seamless. 2) Fully annealed. 3)
32
Maximum hardness: 80 Rb. 4) Free from
33
surface scratches and imperfections. 5)
34
Diameter: 1/2 IN OD unless specified
35
otherwise. 6) Wall thickness: a) Meet
36
requirements of paragraph 122.3 of ASME
37
B31.1. b) Minimum 0.049 IN for 1/2 IN OD
38
tubing.
39
b. Fittings: 1) Flareless. 2) Compression
40
type.
41
42
D.
Pneumatic Signal Tubing:
43
1. Material: Copper per ASTM B75.
44
2. Design and fabrication:
45
.a. Soft annealed.
46
b. Free from surface scratches and
47
imperfections.
46
c. Wall thickness: 1) 0.030 IN for 1/4 IN OD.
49
2) 0.035 IN for 3/8 IN OD.
50
51
E.
Pneumatic Tube Fittings:
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13440-7
01
1. Material:
01
02
a. Straight fittings: Brass per ASTM B16 and
02
03
B453.
03
04
b. Shaped bodies: Brass per ASTM B124 Alloy 377
04
05
or ASTM B283.
05
06
2. Design and fabrication:
06
07
a. Flareless.
07
08
b. Compression type.
08
09
09
10
2.02 INSTRUMENT VALVES
10
11
11
12
A. Process instrument multi -valve manifolds, isolation,
12
13
vent and blow -down valves:
13
14
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
14
15
a.. Subject to compliance with the Contract
15
16
Documents, the following manufacturers are
16
17
acceptable: 1) Whitey Co. 2)
17
18
Anderson -Greenwood USA, Inc.
18
19
b. Submit requests for substitution in
19
20
accordance with Specification Section 01640.
20
21
2. Materials:
21
22
a. Packing: 1) 450 DegF and above: Graphite.
22
23
2) Below 450 DegF: Graphite.or teflon.
23
24
b. Body: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A479.
24
25
c. Stem: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276.
25
26
d. Ball: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276.
26
27
e. Support rings: 316 stainless steel per ASTM
27
28
A276.
28
29
f. Seats: 1) Metal: a) 316 stainless steel per
29
30
ASTM A276. 2) Soft: a) Teflon, Delrin, or
30
31
equivalent. b) Only utilized on applications
31
32
where manufacturer's temperature and pressure
32
33
ratings exceed process design conditions.
33
34
3. Design and fabrication:
34
35
a. Either of the following: 1) Ball valve with
35
36
1/4 turn activation. 2) Free -swiveling ball
36
37
stem.
37
38
b. Provide body wall thickness sufficient for
38
39
process design conditions per ASME B31.1.
39
40
c. Temperature: Manufacturer's temperature
40.
41
rating for all components shall exceed
41
42
process design conditions.
42
43
43
44
B. Isolation Valves in Instrument Air Tubing:
44
45
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
45
46
a. Subject to compliance with the Contract
46
47
Documents, the following manufacturers are
47
48
acceptable: 1) Whitey Co. 2) Or equal.
48
49
b. Submit requests for substitution in
49
50
accordance with Specification Section 01640.
50
51
2. Materials:
51
52
a. Packing: Graphite or teflon.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13440-8
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
b. Body: Brass per ASTM B16.
01
C. Stem: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276.
02
d. Ball: 316 stainless steel per ASTM A276.
03
e. Support rings: 316 stainless steel per ASTM
04
A276.
05
f. Seats: 1) Metal: a) 316 stainless steel per
06
ASTM A276. 2) Soft: a) Teflon, Delrin, or
07
equivalent. b) Only utilized on applications
08
where manufacturers temperature and pressure
09
ratings exceed process design conditions.
10
3. Design and fabrication:
11
a. Ball valve with 1/4 turn activation.
12
b. Provide body wall thickness sufficient for
13
process design conditions per ASME B31.1.
14
15
2.03 MATERIALS
16
17
A. Support Angle for Tubing:
18
1. 2 x 2 IN x 12 GA aluminum or galvanized finish
19
steel.
20
2. Aluminum or galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and
21
accessories.
22
23
B. Tubing Tray or Channel: Aluminum.
24
25
2.04 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
26
27
A. System Operating Criteria:
28
1. Stability: After controls have taken corrective
29
action, as result of a change in the controlled
30
variable or a change in setpoint, oscillation of
31
final control element shall not exceed two cycles
32
per minute or a magnitude of movement of 0.5
33
percent full travel.
34
2. Response: Any change in setpoint or change in
35
controlled variable shall produce a corresponding
36
corrective change in position of final control
37
element and become stabilized within 30 seconds.
38
3. Agreement: Setpoint indication of controlled
39
variable and measured indication of controlled
40
variable shall agree within 3 percent of full
41
scale over a 6:1 operating range.
42
4. Repeatability: For any repeated magnitude of
43
control signal, from either an increasing or
44
decreasing direction, the final control element
45
shall take a repeated position within 0.5 percent
46
of full travel regardless of force required to
47
position final element.
48
S. Sensitivity: Controls shall respond to setpoint
49
deviations and measured variable deviations
50
within 1.0 percent of full scale.
51
6. Performance: All instruments and control devices
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13440-9
O1
shall perform in accordance with manufacturer's
01
02
specifications.
02
03
03
04
B.
Equipment Surge Protection:
04
05
1. Provide power supplies for electronic equipment
05
06
to successfully withstand surges in AC power
06
07
circuits per the wave form, voltage amplitude,
07
08
current amplitude, and frequency provided in IEEE
08
09
C62.41.
09
10
a. Successfully withstanding transients requires
10
11
that none of the following conditions occur
11
12
as a result of the transient: 1) Erroneous
12
13
output. 2) Component failure. 3)
13
14
Calibration change exceeding normal
14
15
tolerances.
15
16
16
17
2.05
ACCESSORIES
17
18
18
19
A.
Provide instruments with manufacturer's
19
20
identification nameplate showing:
20
21
1. Manufacturer's model number.
21
22
2. Manufacturer's serial number.
22
23
3. Range. (English units)
23
24
4. Power supply requirement.
24
25
25
26
26
�+1 27
PART
3 - EXECUTION
27
( 28
28
29
3.01
INSTALLATION
29
30
- 30
31
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's
31
32
instructions.
32
33
33
34
B.
Install instrument mounting pipe stands level and
34
35
plumb.
35
36
36
37
C.
Instrument Valves:
37
38
1. orient stems for proper operation.
38
39
2. Install arrays orderly and neat in appearance
39
40
with true horizontal and vertical lines.
40
41
3. Provide a minimum of 2 IN clearance between valve
41
42
handle turning radii where there are multiple
42
43
valve handles appearing in a straight line.
43
44
4. Valves shall have bonnets and any soft seals
44
45
removed during welding or soldering into the
45
46
line. When cool, reassemble the valves.
46
47
5. Support each valve individually. The tubing
47
48
system does not qualify as support for the valve.
48
49
49
50
D.
Locate instrument piping and tubing so as to be free
50
51
of vibration and interference with other piping,
51
52
conduit, or equipment.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13440-10
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
IS
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
E. Keep foreign matter out of the system.
F. Remove all oil on piping and tubing with solvent
before piping and tubing installation.
G. Plug all open ends and connections to keep out
contaminants.
H. Tubing Installation:
1. General:
a. Install such that tube shows no sign of
crumpling, bends of too short a radius, or
flattening, etc.
b. Make tube runs straight and parallel or
perpendicular to the floor, equipment and
piping runs.
C. For liquid and steam applications, slope
continuously from the process to the
instrument with a minimum slope of 0.50 IN
per foot.
d. For gas and air applications, slope
continuously from the instrument to the
process with a minimum slope of 0.50 IN per
foot.
e. If the sensing line cannot be continuously
sloped, install high point vents and low
point drains.
f. Keep instrument tubing clean during all
phases of work.
g. Blow out with clean, dry, oil -free air
immediately before final assembly.
2. Stainless steel tubing:
a. Cut by sawing only and debur.
b. Make each bend with tube bender of the
correct size for the tube.
c. Make all bends smooth and continuous.
d. Rebending is not permitted.
e. Make bends true to angle and radius.
f. Maintain a true circular cross section of
tubing without buckling or undue stretch of
tube wall.
g. Allowable tolerance for flattening out of
tubing bends: Maximum of 8 percent of the OD
for stainless steel tubing.
h. Minimum bending radius.
MINIMUM BENDING
TUBE OD INCHES RADIUS, INCHES
1/4 9/16
3/8 15/16
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
13440-11
01
1/2 1-1/2
02
03
3. Tubing support:
04
a.
Intermittently support by clamping to support
05
angle.
06
b.
Install supports to be self -draining,
07
supported by hangers, or cantilevered from
08
walls or structural beams.
09
C.
Support at 5 FT-0 IN maximum spans for
10
horizontal or vertical runs.
11
d.
Use tubing trays in areas where spans between
12
supports are greater than 5 FT and for all
13
signal tubing support.
14
e.
Support each tubing tray at 10 FT maximum
15
spans.
16
f.
Align tubing in orderly rows and retain in
17
the tray by bolted clips. The use of spring
18
or speed clips is not acceptable.
19
g.
Maintain order of the tubing throughout the
20
length of the tray.
21
h.
Locate angle, channel and tray installation
22
to protect tubing from spills and mechanical
23
damage.
24
i.
Locate support members to clear all piping,
25
conduit, equipment, hatchways, monorails, and
26
personnel access ways and allow access for
27
equipment operation and maintenance.
28
j.
Support trays to prevent torsion, sway or
29
sag.
30
k.
Permanently attach supports to building steel
31
or other permanent structural members.
32
1.
Arrange supports and trays so that they do
33
not become a trough or trap.
34
4. Routing and orientation:
35
a.
Route to maintain a minimum headroom
36
clearance of 8 FT.
37
b.
Locate and orient valves and specialties so
38
that they are accessible for operation and
39
maintenance from the operating floor. Do not
40
route through or over equipment removal
41
areas, below monorails or cranes nor above or
42
below hatches.
43
5. Expansion and vibration provisions:
44
a.
Provide horizontal expansion loops at the
45
process connections.
46
b.
Route tubing parallel to relative motion
47
through sleeved supports that allow linear
48
tube movement.
49
C.
Cold springing of tubing to compensate for
50
thermal expansion is prohibited.
51
d.
Utilize flexible hoses to connect pneumatic
52
tubing to air users which may move or
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
13440-12
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
vibrate.
I. Air Supply:
1. Connect all instruments requiring air to air
supply piping and tubing. Provide connections as
follows:
a. Terminate branch supply line not more than 36
IN from the device with a 1/2 IN isolation
valve.
b. For remaining line, use 1/4 or 3/8 IN tubing
of a length to allow for normal equipment
movement and vibration.
c. Use flexible hoses to connect pneumatic
tubing to air users which may experience
significant movement or vibration.
d. Make branch connections to individual
instruments from the top of the supply
header.
e. Purge instrument air piping of extraneous
material by blowing clean, dry, oil -free air
through the system prior to final connection.
J. Threaded Connection Seals:
1. Use Tite-Seal or acceptable alternate.
2. Use of lead base pipe dope or teflon tape is not
acceptable.
3. Do not apply Tite-Seal to tubing threads of
compression fittings.
K. Capillary Tubing:
1. Route capillary tubing in tubing tray.
2. Install capillary tubing with a 2 IN minimum bend
radius which does not kink or pinch the
capillaries.
3. Do not cut or disconnect at any point.
4. Coil excess capillary tubing and secure at the
instrument.
L. Temperature Elements:
1. Assemble in the following sequence:
a. Remove temperature sensor sheaths and
terminal blocks from the head and nipple
assembly.
b. Connect nipple and head to thermowell
installed in the pipe.
C. Insert sheath and terminal block until it
seats in the thermowell.
d. Connect to the head.
M. Use bottom entry for all conduit entry to instruments
and junction and terminal boxes.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1s
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
13440-13
O1
N.
Install electrical components per Division 16.
01
02
02
03
0.
Instrument Mounting:
03
04
1. Mount all instruments where they will be
04
05
accessible from fixed ladders, platforms, or
05
06
grade.
06
07
2. Mount all local indicating instruments with face
07
08
forward toward the normal operating area, within
08
09
reading distance, and in the line of sight.
09
10
3. Mount instruments level, plumb, and support
10
11
rigidly.
it
12
4. Mount to provide:
12
13
a. Protection from heat, shock, and vibrations.
13
14
b. Accessibility for maintenance.
14
15
C. Freedom from interference with piping,
15
16
conduit and equipment.
16
17
5. Do not mount current -to -pressure transducers on
17
18
the control valves unless the transducers are
18
19
received from the Manufacturer already valve
19
20
mounted and tubed, or specific instructions to
20
21
valve mount the transducers are given on the
21
22
Drawings.
22
23
23
24
P.
Connect surge arresters to ground.
24
25
25
26
Q.
Panel -Mounted Instruments:
26
27
1. Mount and wire so removal or replacement may be
27
28
accomplished without interruption of service to
28
29
adjacent devices.
29
30
2. Locate all devices mounted inside enclosures so
30
31
terminals and adjustment devices are readily
31
32
accessible without use of special tools and with
32
33
terminal markings clearly visible.
33
34
34
35
R.
See Section 16120.
35
36
36
37
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
37
38
38
39
A.
See Section 01650.
39
40
40
41
B.
Maintain accurate daily log of all startup
41
42
activities, calibration functions, and final setpoint
42
43
adjustments.
43
44
44
45
C.
In the event that instrument air is not available
45
46
during calibration and testing, supply either
46
47
filtered, dry, instrument quality air from a portable
47
48
compressor or bottled, dry, instrument quality air.
48
49
Do not, under any circumstances, apply hydrostatic
49
50
test to any part of the air supply system or
50
51
pneumatic control system.
51
52
52
West'Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13440-14
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
D. Instrumentation Calibration:
01
1.
Verify that all instruments and control devices
02
are calibrated to provide the performance
03
required by the Contract Documents.
04
2.
Calibrate all field -mounted instruments, other
05
than local pressure and temperature gages, after
06
the device is mounted in place to assure proper
07
installed operation.
08
3.
Calibrate in accordance with the manufacturer's
09
specifications.
10
4.
Bench calibrate pressure and temperature gages.
11
Field mount gage within 1 day of calibration.
12
5.
Calibrate each transmitter and gage across its
13
specified range at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100
14
percent. Check for both increasing and
15
decreasing input signals to detect hysteresis.
16
6.
Replace any instrument which cannot be properly
17
adjusted.
18
7.
Stroke control valves with clean dry air to
19
verify control action, positioner settings, and
20
solenoid functions.
21
S.
Mark range, date, setpoint and calibrator's
22
initials on each instrument by means of blue or
23
black ink on a waterproof tag affixed to the
24
instrument.
25
9.
Certify calibration equipment by an independent
26
agency with traceability to NISI immediately
27
prior to utilization of the equipment on this
28
Project. Re -certify calibration equipment if the
29
accuracy of the equipment is questioned by the
30
Engineer.
31
10.
Dead weight calibrate precision test gages and
32
use as secondary calibration standards.
33
Recalibrate precision test gages on a weekly
34
basis or as requested by Engineer. Provide a
35
dead weight tester certified with traceability to
36
NIST.
37
38
E. Loop checkout requirements are as follows:
39
1.
Check control signal generation, transmission,
40
reception and response for all control loops
41
under simulated operating conditions by imposing
42
a signal on the loop at the instrument
43
connections. Use actual signals where available.
44
Closely observe controllers, recorders, alarm and
45
trip units, remote setpoints, ratio systems, and
46
other control components. Make corrections as
47
required. Following any corrections, retest the
48
loop as before.
49
2.
Stroke all control valves, cylinders, drives and
50
connecting linkages from the local control
51
station and from the control room operator
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13440-15
O1
interface.
02
3. Check all interlocks to the maximum extent
03
possible.
04
4. In addition to any other as -recorded documents,
05
record all setpoint and calibration changes on
06
all affected Contract Documents and turn over to
07
the Owner.
08
09
F. Provide verification of system assembly, power,
10
ground, and I/O tests.
11
12
G. verify existence and measure adequacy of all grounds
13
required for instrumentation and controls.
14
15
H. During the demonstration period, observe each signal
16
circuit for the existence of electrical noise.
17
1. Utilize noise suppression techniques given in
18
Section 6.5, "Suppressive Techniques," of IEEE
19
518 for all circuits for which electrical noise
20
introduces an error greater than the
21
instrumentation accuracy.
22
23
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
13442-1
O1
02
9GK12
SECTION 13442
01
02
03
03
04
PRESSURE AND LEVEL CONTROLS
04
05
05
06
06
07
PART
1 - GENERAL
07
08
08
09
1.01
SUMMARY
09
10
10
11
A.
Section Includes:
11
12
1. Pressure sensors and switches.
12
13
2. Level sensors and switches.
13
14
14
15
B.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily
15
16
limited to:
16
17
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract
17
18
Forms; and Conditions of the Contract.
18
19
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
19
20
3. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process
20
21
Control: General Requirements.
21
22
4. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic
22
23
Requirements.
23
24
5. Section 15061 - Pipe: Steel.
24
25
25
26
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
26
27
27
28
A.
Referenced Standards:
28
29
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
29
30
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
30
31
a. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
31
32
b. PTC 19.3, Instruments and Apparatus, Part 3
32
33
Temperature Measurement.
33
34
c. MC96.1, Temperature Measurement
34
35
Thermocouples.
35
36
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
36
37
a. Fluid Meters, Sixth Edition.
37
38
4. American Society for Testing and Materials
38
39
(ASTM):
39
40
a. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron
40
41
Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
41
42
Fittings.
42
43
b. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or
43
44
Rolled Alloy - Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged
44
45
Fittings and Valves and Parts for High
45
46
Temperature Service.
46
47
C. A240, Standard Specification for
47
48
Heat -Resisting Chromium and Chromium -Nickel
48
49
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
49
50
Pressure Vessels.
50
51
d. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or
51
52
Valve Bronze Castings.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13442-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
S. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
01
(NEMA) :
02
a. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and
03
Systems.
04.
05
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
06.
07
A.
The pressure and level controls described in this
08
Section shall function to regulate the non -potable
09
water system. The system has been designed to
10
maintain not less than 40 PSI under all conditions.
11
12
1.04
SUBMITTALS
13
14
A.
Shop Drawings:
15
1. See Sections 01340 and 13440.
16
17
B.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
18
1. See Section 01340.
19
20
21
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
22
23
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
24
25
A.
Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
26
the Manufacturers listed in the articles describing
27 r-•.,
each element are acceptable.
28
29
B.
Submit requests for substitutions in accordance with
30
Specification Section 01640.
31
32
2.02
PRESSURE COMPONENTS
33
34
A.
Pressure Transmitters:
35
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
36
a. Rosemount.
37
b. Foxboro.
38
C. Fisher Controls.
39
d. Fischer and Porter.
40
2. Materials:
41
3. Design and fabrication:
42
a. Output: 4-20 mA DC proportional to pressure.
43
b. Solid-state electronics.
44
C. Power supply: 24 V DC.
45
d. Adjustable zero and span.
46
e. Temperature limits: -20 to 160 DegF.
47
f. Overpressure limits: :Withstand 150 percent
48
of stated maximum service pressure without
49
damage.
50
g. Humidity limits: 0 to 100 percent relative
51
humidity.
52 r�
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
13442-3
01
h.
Damping: Time constant adjustable between
02
0.2 and 1.67 seconds.
03
i.
Accuracy (includes effects of linearity,
04
repeatability and hysteresis): ±0.2
05
percent of calibrated span.
06
j.
Linearity: ±0.1 percent of calibrated
07
span.
08
k.
Hysteresis: ±0.1 percent of calibrated
09
span.
10
1.
Stability: ±0.2 percent of upper range
11
limit for 6 months.
12
M.
Temperature effect at maximum calibrated
13
span: (1) Zero error: ±0.5 percent of
14
span per 100 DegF. (2) Total effect
15
including span and zero errors: ±1.0
16
percent of span per 100 DegF.
17
n.
Temperature effect at minimum calibrated
18
span: (1) Zero error: ±3.0 percent of
19
span per 100 DegF. (2) Total effect
20
including span and zero errors: ±3.5
21
percent of span per 100 DegF.
22
o.
Minimum 1/4 IN pressure connection.
23
p.
Zero elevation: 600 percent of calibrated
24
span.
25
q.
Zero suppression: 500 percent of calibrated
26
span.
27
r.
If transmitter is associated with any trip or
28
alarm setpoints, range so that setpoints do
29
not fall within 5 percent of the high or low
30
end of the range.
31
s.
Range: 10-15 percent over the actual process
32
operating range.
33
t.
Equip with test jacks or accessible terminals
34
for testing output.
35
36
B. Pressure Switches:
37
1.
Acceptable manufacturers:
38
a.
Mercoid.
39
b.
Automatic Switch Company.
40
c.
United Electric.
41
2.
Materials:
42
a.
Wetted switch elements: 316 stainless steel.
43
b.
Diaphragm seal housing: 316 stainless steel.
44
c.
Pressure snubber;
45
1) Filter disc: 316 stainless steel.
46
2) Housing: Brass.
47
3.
Accessories:
48
a.
Provide ball valve to isolate pressure switch
49
from source.
50
4.
Design and fabrication:
51
a.
Utilize hermetically sealed mercury contact
52
switches.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5o
51
52
13442-4
O1 b. Two SPDT contacts rated:
02 1) 1 amp inductive at 125 V DC.
03 2) 5 A inductive at 120 V AC.
04 c. Switch set points:
05 1) Below 1,000 psi: (a) Set points between
06 30 and 70 percent of switch rated working
07 range. (b) Operating pressure not to
08 exceed 75 percent of switch rated working
09 range.
10 d. Accuracy: Better than 1 percent of full
it scale.
12
13 2.03 LEVEL ELEMENTS
14
15 A. Float -Tilt Type Level Switches:
16 1. Acceptable manufacturers:
17 a. Anchor Scientific Inc.
18 b. Consolidated Electric.
19 2. Materials:
20 a. Float material: Polypropylene or teflon
21 coated type 316 stainless steel.
22 b. Cable jacket: PVC, neoprene or equal.
23 C. Cable clamp: Polypropylene or 316 stainless
24 steel.
25 d. Design and fabrication:
26 1) Sealed mercury switch in float.
27 2) Provide switch complete with flexible
28 electrical cables.
29 3) SPDT contact rated at 4.5 A at 120 V
30 AC.
31 4) Direct acting float switch: a) Switch
32 actuates on rising level. b) Switch
33 deactuates when liquid falls 1 IN below
34 actuation level.
35 5) Terminate cables in junction box.
36
37 B. Capacitance Type Level Switch:
38 1. Acceptable manufacturers:
39 a. Endress and Hauser.
40 b. Drexelbrook Engineering Company.
41 c. Magnatrol.
42 2. Materials:
43 a. Probe: 316 stainless steel.
44 3. Design and fabrication:
45 a. Unaffected by material build-up on probe.
46 b. Compatible with bulk density of process
47 material.
48 c. Probe temperature rating: 1) At least as
49 great as maximum possible process
50 temperature. 2) Minimum: 300 DegF.
51 d. Electronics temperature rating: -40 DegF to
52 140 DegF.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
13442-5
O1
e. Contact outputs: 5 amps at 126 V AC.
02
03
C. Float Type Level Transmitter:
04
1. Materials:
05
a. Float: 316 stainless steel.
06
b. Float arm: 316 stainless steel.
07
c. Transmitter case: Cast aluminum.
08
2. Design and fabrication:
09
a. Single water float operated type
10
transmitters.
11
b. Self-contained and capable of providing
12
continuous signed transmission.
13
c. Transmitter float:
14
1) Direct acting type requiring no float
15
pipe, stilling well, or other such
16
device.
17
2) Counter balanced float and float arm.
18
3) Universal type brackets to permit
19
mounting directly in flow stream.
20
d. Transmitter case:
21
1) Bolted and gasketed cover.
22
2) Cover mating surfaces machined.
23
3) Prevent water intrusion through outboard
24
bearing.
25
4) Complete unit waterproof and capable of
26
operating under submerged conditions.
27
3. Schedule:
28
29
TAG NUMBER SERVICE RANGE
30
31
32
2.04 ACCESSORIES
33
34
A. Furnish all mounting brackets, hardware and
35
appurtenances required for mounting primary elements
36
and transmitters.
37
1. Materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be
38
as follows:
39
a. Bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors: 316
40
stainless steel.
41
b. Mounting brackets:
42
1) Standard: 316 stainless steel.
43
c. Mounting plates, angles:
44
1) Standard: carbon steel.
45
46
47
PART 3 - EXECUTION
48
49
3.01 INSTALLATION
50
51
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
52
instructions.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
13442-6
O1 01
02 END OF SECTION 02
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
14300-1
O1
2L18,
7J23 SECTION 14300
01
02
02
03
HOISTS FOR BRIDGE CRANES
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Work included consists of but is not necessarily
09
10
limited to:
10
11
1. Section 14305: Bridge cranes.
11
12
12
13
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
14
14
15
A.
Refer to latest editions of following standards for
15
16
detailed specification requirements for materials,
16
17
methods, tests and physical parameters:
17
18
18
19
Hoist Manufacturers Institute (HMI)
19
20
20
21
HMI 100 Standard Specifications for Electric Wire Rope
21
22
Hoists
22
23
23
24
HMI 200 Standard Specifications for Hand Operated Chain
24
25
Hoists
25
26
27
HMI 400 Standard Specifications for Electric Chain Hoists27
26
28
28
29
B.
Furnish equipment made by a recognized reputable
29
30
manufacturer.
30
31
31
32
C.
Insure that all equipment selected is locally
32
33
serviceable with replacement parts readily available.
33
34
34
35
D.
After installation is complete, secure and pay for
35
36
services of a representative of equipment supplier
36
37
and provide supervision of any final adjustments.
37
38
38
39
E.
Give Owner's personnel complete instructions
39
40
regarding proper operation and maintenance
40
41
procedures.
41
42
42
43
F.
Secure from manufacturer's representative a written
43
44
report stating installation has been examined and
44
45
units are installed properly and in accordance with
45
46
manufacturer's recommendations.
46
47
47
48
G.
Submit this report to Architect and Owner.
48
49
49
50
1.03
SUBMITTALS
50
51
51
52
A.
Shop drawings:
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
14300-2
O1
1. Include with shop drawings structural
02
calculations for track, supports, reports of
03
tests verifying strength of inserts and rail,
04
track layout including arrangement of supports,
05
splices, and connections, and details of hoists,
06
trolleys, etc.
07
08
B.
Product data.
09
10
C.
Contract closeout information:
11
1. Maintenance data.
12
2. Owner instruction report.
13
14
1.04
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
15
16
A.
Handle, unload, and store equipment in full
17
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
18
19
20
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
21
22
2.01
SCHEDULE OF CONVEYING SYSTEMS
23
24
A.
General:
25
1. Provide systems as indicated.
26
2. Acknowledge and verify that wheel load is less
27
than maximum wheel load specified.
28
3. "Hook height" is minimum acceptable distance from
29
bottom of hook in full raised position to nearest
30
floor surface.
31
4. "Lifting height is distance from bottom of hook
32
in full raised position to lowest floor from
33
which items may be hoisted.
34
5. Distances listed are approximate since they will
35
vary depending on hoist and trolley selection..
36
6. Refer to Structural Drawings for location of
37
cranes, monorails, bridge crane rails, etc.
38
39
B.
Locate lifting equipment as indicated, of following
40
types:
41
1. Bridge crane.
42
43
2.02
ELECTRIFICATION AND CONTROLS
44
45
A.
Provide electrical power to motor driven hoists,
46
trolleys, and cranes using one of following methods:
47
1. Festoon tagline system. Equip with plastic
48
wheels in areas with an NEC classification of
49
Class I, Division 1 or 2, Group D. Include all
50
components needed for a complete and operable
51
system.
52
2. Cable reel system with (360-degree swivel base)
West -Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
14300-3
01
(330-degree pivot base) and with full working
02
length of cable plus 25 percent. Include all
03
components needed for a complete and operable
04
system.
05
3.
Enclosed figure 8 safety conductor system:
06
Duct-o-Bar or Insul-8. Include collectors and
07
all other components necessary for a complete,
08
operable system.
09
10
B. Controls:
11
1.
Provide pendant push button control stations with
12
reversing type contactors for electric hoists,
13
trolleys, and cranes.
14
2.
Provide single station if hoist, trolley and
15
crane are motor driven.
16
3.
Suspend control stations from trolleys for
17
monorails.
18
4.
Suspend control station from roller track for
19
bridge crane systems, to permit operator to
20
control crane motions from from any point across
21
width of span and up to 30 degrees from
22
perpendicular.
23
5.
Clearly mark function of each button.
24
6.
Suspend station in a manner that will protect
25
electric conductors against strain.
26
7.
Control station operable from 115-volt power
27
supply.
28
8.
Ground control station to hoist.
29
9.
Provide ON/OFF buttons.
30
31
32
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
33
34
3.01 INSTALLATION - APPLICATION - ERECTION
35
36
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
14305-1
01
9J01,
7J23 SECTION 14305
01
02
02
03
BRIDGE CRANES
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
07
08
08
09
A.
Refer to most recent editions of following standards
09
10
for detailed specification requirements for
10
11
materials, methods, tests and physical parameters:
11
12
12
13
Crane Manufacturers Association of America
13
14
1326 Freeport Road
14
15
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15238
15
16
16
17
CMAA No.70 Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling17
18
Cranes
18
19
19
20
CMAA No.74 Specification for Top Running and Under Runnin20
21
Single Girder Electric Overhead Traveling
Cran21
22
22
23
B.
See Section 14300.
23
24
24
25
C.
Have all welding done by certified welders in
25
,�+►�
26
accordance with American Welding Society Standards.
26
27
27
28
1.02
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1 and Section 14300)
28
29
29
30
A.
Contract closeout information:
30
31
1. Maintenance data.
31
32
32
33
33
34
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
34
35
35
36
2.01
CRANE CONSTRUCTION - SINGLE GIRDER TYPE
36
37
37
38
A.
General:
38
39
1. Provide underhung single girder bridge crane(sl
39
40
as indicated.
40
41
2. Design load carrying parts, except structural
41
42
members and gears, so that calculated stress in
42
43
material, based on rated load, does not exceed 20
43
44
percent of published average ultimate strength of
44
45
material.
45
46
3. Comply with CMAA No.74 unless noted otherwise.
46
47
4. Ten (10) ton capacity.
47
48
48
49
B.
Trolley and hoist:
49
50
1. Provide trolley and hoist compatible with
"50
51
specified and scheduled bridge crane.
51
52
2. Trolley and hoist comply with Section 14300 and
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
14305-2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
i5
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
this section.
C. Runway rails (Section 13121):
1. Provide runway rails under contract for
pre-engineered buildings, Section 13121.
Coordinate with Sections 14300 and 14305.
2. Provide straight, parallel and level rails at
same elevation.
3. Make distance C to C and elevation within
tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 IN.
4. Design runway with sufficient strength and
rigidity to prevent detrimental lateral or
vertical movement.
D. Girder:
1. Construct crane girder of structural steel from
standard structural shapes.
2. Design girder to resist vertical, lateral and
torsional stresses as defined by CMAA No.74.
3. Maximum vertical deflection of girder produced by
dead load, weight of trolley and hoist and rated
load not exceeding 1/600 of span.
4. Locate safety stops at each end of girder to
prevent over -travel of trolley hoist.
E. End trucks:
1. Carry crane bridge on end trucks of ample size to
carry rated load when lifted at one end of
bridge.
2. End truck wheelbase a minimum of 1/8 of crane
span.
3. Construct end truck from structural channels
welded and bolted into a rigid box section to
assure proper alignment of axles.
4. Design truck so that drop of truck is limited to
1 IN in case of axle or wheel failure.
5. Equip motorized top running cranes with rail
sweeps extending below top rail and projecting in
front of crane wheels.
F. Crane wheels:
1. Top running double flanged wheels of forged steel
or cast iron or cast carbon or alloy steel.
2. Support each wheel on roller bearings mounted on
axles suitable to take radial and thrust loads.
3. Factory lubricate and seal bearings to exclude
dirt and grease leakage.
4. Wheels may be heat treated.
G. Crane drives:
1. Provide each end truck with a helical gear motor
reducer.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
14305-3
01
2. Provide totally enclosed fan cooled motors.
02
3. Motors integral with fully enclosed oil splash
03
lubricated gear reducers.
04
4. Support gear reduction shaft by precision ball or
05
roller bearings.
06
07
H.
Bearings: Design bearings for minimum 5000 hours
08
B-10 bearing life.
09
10
I.
Gearing:
11
1. Provide adequate and proper lubrication on all
12
gearing.
13
2. Run all gearing except final reduction at wheels
14
in oil or be splash lubricated.
15
3. Comply with AGMA specifications for load ratings.
16
4. Guard all gears not enclosed in gear boxes, which
17
might constitute a hazard under normal operating
18
conditions, make provisions for lubrication and
19
inspection.
20
5. Securely fasten guards.
21
6. Design guards to support minimum of a 200 LB man
22
without permanent distortion.
23
24
J.
Bridge brake: Capable of stopping bridge motion in a
25
distance in feet equal to 10 percent of full load
26
speed (in FPM) when traveling at full speed with full
`
27
load.
28
29
K.
Bumpers and stops: _
30
1. Provide bridge bumpers capable of stopping crane
31
at a rate of deceleration not to exceed 3 FPS
32
when traveling in either direction at 20 percent
33
of rated speed.
34
2. Design bumpers with sufficient damping capacity
35
to stop crane traveling full speed with full
36
load.
37
3. Provide runway stops designed to resist full load
38
speed.
39
4. Locate stops at limit of bridge travel.
40
5. Runway stops shall not engage wheel treads.
41
42
L.
Electrical supply:
43
1. Provide disconnect switch with crane to open all
44
ungrounded conductors.
45
a. Fused.
46
2. Disconnect switch to meet requirements of
47
Division 16.
48
3. Locate disconnect switch as shown on electrical
49
drawings.
50
4. Electrical supply supplied to mainline contactor
51
and bridge control.
52
a. Spring return cord reel.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
14305-4
01
02
M.
Electrical controls:
03
1. Single -speed.
04
2. Bridge control energized from mainline contactor.
05
06
N.
Luminaire:
07
1. Provide 1 luminaire, on trolley hoist.
08
2. Luminaire: Enclosed and gasketed 250 watt high
09
pressure sodium fixture; high power factor (0.95)
10
fused ballast with lower starting current than
11
operating current, 18 percent maximum ballast
12
regulation, maximum of 1.8 lamp current crest
13
factor; spun aluminum or alzac reflector; lens on
14
a safety chain; snap action power hook, twistlock
15
plug and receptacle; and safety chain.
16
3. Luminaires provide illumination whenever mainline
17
contactor to crane is energized.
18
19
20
PART 3
- EXECUTION
21
22
3.01
INSTALLATION
23
24
A.
By manufacturer or authorized representative.
25
26
B.
Assure all required components are properly
27
installed.
28
29
C.
Verify operation prior to substantial completion and -
30
correct all deficiencies.
31
32
3.02
OPERATIONAL TESTING
33
34
A.
Perform in presence of Owner.
35
36
B.
Instruct Owner's personnel in correct operation and
37
Maintenance.
38
39
3.03
FINAL CLEANUP
40
41
A.
Leave unit in correct operational condition.
42
43
B.
Perform final cleaning.
44
45
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010-1
O1
96A03
SECTION 15010
02
03
MECHANICAL: BASIC REQUIREMENTS
04
05
06
PART
1 - GENERAL
07
08
1.01
SUMMARY
09
10
A.
Section Includes:
11
1. Mechanical equipment.
12
13
B.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily
14
limited to:
15
1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms_, and
16
Conditions of the Contract.
17
2. Division 1 - General Provisions.
18
3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.
19
4. Section 15090 - Pipe Support Systems.
20
5. Division 16 - Electrical.
21
22
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24
A.
Comply with requirements of Section 11005.
25
26
B.
Perform work in strict accordance with rules,
27
regulations, codes, ordinances, or laws of Local,
28
State, and Federal governments, or of other
29
authorities having lawful jurisdiction. Such rules,
30
regulations, codes, ordinances, or laws include but
31
are not necessarily limited to the following:
32
1. State building and fire codes.
33
2. State plumbing and mechanical codes.
34
3. City building and fire codes.
35
4. City plumbing and mechanical codes.
36
5. American Gas Association (AGA).
37
6. National Electric Code (NEC).
38
7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
39
8. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
40
41
C.
Referenced Standards:
42
1. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).
43
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
44
a. B40.1, Gauges -Pressure Indicating Dial Type
45
Elastic Element.
46
3. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and
47
Air -Conditioning Engineer (ASHRAE).
48
4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
49
5. American Society for Testing and Materials
50
(ASTM) :
51
a. A36, Specification for Structural Steel.
52
6. Factory Mutual Association (FM).
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010-2
O1
7. Instrument Society of America (ISA):
02
a. 520, Specification Forms for Process
03
Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary
04
Elements and Control Valves.
05
8. National Electric Manufacturers Association
06
(NEMA) .
07
9. Sheet Metal and Air -Conditioning National
08
Contractors Association (SMACNA).
09
10
1.03
DEFINITIONS
11
12
A.
Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is
13
the person actually installing or applying the
14
product in the field at the Project site.
15
1. Installer or applicator are synonymous.
16
17
1.04
SUBMITTALS
18
19
A.
See Section 01340.
20
21
B.
Verify on sheet metal shop drawings dimensions,
22
transverse joints, reinforcement, seams, seals,
23
fittings, hangers and miscellaneous appurtenances.
24
Include on fabrication drawings location and
25
connection details of jointed sections to permit
26
access and maintenance of connected equipment,
27
dampers, and controls and to permit removal of
28
connected equipment without disturbing main duct
29
system.
30
31
C.
Submit copies of any manufacturer's written
32
directions regarding equipment and material handling,
33
installation, operation and maintenance.
34
35
D.
Detail coordinations, connections, offsets and
36
crossovers in work.
37
38
E.
Locate and dimension equipment items with reference
39
to other items of work accurately.
40
41
F.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
42
1. See Section 01340.
43
44
1.05
PERMITS
45
46
A.
Permits, Fees, Licenses,,and Inspections:
47
1. Make arrangements for, obtain, and pay for
48
necessary permits, licenses, and inspections.
49
Pay necessary fees in conjunction with mechanical
50
work.
51
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010-3
01
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
�r
02
03
2.01 MATERIALS
04
05
A. Unions:
06
1. Provide union between valves and connection to
07
each item as required to make up or disconnect
08
piping. Install unions to facilitate removal of
09
parts, equipment of fixtures, for inspection or
10
cleaning. Install in position which will permit
11
device, fixture or part to be removed without
12
disconnecting piping except unions.
13
2. Use unions of type and material specified under
14
each piping specification.
15
3. Where mechanical type couplings are used, they
16
may serve as unions. Make connections between
17
couplings and flanged equipment with flanges and
18
flexible couplings.
19
20
B. Drains:
21
1. Install drain in sump access pad as indicated or
22
as required to permit complete drainage pad onto
23
sidewall drainage as indicated in Drawings. Use
24
drain consisting of 3/4 IN globe valve with hose
25
adapter.
26
2. Regardless of pipe size, where drains are
27
installed on piping over electrical equipment or
28
over other piping on equipment where access to
29
drain valve is difficult, pipe these drain valves
30
to accessible location with hose bibb adapter
31
such that system may be drained without'damage to
32
equipment insulation of finished spaces.
33
3. Coordinate work to avoid piping over electrical
34
components (not rated NEMA 4 or better) or
35
provide minimum 16 GA 316 stainless steel pans to
36
protect the electric components. Slope and pipe
37
these pans to drains.
38
39
C. Sleeves:
40
1. Furnish and install sleeves where required for
41
installation of work under this Division.
42
2. Where sleeves are set in walls for future
43
connections, close opening with lightweight
44
concrete.
45
3. Set sleeves true to line, grade, position and
46
plumb or level and maintain so during
47
construction.
48
49
D. Pipes and Anchors:
50
1. Comply to requirements of Section 15090.
51
2. Furnish and install pipe anchors as indicated, or
52
as required to permit complete installation of
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010-4
O1 system.
02 3. Anchors of sufficient strength structural shapes
03 and stainless steel rods with turnbuckles are
04 acceptable unless detailed otherwise.
05 4. Provide hanger rod anchoring devices, installed
06 in concrete, of hard metal type which do not
07 depend on soft lead for their holding power.
08
09 E. Equipment Anchors:
10 1. Comply to requirements of Section 11005.
11
12 F. Electric Wiring, Motors and Controls:
13 1. Comply to requirements of Sections 11005 and
14 Division 16.
15
16
17 PART 3 - EXECUTION
18
19 3.01 INSTALLATION
20
21 A. Cutting, Fitting, Repairing, Patching, and Finishing:
22 1. Arrange and pay for cutting, fitting, repairing,
23 patching, and finishing of work of other trades
24 where it is necessary to disturb such work to
25 permit installation of mechanical work. Perform
26 work only with craftsmen skilled in their
27 respective trades.
28 2. Avoid cutting, insofar as possible, by setting
29 sleeves, frames, and related work and by
30 requesting openings in advance. Assist other
31 trades in securing correct location and placement
32 of rough -frames, sleeves, openings, and related
33 work for piping.
34 3. Before cutting obtain permission from Engineer.
35 Cut holes neatly and as small as possible to
36 admit work. Include cutting where sleeves or
37 openings have been omitted. Perform cutting in
38 manner so as not to weaken walls, partitions or
39 floors. Drill holes cut in floors without
40 breaking out around holes.
41 4. Where cutting of holes through reinforced
42 concrete is necessary, cut by rotary type drill.
43 Use of pneumatic hammer type drills, impact type
44 electric drills, and hand or manual hammer type
45 drills will not be allowed. Locate holes so as
46 not to affect structural sections such as ribs or
47 beams. Layout holes in advance and perform
48 drilling only after approval by Engineer.
49 5. Where alterations are necessary, including
50 outside trenching; disturbing lawns, walks,
51 paving, etc., or where new or old work join, cut,
52 remove, patch, repair and restore adjacent
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1'Construction
15010-5
O1
surface's and leave in;as good condition as
^�
02
existed prior to start of work.
03
04
B. Installation of Equipment:
05
1. Comply to requirements of Section 11005.
06
2. Use galvanized structural steel installed in
07
areas of high humidity or locations where
08
moisture may collect due to condensation.
09
3. Use structural steel members conforming to ASTM
10
A36. Furnish with shop coat of red lead primer.
11
Retouch primer after field welding.
12
13
C. Provisions for Later Installation:
14
1. When mechanical work can not be installed as
15
structure is being erected, provide and arrange
16
for building -in of boxes, sleeves, insets,
17
fixtures or devices necessary to permit
18
installation later. Lay out chases, holes or
19
other openings which must be provided in masonry,
20
concrete or other work.
21
2. Verify nature and arrangements of materials and
22
construction to which this work attaches or
23
passes through.
24
25
D. Access to Equipment for Maintenance:
26
1. Install equipment and piping in such manner as to
27
permit access for.normal maintenance. Maintain
28
easy access to motors, drives, compressors, and
29
arrange piping, conduit, and related work to
30
facilitate maintenance. Perform relocation of
31
pipes and other obstacles required to permit
32
access at request of Engineer at no additional
33
cost to Owner.
34
2. Provide access doors or panels in walls, floors,
35
and ceilings to permit access to valves,
36
strainers, traps, cleanouts, motors, and
37
equipment and piping requiring service.
38
3. Size of access panels to allow inspection and
39
removal of items served, minimum 12 x 12 IN size.
40
Fabricate door and frame of minimum 14 GA,
41
stretcher leveled stock, cadmium plated or
42
galvanized after fabrication and fitted with
43
screw driver lock of cam type. Provide with key
44
locks, keyed alike, in public use areas. Furnish
45
panels with prime coat of paint. Style and type
46
as required for material in which door installed.
47
Where door is installed in fire -rated
48
construction, provide door bearing UL label
49
required for condition.
50
51
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010-6
01 A. Balancing and Performance Tests:
02 1. On date predetermined and agreed upon by
03 manufacturer, Engineer, and Installer, prior to
04 acceptance of installation by Owner, conduct
05 various tests witnessed by Engineer to determine
06 operational and functional acceptability of
07 equipment installed. Tests will determine that
08 items of equipment and materials installed fully
09 meet requirements as to type, quality, design,
10 and performance as stipulated in Contract
11 Documents. If any work performed or any
12 equipment furnished and installed is found to be
13 defective take remedial measures and arrange for
14 new tests at no extra cost to Owner. If, after
15 retests, installation is still found to be
16 inadequate remove defective equipment and
17 reinstall equipment of operational adequacy to
18 satisfy Engineer that Contract Documents have
19 been satisfied. Perform this work at no
20 additional cost to Owner.
21
22 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010A-1
01 6A26 SECTION 15010A
02
03 SPECIAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
04
05 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07 1.01 DESCRIPTION
08
09 A. Description of system:
10 1. Special mechanical requirements.
11 a. Access doors, panels, and frames.
12 b. Equipment guards.
13 c. Motors and controls.
14 d. Rain hoods and counter flashings.
15 e. Penetrations.
16 f. Structural steel for supports.
17
18 B. Drawings use and interpretation:
19 1. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general
20 arrangement of systems and equipment, except when
21 specifically dimensioned or detailed.
22 2. For exact locations of building elements, refer
23 to dimensioned architectural/structural drawings.
24 3. Field measurements take precedence over
25 dimensioned drawings.
26 4. Piping and ductwork plans are intended to
f 27 indicate size, capacity, approximate location,
28 direction and general relationship of one work
29 phase to another, but not exact detail or
30 arrangement.
31
32 C. Installation of systems and equipment:
33 1. Installation is subject to clarification as
34 indicated in reviewed Shop and Field Coordination
35 Drawings.
36 a. Generally, lay out piping requiring gravity
37 drainage first; then lay out large pipe
38 mains, ductwork and electrical conduit.
39 b. This procedure is intended to promote orderly
40 installation, but not to establish trade
41 precedence.
42 c. Dimensions indicated are limiting dimensions.
43 d. Do not use equipment exceeding dimensions
44 indicated on detail drawings or arrangements
45 that reduce required clearances or exceed
46 specified maximum dimensions.
47 e. In mechanical equipment room corridors and
48 aisle ways, maintain clear head room between
49 floor and underside of ducts, pipes, and
50 equipment to allow for future replacing of
51 equipment and major components (e.g., coils,
52 fans, heat exchangers, pumps).
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16
17
15010A-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
D. Description of systems: Furnish and install
materials resulting, upon completion, in functioning
systems in compliance with performance requirements
specified, and modifications resulting from reviewed
Shop and Field Coordination Drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with following codes:
1. State and city building, plumbing and mechanical
codes.
a. Standard Building Code, 1994 Edition.
b. Life Safety Code Handbook, 1985 Edition.
c. NFPA, 1994 Edition, or current Edition.
2. American Gas Association.
3. National Electrical Code.
4. National Fire Protection Association.
5. Authorities having jurisdiction.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. Access doors, panels and frames.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Provide covering and shielding for equipment provided
to protect from damage.
B. Repair, restore and replace damaged items.
C. Protect nameplates on motors, pumps and similar
equipment.
D. Protect plumbing fixtures and brass or chromium
plated trim, valves and piping from damage.
E. Keep dirt and debris out of pipes and ducts by
capping or plugging open ends.
1. Keep plug or cap in place until final connections
are made.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cause as little interference or interruption of
existing utilities and services as possible.
1. Schedule work which will cause interference or
interruption in advance with Owner, Construction
Manager, Architect, authorities having
jurisdiction, and affected contractors.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010A-3
01
B.
Keep roads clear of materials and debris.
02
03
C.
Examine Contract Documents to determine how other
04
work will affect execution of mechanical work.
05
06
D.
Examine site and become familiar with existing local
07
conditions affecting work.
08
09
E.
Determine and verify locations of existing utilities
10
on or near site.
11
12
F.
Make arrangements for and pay for necessary permits,
13
licenses, and inspections.
14
15
G.
Record drawings:
16
1. Keep a complete set of mechanical drawings in job
17
site office for indicating actual installation of
18
mechanical systems and equipment.
19
2. Use this set of drawings for no other purpose.
20
3. Where material, equipment, or system components
21
are installed differently from that indicated,
22
indicate such differences clearly and neatly.
23
4. At project completion, submit record set of
24
drawings in accordance with Division 1.
25
r'
26
H.
Operation and maintenance data: See Division 1.
27
28
29
PART
2 - PRODUCTS -
30
31
2.01
GENERAL
32
33
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
34
1. Access doors, panels, and frames:
35
a. Base:
36
(1) Milcor, Inc..
37
b. Optional:
38
(1) J L Industries.
39
(2) Karp Associates, Inc.
40
(3) Potter -Roemer.
41
(4) C E Sparrow Co.
42
(5) Ventfab.
43
(6) Williams Brothers Corp.
44
(7) Zurn.
45
2. Motors:
46
a. Base:
47
(1) Reliance XE.
48
b. Optional:
49
(1) Baldor.
50
(2) Century Electric, E-Plus.
51
(3) General Electric, Energy Saver.
52
(4) Westinghouse.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010A-4
01
3.
Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
02
Document 00440.
03
04
B. Use
only prime quality, new materials, apparatus and
05
equipment.
06
07
2.02 ACCESS DOORS, PANELS, AND FRAMES
08
09
A. Access doors, panels, and frames:
10
1.
Style and type as required for material in which
11
installed.
12
2.
Size:
13
a. As required to allow inspection and removal
14
of items served.
15
b. Minimum 18 x 18 IN.
16
3.
Minimum 14 GA sheet metal, galvanized after
.17
fabrication and factory primed ready for
18
painting.
19
4.
Panels in public areas: Key lock and keyed
20
alike.
21
5.
Fire rated construction:
22
a. Provide in fire rated walls, floors and
23
ceilings.
24
b. UL listed.
25
C. Sandwich type door filled with insulation.
26
d. 1.5 hr(B) fire rating.
27
e. Automatic door closing system.
28
6.
Provide and rough -in at walls, floors, and
29
ceilings as required to permit access to
30
equipment, devices and piping requiring service
31
or adjustment.
32
a. Finish work on gypsum wall board will be
33
accomplished by Section 09250.
34
7.
Rough -in only, final finishing, Section 09250.
35
B.
Access doors, panels, and frames in ductwork:
36
See additional requirements in Section 15880.
37
38
2.03 EQUIPMENT GUARDS
39
40
A. Equipment guards:
41
1.
Use suitable structural frames with minimum 12
42
GA, 3/4 IN galvanized mesh, or expanded metal
43
mesh.
44
2.
Attach to equipment by removable clips and bolts
45
with wing nuts, or other approved connectors.
46
3.
At belts, provide.opening for measuring RPMs.
47
4.
Provide at belts, couplings, moving machinery and
48
equipment in accordance with OSHA.
49
5.
Design for easy access to belts and other items
50
requiring replacement.
51
52
2.04 MOTORS AND CONTROLS
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15010A-5
O1
' 02
A. Motors:
03
1.
Provide motors indicated in Division 15.
04
2.
Motors shall be ball or roller bearing type, high
05
efficiency type, and have starting and running
06
characteristics consistent with torque and speed
07
requirements of driven machine.
08
3.
Motor efficiency:
09
a. NEMA Standard MG1-1993, Table 12-10.
10
b. Indicate full load efficiency on each
11
nameplate.
12
4.
Use motors rated in accordance with NEMA
13
performance standards to carry full nameplate
14
load continuously at maximum temperature rise of
15
40 °C above ambient with service factor of 1:15.
16
5.
Motor load as scheduled.
17
6.
Do not allow load requirements of driven machine
18
to exceed nominal nameplate rating of motor
19
furnished.
20
7.
Do not include service factor when selecting
21
motor load.
22
8.
Motors 1/2 HP and over: 460/3/60.
23
9.
Motors less than 1/2 HP: 115/1/60.
24
10.
Provide for items which require electric drive.
25
11.
Where equipment with motors will be driven by
26
adjustable frequency drives (AFD's), provide
27
motors that are compatible with AFD's.
28
29
B. Motor controls and wiring for controls:
30
1.
Provide complete installation of controls and
31
wiring for controls for Division 15
32
packaged/pre-wired equipment.
33
a. Include line voltage controls, low voltage
34
controls, control switches, starters,
35
disconnects, conduit, and wiring.
36
b. Locate disconnects on outside of equipment
37
enclosures or guards.
38
2.
Starters, disconnects, conduit, and wiring.
39
furnished under Division 15 shall comply with
40
applicable Division 16 specifications.
41
3.
Where equipment is specified with
42
packaged/pre-wired controls, but is furnished
43
instead with loosely shipped components that
44
require field wiring, coordinate complete
45
installation and assume costs.
46
47
2.05 RAIN
HOODS AND COUNTER FLASHINGS
48
49
A. Rain hoods and counter flashings not exposed to view:
50
1.
Stainless steel: Minimum 20 GA.
51
2.
Sheet copper: Minimum 24 OZ/SF.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010A-6
Al
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
B. Rain hoods and counterflashings exposed to view:
1. Material specified in Section 07600.
2.06 PENETRATIONS
A. Maintain fire and smoke ratings where mechanical
items penetrate fire and fire/smoke rated building
elements.
2.07 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR SUPPORTS
A. Structural steel for supports: ASTM-A36/A36M.
1. Galvanize members installed in fan plenums or
areas of high humidity or condensation, and
outside.
2. Furnish other members with shop coat of rust
inhibiting primer.
3. Shop fabricate for field assembly using bolts.
4. Minimize field welding.
5. Retouch primer after field welding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION ,
3.01 GENERAL
A. When changes in location of work are required, obtain
approval of Architect before making change.
1. Make changes at no extra cost. B. Provide necessary offsets and crossovers in piping
and ductwork, whether indicated or not.
C. Install piping and ductwork parallel to walls and
vertically plumb.
D. Do not change indicated sizes without approval of
Architect.
E. Electrical equipment:
1. Install no ductwork or piping in or above
electrical equipment rooms and closets.
2. Install no ductwork or piping above panelboards,
switchboards, motor control centers, or motor
control panels.
3. Floor drains may be installed in floor of
electrical equipment rooms.
F. In elevator machine rooms, install no piping except
floor drains and fire protection piping that
specifically serves the room.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010A-7
01
G.
Roof penetrations:
01
02
1. Make penetrations through roofs prior to
02
03
installation of roofing.
03
04
2. For penetrations required after installation of
04
05
roofing:
05
06
a. In built up roofing (BUR), provide curbs,
06
07
cants and counter flashings.
07
08
b. In elastic sheet roofing (ESR), arrange and
08
09
pay for flashing work by authorized roofer;
09
10
provide counter flashings.
10
11
3. Repair and replace roof construction which is
11
12
damaged by this work in manner which will not
12
13
nullify roof warranty.
13
14
14
15
3.02
LOCATING SERVICEABLE DEVICES
15
16
16
17
A.
Install devices that may require adjustment, service,
17
18
or maintenance in normally accessible locations, or
18
19
provide flush -mounted access doors.
19
20
1. Such devices include but are not limited to
20
21
equipment, valves, filters, motors, drives,
21
22
compressors, unions, traps, strainers,
22
23
thermometers, gauges, switches, measurement
23
24
devices, coils, detectors, dampers, sensors,
24
25
monitors, backflow prevention devices,
25
26
water -hammer arresters, drains, floor sinks,
26
`
27
cleanouts, test stations, signal devices,
27
28
sprinkler heads, air vents, expansion joints, and
28
29
system drains. _
29
30
2. Arrange piping, conduit, ducts, and related work
30
31
to facilitate maintenance.
31
32
3. Relocate items which interfere with access.
32
33
33
34
3.03
CUTTING AND PATCHING
34
35
35
36
A.
Perform or pay for cutting, fitting, repairing,
36
37
patching and finishing of work of other sections
37
38
where it is necessary to disturb such work to permit
38
39
installation of mechanical work.
39
40
40
41
B.
Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves or
41
42
frames, and by requesting openings in advance.
42
43
1. Coordinate locations with work of other sections.
43
44
44
45
C.
Before cutting of structural elements, obtain written
45
46
approval of Architect.
46
47
1. Use only approved methods.
47
48
2. Neatly cut holes as small as possible to admit
48
49
work.
49
50
3. Do not weaken walls or floors; locate holes in
50
51
concrete to miss structural sections.
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010A-8
O1
D.
Locate openings and sleeves to permit neat
02
installation of piping, ductwork and equipment.
03
04
E.
Do not remove or damage fireproofing materials.
05
1. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors
06
prior to installation of fireproofing.
07
2. Repair or replace fireproofing removed or
08
damaged, at no extra cost.
09
10
F.
In existing areas remove and replace existing
11
ceilings for mechanical work if not indicated to be
12
removed on architectural drawings.
13
14
3.04
EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
15
16
A.
See Division 2.
17
18
3.05
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
19
20
A.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's
21
recommendations and as specified.
22
23
B.
Provide necessary anchoring devices and supports.
24
1. Use structural supports suitable for equipment,
25
or as indicated.
26
2. Check loadings and dimensions of equipment with
27
shop drawings.
28
3.` Do not cut, or weld to, building structural
29
members.
30
4. Provide equipment supports even though not
31
detailed on architectural and structural
32
drawings.
33
34
C.
Verify that equipment will fit support layouts-
35
indicated.
36
1. Where substitute equipment is used, revise
.37
indicated supports to fit.
38
39
D.
Arrange for necessary openings to allow entry of
40
equipment.
41
1. Where equipment cannot be installed as structure
42
is being erected, provide and arrange for
43
building in of boxes, sleeves or other devices to
44
allow later installation.
45
46
E.
Install rain hoods and metal counter flashings as
47
indicated, and to make penetrations of mechanical
48
work through walls and roofs water and weathertight.
49
1. Furnish clamps, waterproofing material and labor.
50
2. Where metal flashings are applied over concrete,
51
paint concrete with 1/8 IN of mastic cement
52
first.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010A-9
01
3. Set flashing in mastic cement, watertight.
01
f
02
02
03
F.
Provide concrete foundations (isolation pads) or -
03
04
housekeeping pads for mechanical equipment as follows
04
05
unless indicated otherwise:
05
06
1. Install 3-1/2 IN high concrete housekeeping pads.
06
07
2. Use 3,000 PSI concrete.
07
08
3. Reinforce with No.4 bars, 12 IN OC each way, with
08
09
short No.4 dowels into floor at 24 IN OC each
09
10
way, with 6 IN minimum penetration into floor.
10
it
4. Chamfer top edges 3/4 IN.
11
12
5. Make faces smooth.
12
13
6. Set anchor bolts for equipment.
13
14
14
15
3.06
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OWNER OR OTHER
15
16
DIVISIONS
16
17
17
18
A.
Receive, uncrate and set in place mechanical
18
19
equipment furnished by Owner or other Divisions.
19
20
20
21
B.
Remove, relocate and reinstall existing mechanical
21
22
equipment to be reused.
22
23
23
24
C.
Provide rough -in and final connections to equipment
24
25
requiring mechanical services.
25
26
1. See schedules.
26
27
2. For existing equipment: Obtain rough -in data
27
28
from inspection of same.
28
29
3. For equipment furnished by Owner or other
29
30
divisions: Obtain rough -in data from final shop
30
31
drawings.
31
32
32
33
D.
Install loosely shipped fittings, valves, and other
33
34
items furnished as integral part of equipment.
34
35
35
36
3.07
PAINTING
36
37
37
38
A.
See Section 09900.
38
39
39
40
3.08
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
40
41
41
42
A.
Perform indicated tests to demonstrate workmanship,
42
43
operation, and performance.
43
44
1. Conduct tests in presence of Architect and, if
44
45
required, inspectors of agencies having
45
46
jurisdiction.
46
47
2. Arrange date of tests in advance with Architect,
47
48
manufacturer and installer.
48
49
3. Give inspectors minimum of 24 hours notice.
49
50
4. Furnish or arrange for use of.electrical energy,
50
51
steam, water or gas required for tests.
51
52
5. Furnish materials required for test.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15010A-10
O1
02
B.
Repair or replace equipment and systems found
03
inoperative or defective and retest.
04
1. If equipment or system fails retest, replace it
- 05
with products conforming to Contract Documents.
06
2. Continue remedial measures and retests until
07
satisfactory results are obtained.
08
09
C.
Test equipment and systems for each item, unless
10
otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
11
1. Tests specified_in Section 15990, Testing and
12
Balancing need not be duplicated under other
13
sections.
14
15
3.09
ADJUST AND CLEAN
16
17
A.
Inspect equipment and put in satisfactory working
18
order.
19
20
B.
Clean exposed and concealed items: See Cleaning
21
(Section 01710).
22
1. Clean air surfaces of coils, fans (including fan
23
wheels and motors), air handler plenums and air
24
filter frames.
25
2. Clean floor drains, cleanouts, and plumbing
26
fixtures.
27
3. -Clean specialties such as traps and strainers and
28
equipment surfaces such as pumps, motors,
29
boilers, etc.
30
4. Clean finned elements of fin tube radiation with
31
compressed air.
32
5. Clean piping of tags, debris and other
33
construction materials before insulating or
34
painting.
35
6. Clean debris including dirt and sand out of
36
ductwork.
37
38
3.10
PUTTING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION - START UP
39
40
A.
Prior to substantial completion and building
41
occupancy, at time agreed to by Owner and Architect,
42
put systems into satisfactory operation.
43
1. At first heating or cooling season following
44
substantial completion, put systems not yet
45
operated under their seasonal loads into
46
satisfactory operation.
47
48
B.
Operate systems in satisfactory working order for
49
period of 10 working days.
50
1. After the 10 days, clean debris including dirt
51
and sand out of ductwork.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
1501OA-11
01 END 6F SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
15060-1
O1
96A03 SECTION 15060
02
03
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: BASIC REQUIREMENTS
04
05
06
PART 1 - GENERAL
07
08
1.01 SUMMARY
09
10
A. Section Includes:
11
1. Plumbing manifold piping systems in sump access
12
structure.
13
14
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily
15
limited to:
16
1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and
17
Conditions of the Contract.
18
2. Division 1 - General Provisions.
19
3. Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling, and
20
Compacting for Utilities.
21
4. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.
22
5. Section 15090 - Pipe Support Systems.
23
6. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements.
24
7. Section 15010 - Mechanical: General
25
Requirements.
26
27
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
28
29
A. Referenced Standards:
30
1. American Association of State Highway and
31
Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
32
a. M278, Standard Specification for Class PS 46
33
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe.
34
b. M294, Interim Specification for Corrugated
35
Polyethylene Pipe 12 to 24 Inch Diameter.
36
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
37
a. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
38
b. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
39
c. B16.9, Factory -Made Wrought Steel.
40
Butt -Welding Fittings.
41
d. B16.22, Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder -
42
Joint Pressure Fittings.
43
e. B16.26, Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared
44
Copper Tubes.
45
f. B36.19, Stainless Steel Pipe.
46
g. B40.1, Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type
47
- Elastic Element.
48
h. C110, Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3
49
IN through 48 IN for Water and Other Liquids.
50
i. C115, Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Threaded
51
Flanges.
52
j. C151, Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
15060-2
01
In Metal Molds or Sand -Lined Molds for Water
01
02
or Other Liquids.
02
03
k.
C207, Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for
03
04
Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 IN through 144
04
05
IN.
05
06
3. American Society for Testing and Materials
06
07
(ASTM):
07
08
a.
A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel,
08
09
Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded and
09
10
Seamless.
10
11
b.
A74, Cast -Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
it
12
c.
A106, Standard Specification for Seamless
12
13
Carbon Steel Pipe for High -Temperature
13
14
Service.
14
15
d.
A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron
15
16
Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe
16
17
Fittings.
17
18
e.
A182, Standard Specification for Forged or
18
19
Rolled Alloy Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged
19
20
Fittings and Valves and Parts for High
20
21
Temperature Service.
21
22
f.
A197, Standard Specification for Cupola
22
23
Malleable Iron.
23
24
g.
A234, Standard Specification for Pipe
24
25
Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy
25
26
Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.
26
27
h.
A269, Specification for Seamless and Welded
27
28
Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
28
29
Service.
29
30
i.
A312, Standard Specification for Seamless and
30
31
Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
31
32
j.
A518, Corrosion -Resistant High -Silicon
32
33
Cast -Iron.
33
34
k.
A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron
34
35
Castings.
35
36
1.
A587, Standard Specification for
36
37
Electric -Welded Low -Carbon Steel Pipe for the
37
38
Chemical Industry.
38
39
m.
A774, Standard Specification for As -Welded
39
40
Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings
40
41
for General Corrosive Service at Low and
41
42
Moderate Temperatures.
42
43
n.
A778, Standard Specification for Welded,
43
44
Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular
44
45
Products.
45
46
o.
B88, Seamless.Copper Water Tube (ANSI H23.1).
46
4'7
p.
C14, Standard Specification for Concrete
47
48
Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe.
48
49
q.
C76, Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain
49
50
and Sewer Pipe.
50
51
r.
C301, Standard Test Methods for Vitrified
51
52
Clay Pipe.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060-3
O1
S.
C361, Standard Specifid4t'ion' for Reinforced
02
Concrete Low -Head Pressure Pipe.
03
t.
C425, Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay
04
Bell and Spigot Pipe.
05
U.
C443, Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and
06
Culvert Pipe Using Flexible, Watertight,
07
Rubber Gaskets.
08
v.
C564, Rubber Gaskets for Cast -Iron Soil Pipe
09
and Fittings.
10
w.
C700, Extra Strength and Standard Strength
11
Clay Pipe and Perforated Clay Pipe.
12
x.
D1785, Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl
13
Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly
14
Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds.
15
y.
D2466, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe
16
Fittings, Schedule 40.
17
z.
D2467, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe
18
Fittings, Schedule 80.
19
aa.
D2513, Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe,
20
Tubing, and Fittings.
21
bb.
D2683, Standard Specification for
22
Socket -Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside
23
Diameter- Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and
24
Tubing.
25
cc.
D3212, Standard Specification for Joints for
26
Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipe Using Flexible
27
Elastomeric Seals.
r
28
dd.
D3261, Standard Specification for Butt Heat
29
Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for
30
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing.
31
ee.
D4101, Standard Specification for Propylene
32
Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials.
33
ff.
F438, Standard Specification for Socket -Type
34
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
35
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
36
gg.
F439, Standard Specification for Socket -Type
37
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
38
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
39
hh.
F441, Standard Specification for,Chlorinated
40
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe,
41
Schedules 40 and 80.
42
ii.
F491, Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride)(PVDF)
43
Plastic Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe and
44
Fittings.
45
jj.
F492, Propylene and Polypropylene (PP)
46
Plastic Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe and
47
Fittings.
48
4. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc (UL).
49
50
B. Coordinate flange dimensions and drillings between
51
piping,
valves, and equipment.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060-4
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
.49
50
51
52
1.03 -SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Piping Systems Organization and Definition:
1. Piping services are grouped into designated
systems according to the chemical and physical
properties of the fluid conveyed, system
pressure, piping size and system materials of
construction.
2. Table A below defines each service
classification, its symbol, and the designated
system classification number of each service.
TABLE A. PIPING SERVICES
3. See PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES in PART 3.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340.
2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:
a. Interior piping drawings (minimum scale 1 IN
equals 1 FT) with information including:
1) Dimensions of piping from column lines or
wall surfaces.
2) Centerline dimensions of piping.
3) Centerline elevation and size of
intersecting ductwork, conduit/conduit
racks, or other potential interferences
requiring coordination. -
4) Location and type of pipe supports and
anchors.
5) Locations of valves and valve actuator
type.
6) Details of fittings, tapping locations,
equipment connections, flexible expansion
joints, connections to equipment, and
related appurtenances.
7) Acknowledgement of valve, equipment and
instrument tag numbers.
8) Provisions for 'expansion and contraction.
9) Rough -in data for plumbing fixtures.
3. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet
requirements of standards referenced.
b. Copies of manufacturer's written directions
regarding material handling, delivery,
storage and installation.
c. Separate schedule sheet for each piping
system scheduled in this Section showing
compliance of all system components. Attach
technical product data on gaskets, pipe,
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15060-5
O1
fittings, and other components.
02
4. Test reports:
03
a. Copies of pressure test results on all piping
04
systems.
05
b. Notification of time and date of piping
06
pressure tests.
07
08
B.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
09
1. See Section 01340.
10
11
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
12
13
A.
Protect pipe during handling using methods
14
recommended by manufacturer. Use of bare cables,
15
chains, hooks, metal bars or narrow skids in contact
16
with pipe is not permitted.
17
18
B.
Prevent damage to pipe during transit. Repair
19
abrasions, scars, and blemishes. If repair of _
20
satisfactory quality cannot be achieved, replace
21
damaged material immediately.
22
23
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
24
25
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
26
27
A.
Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
28
the following manufacturers are acceptable:
29
1. Flexhose:
30
a. Tigerflex Series "F".
31
b. Kanaflex PS 101.
32
c. Thermoid Industries.
33
d. Ryan Herco Extra Heavy Duty.
34
e. Hi -Tech Hose, Inc.
35
2. Quick Disconnect Couplings:
36
a. Bee Value, Inc.
37
b. GPW Kamlock.
38
c. Ryan Herco Kaunvalock.
39
40
B.
Submit requests for substitution in accordance with
41
Specification Section 01640.
42
43
2.02
PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES
44
45
A.
Piping system materials, fittings and appurtenances
46
are subject to requirements of specific piping
47
specification schedules located at the end of PART.3
48
of this Section.
49
50
2.03
COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
51
52
A.
Quick Disconnect Couplings:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060-6
01
1. Adapters:
01
02
a. Adapters shall be manufactured to meet MIL
02
03
SPEC C-27487.
03
04
b. Adapters:
04
05
1) Female NPT end connection for leachate
05
06
pump discharge.
06
07
2) Male shank adaptors for upstream flexhose
07
08
connections.
08
09
c. Construct adapters for leachate applications
09
10
from 316 polypropylene.
10
11
2. Couplers:
11
12
a. Couplers shall be manufactured to meet MIL
12
13
SPEC C-27487.
13
14
b. Built-in valve and.spring loaded poppet which
14
15
close automatically when disconnected.
15
16
c. Designed to remainwatertightwith only one
16
17
arm locked in closed position.
17
18
d. Construct couplers from material utilized for
18
19
adapters.
19
20
e. Gasket: EPDM for polypropylene couplers or
20
21
Buna-N for stainless steel.
21
22
3. Dust caps: For all adapters.
22
23
23
24
B. Valves:
24
25
1. See schematics and details for definition of
25
26
manual valves used in each system under 4 IN in
26
27
size.
27
28
2. See Section 15100.
28
29
29
30
30
31
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31
32
32
33
3.01 INTERIOR AND EXPOSED EXTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION
33
34
34
35
A. Install piping in vertical and horizontal alignment
35
36
as shown on Drawings.
36
37
37
38
B.` Alignment of piping smaller than 4 IN may not be
38
39
shown. However, install according to Drawing intent
39
40
and with clearance and allowance for:
40
41
1. Expansion and contraction.
41
42
2. Operation and access to equipment, doors,
42
43
windows, hoists, moving equipment.
43
44
3. Headroom and walking space for working areas and
44
45
aisles.
45
46
4. System drainage and air removal.
46
47
47
48
C. Enter and exit through structure walls, floor and
48
49
ceilings using penetrations and seals specified in
49
50
Section 01800 and as shown on the Drawings.
50
51
51
52
D. Install vertical piping runs plumb and horizontal
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060-7
01
piping runs parallel with structure walls.
02
03
E. Pipe Support:
04
1. Use methods of piping support as shown on
05
Drawings and as required in Section 15090.
06
2. Where pipes run parallel and at same elevation or
07
grade, they may be grouped and supported from
08
common trapeze -type hanger, provided hanger rods
09
are increased in size as specified for total
10
supported weight. The pipe in the group
11
requiring the least maximum distance between
.12
supports shall set the distance between trapeze
13
hangers.
14
3. Size pipe supports with consideration to specific
15
gravity of liquid being piped.
16
17
F. Locate and size sleeves and castings required for
18
piping system. Arrange for chases, recesses, inserts
19
or anchors at proper elevation and location.
20
21
G. Use reducing fittings throughout piping systems.
22
Bushings will not be allowed unless specifically
23
approved.
24
25
H. Equipment Drainage and Miscellaneous Piping:
26
1. Provide drip pans and piping at equipment where
27
condensation may occur.
28
2. Hard pipe spillage in sump access as shown on the
29
contract drawings.
30
3. Avoid piping over electrical components such as
31
motor control centers, panelboards, etc.
32
a. If piping must be so routed, utilize 16 GA,
33
316 stainless steel drip pan under piping and
34
over full length of electrical equipment.
35
b. Hard pipe drainage to nearest floor drain.
36
4. Collect system condensate at drip pockets, traps
37
and blowoff valves.
38
5. Provide drainage for process piping at locations
39
shown on Drawings in accordance with Drawing
40
details.
41
6. For applications defined above and for other
42
miscellaneous piping which is not addressed by a
43
specific piping service category in PART 1,
44
provide 304 stainless steel piping and fittings.
45
Size to handle application with 3/4 IN being
46
minimum size provided.
47
48
I. Unions:
49
1. Install in position which will permit valve or
50
equipment to be removed without dismantling
51
adjacent piping.
52
2. Mechanical type couplings may serve as unions.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060-8
01
3. Additional flange unions are not required at
01
02
flanged connections.
02
03
03
04
J. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow
04
05
expansion/contraction movement.
05
06
06
07
K. Provide full face gaskets on all systems.
07
08
08
09
L. Anchorage and Blocking:
09
10
1. Block, anchor, or harness exposed piping
10
11
subjected to forces in which joints are installed
11
12
to prevent separation of joints and transmission
12
13
of stress into equipment or structural components
13
14
not designed to resist those stresses.
14
15
15
16
M. Equipment Pipe Connections:
16
17
1. Equipment - General:
17
18
a. Exercise care in bolting flanged joints so
18
19
that there is no restraint on the opposite
19
20
end of pipe or fitting which would prevent
20
21
uniform gasket pressure at connection or
21
22
would cause unnecessary stresses to be
22
23
transmitted to equipment flanges.
23
24
b. Where push -on joints are used in conjunction
24
25
with flanged joints, final positioning of
25
26'
push -on joints shall not be made until flange
26
27
joints have been tightened without strain.
27
28
c. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate which
28
29
will result in uniform gasket compression
29
30
over entire area of joint. Provide
30
31
tightening torque in accordance with
31
32
manufacturer's recommendations.
32
33
d. Support and match flange faces to uniform
33
34
contact over their entire face area prior to
34
35
installation of any bolt between the piping
35
36
flange and equipment connecting flange.
36
37
e. Permit piping connected to equipment to
37
38
freely move in directions parallel to
38
39
longitudinal centerline when and while.bolts
39
40
in connection flange are tightened.
40
41
f. Align, level, and wedge equipment into place
41
42
during fitting and alignment of connecting
42
43
piping.
43
44
g. Grout equipment into place prior to final
44
45
bolting of piping but not before initial
45
46
fitting and alignment.
46
47
h. To provide maximum flexibility and ease of
47
48
alignment, assemble connecting piping with
48
49
gaskets in place and minimum of four bolts
49
50
per joint installed and tightened. Test
50
51
alignment by loosening flange bolts to see if
51
52
there is any change in relationship of piping
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060-9
O1
flange with equipment{'connect ng flange.
01
02
Realign as necessary, install flange bolts
02
03
and make equipment connection.
03
04
i. Provide utility connections to equipment
04
05
shown on Drawings, scheduled or specified.
05
06
06
07
N.
Provide insulating components where dissimilar metals
07
08
are joined together.
0$
09
09
10
O.
Gages:
10
11
1. Assure gage position is clear of equipment
11
12
functions and movements and location is protected
12
13
from maintenance and operation of equipment.
13
14
2. Assure gage is readable from an accessible
14
15
standing position.
15
16
3. For piping to 4 IN, utilize tee with branch
16
17
reduced for gage.
17
18
18
19
3.02
FLEXHOSE
19
20
20
21
A.
Design Considerations:
21
22
1. Flexhose shall be capable of handling landfill
22
23
leachate at temperatures ranging from -4 to +140
23
24
DegF. Typical working pressure of 60 psi.
24
25
2. Connections to pumps, additional lengths of
25
26
flexhose and surface .piping without leakage as
26
27
described in this Section.
27
28
3. 1-1/2 IN ID, smooth bore, reinforced construction
28
29
with 6 IN bend radius max.
29
30
30
31
B.
Materials:
31
32
1. PVC hose meeting the requirements of this
32
33
section.
33
34
2. Polyethylene hose meeting the requirements of
34
35
this section.
35
36
36
37
C.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
37
38
1. Tigerflex Series "F".
38
39
2. Ryan Herco PVC Hose.
39
40
3. Kanaflex.
40
41
41
42
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
42
43
43
44
A.
Pipe Testing - General:
44
45
1. Test piping systems as follows:
45
46
a. Test exposed, non -insulated piping systems
46
47
upon completion of system.
47
48
b. Test exposed, insulated piping systems upon
48
49
completion of system but prior to application
49
50
of insulation.
50
51
c. Test concealed interior piping systems prior
51
52
to concealment and, if system is insulated,
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060-10
01
prior to application of insulation.
01
02
d. Test buried piping (insulated and
02
03
non -insulated) prior to backfilling and, if
03
04
insulated, prior to application of
04
05
insulation.
05
06
2. Utilize pressures, media and pressure test
06
07
durations as specified on Piping Specification
07
08
Schedules.
08
09
3. Isolate equipment which may be damaged by the
09
10
specified pressure test conditions.
10
11
4. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure
11
12
gages and calibrated volumetric measuring
12
13
equipment to determine leakage rates.
13
14
a. Select each gage so that the specified test
14
15
pressure falls within the upper half of the
15
16
gage's range.
16
17
b. Notify the Engineer 24 HRS prior to each
17
18
test.
18
19
5. Completely assemble and test new piping systems
19
20
prior to connection to existing pipe systems.
20
21
6. Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and
21
22
inspections in writing to Engineer prior to final
22
23
acceptance.
23
24
7. Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting,
24
25
locating and remedying of leaks and any necessary
25
26
retesting and re-examination.
26
27
27
28
B. Pressure Testing (other than as specified in Section
28
29
15065) :
29
30
1. Testing medium: Unless otherwise specified in
30
=31
the Piping Specification Schedules, utilize the
31
32
following test mediums.
32
33
a. Process and plant air systems:
33
34
34
.35
SPECIFIED
35
36
PIPE LINE SIZE TEST PRESSURE TESTING MEDIUM
36
37
______________ __-___-______ __-__________=
37
38
2 IN and smaller 75 psi or less Air or water
38
39
2 IN and smaller Greater than 75 psi Water
39
40
Greater than 2 IN 3 psi or less Air or water
40
41
Greater than 2 IN Greater than 3 psi Water
41
42
42
43
b. Laboratory gases and natural gas systems:
43
'44
Cylinder nitrogen.
44
45
c. Liquid systems:
45
46
46
47
PIPE LINE GRAVITY SPECIFIED TESTING
47
48
SIZE (DIA) OR PUMPED TEST PRESSURE MEDIUM
48
49
=_____-___ _________ _____________-______
49
50
Up to and
50
51
including 48 IN Gravity, 25 psig or less Air or
51
52
water
52
West "Texas -Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060-11
k
01
02
03
2. Allowable leakage rates:
04
a. Hazardous gas systems, all exposed piping
05
systems, all pressure piping systems and all
06
buried, insulated piping systems which are
07
hydrostatically pressure tested shall have
08
zero leakage at the specified test pressure
09
throughout the duration of the test.
10
11
3. Hydrostatic pressure testing methodology:
12
a. General:
13
1) All joints, including welds, are to be
14
left exposed for examination during the
15
test.
16
2) Provide additional temporary supports for
17
piping systems designed for vapor or gas
18
to support the weight of the test water.
19
3) Provide temporary restraints for
20
expansion joints for additional pressure
21
load under test.
22
4) Isolate equipment in piping system with
23
rated pressure lower than pipe test
24
pressure.
25
5) Do not paint or insulate exposed piping
26
until successful performance of pressure
27
test.
28
b. Soil, waste, drain and vent systems:
29
1) Test at completion of installation of
30
each stack or section of piping by
31
filling system with water and checking
32
joints and fittings for leaks.
33
2) Eliminate leaks before preceding with
34
work or concealing piping.
35
3) Minimum test heights shall be 10 FT above
36
highest stack inlet.
37
4. Air testing methodology:
38
a. General:
39
1) Assure air is ambient temperature.
40
b. Low pressure air testing:
41
1) Place plugs in line and inflate to 25
42
psig.
43
2) Check pneumatic plugs for proper sealing.
44
3) Introduce low pressure air into sealed
45
line segment until air pressure reaches 4
46
psig greater than ground water that may
47
be over the pipe. a) Use test gage
48
conforming to ANSI B40.1 with 0 to 15 psi
49
scale and accuracy of 1 percent of full
50
range.
51
4) Allow 2 minutes for air pressure to
52
stabilize.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phased Construction
15060-12
O1 5) After stabilization period (3.5 psig
02 minimum pressure in pipe) discontinue air
03 supply to line segment.
04 6) Record pressure at beginning and end of
05 test.
06
07 C. Dielectric Testing Methods and Criteria:
08 1. Provide electrical check between metallic
09 non-ferrous pipe or appurtenances and ferrous
10 elements of construction to assure discontinuity
11 has been maintained.
12 2. Wherever electrical contact is demonstrated by
13 such test, locate the point or points of
14 continuity and correct the condition.
15
16 3.04 CLEANING AND PURGING
17
18 A. Cleaning:
19 1. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly
20 before installing.
21 2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during
22 installation.
23 3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe
24 joint contact surfaces and then properly dress
25 and make joint.
26 4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and
27 remove grease, metal cuttings, dirt, or other
28 foreign materials which may have entered the
29 system.
30 5. At completion of work and prior to Final
31 Acceptance, thoroughly clean work installed under
32 these Specifications. Clean equipment, fixtures,
33 pipe, valves, and fittings of grease, metal
34 cuttings, and sludge which may have accumulated
35 by operation of system, from testing, or from
36 other causes. Repair any stoppage or
37 discoloration or other damage to parts of
38 building, its finish, or furnishings, due to
39 failure to properly clean piping system, without
40 cost to Owner.
41
42
43 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
1506OA-1
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
1B15, 7D30
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
SECTION 15060A
PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR BUILDINGS
A. Description of system:
1. Pressurized piping.
2. Nonpressurized piping.
3. Accessories:
a. Dielectric waterway fittings.
B. Related sections:
1. General requirements: Division 1.
2. Special mechanical requirements: Section 15010.
3. Piping specialties: Section 15120.
4. Piping supports, sleeves and seals: Section
15140.
5. Mechanical identification systems: Section
15190.
6. Pipe insulation: Section 15250.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pipe and fittings to be ASTM labeled for rating
specified.
B. Welder qualifications: Certified under requirements
of ANSI/ASME-B31.1 Power Piping.
1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
A. Shop drawings: Not required for Architect review.
B. Product data: Not required for Architect review.
C. Samples: Not required for Architect review.
D. Project information:
1. Manufacturer of listed products.
E. Contract closeout information: Not required for
Architect review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15060A-2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
1.
Fittings, mechanical grooved
pipe:
a. Base:
(1) Victaulic Company of
America.
b. Optional:
(1) Grinnell Corp.
(2) Guston-Bacon.
2.
Dielectric waterway fittings:
a. Base:
(1) Victaulic Company of
America.
3.
Coal tar coating:
a. Base:
(1) Koppers Co., Inc.
4.
Coating and sealants:
a. Base:
b. Optional:
(1) Koppers Co., Inc.
(2) Sonneborn-Contech.
5.
Other manufacturers desiring
approval
Document 00440.
2.02 PIPE
comply with
A. Black steel pipe:
1. Seamless or welded steel pipe, ASTM-A53 or A135,
standard weight unless otherwise indicated.
2. For fire sprinkler service: ASTM-A53 or A795,
Grade B, Schedule 40
B. Copper pipe: _
1. Seamless copper tubing, ASTM-B88 or
F.S.WW-T-799E, type K or L as indicated.
2. Soldered joints: Use ASTM-B32, 95 percent tin, 5
percent antimony solder, or Silvabrite 100.
3. High temperature soldered joints: Use 1,000 degF
solder.
4. Wrought copper fittings: ANSI-B16.22.
5. Cast brass fittings: ANSI-B16.18.
6. Flared tubing fittings: Use only on annealed
Pipe•
7. Cast flanged fittings: ANSI-B16.24, 150 LB.
8. 400 PSIG fittings: Heavy wall type, Mueller
"Steamline".
C. Cast iron soil pipe:
1. ASTM-A74.
2. Bell and spigot joints: Use oakum and lead, or
neoprene gaskets (if allowed by code).
3. Gaskets: ASTM-0564.
D. No hub cast iron pipe:
1. CISPI 310.
2. Mechanical joints: Use stainless steel couplings
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060A-3
O1
with neoprene gaskets.
02
3.
Gaskets: ASTM-0564.
03
04
E.
Ductile
iron pipe:
05
1.
Centrifugally cast, ANSI/AWWA-C151/A21.51, lined
06
and coated.
07
2.
Gasketed mechanical joints:
08
ANSI/AWWA-C111/A21.11.
09
3.
Gaskets: ANSI/AWWA-C111/A21.11.
10
11
F.
Shop coating and lining for ductile and cast iron.
12
pipe.
13
1.
Cement lining: ANSI/AWWA-C104/A21.4, except
14
lining thickness may be reduced to 1/2 ANSI
15
specified thickness for "Enameling" coating.
16
2.
Rust preventative: Non-Ox-Id 558.
17
3.
Bituminous coating: Manufacturer's standard,
18
minimum 1 mil thick.
19
4.
Provide interior surfaces of ductile iron and
20
cast iron pipe and fittings with cement lining.
21
5.
Shop coat flange faces with rust preventative
22
compound.
23
6.
Shop coat other surfaces of ductile iron and cast
24
-iron pipe and fittings with bituminous coating.
25
26
2.03
FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS
27
28
A.
Steel
pipe fittings:
29
1.
Socket welding fittings: ANSI-B16.11 and -
30
ASTM-A234.
31
2.
Butt welding fittings: ANSI-B16.9 and ASTM-A105.
32
3.
Grooved fittings: Square cut, ASTM-A53 steel, or
33
roll grooved, ASTM-A135.
34
4.
Flanged fittings: ANSI-B16.5 and ASTM-A105.
35
36
B.
Malleable iron pipe fittings:
37
1.
Threaded fittings: ANSI/ASME-B16.3, 150 PSI.
38
2.
Grooved couplings: ASTM-A47, coupling segments
39
with EPDM Grade E gasket.
40
3.
Galvanized malleable iron couplings: Victaulic;
41
or ITT Grinnell.
42
43
C.
Cast iron pipe fittings:
44
1.
Drainage fittings: Coated or galvanized,
45
ASTM-A74.
46
2.
Threaded fittings: ANSI/ASME-B16.4, 125 PSI.
47
3.
Threaded drainage fittings: ANSI-B16.12 and
48
ASTM-A126.
49
50
D.
Ductile iron pipe fittings:
51
1.
ANSI/AWWA-C110/A21.10.
52
2.
Gasketed mechanical joints:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060A-4
O1
02
03
04
05
06
.07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
ANSI/AWWA-C111/A21.11.
3. Laying length (AWWA fittings): Short body
dimensions.
4. Flanged fittings: ANSI-B16.1.
S. Thickness of iron: Not less than for ductile
iron pipe with additional thickness as required
for proper reinforcement of branches for tees and
crosses.
E. Dielectric waterway fittings:
1. ASTM-A53 Schedule 40, hot dip galvanized, steel
pipe casing with inert, non -corrosive
thermoplastic lining (NSF/FDA listed).
2. Threaded or threaded X rolled grooved
connections.
3. Victaulic, "Clearflow".
F. Mechanical grooved
1. Malleable iron,
ASTM-A536.
end couplings and fittings:
ASTM-A47 or ductile iron,
2. Gaskets: EPDM Grade E conforming to ASTM-D2000
for water services up to 230 degF.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with ANSI/ASME-B31.9 for pressure piping
installations.
B. Flush out water piping systems with clean,water prior
to adding treatment.
3.02 PIPING
A. Install piping parallel to building walls at such
heights as not to obstruct portion of window,
doorway, stairway, or passageway.
1. Where interference develops in field., offset or
reroute piping as required to clear such
interferences.
2. Consult Drawings forexact location of pipe
spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings
or other architectural details and report
discrepancies to Architect, before installing
Piping. _
B. Pitch piping to drain:
1. Minimum pitch of 1 IN in 100 FT (except drainage
Piping)
2. Make piping and equipment drainable.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060A-5
01
3. Accomplish pipe drainage using drain valves
01
02
located on equipment and fixtures or separate
02
03
drains.
03
04
4. Drains: See Section 15120.
04
05
05
06
C.
Factory cut and thread nipples from seamless stock.
06
07
1. Use nipples of same material as pipe with which
07
08
they are used.
08
09
2. Do not use close nipples except where such use is
09
10
unavoidable.
10
11
3. Use Schedule 80 seamless pipe for close nipples
11
12
and nipples of pipes 3/8 IN or smaller.
12
13
13
14
D.
Provide backing and sleeves required in walls or
14
15
floors for setting of fixtures or equipment.
15
16
16
17
E.
Where transition occurs from sweated fittings (as at
17
18
connection to fixture supplies, etc.), provide rigid
18
19
anchorage so that no strain will be placed upon
19
20
tubing.
20
21
21
22
3.03
JOINTS
22
23
23
24
A.
Threaded joints:
24
25
1. Cut piping carefully, ream, thread and work into
25
26
place without springing.
26
27
2. Use a small amount; of prepared pipe thread
27
28
lubricant on outside threads only.
28
29
3. Provide in accord with ANSI/ASME-B1.20.1.
29
30
30
31
B.
Use dielectric waterway fittings for connections
31
32
between dissimilar metals.
32
33
33
34
C.
Flanged joints:
34
35
1. Take care to ensure that there is no restraint on
35
36
opposite end of pipe or fittings which would
36
37
prevent uniform gasket compression or cause
37
38
unnecessary stress in flanges.
38
39
2. Keep one flange free to move in any'direction
39
40
while flange bolts are being tightened.
40
41
3. Do not pack or assemble bell and spigot joints
41
42
affected by flanged joints until such flanged
42
43
joints have been tightened.
43
44
4. Tighten bolts gradually and at a uniform rate, so
44
45
that gasket compression is uniform over entire
45
46
area of gasket.
46
47
47
48
D.
Mechanical joints:
_48
49
1. Assemble in accord with instructions and
49
50
recommendations of pipe manufacturer.
50
51
2. Clean joint surfaces and lubricate with soap
51
52
solution or water soluble lubricant immediately
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060A-6
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
before joint is assembled.
3.04 UNIONS
A. Provide a union between valves, at connection to each
fixture, device or item of equipment, and elsewhere
as required to make up or disconnect piping.
1. Install each union to facilitate removal of
parts, equipment or fixtures for inspection or
cleaning.
2. Install in a position which will permit device,
fixture or part to be removed without
disconnecting piping except unions.
B. Install unions elsewhere in system as required to
facilitate installation and servicing.
C. Provide unions as specified in Section 15120.
3.05 PIPING EXPANSION
A. Install piping to allow thermal expansion and
contraction without injury to piping, equipment or
structure.
1. Use loops or expansion joints where necessary.
B. Where screwed piping is used for soil, waste or vent
risers, or downspouts, use caulked joints or
expansion joints at intervals to allow expansion
movement.
C. In general, make branch connections to heating
equipment with 3-elbow swing joint to allow for
expansion movement.
3.06 WELDED STEEL PIPING
A. Where welded piping is specified, make welds by
oxy-acetylene or electric process in accord with
ANSI-B31.1.
1. Welding rods: Grade recommended for purpose by
manufacturer; each rod stamped with
manufacturer's name and identification.
B. Line welds:
1. Single V-butt type.
2. Mill or machine bevel pipe at 37-1/2 degrees to
within 1/16 IN of inside wall, except that in
field, limited amount of pipe may be flame
beveled.
3. Pipe with a wall thickness of 3/16 IN or less
need not be beveled but may be welded by melting
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060A-7
01
down into, and building up over abutting ends.
02
4. Separate abutting ends of joints before welding
03
to permit complete fusion to bottom without
04
overlapping.
05
5. Tack in 2 or more points to maintain alignment,
06
and fusion weld.
07
6. Weld continuously around pipe.
08
09
C.
Make welds of sound weld metal, thoroughly fused into
10
ends of pipe, and to bottom of vee.
11
1. Build in excess of pipe wall to give
12
reinforcement of 1/4 pipe wall thickness.
13
2. Weld metal shall present a gradual increase in
14
thickness from surface of pipe to center of weld.
15
3. Minimum weld width: 2-1/2 times thickness of
16
pipe wall.
17
18
D.
Use welding ells at turns in welded lines except
19
where pipe bends are indicated or are required for
20
flexibility.
21
22
E.
Mitered ells will not be permitted.
23
24
F.
Do not weld pipe couplings in place of welding
25
fittings for branch connections.
26
27
G.
Weld-O-Lets and Thread-O-Lets:
28
1. Scribe and cut openings in main pipes for welded
29
branches accurately taking care to remove plug
30
and cuttings from main pipe.
31
2. Full weld fillet welds for full depth of fillet,
32
with additional beads to form well rounded
33
connection as recommended by Weld-O-Let
34
manufacturer.
35
a. Partially filled fillets not acceptable.
36
37
H.
Cut openings into pipe for welded connections
38
accurately to give carefully matched intersections.
39
40
I.
Make welded fittings of same material with same
41
pressure and temperature rating as pipe with which
42
they are used.
43
44
J.
Make flanged connections to control valves, pump
45
suction, and specialties with ANSI standard welding
46
neck flanges.
47
1. Other flange connections may be made with slip-on
48
flanges provided they are seal welded on inside.
49
50
K.
Fuse fillet welds for flanges or fittings into pipe
51
and plate for minimum distance of 1-1/2 times pipe
52
wall thickness and depth of weld of 1-1/4 times pipe
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060A-8
O1
wall thickness.
02
03
3.07
THREADED STEEL PIPING
04
05
A.
Branch connections to screwed piping may be made with
06
Weld-O-Lets or Thread-O-Lets.
07
08
B.
Do not weld pipe couplings in place of welding
09
fittings for branch connections.
10
11
3.08
DUCTILE IRON PIPING
12
13
A.
Perform cutting without damage to pipe or to cement
14
lining.
15
1. Make pipe cuts smooth, straight and at right
16
angles to pipe axis.
17
2. Use approved type mechanical pipe cutters.
18
3. In locations where use of mechanical cutters
19
would be difficult or impracticable, existing
20
pipe may be cut with diamond point chisels, saws,
21
or other tools which will not cause damaging
22
impact or shock.
23
24
B.
Use equipment, tools and methods in handling and
25
laying pipe and fittings which prevent damage.
26
1. Hooks inserted in ends of pipe shall have broad,
27
well padded contact surfaces.
28
29
C.
Replace pipe and fittings in which cement lining has
30
been broken or loosened.
31
1. Where damaged areas are small and readily
32
accessible, lining may be repaired, if Architect
33
approved.
34
-35
D.
Repair pipe coating which has been damaged before
36
installing pipe.
37
38
E.
Make connections between below ground piping and
39
above ground piping with a flanged spigot adapter.
40
1. Hold spigot piece in place with bolts on 2 sides
41
of flanges between mechanical joint and flange
42
connector.
43
44
F.
Comply with AWWA-C600 for installation.
45
46
3.09
CAST IRON DRAINAGE PIPING
47
48
A.
Lay underground pipe on undisturbed earth excavated
49
to provide firm bearing on at least 1/3 of pipe
5o
circumference for full length, with bell holes cut
51
out.,
52
1. Where excavation has been carried too deep, place
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15060A-9
O1
a layer of sand well tamped to bring pipe to
02
proper grade.
03
2. Where fill or unsound earth is encountered, place
04
a layer of 2500 PSI concrete to properly bed
05
pipe.
06
07
B.
Bell and spigot joints:
08
1. Install neoprene gaskets in accord with
09
manufacturer's recommendations.
10
2. Calk tarred oakum well into joint and pour in
11
molten lead continuously around joint, using at
12
least 12 OZ of lead per IN of pipe diameter.
13
3. Furnish sufficient -lubricant to provide a thin
14
coat on each spigot end.
15
4. Use lubricant that is non -toxic, imparts no taste
16
or odor to conveyed liquid, and has no
17
deleterious effect on rubber gasket, with
18
consistency so that it can be easily applied to
19
pipe in hot or cold weather and will adhere to
20
either wet or dry pipe.
21
22
C.
Threaded joints:
23
1. Clean cut, American National taper pipe threads.
24
2. Ream pipe ends to full pipe size and remove
25
burrs, chips, cuttings before making up.
26
3. Pipe joint cement permitted on male threads only.
27
28
3.10
COPPER PIPING
29
30
A.
High temperature soldered joints:
31
1. Take care to avoid annealing of pipe material.
32
2. For pipe sizes 2 IN and larger: Use a circular
33
torch such as Circa Torch by Cedarberg
34
Industries, Inc., for soldering joints.
35
36
B.
Do not use solder containing lead.
37
38
C.
T-drilling with high temperature solder is
39
acceptable.
40
41
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15064-1
O1
96A03 SECTION 15064
02
03
PIPE: PLASTIC
04
05
PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01 SUMMARY
08
09
A. Section Includes:
10
1. Sump access plastic pipe.
11
12
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily
13
limited to:
14
1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and
15
Conditions of the Contract.
16
2. Division 1 - General Provisions.
17
3. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic
18
Requirements.
19
4. Section 15090 —Pipe Support Systems.
20
5. Section 15700 - Valves and Appurtenances.
21
22
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24
A. See Section 15060.
25
26
B. Referenced Standards:
27
1. American Society for Testing and Materials
28
(ASTM) :
29
a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials:
30
1) D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid
31
Poly(vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
32
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
33
Compounds.
34
2) D1785, Poly(vinyl Chloride) PVC Plastic
35
Pipe (Schedules 40, 80 and 120).
36
3) D2241, (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR and
37
Class T).
38
4) D2464, Threaded (PVC) Plastic Pipe
39
Fittings, Schedule 80.
40
5) D2466, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe
41
Fittings, Schedule 40.
42
6) D2467, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe
43
Fittings, Schedule 80.
44
7) D2564, Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic
45
Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings.
46
8) D2665, (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and
47
Vent Pipe and Fittings.
48
9) D2729, (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
49
10) D2740, (PVC) Plastic Tubing.
50
11) D2836, Filled (PVC) Sewer Pipe.
51
12) D3034, Type PSM - PVC Sewer Pipe and
52
Fittings.
West Texas RegionDisposalFacility
Phase 1`Construction
15064-2
O1
13)
D3139, Standard Specification for Joints
02
for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible
03
Elastomeric Seals.
04
14)
F949, Poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC)
05
Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth
06
Interior and Fittings.
07
b. Acrylonitrile butadiene-styrene (ABS)
08
materials:
09
1)
D1527, Dimensions of Iron Pipe Size (IPS)
10
Extruded ABS Plastic Pipe.
11
2)
D2235, Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe
12
and Fittings.
13
3)
D2465, Threaded ABS Plastic Pipe Fittings,
14
Schedule 80.
15
4)
D2751, (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
16
C. Polyethylene (PE) materials:
17
1)
D2104, (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40.
18
2)
D2239, (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
19
3)
D2447, (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and
20
80 Based on Outside Diameter.
21
4)
D2609, Plastic Inserts Fittings for (PE)
22
Plastic Pipe.
23
5)
D2610, Butt Fusion (PE) Plastic Pipe and
24
Fittings, Schedule 40.
25
6)
D2611, Butt Fusion (PE) Plastic Pipe
26
Fittings, Schedule 80.
27
7)
D2737, (PE).Plastic Tubing.
28
d. Installation:
29
1)
D2321, Underground Installation of
30
Flexible Thermosplastic Sewer Pipe. -
31
2)
D2855, Making Solvent Cemented Joints with
32
PVC Pipe and Fittings.
33
e. Special pipe and methods:
34
1)
D2513, Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe,
35
Tubing, and Fittings.
36
2)
D2517, Reinforced Thermosetting Gas
37
Pressure Piping and Fittings.
38
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
39
a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials:
40
1)
C900, Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure
41
pipe 4 through 12 IN for Water.
42
b. Polyethylene (PE) materials:
43
1)
C901, Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe
44
Tubing and Fittings, 1/2 through 3 IN for
45
Water..
46
47
1.03 SUBMITTALS
48
49
A. See Section 15060..
50
51
52
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15064-3
s J
O1
02
2.01 PVC PRESSURE PIPING (EXPOSED)
03
04
A. General: Provide Schedule 80 pipe with Schedule 80
05
fittings and appurtenances to locations shown on
06
Drawings. Furnish materials in full compliance to
07
following material specifications:
08
1. Manufacture pipe,- fittings and appurtenances from
09
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound which meets the
10
requirements of Type 1, Grade 1 (12454-B)
11
Polyvinyl Chloride as outlined in ASTM D1784.
12
2. Manufacture pipe, fittings and valves from
13
materials that have been tested and approved for
14
conveying potable water by the National
15
Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
16
17
B. Pipe: Furnish pipe meeting requirements of ASTM
18
D1785. Pipe shall be flanged unless shown otherwise
19
on Drawings.
20
21
C. Unions: Furnish unions at locations shown on
22
Drawings. Provide unions at valves, penetrations
23
through structures and equipment connections.
24
1. Use flat, full faced natural rubber gaskets at
25
flanged connections. Furnish heavy hex head
26
bolts, each with one heavy hex nut, ASTM F593
27
Type 316 stainless steel.
28
2. Use spacers supplied by pipe manufacturer when
29
mating raised -faced flanges to other flanges.
30
-
31
D. Installation:
32
1. Employ installation and pipe support practices
33
all in compliance to the manufacturer's printed
34
recommendation. Continuously support PVC piping
35
at liquid operating temperatures in excess of 100
36
DegF. For vertical piping, band the pipe at
37
intervals to rigidly support load of twice
38
vertical load. Support riser clamps on spring
39
hangers. Do not clamp PVC tightly or restrict
40
movement for expansion and contraction.
41
42
43
PART 3 - EXECUTION
44
45
3.01 IDENTIFICATION
46
47
A. Identify each length of pipe clearly. Include
48
manufacturer's name and trademark. Nominal size of
49
pipe, appurtenant information regarding polymer cell
50
classification and critical identifications regarding
51
performance specifications, and "NSF" approvals when
52
applicable.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15064-4
O1
02
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15065-1
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
.19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
SECTION 15065
HDPE PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment
and services for all pipe in accordance with
provisions of the Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other
trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
furnish and install all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
incidental to or necessary for a sound and
complete installation.
B. Work included consists of, but is.not necessarily
limited to:
1. 4 IN Leachate collection.
2. 4 IN riser.
3. 6 IN transducer riser.
4. 12 IN sump and riser pipes.
5. 4 IN Non -potable water lines.
C. Related Sections include, but are not necessarily
limited to:
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms
and Conditions of the Contract.
2. Section 02775 - Geosynthetic Liner System.
3. Section 11076 - Pumping Equipment.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. ASTM D-638 - Test Method for Tensile Properties
of Plastics.
2. ASTM D-696 - Linear Thermal Expansion
Coefficient.
3. ASTM D-746 - Brittleness Temp.
4. ASTM D-790 - Test Method for Flexural Properties
of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and
Electrical Insulating Materials.
5. ASTM D-1238 - Test Method for Flow Rates of
Thermal Plastics by Extrusion Plastometer.
6. ASTM D-1248 - Specification for Polyethylene
Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials.
7: ASTM D-1505 - Text Method for Density of Plastics
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15065-2
01
by the Density Gradient Technique.
01
02
8. ASTM D-1525 - Vicat Softening Temp.
02
03
9. ASTM D-1599 - Test Method for Short Time
03
04
Hydraulic Failure Pressure of Plastic Pipe,
04
05
Tubing and Fittings.
05
06
10. ASTM D-1603 - Carbon Black in Olefin Plastics.
06
07
11. ASTM D-1693 - Test Method for Environmental
07
08
Stress Cracking of Ethylene Plastics.
08
09
12. ASTM D-2122 - Method for Determining Dimensions
09
10
of Thermal Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
10
11
13. ASTM D-2837 - Method for obtaining Hydrostatic
11
12
Design Basis for Thermal Plastic Pipe Materials.
.12
13
14. ASTM D-3350 - Specification for Polyethylene
13
14
Platic Pipe and Fittings Material.
14
15
15. ASTM F-1248 - Determination of Environmental
15
16
Stress Crack Resistance`(ESCR) of Polyethylene
16
17
Pipe.
17
18
16.' ASTM D-4218 — Test Method for Carbon Black
18
19
Content in Polyethylene Compounds by the
19
20
Muffle -Furnace Technique.
20
21
17. ASTM F-714 - Standard Specification for
21
22
Polyethylene Plastic Pipe Based on Outside
22
23
Diameter.
23
24
18. AWWA C-906 - Polyethylene Pressure Pipe and
24
25
Fittings.
25
26
26
27
1.03
SUBMITTALS
27
28
28
29
A.
See Section 01340.
29
30
30
31
B.
The pipe manufacturer shall provide certifications
31
32
and test reports indicating that samples of the
32
33
production pipe from which the furnished materials
33
34
were obtained have been tested in accordance with
34
35
ASTM D-2837. The minimum hydrostatic design basis
35
36
shall be 1600 psi at 73.40F and 800 psi at
36
37
1400F.
37
38
38
39
PART 2
- PRODUCTS
39
40
40
41
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
41
42
42
43
A.
Subject to compliane with the Contract Documents, the
43
44
following Manufacturers are acceptable:
44
45
1. Pipe:
45
46
a. Plexco.
46
47
b. Driscopipe 1000.
47
48
C. Polypipe PE 3408.
48
49
d. Hydroconduit.
49
50
e. Approved equal..
50
51
51
52
B.
-Submit request for substitutions in accordance with
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15065-3
01
Specification"Section `016 '0.
01
f 02
02
03 2.02
PIPE AND APPURTENANCES
03
04
04
05 A.
Materials:
05
06
1.
Pipe: High Density Polyethylene Pipe, perforated
06
07
and solid wall shall conform to requirements of
07
08
ASTM D-1248 with an SDR of 11 for 12 IN Sump
08
09
Riser and SDR 17 for 4 IN leachate collection and
09
1.0
riser pipe. 6 IN transducer riser shall be SDR
10
11
11. 4 IN non -potable water line shall be SDR 21,
11
12
AWWA Class C-906.
12
13
13
14
2.
Polyethylene for the manufacture of pipe shall be
14
15
high- density polyethylene conforming to ASTM
15
16
D3350 Cell Classification 345434C.
16
17
17
18
3.
Pipe and fittings shall be butt fusible at
18
19
440OF to 5000F.
19
20
20
21
4.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with
21
22
ASTM F-714.
22
23
23
24
5.
Except as noted on Drawings, fittings shall be
24
25
butt fusion type, meeting the requirements of
25
26
ASTM D-3261 and this specification. All fittings
26
27
shall be pressure rated to match the system
27
28
piping to which they are fused. At the point of
28
29
fusion, the outside diameter and minimum wall
29
30
thickness specifications of ASTM F-714 for the
30
31
same size of pipe. The side slope riser fittings
31
32
shall be factory fabricated and shall have a
32
33
smooth interior surface.
33
34
34
35
6.
All 6 IN Leachate Collection Pipe shall be
35
36
perforated by the Manufacturer as shown on the
36
37
Drawings.
37
38
38
39
7.
The 12 IN Sump Riser and 2 IN Transducer Riser
39
40
Pipe shall be perforated by the Manufacturer as
40
41
shown on the Drawings. Above the floor of the
41
42
sump, both pipes shall be solid wall SDR 11. The
42
43
Sump End Cap shall be perforated by the
43
44
Manufacturer as shown on the Drawings and fusion
44
45
welded to the Collection Sump.
45
46
46
47
8.
All exposed line ends will be fitted with a
47
48
snugly fitting slip cap at the end of each day
48
49
and at all temporary liner terminations. End
49
50
caps shall be of similar material and
50
51
construction as collection pipes and supplied by
51
52
the same manufacturer for this purpose.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15065-4
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
B. Requirements:
1. Workmanship: Exterior and interior surfaces
shall be smooth with no sharp projections. The
surfaces shall be free of foreign inclusions and
major surface defects. Polyethylene pipe shall
be as uniform as commerically practical in color,
opacity, density, and other physical properties.
The product function shall be considered when
judging external defects.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Pipe:
1. Install all pipe, fittings and appurtences in
accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
2. Install to line and grade as indicated.
3. Only butt fusion welding of HDPE pipe is
acceptable.
4. If the certified personnel are not available to
complete all connections, the manufacturer shall
provide the services of a field technician for
one day to instruct, direct, and certify the
Contractor's personnel in the proper procedures
for making field connections. All training shall
be at no additional cost to the Owner.
S. 4 IN non -potable water line shall be buried.
B. Contractor shall visually inspect each pipe joint for
proper installation in accordance with manufactured
recommendations prior to covering the pipes. If all
joints are acceptable, he shall notify the Inspector
of such and await his approval to cover pipes.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The first butt fusion of:each day, for each fusion
machine, shall be destructively tested by the "bent
strap" test. This test shall be performed as
presented in AWWA C-.906 or PLEXCO Bulletins Nos.
105Y and 106.
B. Upon completion, all pressure lines shall be
hydrostatically pressure tested to 100 PSI for a
period of one hour with no pressure drop.' Testing
shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations or Section 15060, at Engineer's
discretion.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15065-5
O1 3.03
02
03 A.
04
05
06 B.
07
08
09
10 3.04
11
12 A.
13
14
15 B.
16
17
18
19
20
PIPE SUPPORTS
Construct sump access structure to provide support as
shown on the Drawings.
Provide additional supports as required to support
piping such that its weight is not supported by pumps
or equipment.
CLEANING
Keep inside of all pipe, fittings, and valves clean
and free from dirt and debris.
Thoroughly clean piping as specified by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
15100A-1
01
5I15
SECTION 15100A
02
03
MANUAL VALVES
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Definitions:
10
1. Class: ANSI Class.
11
2. SWP: Steam Working Pressure.
12
3. WOG: Water/Oil/Gas non -shock working pressure.
13
4. WWP: Cold water non -shock working pressure.
14
15
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
16
17
A.
Boiler system valves: ASME Boiler Code
18
Specifications.
19
20
B.
Fire protection valves: UL listed, NFPA and FM
21
approved.
22
23
C.
Valves used in flammable liquid or flammable gas
24
systems:
25
26
UL listed for applicable service.
27
28
D.
Valves cleaned for oxygen service: CGA Pamphlet
29
G-4.1, Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service.
30
31
E.
Valve bodies, shells and seats: Designed,
32
manufactured, and tested in accordance with the
33
following:
34
1. Ball valves: Federal Specification WW-V-35.
35
2. Pressure testing of steel valves: MSS SP-61.
36
3. Butterfly valves: MSS SP-67.
37
4. Butterfly valves, bronze: Federal Specification
38
WW-V-1967.
39
5. Cast iron gate valves, flanged and threaded ends:
40
MSS-SP-70.
41
6. Cast iron swing check valves, flanged and
42
threaded ends: MSS.SP-71.
43
7. Cast iron plug valves, flanged and threaded ends:
44
MSS SP-78.
45
8. Bronze gate, globe, angle and check valves: MSS
46
SP-80.
47
9. Valve pressure testing methods: MSS SP-82.
48
10. Cast iron globe and angle valves, flanged and
49
threaded ends: MSS SP-85.
50
11. Diaphragm type valves: MSS SP-88.
51
12. Resilient seated eccentric cast iron plug
52
valves: MSS SP-108.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15100A-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
13. Ball valves --threaded, socket -welding, solder
joint, grooved, and flared ends: MSS SP-110.
F. Standard for pressure containing parts of valves
rated for 125 PSI SWP and 150 PSI SWP: ASTM-B62.
G. Standard for metallic seats in valves rated at 200
PSI SWP and 300 PSI SWP: ASTM-B61.
H. Iron body valves:
1. Pressure containing parts: ASTM-A126, Grade-B.
2. Face to face and end to end dimensions:
ANSI/ASME-B16.10.
3. Use domestic manufactured valves as required by
Buy America Act.
I. Valve stems: ASTM-B371, Alloy C69400; ASTM-B371,
Alloy C65100H04 (rolled silicon brass); or other
material equally resistant to dezincification.
J. Pressure castings: Free of impregnating materials.
K. Indicate following information on valves:
1. Stamped or cast into body:
a. Manufacturer's name or trademark.
b. Pressure rating as Class, SWP, WOG, or WWP.
C. "UL-FM" for UL-FM valves.
2. Permanently attached to body:
a. Valve's country of origin. -
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. Valves.
a. In addition to submittal requirements of
01340, submittal shall include the following:
(1) For submittals with model numbers not
listed in this section, include published
cross reference sheet. Indicate
association between submitted model
number and the listed model number on the
cross reference sheet.
(2) For each valve submitted indicate in
which specification section(s) and in
which system(s) the valve will be used.
b. When valve assembly includes components other
than the base valve body and handle (e.g.,
operator, valve box), include data on entire
valve assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15100A-3
01
02
2.01 GENERAL
03
04
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
05
1. Angle valves:
06
a. Base:
07
(1) Nibco.
08
(2) Stockham.
09
b. Optional:
10
(1) Crane.
11
(2) Grinnell.
12
(3) Hammond.
13
( 4 ) Jenkins.
14
(5) Lunken.
1.5
(6) Milwaukee.
16
(7) Powell.
17
(8) Walworth.
18
2. Ball valves:
19
a. Base:
20
(1) Milwaukee.
21
(2) Nibco.
22
b. Optional:
23
(1) Apollo.
24
(2) Chemtron.
25
( 3 ) Crane.
26
(4) Grinnell.
~
27
(5) Hammond.
28
(6) Jamesbury.
29
(7) Jenkins.
30
(8) Jomar.
31
(9) Lance.
32
(10) Ohio.
33
(11) Pittsburgh.
34
(12) Powell.
35
(13) Puritan.
36
(14) Stockham.
37
3. Butterfly valves:
38
a. Base:
39
(1) DeZurik.
40
(2) Flowseal.
41
( 3 ) Milwaukee.
42
(4) Stockham.
43
(5) Victaulic.
44
b. Optional:
45
(1) Centerline.
46
(2) Crane.
47
(3) Grinnell.
48
(4 ) Hammond.
49
( 5 ) Jenkins.
50
(6) Keystone.
51
(7) Lunken.
52
(8) Mueller Steam Specialty Co.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
1510,OA-4
01
(9) Nibco.
01
02
(10) Powell.
02
03
(11) Universal.
03
04
(12) Walworth.
04
05
4. Check valves:
05
06
a. Base:
06
07
(1) Apco.
07
08
(2) Nibco.
08
09
(3) Stockham.
09
10
b. Optional:
10
11
(1) Crane.
11
12
(2) Grinnell.
12
13
(3) Hammond.
13
14
(4) Jenkins.
14
15
(5) Kennedy.
15
16
(6) Lunken.
16
17
(7) Marlin.
17
18
(8) Milwaukee.
18
19
(9) Mission.
19
20
(10) Mueller Co.
20
21
(11) Mueller Steam Specialty Co.
21
22
(12) Powell.
22
23
(13) Victaulic.
23
24
(14) Viking.
24
25
(15) Walworth.
25
26
(16) Waterous.
26
27
5. Diaphragm valves:
27
28
a. Base:
28
29
(1) ITT Engineered Valves.
29
30
b. Optional:
30
31
(1) Barnsted.
31
32
(2) Saunders.
32
33
6. Gate Valves:
33
34
a. Base:
34
35
(1) Mueller Co.
35
36
(2) Nibco.
36
37
(3) Stockham.
37
38
b. Optional:
38
39
(1) Crane.
39
40
(2) Grinnell.
40
41
(3) Hammond.
41
42
(4) Jenkins.
42
43
(5) Kennedy.
43
44
(6) Lunken.
44
45
(7) Milwaukee.
45
46
(8) Mueller Steam Specialty Co.
46
47
(9) Powell.
47
48
(10) Walworth.
48
49
(11) Waterous.
49
50
7. Globe valves:
50
51
a. Base:
51
52
(1) Stockham.
52./--,,
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15100A-5
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
b. Optional:
(1) Crane.
(2) Grinnell.
(3) Hammond.
(4) Jenkins.
(5) Lunken.
(6) Milwaukee.
(7) Nibco.
(8) Powell.
(9) Walworth.
8. Plug valves:
a. Base:
(1) DeZurick.
(2) Resun.
b. Optional:
(1) Lunken.
(2) Milliken.
(3) Rockwell-Nordstrum.
(4) Victaulic.
9. Valve boxes and stop boxes:
a. Base:
(1) Tyler.
(2) Western.
b. Optional:
(1) Neenah.
(2) Vulcan.
(3) Local foundry.
10. Other manufacturers desiring
with Document 00440.
B. Ball valves:
1.
Full -port chrome -plated o
a. 2-1/2 and 3 IN valves
2.
Blow-out proof stems.
3.
Reinforced Teflon seats.
4.
Teflon seals.
5.
Adjustable packing.
6.
3-piece valves:
a. May be standard port.
b. Repairable in line.
approval comply
r stainless -steel ball.
may be standard port.
C. Butterfly valves:
1. Ninety degree operation.
2. Bi-directional, bubble -tight shut off at full
pressure rating (at full differential pressure).
3. 2 IN extended neck.
4. Lugs, where specified, shall be drilled and
tapped.
5. Operators:
a. 2-1/2 to 4 IN: Position lock handle.
b. 5 IN and larger: gear operator with 4-arm or
wheel handle.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15100A-6
O1
6.
Iron body:
02
a. Seals shall be replaceable without removing
03
valve from line or removing parts other than
04
operator.
05
7.
Bronze:
06
a. Blow-out proof stem.
07
b. Viton seals.
08
C. Pressure rating: 175 PSI WWP, 350 PSI WOG.
09
10
D.
Chain operators:
11
1.
Provide operators for valves located in
12
mechanical spaces 8 FT or higher above floor.
13
2.
Chain lever or chain sprocket operator with
14
sufficient chain to reach within 5 FT of floor.
15
3.
Remote operator accessories by same manufacturer
16
as valve.
17
4.
Do not provide for Fire Protection valves.
18
19
E.
Diaphragm valves:
20
1.
Working parts of valve shall be isolated from
21
process fluid.
22
2.
Valve shall be constructed to allow neither
23
accumulation nor stagnation of process fluids
24
within valve.
25
3.
Valve shall have tight shut off.
26
4.
Diaphragm shall be positively supported in every
27
position.
28
29
F.
End
styles, general:
30
1.
Compatible with piping systems served.
31
2.
Flanged valves:
32
a. Class 125 cast iron: Flat flanges.
33
b. Class 250 cast iron: Raised flanges.
34
c. Ductile iron: Raised flanges.
35
3.
Valves with solder ends for use in brazed piping
36
systems shall be constructed for brazing.
37
38
G.
Extended necks and stems:
39
1.
For valves specified with extended necks or,
40
stems, provide design that isolates moving valve
41
parts from insulation.
42
2.
For valves specified with extended necks or stems
43
and memory stops, provide design that allows
44
access to memory stop without disturbing
45
insulation.
46
47
H.
Packing shall not contain asbestos.
48
49
I.
Plug valves:
50
1.
Eccentric plugsf
51
a. Non -lubricated valves with resilient seats
52
shall be suitable for 250 degF service.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
1510OA-7
01
b. Rubber seated eccentric plugs: Bolted stem
01
02
seals shall permit replacement of packing
02
03
without removing valve from line or removing
03
04
parts other than operator.
04
05
05
06
2.02
VALVES
06
07
07
08
A.
General:
08
09
1. Example model numbers may indicate a general
09
10
series, or may be abbreviated. They may not
10
11
reflect all features described. Provide valves
11
12
with described features.
12
13
2. Specified requirements are minimums. Valves that
13
14
meet or exceed specifications may be submitted.
14
15
15
16
B.
V-1: Gate valve, Class 125, bronze body, screwed
16
17
bonnet, non -rising stem, solid wedge disc, solder.
17
18
Example: Stockham B-112.
18
19
19
20
C.
V-2: Gate valve, Class 150, bronze body, union
20
21
bonnet, rising stem, solid wedge disc, threaded.
21
22
Example: Stockham B-120.
22
23
23
24
D.
V-3: Gate valve, Class 125, cast iron body, bronze
24
25
trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, OS&Y, solid wedge
25
26
disc, flanged. Example: Stockham G-623.
26
27
27
28
E.
V-4: Gate valve, same as V-2 except Class 200.
28
29
Example: Stockham B-135.
29
30
30
31
F.
V-5: Gate valve, same as V-3 except Class 250.
31
32
Example: Stockham F-667.
32
33
33
34
G.
V-6: Globe valve, Class 150, bronze body, union
34
35
bonnet, renewable Teflon disc, solder. Example:
35
36
Stockham B-24T.
36
37
37
38
H.
V-7: Globe valve, same as V-6 except threaded.
38
39
Example: Stockham B-22T.
39
40
40
41
I.
V-8: Globe valve, Class 125, cast iron body, bronze
41
42
trim, bolted bonnet, OS&Y,'renewable seat and bronze
42
43
disc, flanged. Example: Stockham G-512.
43
44
44
45
J.
V-9: Globe valve, Class 200, bronze body, union
45
46
bonnet, renewable plug type seat and disc, threaded.
46
47
Example: Stockham B-62.
47
48
48
49
K.
V-10: Globe valve, same as V-8 except Class 250.
49
50
Example: Stockham F-532.
50
51
51
52
L.
V-11: Ball valve, 150 PSI SWP, 400 PSI WOG bronze
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1-Construction
15100A-8
O1
body, adjustable memory stop, 3-piece construction,
02
extended stem, solder. Example: Milwaukee BA-350.
03
04
M.
V-12: Ball valve, same as V-11 except threaded.
05
Example: Milwaukee BA-300.
06
07
N.
V-13: Ball valve, 150 PSI SWP, 400 PSI WOG bronze
08
body, 2-piece construction, extended brass stem,
09
solder. Example: Milwaukee BA-250.
10
11
O.
V-14: Ball valve, same as V-13 except threaded.
12
Example: Milwaukee BA-200.
13
14
P.
V-15: Ball valve, 150 PSI SWP, 400 PSI WOG, 29 IN Hg
15
vacuum service , bronze body, 3-piece construction,
16
cleaned and capped for oxygen service, lockable in
17
either the'open or closed position, color coded
18
handle to match gas service, braze. Example:
19
Milwaukee BA-350. (Zone valves shall not be
20
lockable, and shall be furnished with factory brazed
21
copper extensions.)
22
23
Q.
V-16: Ball valve, 150 PSI SWP, 600 PSI WOG, 250 PSI
24
UL listed for flammable liquids and LP gas, bronze
25
body, 2-piece construction, full or standard port,
26
bronze ball, non -lubricated, threaded. Example:
27
Nibco T-580-70-UL & T-585-70-UL.
28
29
R.
V-17: Angle valve, Class 125, bronze body, screwed
30
bonnet, bronze disc, threaded. Example: Stockham
31
B-216.
32
33
S.
V-18: Angle valve, Class 125, cast iron body, bolted
34
bonnet, bronze trim,,renewable seat and disc,
35
flanged. Example: Nibco F-818-B.
36
37
T.
V-19: Angle valve, Class 200, bronze body, union
38
bonnet, bronze disc, threaded. Example: Stockham
'39
B-237.
40
41
U.
V-20: Angle valve, Class 250, cast iron body, bronze
42
trim, flanged. Example: Stockham F-541.
43
44
V.
V-21: Angle valve, automatic stop -check, Class 250,
45
cast iron body, bolted bonnet, renewable disc and
46
seat, flanged. Example: Stockham F-541.
47
48
W.
V-22: Check valve, in -line pattern, spring -operated
49
double doors, Class 250„ cast-iron body, renewable
50
bronze doors and Viton-A seal, Inconel springs,
51
stainless steel trim, flat faced wafer. Example:
52
Stockham WG-976.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15100A-9
01
01
02
X.
V-23: Check valve, Y-pattern, horizontal swing,
02
03
Class 150, bronze body, threaded cap, renewable
03
04
Teflon disc and seat, threaded. Example: Nibco
04
05
T-433-Y.
05
06
06
07
Y.
V-24: Check valve, Y-pattern, horizontal swing,
07
O8
Class 125, bronze body, threaded cap, renewable
08
09
bronze disc and seat, solder. Example: Nibco
09
10
S-413-B.
10
11
11
12
Z.
V-25: Check valve, same as V-23 except Class 125.
12
13
Example: Nibco T-413-Y.
13
14
AA.
V-26: Check valve, in -line pattern, spring -operated
14
15
disc, Class 125, bronze body, renewable Teflon disc and
15
16
seat, 316 stainless -steel spring, threaded. Example:
16
17
Nibco T-480-Y.
17
18
BB.
V-27: Check valve, T-pattern, horizontal lift, Class
18
19
150, bronze body, union bonnet, renewable Teflon disc and
19
20
seat, threaded. Example: Stockham B-322-T.
20
21
CC.
V-28: Check valve, T-pattern, horizontal swing, Class
21
22
125, cast iron body, bolted bonnet, bronze trim, renewable22
23
bronze or cast iron disc and seat, flanged. Example:
23
24
Stockham G-931.
24
25
DD.
V-29: Check valve, in -line pattern, spring -operated
25
26
double doors, Class 125 (cast iron body) or Class 150
26
27
(steel body), Buna-N or EPDM seal, aluminum bronze or
27
28
stainless steel doors, 316 stainless steel spring;
28
29
grooved, threaded, flanged, wafer, or lugged at locations
29
30
other than equipment; grooved, flanged or lugged if
30
31
between equipment and its isolation valve. Example: APCO31
32
L9000.
32
33
EE.
V-30: Check valve, silent, in -line pattern,
33
34
spring -operated disc, Class 125, cast iron body, renewable34
35
bronze disc and seat, stainless steel spring, flat faced
35
36
wafer. Example: Nibco W-910-B.
36
37
FF.
V-31: Check valve, same as V-23 except Class 200.
37
38
Example: Nibco T-473-Y. _38
39
GG.
V-32: Check valve, same as V-28 except Class 250.
39
40
Example: Stockham F-947.
40
41
HH.
V-33: Butterfly valve, 200 PSI WWP; 27 IN Hg vacuum;
41
42
cast or ductile iron body; EPT (EPDM) sleeve; stainless
42
43
steel stem; aluminum -bronze or stainless steel disc;
43
44
lugged. Example: Stockham L#-7#2.
44
45
II.
V-34: Butterfly valve, same as V-33 except wafer.
45
46
Example: Stockham L#-5#2.
46
47
JJ.
V-35: Butterfly valve, 200 PSI WWP for 12 IN and
47
48
smaller, 175 PSI WWP for 14 IN and larger; 27 IN Hg vacuum48
49
for all sizes; cast or ductile iron body; EPT (EPDM) seat;49
50
stainless steel stem; replaceable forged brass,
50
51
aluminum -bronze, stainless steel, or EPDM coated ductile
51
52
iron disc; grooved. Example: Victaulic 300/709.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15100A-10
O1 KK. V-36: Eccentric plug valve, 175 PSI WOG, cast-iron body, 01
02
bronze or nickel -plated cast-iron plug, Isobutene-Isoprene02
03
steam and plug seals, high -temperature plug face, capped
03
04
drip tap on seat end of valve, memory stop, lever handle,
04
05
threaded. Example: DeZurick 499S.
05
06
LL.
V-37: Eccentric plug valve, 175 PSI WWP for 12 IN and
06
07
smaller, 150 PSI WWP for 14 IN and larger, cast-iron body,07
08
Viton filled TFE U-ring seal, Isobutene-Isoprene plug -08
09
face, memory stop; lever handle for sizes 2-1/2 to 4 IN;
09
10
gear operator with handwheel actuator for sizes 6 IN and
10
11
larger; flanged. Example: DeZurick 118F.
11
12
MM.
V-38: Eccentric plug valve, same as V-36 except flanged,
12
13
or grooved. Example: DeZurick 499.
13
14
NN.
V-39: Ball valve, same as V-13 and V-14 except include
14
15
adjustable memory stop. Example: Nibco S-585-70.
15
16
00.
V-40: Butterfly valve, 200 PSI WWP, bronze body,
16
17
adjustable memory stop with visual disc position range of
17
18
90 degrees, stainless steel disc and stem, Viton seal,
18
19
threaded. Example: Milwaukee BB2-100.
19
20
PP.
V-41: Plug valve, lubricated, 200 PSI WOG, semi -steel,
20
21
bottom or bolted -top entry, UL listed for application,
21
22
lubricant compatible with application, short pattern
22
23
flanged. Example: Resun R-1431.
23
24
QQ.
V-42: Not used.
24
25
RR.
V-43: Diaphragm valve, weir style; unlined, 316
25
26
stainless steel body; 145 PSI at 120 degF for 4 IN and
26
27
smaller, 125 PSI at 120 degF for 6 IN; 100 PSI at 120 degF27
28
for 8 IN; 65 PSI at 120 degF for 10 IN and larger; FDA
28
29
PTFE diaphragm; Stainless'steel bonnet with indicating
29
30
travel stop; handwheel operated; threaded for 2 IN and
30
3.1
smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 INand larger. Examples: ITT
31
32
32
33
2403 and 2433.
33
34
SS.
V-44: Diaphragm valve, weir style; solid PVC body; 150
34
35
PSI at 80 degF; FDA butyl rubber diaphragm; solvent weld
35
36
socket. Example: ITT 2451.
36
37
TT.,
V-45, Gate valve with stop box:
37
38
1. Gate valve, inverted key, integral drain, 3/4 to
38
39
1 IN, threaded. Example Mueller H-15210.
39
40
2. Stop box, coated cast-iron, adjustable, cast -in
40
41
marking indicating service. Example: Western
41
42
100.
42
43
UU.
V-46, Gate valve with stop box:
43
44
3. Gate valve, curb stop, integral drain, 1-1/2 to 2
44
45
IN, threaded. Example: Mueller 15214.
45
46
4. Stop box, coated cast-iron, adjustable, cast -in
46
47
marking indicating service. Example: Western
47
48
100.
48
49
VV.
V-47, Gate valve with valve box:
49
50
5. Gate valve, AWWA-0500, 200 PSI WWP for 12 IN and
50
51
smaller, 150 PSI for 14 IN and larger, iron body,
51
52
bronze mounted, bronze or cast-iron double disc,
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15100A-11
01
non -rising stem, parallel seat, mechanical joint.
01
02
Example: Stockham G-743.
02
03
6. Valve box: coated cast-iron, 5-1/4 IN shaft,
03
04
screw type, 3-piece, drop -in lid with cast -in
04
05
marking indicating service. Example: Tyler
05
06
6860.
06
07
WW.
V-48, Butterfly valve with valve box:
07
08
7. Butterfly valve, AWWA-0504, Class 150, iron body,
08
09
stainless steel seat, aluminum -bronze or cast
09
10
iron disc, natural rubber or Buna-N seat,
10
11
mechanical joint or flanged. Example: DeZurick
11
12
BAW.
12
13
8. Valve box: coated cast-iron, 5-1/4 IN shaft,
13
14
screw type, 3-piece, drop -in lid with cast -in
14
15
marking indicating service. Example: Tyler
15
16
6860.
16
17
XX.
V-49: Gate valve, UL-FM, 175 PSI WWP, bronze body, union
17
18
or screwed bonnet, solid wedge disc, OS&Y, threaded.
18
19
Example: Nibco T-104-0.
19
20
YY.
V-50: Gate valve, UL-FM, 175 PSI WWP, cast iron body,
20
21
bolted bonnet, resilient or solid wedge, OS&Y, flanged.
21
22
Example: Stockham G-634.
22
23
ZZ.
V-51: Butterfly valve, UL-FM, 175 PSI WWP, ductile iron
23
24
body, O-Ring seals, aluminum -bronze or ductile -iron disc,
24
25
stainless steel stem, Buna-N seal, manual geared operator
25
26
with visual position indicator, lugged. Example:
26
27
Stockham LD-72UF.
27
28
Aa.
V-52: Gate valve, UL-FM, AWWA C-509, 175
28
29
PSI WWP, cast iron body, resilient wedge, non -rise stem,
29
30
indicator post flange, MJ or flanged. Example: Stockham
30
31
G-600/601/602.
31
32
Bb.
V-53: Check valve, T-pattern, horizontal swing, UL-FM,
32
33
175 PSI WWP, cast iron body, bolted bonnet,
33
34
bronze trim, renewable bronze or cast-iron disc and seat,
34
35
flanged. Example: Stockham G-939.
35
36
Cc.
V-54: Check valve, in -line, spring -operated single or
36
37
double door(s), UL-FM, 200 PSI WWP, cast
37
38
iron body, renewable bronze door and rubber or EPDM seat,
38
39
stainless steel spring, wafer or grooved. Example:
39
40
Stockham WG-990.
40
41
Dd.
V-55: Butterfly valve, UL listed, 175 PSI WWP,
41
42
bronze body, stainless steel stem and disc, Viton seal,
42
43
threaded. Example: Milwaukee BB2-100.
43
44
Ee.
V-56: Butterfly valve, same as V-40 except include
-44
45
extended neck, solder. Example: Milwaukee BB2-350.
45
46
Ff.
V-57: Butterfly valve, same as V-40 except include
46
47
extended neck, threaded. Example: Milwaukee BB2-100.
47
48
Gg.
V-58: Not used.
48
49
Hh.
V-59: Butterfly valve, same as V-55 with tamper switch.
49
50
Example: Milwaukee BB2-100.
50
51
Ii.
V-60: Plug valve, lubricated, 125 PSI WOG
51
52
semi -steel, bottom or bolted -top entry, UL listed for
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15100A-12
01
application, lubricant compatible with application,
01 ram.
02
threaded. Example: Resun R-1430.
02
03
Jj.
V-61: Butterfly valve, UL-FM, 175 PSI WWP,
03
04
coated cast or ductile iron body, aluminum bronze or
04
05
ductile iron disk with EPDM coating, manual geared
05
06
operator with visual position indicator, grooved.
06
07
Example: Victaulic'708.
07
08
Kk.
V-62: Butterfly valve, 300 PSI WOG, 27 IN vacuum,
08
09
bronze
body, ductile iron disk with
09
10
EPDM coating, extended neck, grooved. Example: Victaulicl0
11
600.
11
12
L1.
V-63: Butterfly valve, Class 150, carbon steel body,
RTFE12
13
seat, stainless steel shaft, stainless steel disc, TFE
13
14
packing, wafer. Example: Flowseal 1W.
14
15
15
16
16
17
PART 3
- EXECUTION
17
18
18
19
3.01
INSTALLATION
19
20
20
21
A.
Refer to individual sections for specific valve
21
22
installation requirements.
22
23
23
24
B.
Keep valves clear of pull spaces.
24
25
25
26
C.
Install valves in accessible locations for operation,
26
27
removal, inspection, and repair of valves and
27 r�
28
equipment.
28
29
29
30
D.
Install gate and globe valves with stem in vertical
30
31
upright to horizontal position.
31
32
32
33
E.
Install butterfly valves with stem in horizontal
33
34
position.
34
35
35
36
F.
Install diaphragm valves to be self draining.
36
37
37
38
G.
Support valves individually to relieve pipe stress
38
39
and allow equipment removal.
39
40
40
41
H.
Follow manufacturer's recommendation for disassembly
41
42
of valves for end joining method employed.
42
43
43
44
I.
Provide globe valve in bypass around control valves.
44
45
Coordinate with Controls Contractor.
45
46
46
47
J.
Provide shut off valve on each side of control valve.
47
48
Coordinate with Controls Contractor.
48
49
49
50
END OF SECTION
50
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15101-1
01
96A03
SECTION 15101
01
02
02
03
GATE VALVES
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
SUMMARY
07
08
08
09
A.
Section Includes:
09
10
1. Gate valves.
10
11
11
12
B.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily
12
13
limited to:
13
14
1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and
14
15
Conditions of the Contract.
15
16
2. Division 1 - General Provisions.
16
17
3. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements.
17
18
18
19
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
19
20
20
21
A.
Referenced Standards:
21
22
1. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
22
23
a. C500, Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage
23
24
Systems.
24
25
b. C509, Resilient Seated Gate Valves, 3 through
25
26
12 NPS, for Water and Sewerage Systems.
26
27
27
28
1.03
DEFINITIONS
28
29
29
30
A.
OS&Y: Outside Screw and Yoke.
30
31
31
32
B.
NRS: Non -rising Stem.
32
33
33
34
C.
RS: Rising Stem.
34
35
35
36
1.04
SUBMITTALS
36
37
37
38
A.
Shop Drawings:
38
39
1. See Section 15100.
39
40
40
41
B.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
41
42
1. See Section 01340.
42
43
43
44
44
45
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
45
46
46
47
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
47
48
48
49
A.
Subject to compliance with the -Contract Documents,
49
50
the manufacturers listed under the specific valve
50
51
types are acceptable.
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15101-2
O1 2.02 VALVE: WATER, STEAM CONDENSATE, STEAM TO 125 PSI, AIR; 2-012
02
IN AND SMALLER
02
03
03
04
A.
Class 125 bronze gate valve.
04
05
05
06
B.
Comply with MSS SP-80.
06
07
07
08
C.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
08
09
1. Nibco 113.
09
10
2. Stockham B103, B104.
10
11
11
12
D.
Materials:
12
13
1. Body, bonnet, wedge: Bronze.
13
14
2.. Stem: Silicon bronze.
14
15
3. Packing: Teflon or TFE impregnated fibre.
15
16
16
17
E.
Design Requirements:
17
18
1. 125 psi steam, 200 psi nonshock WOG.
18
19
2. Screw in bonnet, non -rising stem, solid wedge.
19
20
20
21
2.03
ACCESSORIES
21
22
22
23
A.
Refer to Drawings and valve schedule for type of
23
24
actuators. Furnish actuator integral with valve.
24
25
25
26
B.
Refer to Section 15100 for actuator requirements.
26
27
27
28
2.04
FABRICATION
28
29
29
30
A.
General:
30
31
1. Provide valves with clear waterways the full
31
32
diameter of the valve.
32
33
33
34
B.
Spot valves in accordance with MSS SP-9.
34
35
35
36
36
37
PART
3 - EXECUTION
37
38
38
39
3.01
INSTALLATION
39
40
40
41
A.
See Section 15100:
41
42
42
43
B.
Do not install gate valves inverted or with the stems
43
44
sloped more than 45 degrees from the upright unless
44
45
the valve was ordered and manufactured specifically
45
46
for this orientation.
46
47
47
48
END OF SECTION
48
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15106-1
01
92B24
SECTION 15106
01
02
02
03
CHECK VALVES
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
SUMMARY
07
08
08
09
A.
Section Includes:
09
10
1. Check valves.
10
11
11
12
B.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily
12
13
limited to:
13
14
1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and
14
15
Conditions of the Contract.
15
16
2. Division 1 - General Provisions.
16
17
3. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements.
17
18
18
19
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
19
20
20
21
A.
Referenced Standards:
21
22
1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI):
22
23
a. B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged
23
24
Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.
24
25
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
25
26
a. C111, Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron
26
27
Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
27
28
b. C508, Swing Check Valves for Waterworks
28
29
Service, 2 through 24 IN NPS.
29
30
3. Manufacturer's Standardization, Society of the
30
31
Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc (MSS):
31
32
a. SP-9, Spot Facing for Bronze, Iron and Steel
32
33
Flanges.
33
34
b.. SP-71, Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged
34
35
and Threaded Ends.
35
36
C. SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check
36
37
Valves.
37
38
38
39
1.03
SUBMITTALS
39
40
40
41
A.
Shop Drawings:
41
42
1. See Section 15100.
42
43
43
44
B.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
44
45
1. See Section 01340.
45
46
46
47
47
48
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
48
49
49
50
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
50
51
51
52
A.
Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15106-2
O1
manufacturers listed under the valve with types are
02
acceptable.
03
04
B.
Submit requests for substitution in accordance with
05
Specification Section 01640.
06
07
2.02
CHECK VALVES: 2 IN AND SMALLER
08
09
A.
Class 125 Bronze Swing Check (Fuel Oil, Utility Air,
10
Water, Wastewater):
11
1. Comply with MSS SP-80.
12
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
13
a. Nibco 413B.
14
b. Stockham B319.
15
C. Or approved equal.
16
3. Materials:
17
a. Body, bonnet, disc: Bronze.
18
4. Design requirements:
19
a. 125 psi steam to 406 DegF, 200 psi WOG.
20
b. Horizontal swing, renewable disc.
21
22
B.
Class 150 Bronze Lift Check (Fuel Oil, Utility Air):
23
-
1. Comply with MSS SP-80.
24
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
25
a. Stockham B322.
26
b. Powell 158B.
27
C. Or approved equal.
2.8
3. Materials:
29
a. Body, cap, disc holder: Bronze.
30
b. Disc: Buna-N.
31
4. Design requirements: -
32
a. 150 psi to 150 DegF, 300 psi WOG.
33
b. Lift check, union cap.
34
35
C.
Class 200 Bronze Swing Check (Steam 125 to 200 psi):
36
1. Comply with MSS.SP-80.
37
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
38
a. Nibco T473B.
39
b. Stockham B345.
40
c. Or approved equal.
41
3. Materials:
42
a. Body, bonnet, disc: Bronze.
43
4. Design requirements:
44
a. 200 psi steam to 550 DegF, 400 psi WOG.
45
b. Horizontal swing, Y-pattern.
46
47
2.03
SWING CHECK: VALVES (3 TO 24 IN)
48
49
A.
Swing Check Valve (Water, Wastewater, Sludge):
50
1. Comply with AWWA C508.
51
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
52
a. Clow.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1-Construction
15106-3
01
b. American Darling.
01
02
c. Or approved equal.
02
03
3. Materials:
03
04
a. Body and cover: Cast iron.
04
05
b. Seat ring, hinge: Bronze.
05
06
c. Disc: 1) 3 to 4 IN: Bronze. 2) 6 to 24 IN:
06
07
Cast iron with bronze face. 3) 6 to 24 IN:
07
08
Cast iron with rubber face.
08
09
d. Hinge shaft: Stainless steel.
09
10
e. Bearings, connecting hardware: Bronze.
10
11
4. Design requirements:
11
12
a. 175 psi working pressure (3 to 12 IN).
12
13
b. 150 psi working pressure (14 to 24 IN).
13
14
C. Furnish with outside weight and lever or
14
15
lever and spring.
15
16
16
17
B.
Class 125 Iron Check Valves (Steam to 125 psi, Fuel
17
18
Oil, Utility Air):
18
19
1. Comply with MSS SP-71.
19
20
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
20
21
a. Nibco F918B.
21
22
b. Stockham G931.
22
23
c. Or approved equal.
23
24
3. Materials:
24
25
a. Iron body, bronze mounted.
25
26
b. Seat ring, disc face: Bronze.
26
27
c. Hinge pin: Bronze or stainless steel.
27
28
d. Connecting hardware: Bronze or plated steel.
28
29
4. Design requirements:
29
30
a. 125 psi steam to 450 DegF, 200 psi WOG.
30
31
b. Bolted cap.
31
32
32
33
C.
Class 250 Iron Check Valve (Steam 125 to 250 psi):
33
34
1. Comply with MSS SP-71, Type 1.
34
35
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
35
36
a. Nibco F968B.
36
37
b. Stockham F947.
37
38
c. Or approved equal.
38
39
3. Materials:
39
40
a. Iron body, bronze mounted.
40
41
b. Seat ring, disc face: Bronze.
41
42
c. Hinge pin: Brass.
42
43
d. Connecting hardware: Bronze.
43
44
4. Design requirements:
44
45
a. 250 psi steam to 450 DegF, 500 psi WOG.
45
46
b. Bolted cap.
46
47
47
48
2.04
CUSHIONED SWING CHECK VALVE: 2 TO 24 IN
48
49
49
50
A.
Class {1251 {2501.
50
51
51
52
B.
Comply with AWWA C508.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15106-4
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Air:
a. Golden Anderson (Figure 25 D (Class 125))
(Figure 25D (Class 250)).
b. APCO Series 6000.
c. Or approved equal.
2. Oil:
a. APCO Series 6100.
b. Golden Anderson Figure 25-DXH.
C. Or approved equal.
D. Materials:
1. Body, cover, disc, levers: Cast iron or cast
steel.
2. Seat: Bronze or stainless steel.
3. Seat ring: Bronze or rubber (Buna-N).
4. Hinge: Stainless steel.
5. Cushion cylinder: Metallic corrosion resistant
material.
E. Design Requirements:
1. Seat ring: Replaceable.
2. Hinge: Extend out both sides with lever and
weight.
3. Cushion: (Air) (oil) type with adjustable speed
control.
2.05 DOUBLE DOOR CHECK VALVES
A. Class (125) (250).
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. APCO. Series 9000 (2 to 48 IN).
2. Nibco W920W (2 to 24 IN) .
3. Or approved equal.
C. Materials:
1.
Body:
Cast iron
(wafer)
(threaded lug) style.
2.
Doors:
a. 2
to 12 IN:
Aluminum
bronze.
b. 14
to 54 IN:
Ductile
iron, bronze faced.
3.
Hinge
and stop pins:
Stainless
steel, 316.
4.
Spring:
Stainless
Steel,
T316.
5.
Seat:
(Buna-N)
(Bronze).
2.06 SILENT CHECK VALVES
A. Class (125) (250), ANSI B16.1.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. APCO Series 300 or 600.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15106-5
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
` 27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
2. Clow 375, 636.
3. Or approved equal.
C. Materials:
1. Body: Cast iron.
2. Plug and seat: Bronze.
3. Spring: Stainless steel.
D. Design Requirements:
1. Body type:
a. 1 to 10 IN: Wafer.
b. 3 to 30 IN: Flanged center guided, globe
style.
2.07 RUBBER FLAPPER SWING CHECK (2 TO 24 IN)
A. Class 125 (175 psi), ANSI B16.1.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. APCO Series 100.
2. Or approved equal.
C. Materials:
1. Body and cover: Cast iron.
2. Flapper: Buna-N, steel reinforced.
2.08 BALL CHECK VALVES (1/2 to 4 IN)
A. 150 psi at 73 DegF.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. R&G Sloane.
2. Corr Tech.
3. Or approved equal.
C. Materials:
1. Body: PVC (CPVC} (PVDF}.
2. Ball: Glass filled or polypropylene.
3. Seals: Viton or EPDM.
D. Design Requirements:
1. Connectors: Double union.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. See Section 15100.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15106-6
01 01
02 END OF.SECTION 02
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15114-1
O1
93I27
SECTION 15114
02
03
SPECIALTY VALVES AND CONTROLS
04
05
06
PART
1 - GENERAL
07
08,
1.01
SUMMARY
09
10
A.
Section Includes:
11
1. Air/Vacuum valve for water well.
12
2. Air release valve for water pipeline high point.
13
3. Automatic level and pressure controls and valves:
14
a. Pressure relief valves at pond and well.
15
b. Pressure -sustaining valve at pond.
16
C. Pressure switch for water well.
17
d. Pressure switch for hydropneumatic tank.
18
e. Pond level switch.
19
f. Float switch for irrigation water tank.
20
21
B.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily
22
limited to:
23
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract
24
Forms, and Conditions of the Contract.
25
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
26
3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.
'
27
4. Section 15100 - Valves: Basic Requirements.
28
29
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
30
31
A.
Referenced Standards:
32
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
33
a. B16.1, Cast -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged
34
Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800.
35
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
36
a. C512, Air -Release, Air/Vacuum, and
37
Combination Air Valves for Waterworks
38
Service.
39
b. C550, Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for
40
Valves and Hydrants.
41
42
1.03
SUBMITTALS
43
44
A.
Shop Drawings:
45
1. See Section 15100.
46
47
B.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
48
1. See Section 01340.
49
50
51
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15114-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
the manufacturers listed under the specific valve
types are acceptable.
B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with
Specification Section 01640.
2.02 AIR RELIEF AND AIR/VACUUM VALVES
A. General:
if. Conform to AWWA C512.
B. Air Release Valve:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. APCO 200A, 1 IN.
b. GA Industries, Figure 920, 1 IN.
C. Cla-Val Model 34AR, 1 IN.
d. Or approved equal.
2. Materials:
a. Body and cover: Cast iron or semi -steel.
b. Float: Stainless steel.
C. Linkage and trim: Bronze or stainless steel.
3. Design requirements:
a. Working pressure: 300 psi, max.
b. Release 10 cfm at 10 psi differential.
C. Air/Vacuum Valve:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. APCO Series 140 AVV, 1 IN.
b. GA Industries, Figure 935, 1 IN.
C. Cla-Val Model 34, 1 IN.
d. Or approved equal.
2. Materials:
a. Body and cover: Cast iron.
b. Float: Stainless steel.
C. Seat: Buna-N.
3. Design requirements:
a. Working pressure: 300 psi.
b. Capacity 10 scfm at 10 psi differential.
C. Provide gate or ball isolation valve.
d. Flush accessories:
1) Blow -off valve.
2) Clear water inlet valve.
3) Bug screen in vent cap.
2.03 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
A. Basic Valve:
1. Type:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15114-3
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
a. Diaphragm -actuated hydraulically operated.
1) Acceptable manufacturers:
a) Cla-Val, Model 100-01.
b) Or approved equal.
2) Materials:
a) Body: Cast iron.
b) Seat insert: Renewable bronze.
c) Disc: Buna-N.
d) Diaphragm: Nylon fabric bonded with
synthetic rubber.
3) Design requirements:
a) Do not use diaphragm as seating
surface.
b. Differential piston hydraulically operated:
1) Acceptable manufacturers:
a)"GA Industries.
b) Or approved equal.
2) Materials:
a) Body: Cast iron.
b) Piston, liner and seat crown: Bronze.
c) Piston cup and liner cup: Leather or
Buna-N.
3) Design requirements:
a) Valve liner with vee-port openings.
2. Design requirements:
a. Size: 4 IN.
b. Operating pressure:
1) Maximum 80 psi.
2) Minimum 40 psi.
C. Flow range:
1) Normal maximum 135 gpm.
2) Normal minimum 75 gpm.
B. Pressure -sustaining with solenoid shut-off:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Cla-Val, Model 50-01.
b. GA Industries, Figure 6700DR.
c. Watts ACV 116 Series.
d. Or approved equal.
2. Design requirements:
a. Modulate basic valve to maintain constant
upstream pressure by bypassing or relieving
excess pressure.
b. Maintain minimum 40 psi upstream pressure.
c. Solenoid shut-off by pond float switch.
2.04 LEVEL CONTROLLED, ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. ASAHI/America Series 92 electric actuator.
2. Hayward Controls EVU3 electric actuator.
3. Or approved equal
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15114-4
O1
01
02
B.
Design requirements:
02
03
1. Actuate motorized ball valve to control water
03
04
level in the irrigation tank.
04
05
2. Close valve at high water level and open at
05
06
preset lower tank level.
06
07
3. Electronic level sensor used to detect tank
07
08
levels.
08
09
09
10
2.05
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
10
11
11
12
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
12
13
1. ASAHI/America
13
14
2. Or approved equal.
14
15
15
16
B.
Design requirements:
16
17
a) Open valve rapidly at predetermined overpressure
17
18
(5 psi) and close slowly after restoration of
18
19
normal pressure.
19
20
20
21
2.06
FOOT VALVE
21
22
22
23
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
23
24
1. APCO, 4 IN.
24
25
2. Or approved equal.
25
26
26
27
B.
Design requirements:
27
28
1. Open on pump run condition, close on pump shut
28
29
off.
29
30
2. Flow area through valve at least 110% of
30
31
equivalent pipe size.
31
32
3. Materials:
32
33
a) Body: Cast iron.
33
34
b) Plug and Seat: Renewable bronze.
34
35
c) Seat Seal: Buna-N.
35
36
d) Strainer: Stainless Steel.
36
37
e) Bolts: Stainless Steel.
37
38
38
39
2.07
POND LEVEL CONTROL
39
40
40
41
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
41
42
1. Gorman -Rupp, Turtle Switch.
42
43
2. Consolidated Electric DAPS.
43
44
3. Or approved equal.
44
45
45
46
B.
Design requirements:
46
47
1. Open pressure sustaining valve on pond low level.
47
48
2. Close pressure sustaining valve on pond high
48
49
level.
49
50
3. Coorinate installtion of level hangar pipe and
50
51
concrete base block with installation of pond
51
52
liner.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15114-5
O1
4. Float shall resist wave action and shall not
01
02
cause excessive valve cycling.
02
03
03
04
2.08
PUMP CONTROL PRESSURE SWITCH
04
05
05
06
A.
Furnish and install one in -line pressure -activated
06
07
pump control switch with NEMA4 enclosure and
07
08
programmable pressure controller. Coordinate
08
09
pressure switch with pump motor starter and controls.
09
10
B.
Design requirements:
10
11
1. Pump Start pressure: 73 psi.
11
12
2. Pump Stop pressure: 105 psi.
12
13
3. NEMA 4 weathertight enclosure.
13
14
14
15
PART
3 - EXECUTION
15
16
16
17
3.01
INSTALLATION
17
18
18
19
A.
General:
19
20
1. See Sections 11005 and 15100.
20
21
21
22
B.
Tank and Pond level settings:
22
23
1. Coordinate with Owner and Engineer.
23
24
24
25
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
25
26
26
27
A.
Clean, inspect, and operate control and valves to
27
28
ensure all parts are operable and valve seats
28
29
properly.
29
30
30
31
B.
Check and adjust valves and accessories in accordance
31
32
with.manufacturer's instructions and place into
32
33
operation per Section 01650.
33
34
34
35
END OF SECTION
35
M
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15120-1
O1
1B15,
6B13 SECTION 15120
01
02
02
03
PIPING SPECIALTIES
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Description of system:
09
10
1. Thermometer wells and test gauge connections.
10
11
2. Thermometers and pressure gauges.
11
12
3. Combination pressure and temperature test
12
13
stations.
13
14
4. Air vents.
14
15
5. Strainers.
15
16
6. Unions.
16
17
7. Drains.
17
18
18
19
B.
Related sections:
19
20
1. General requirements: Division 1.
20
21
2. Special mechanical requirements: Section 15010.
21
22
3. Pipe and fittings: Section 15060.
22
23
23
24
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
24
25
25
26
A.
Comply with UL, ANSI or ASTM Standards.
26
27
27
28
1.03
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
28
29
29
30
A.
Shop drawings:
30
31
1. Equipment specified.
31
32
32
33
B.
Product data:
33
34
1. Catalog cuts.
34
35
2. Performance data.
35
36
36
37
C.
Samples: Not required for Architect review.
37
38
38
39
D.
Project information: Not required for Architect
39
40
review.
40
41
41
42
E.
Contract closeout information:
42
43
1. Operating and maintenance data.
43
44
2. Warranty.
44
45
45
46
46
47
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
47
48
48
49
2.01
MATERIALS
49
50
50
51
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
51
52
1. Thermometers:
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15120-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
a. Base:
(1) Marsh Instrument Co.
b. Optional
(1) Ashcroft.
(2) Marshalltown Instrument Inc.
(3) Palmer Instruments.
(4) Taylor Scientific Instruments.
(5) H O Trerice Co.
(6) Weiss Instruments.
(7) Weksler Instruments Corp.
(8) Weston and Ernst.
2. Pressure gauges:
a. Base:
(1) Ashcroft.
b. Optional:
(1) Marsh Instrument Co.
(2) H O Trerice Co.
(3) U S Gauge.
(4) Weiss Instruments.
(5) Weksler Instruments Corp.
(6) Weston and Ernst.
3. Pressure/temperature test station (Pete's plug):
a. Base:
(1) Peterson Equipment Company, Inc.
4. Manual air vents:
a. Base:
(1) Crane.
b. Optional:
(1) Jenkins.
(2) Johnston Corp.
(3) OIC.
(4 ) Powell.
(5) Stockham.
(6) Walworth.
5. Automatic air vents:
a. Base:
(1) Armstrong.
b. Optional:
(1) Spirax Sarco Inc.
(2) Illinois.
(3) Trane.
(4) Hoffman.
(5) Bell & Gossett.
(6) Thrush.
(7) Taco.
(8) Fisher.
(9) Johnston Corp.
6. Heating water strainers:
a. Base:
(1) Armstrong.
b. Optional:
(1) Mueller Steam Specialty.
West Texas Region Disposal -Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15120-3
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
(2) ITT Hoffman.
(3) Metraflex.
(4) Spirax Sarco Inc.
7. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply
with Document 00440.
2.02 THERMOMETER WELLS AND TEST GAUGE CONNECTIONS
A. Temperature sensing wells:
1. Brass or stainless steel.
2. Provide extension necks for insulated piping.
3. Provide test thermometer well adjacent to each
point where a temperature sensing device is
required by control specifications and where
piping schematics indicate thermometers.
2.03 THERMOMETERS
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
A. Thermometers: Industrial type, with separable brass 19
sockets, red reading mercury with 9 IN scale minimum, 20
black lines and numbers, right or left side angle 21
type and shatterproof glass. 22
B. Thermometers range schedule:
Range (degF)
Domestic hot water 30-180
Domestic cold water 0-100
Compressed air 50-300
2.04 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure gauges:
1. 4-1/2 IN dial, surface or flush
black numerals, black pointers,
tubes and shatterproof glass.
2. Pressure gauge range schedule:
23
24
25
(degF) 26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
type, white face, 35
bronze bourbon 36
Division
2
1
2
Inter.
Fig. Grad -
Range Interval uations
PSIG PSIG PSIG
Fire
0-400
50 5
Compressed air
0-160
20 2
Domestic hot water
0-200
20 2
Domestic cold water
0-200
20 2
3. Waterlines: Ashcroft 1010 with 1092 gauge cock
and 1106 pulsation dampener.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
37
38
39
40
Bldg. 41
Height 42
Stories43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15120-4
O1
02 2.05 COMBINATION PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST STATIONS
03
04
A.
Pressure/temperature test station, combination:
05
1.
"Pete's Plug", to receive either a 1/8 IN OD
06
temperature or pressure probe.
07
2.
Fitting: Solid brass, 1/4 IN MPT, with 2 valve
08
cores of neoprene (maximum 200 degF at 500 PSI)
09
or Nordel (maximum 275 degF at 500 PSI).
10
3.
Provide long length (XL) at locations with pipe
11
insulation.
12
4.
Provide with color coded and marked cap with
13
gasket, rated at 1000 PSI at 140 degF.
14
5.
Provide at locations shown on equipment and
15
piping schematic drawings. Provide at Water
16
Service Entrance.
17
18
B.
Pressure
and temperature test kit:
19
1.
0-100 PSI, 0-230 FT WG gauge.
20
2.
1/8 IN OD probe and 5 IN stem pocket testing
21
thermometers.
22
3.
No.500 gauge adapter with 1/8 IN OD probe.
23
4.
Protective carrying case.
24
25
2.06
AIR VENTS
26
27
A.
Air
vents, manual:
28
1.
Vent valves: 1/4 IN 125 PSI globe angle valve
29
with XH nipple connecting to pipe.
30
31
B.
Air
vents, automatic:.
32
1.
150 PSI rated, minimum.
33
2.
Maximum working pressure: 100 PSIG.
34
3.
Maximum temperature: 212 degF.
35
4.
Cast bronze, chrome plated, body with renewable
36
valve and seat.
37
5.
Synthetic rubber disc.
38
6.
Armstrong TA-11 or TA-12.
39
40
2.07
STRAINERS
41
42
A.
Strainers - General:
43
1.
Provide full line size strainers ahead of steam
44
and water control valves, steam traps, steam and
45
water pressure regulating valves, suction side of
46
pumps and as indicated.
47
48
B.
Strainers,
chilled water: Y or basket type, screwed
49
or
flanged.
50
1.
2 IN and smaller, brass body, screwed ends.
51
2.
2 1/2 IN and larger, cast iron body, flanged
52
ends.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15120-5
`
O1
3. Working pressure, non shock: 125 PSIG saturated
02
steam.
03
4. Screens: Bronze, monel or stainless steel.
04
a. 2 IN and less: 3/64 IN perforations.
05
b. 2-1/2 IN and larger: 1/8 IN perforations.
06
07
08
09
C.
Air separator/strainer:
10
1. ASME code construction.
11
2. Stainless steel air collector tube.
12
3. NPT tappings for vent and blowdown connections.
13
4. Galvanized or stainless steel strainer with 3/16
14
IN diameter perforations.
15
a. Free area: Not less than 5 times cross
16
sectional area of connecting pipe.
17
5. Working pressure: 125 PSIG at 350 degF.
18
6. Provide where indicated.
19
20
2.08
UNIONS
21
22
A.
Unions: Of same type, pressure rating and material
23
as piping.
24
25
B.
Flanges: Raised face type of same type, pressure
26
rating and material as piping.
27
28
C.
Unions in copper pipe
29
1. 2 IN and smaller: Use wrought copper solder _
30
joint copper to copper unions.
31
2. 2-1/2 IN and larger: Use brass flange unions.
32
33
D.
Dielectric unions: Standard products for prevention
34
of galvanic corrosion.
35
36
2.09
DRAINS
37
38
A.
Drains: 3/4 IN ball valve or as indicated on
39
drawings.
40
41
B.
Drains from safety valves:
42
1. Provide at safety valves, where discharge is
43
1infrequent, or valves which have test levers.
44
2. Pipe to floor drain or janitors sink.
45
46
C.
Drains on copper piping: Male iron pipe adapter and
47
threaded brass cap except where valve drains are
48
required.
49
50
D.
Drains piped to hose bib: Provide over electrical
51
equipment or other piping or equipment which makes
52
access to drain valve difficult; pipe to accessible
West Texas.Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15120-6
01
location with hose bib adapter.
- 02
03
E.
Access panels: Provide flush access panel where
04
drains occur in concealed piping.
05
06
07
PART
3 - EXECUTION
08
09
3.01
GENERAL
10
-11
A.
Install piping specialties according to manufacturer
12
instructions and as specified.
13
14
3.02
THERMOMETER WELLS ANU TEST GAUGE CONNECTIONS
15
16
A.
Provide test thermometer well adjacent to each point
17
where a temperature sensing device is required by
18
control specifications and where piping schematics
19
indicate thermometers.
20
21
3.03
THERMOMETERS
22
23
A.
Where temperature control requires a temperature
24
transmitter, a thermometer will not be required in
25
same location unless specifically required in
26
equipment specifications.
27
28
B.
Where 2 or more pumps are headered, provide one
29
thermometer in suction header and one in discharge
30
header.
31
32
3.04
PRESSURE GAUGES
33
34
A.
Install filter type pressure snubbers at pumps and
35
chillers.
36
37
B.
Install syphons on steam gauges.
38
39
C.
Install brass tee handle cock and 1/4 IN hard
40
tempered tubing from gauge to pipe connection.
41
42
D.
Install additional brass tee handle cock at gauge for
43
panel mounted gauge.
44
45
E.
Calibrate and zero gauges at job site.
46
47
3.05
AIR VENTS
48
49
A.
Air vents, manual:
50
1. Vents shall prevent ANY part of system from being
51
air bound.
52
2. Pipe discharge of'vent to a location where air
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15120-7
01
and water may be collected in a bucket.
02
3. Provide at trapped high points of cooling and
03
heating piping systems whether or not indicated.
04
05
B.
Air vents, automatic:
06
1. Provide shut off valve ahead of vent.
07
2. Provide copper relief line from valve to drain or
08
drip pan.
09
3. Provide at each high point in closed water
10
systems and coil headers in air handling units.
11
12
3.06
STRAINERS
13
14
A.
Y-type strainers: Same size as piping served.
15
16
B.
Connections to branch piping at equipment.
17
18
C.
Strainers 6 IN and larger, provide 1-1/2 IN blow down
19
valve and pipe to floor drain.
20
21
D.
Strainers 5 IN and less, provide 3/4 IN blow -down
22
valve with hose end connection.
23
24
E.
Install strainers ahead of automatic valves (motor
25
operated), steam traps, regulating valves and pumps.
/-� 26
f 27
3.07
UNIONS
28
29
A.
Install unions as directed by Fluid Controls
30
Institute, Inc., (FCI).
31
1. Where "Victaulic" type couplings are used, they
32
may serve as unions.
33
2. Make connections between couplings and flanged
34
equipment with slip-on flanges and a grooved
35
nipple, or "Vic -Flange" adapter.
36
37
B.
Flanged connections:
38
1. Where flanged valves are used at equipment
39
connections, flange unions will not be required.
40
2. Make connections to flanged valves and equipment
41
using ANSI welding neck or slip on type welding
42
flanges.
43
3. Flanged cast iron ells may be used for
44
connections between pumps, strainers, check
45
valves and other flanged equipment.
46
47
C.
Install dielectric unions at each piping joint and
48
equipment connection between ferrous and non-ferrous
49
materials.
50
51
3.08
DRAINS
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15120-8
01
A.
Provide drain valves to drain piping systems and
02
drain safety valves..
03
1. For draining low points of piping: 'Minimum 6 IN
04
nipple, with ball valve.
05
2. On piping 2-1/2 IN and larger: Ball valve with
06
hose adapter.
07
3 On piping 2 IN and smaller: Ball valve.
08
09
B.
Drains from safety valves:
10
1. 'Provide at safety valves, where discharge is
11
infrequent, or valves which have test levers.
12
2. Pipe to floor drain or janitors sink.
13
14
C.
Drains on copper piping: Male iron pipe adapter and
15
threaded brass cap except where valve drains are
16
required.
17
18
D.
Drains piped to hose bib: Provide over electrical
19
equipment or other piping or equipment which makes
20
access to drain valve difficult; pipe to accessible
21
location with hose bib adapter.
22
23
E.
Access panels: Provide flush access panel where
24
drains occur in concealed piping.
25
26
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15140-1
O1
1F21,
6C04 SECTION 15140
01
02
02
03
PIPING SUPPORTS, SLEEVES AND SEALS
03
04,
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Description of system:
09
10
1. Sleeves.
10
it
2. Pipe hangers and supports.
11
12
3. Pipe and equipment anchors.
12
13
13
14
B.
Related sections:
14
15
1. General requirements: Division 1.
15
16
2. Firestopping: Section 07270.
16
17
3. Special mechanical requirements: Section 15010.
17
18
4. Pipe and fittings: Section 15060.
18
19
5. Mechanical sound, vibration and seismic control:
19
20
Section 15240.
20
21
6. Pipe, duct and equipment insulation: Section
21
22
15250.
22
23
7. Fire protection systems:. Section 15300.
23
24
8. Plumbing piping: Section 15410.
24
25
9. Medical gas piping: Section 15482.
25
26
10. Natural gas piping: Section 15483.
26
27
11. Hydronic piping: Section 15510.
27
28
12. Steam and condensate piping: Section 15520.
28
29
13. Fuel oil piping: Section 15590.
29
30
30
31
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
31
32
32
33
A.
Pipe hanger standards: Manufacturers Standardization
33
34
Society (MSS) SP-58, SP-89 and SP-69, as referenced.
34
35
35
36
1.03
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
36
37
37
38
A.
Shop drawings:
38
39
1. For pipe larger than 6 IN, show layout of hanger
39
40
locations and method of support from structure.
40
41
2. All items specified.
41
42
3. Method of hanger support for all piping.
42
43
4. Method of anchoring and guiding piping.
43
44
44
45
B.
Product data:
45
46
1. Catalog cuts.
46
47
2. Performance data.
47
48
48
49
C.
Samples: Not required for Architect review.
49
50
50
51
D.
Project information: Not required for Architect
51
52
review.
52
West Texas,Region Disposal Facility
Phase l_Construction
15140-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
E. Contract closeout information:
1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Sleeves:
a. Base:
(1) Shop or field fabricated.
b. Optional:
(1) Shamrock Industries, "Crete -sleeve"
plastic hole forms.
(2) Proset Systems Inc, "Proset" fire safe
pipe penetrations.
2. Sleeves, pre -manufactured fire and smoke wall
barrier:
a. Base:
(1) Pipe Shields, Inc.
3. Pipe hangers:
a. Base:
(1) Elden Metal Products Company.
b. Optional:
(1) B-Line Systems, Inc.
(2) Carpenter and Paterson, Inc.
(3) Grinnell Corp.
4. Concrete anchors:
a. Base:
(1) Phillips.
b. Optional:
(1) Hilti.
S. Insulated pipe supports:
a. Base:
(1) Pipe Shields, Inc.
b. Optional:
(1) Elden Metal Products Co.
(2) Power Piping
6. Pipe and equipment anchors:
a. Base:
(1) Shop fabricated.
b. Optional:
(1) Field fabricated.
7. Sealants:
a. Base:
(1) Dow Corning.
(2) Nelson.
(3) 3M 'Co:
(4) General Electric.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15140-3
01
(5) Pipe Shields, Inc.
01
02
(6) Proset Systems, Inc.
02
03
8. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
03
04
Document 00440.
04
05
05
06
2.02
SLEEVES
06
07
07
08
A.
Sleeves - general:
08
09
1. Sleeve piping passing through walls, floors,
09
10
roofs, foundations, footings and grade beams
10
11
sufficient to allow free movement of piping with
11
12
insulation continuous thru sleeve.
.12
13
2. Box out openings larger than 14 IN diameter.
13
14
14
15
B.
Sleeves, steel pipe: Use in following locations:
15
16
1. Concrete floors and walls and concrete block
16
17
walls.
17
18
2. Structural concrete members.
18
19
3. Optional products for concrete floors:
19
20
a. Polyethylene hole forms (Crete -Sleeve).
20
21
b. "Proset".
21
22
C. 18 GA galvanized sheet metal.
22
23
d. 24 GA spiral duct.
23
24
24
25
C.
Sleeves for future work: Same as for this work.
25
26
27
D.
Sleeves for plastic piping:
26
27
28
1. Provide steel pipe sleeves for plastic type
28
29
piping (PVC, CPVC and polypropylene) at fire
29
30
rated assembly and floor slab penetrations.
30
31
2. Size sleeves per following schedule:
31
32
32
33
Pipe size Sleeve size Extension beyond barrier
33
34
(IN) (IN) (FT)
34
35
35
36
1 or less 3 2
36
37
1-1/4 to 2 4 2
37
38
3 5 3
38
39
4 6 4
39
40
40
41
3. Extend sleeve listed distance beyond wall or
41
42
floor on both sides.
42
43
4. Insulate plastic pipe with minimum 1 IN thick
43
44
calcium silicate or 2400 degF aluminasilica
44
45
within sleeve length.
45
46
46
47
E.
Sleeves, pre -manufactured fire and smoke wall
47
48
barrier: Optional, similar to Pipe Shields, Inc.
48
49
1. Bare pipe through fire walls and floors: Model
49
50
WFB, DFB or QDFB.
50
51
2. Insulated pipe through fire walls and floors:
51
52
Model WFB, DFB or QDFB.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15140-4
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
a. Insulated chilled water and DX lines: Type
CS-CW.
b. Other insulated pipes: Type CS.
3. Plastic pipe through fire walls and floors: Type
WFB with 1 IN thick calcium silicate insulation
encased in metal sleeve extension 2 FT either
side of fire rated walls or floor.
F. Sleeve sizes:
1 Diameter:
a Minimum 3 IN.
b. Minimum 1 IN larger than pipe and pipe
insulation.
C. In concrete, 1-1/2 IN larger than pipe.
d. Diameter suitable for construction tolerances
.and to receive sealant.
G. Pipe entrance wall sleeve and anchoring:
1. Provide steel, heavy wall welded or seamless pipe
sleeve full circle continuously welded water stop
plate.
2. Provide sleeve full length of wall thickness and
protect with a primer coat.
3. Structurally secure pipe to withstand water
hammer force.
a. Extend exterior piping into building a
minimum of 12 IN.
b. Provide a mechanical joint on interior end of
pipe and mechanically tie end back to
adjoining structural (exterior) wall.
4. Provide "link seal" on pipe at exterior side of
sleeve.
a. Optional sealing of pipe with oakum stop and
caulk on exterior side is acceptable.
H. Sealants: Seal annular space around piping.
1. For fire and smoke rated floors, walls'and
partitions: Use UL listed firestopping material
that maintains fire rated wall and floor
integrity.
a. Provide proper material for each typical
application as described.by manufacturer.
2. Acceptable products:
a. Base:
(1) Dow Corning "Fire Stop".
(2) Nelson "Flameseal".
(3) 3M "Fire Barrier"
(4) GE Pensil 200 Firestop Foam.
(5) GE Pensil 100 Firestop Sealant.
(6) Pipe Shields Inc Model WFB, DFB or QDFB
series. .
(7) Proset Systems.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15140-5
O1
3.
For non -rated walls and partitions: Use mineral
01
02
or glass fiber insulation.
02
03
4.
For exterior and foundation walls: Use synthetic
03
04
rubber seals, "Link -Seal" water proof material or
04
05
system.
05
06
06
07
2.03 PIPE
HANGERS
07
08
08
09
A. Pipe
hangers - General:
09
10
1.
Materials, design and manufacture: MSS SP-58.
10
11
2.
Fabrication and installation: MSS SP-89.
11
12
3.
Selection and application: MSS SP-69.
12
13
4.
Hangers used directly on copper pipe: Copper or
13
14
cadmium plated.
14
15
5.
Other hangers and channels, angles, and
15
16
supporting steel: Cadmium plated or galvanized.
16
17
6.
Pipes running parallel may be supported on
17
18
trapeze hangers.
18
19
7.
Hanger rods of continuous thread type:
19
20
Electro-galvanize or cadmium plate after threads
20
21
are cut.
21
22
8.
Galvanize structural steel, angles, rods,
22
23
channels, and hardware located in boiler,
23
24
mechanical, and fan rooms and on roofs.
24
25
9.
Where "Victaulic " couplings are used, place
25
26
hanger within 2 FT each side of fittings or refer
26
27
to manufacturer's pipe support and anchorage
27
28
guide.
28
29
10.
Screw threads on hangers and fittings: Conform
29
30
to Class 2A and 2B of ANSI-B1.1.
30
31
31
32
B. Structural considerations:
32
33
1.
Steel or concrete roof/floor system including
33
34
slabs or roof deck shall be in place and complete
34
35
before installation of mechanical piping system.
35
36
2.
Space hangers so maximum individual hanger load
36
37
will not exceed values listed in paragraph "Pipe
37
38
hanger loading".
38
39
3.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
39
40
4.
Do not attach hangers to bottom of concrete
40
41
filled floor deck except by permission of
41
42
Architect.
42
43
5.
Attach hangers to beams whenever possible.
43
44
44
45
C. Pipe hanger spacing: Locate hangers on piping mains
45
46
within 2 FT of each change of direction, branch tee,
46
47
and
elbow. Locate hangers on branch connections
47
48
within two foot of connection to main, locate hangers
48
49
within 2 FT of piping wall penetrations and within
49
50
the
following maximum limits:
50
51
51
52
Standard Steel Copper
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15140-6
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
_17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Pipe Diameter Fluid Vapor Fluid Vapor
1/2 - 1 IN 7 FT 8 FT 5 FT 6
FT
1-1/4 - 2 IN 7 FT 9 FT 7 FT 9
FT
2-1/2 - 3 IN 11 FT 12 FT 9 FT 12
FT
3-1/2 - 4 IN 12 FT 12 FT 11 FT 12
FT
5 - 6 IN 12 FT 12 FT 12 FT 12
FT
8 - 14 IN 12 FT 12 FT 12 FT 12
FT
16 IN 12 FT 12 FT
1. For pipe larger than 16 IN diameter.
a. Provide shop drawings for approval showing
location of hangers and method of support
from structure.
2. For fire protection piping, space according to
.NFPA Section 13, but not greater than 12 FT OC.
3. For cast iron pressure piping, space maximum 12
FT OC.
a. Provide minimum of two hangers per pipe
section close to joint on barrel and at
change of direction and branch connections.
4. For cast iron soil piping, space maximum 10 FT
OC.
a. Provide minimum of two hangers per pipe
section close to joint on barrel and at
change of direction and branch connections.
D. Pipe hanger loading:
1. Total hanger rod load (including piping,
insulation, and fluid) not exceeding following
limits:
Nominal Rod Diameter Maximum Load
3/8 IN 610 LB
1/2 IN 1130 LB
5/8 IN 1810 LB
3/4 IN 2710 LB
2. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum
safe load if smaller than above.
E. Pipe hangers for insulated and bare pipe:
1. Insulated pipe:
MSS
B-LINE
GRINNELL
1
B3108
260
3
B3144
295
7
B3172
269
9
-
97
10
B3170
70
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15140-7
01
2.
Bare pipe:
01
0
02
03
MSS B-LINE GRINNELL
03
04
1 B3100/02 C 260
04
05
3 B3144/46 295
05
06
4 B3142 216
06
07
7 B3172 269
07
08
9 - 97
08
09
10 B3170 70
09
10
11 B3173 108
10
11
24 B3188 137
11
12
12
13
3.
Use pipe hanger MSS Type 10 only on pipe sizes 6
13
14
IN or less.
14
15
15
16
F.
Pipe
hangers in other situations: See MSS-SP-69.
16
17
17
18
G.
Pipe
hangers on steam lines 8 IN or larger: Use roll
18
19
type
supports or insulated pipe supports with slide
19
20
bases.
20
21
21
22
H.
Pipe
hangers on insulated lines:
22
23
1.
Pipe sizes 2 IN and less: Use pipe covering
23
24
shield to protect insulation.
24
25
a. Minimum shield length: 12 IN.
25
26
b. Minimum shield thickness: 18 GA.
26
27
2.
Pipe sizes 2-1/2 IN and larger: Use insulated
27
28
pipe supports, or field installed 180 degree
28
29
calcium silicate inserts with metal saddles of _
29
30
gauges indicated below.
30
31
31
32
I.
Hanging rollers, cast iron:
32
33
1.
MSS Type 41.
33
34
2.
Elcen Figure 15.
34
35
3.
B-Line B3114.
35
36
4.
Grinnell 171.
36
37
37
38
J.
Supporting roller, cast iron:
38
39
1.
MSS Type 44, 45 or 46.
39
40
2.
Elcen Figure 19 or 20.
40
41
3.
B-Line B3117SL, B3117, B3118SL or B3119.
41
42
4.
Grinnell 271, 277 or 274.
42
43
43
44
K.
Insulated pipe supports:
44
45
1.
Protect insulated pipe at point of support by 360
45
46
degree pre -insulated pipe supports.
46
47
2.
Utilize 100 PSI, waterproofed calcium silicate
47
48
fully encased in sheet metal shield.
48
49
3.
Insert same thickness as adjoining pipe
49
50
insulation.
50
51
4.
Use shield length and minimum sheet metal gauges
51
52
indicated:
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15140-8
01
02
Pipe Size Shield Length Minimum Gauge
03
04
2-1/2 - 6 IN 6 IN 20
05
8 - 10 IN 9 IN 16
06
12 - 18 IN 12 IN 16
07
20 IN and up 18 IN 16
08
09
5.
Extend insulation inserts 1 IN beyond shields on
10
refrigerant and chilled water lines.
11
6.
Pipe supported on rod hangers:
12
a. Pipe Shields, Inc., Models A1000, A2000,
13
A3000, A4000 and A9000.
14
7.
Pipe supported on flat surfaces:
15
a. Pipe Shields, Inc., Models A1000, A2000,
16
A5000, A6000 and A7000.
17
B.
Pipe supported on pipe rolls:
18
a. Pipe Shields, Inc., Models A3000, A4000,
19
A5000, A6000 and A8000.
20
21
L. Trapeze hangers:
22
1.
Suspend trapeze hangers from concrete inserts,
23
approved structural clips or beam clamps.
24
2.
Construct trapeze hangers of galvanized angle
25
iron, channels or other structural shapes with
26
flat surfaces for point of support.
27
3.
Use pipe clamps or straps to support pipes on
28
trapeze hangers.
29
a. When supporting bare copper piping isolate
30
copper pipe from galvanized trapeze hanger
31
with rubber or elastomeric material.
32
33
M. Vertical pipe supports and guides:
34
1.
Support vertical pipe runs in pipe chases at base
35
of riser and on every other floor.
36
2.
Support pipes for lateral movement with clamps or
37
brackets on alternating floors of pipe supports.
38
a. provide guides.
39
40
N. Concrete inserts:
41
1.
Provide individual or continuous slot concrete
42
inserts for use with hangers for piping and
43
equipment exposed in labs and classrooms, and as
44
required.
45
2.
Provide concrete inserts in time for installation
46
in concrete.
47
3.
Continuous slot inserts:
48
a. Elcen Figure 1150 and 9000.
49
b. B-Line Figure B22I, B32I, B42I or B52I.
50
4.
Individual inserts:
51
a. Elcen Figure 65, 88 or 266.
52
b. Grinnell Figure 282, or 281.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15140-9
r-.
01
c. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended load
01
02
on insert.
02
03
03
04
O.
C-clamps:
04
05
1. Pipe size 3 IN and less:
05
06
a. B-Line Figure B351L or B3033.
06
07
b. Grinnell Figure 86 or 61.
07
08
08
09
P.
Beam clamps:
09
10
1. Pipe size larger than 3 IN:
10
11
a. B-Line Figure B3054 or B3055.
it
12
b. Grinnell Figure 219, 228, 229 or 292.
12
13
13
14
Q.
Attachments to wood structure:
14
15
1. Provide angle clips and lag screws or side beam
15
16
connectors: PHD figure 920 or 905.
16
17
2. Strap type hangers not acceptable.
17
18
18
19
R.
Pipe hanger in central plant:
19
20
1. Provide spring isolated pipe hangers.
20
21
21
22
2.04
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT ANCHORS
22
23
23
24
A.
Pipe anchors:
24
25
1. Provide as indicated and required to permit
25
26
complete installation of system.
26
27
2. Do not anchor piping to plaster or gypsum
27
28
wallboard partition walls.
28
29
3. Provide anchoring devices at locations indicated.
29
30
30
31
B.
Anchors: Angle iron and rods with turnbuckles,
31
32
unless detailed otherwise.
32
33
33
34
C.
Anchors for ductwork, equipment and piping hanger
34
35
rods:
35
36
1. Anchoring devices installed in concrete after
36
37
forms are removed: Hard metal type which do not
37
38
depend on soft lead for their holding power.
38
39
2. Hilti Kwik-Bolts or Phillips Drill Co.,
39
40
self -drilling wedge anchors.
40
41
41
42
42
43
PART
3 - EXECUTION
43
44
44
45
3.01
GENERAL
45
46
46
47
A.
Install components as indicated and in accordance
47
48
with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
48
49
All supports and associated components shall be
49
50
galvanized or -painted. Do not support piping from
50
51
ductwork or other piping.
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15140-10
O1 3.02 SLEEVES
02
03
A.
Coordinate location of opening in structural systems
04
with Architect.
05
06
B.
Maintain rating of fire and smoke rated construction.
07
08
C.
Set sleeves plumb or level, in proper position,
09
tightly fitted into work.
10
11
D.
Set sleeves with ends flush with finished wall and
12
ceiling surfaces, except for plastic piping sleeves.
13
14
E.
Set floor penetration sleeves with top 4 IN above
15
finished floor:
16
1. Mechanical rooms.
17
2. Boiler rooms.
18
3. Kitchens.
19
4. Laundry rooms.
20
21
F.
Seal around pipes and use firestopping for mechanical
22
penetrations through floor slabs, fire rated walls
23
and partitions, and at each floor level in vertical
24
mechanical service shafts.
25
1. Install firestopping as described in
26
manufacturers installation instructions.
27
28
G.
Seal around sleeves.
29
30
H.
Fill openings made by others for piping penetrations,
31
with same construction as work opening is in,'or
32
construction of equivalent fire or smoke rating.
33
34
END OF SECTION
West'Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15190-1
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
6A26, 7D30
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Description of work:
1. Piping, valve, duct and equipment identification.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping system identification:
1. ANSI-A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of
Piping Systems".
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Pipe markers.
2. Valve tags.
3. Hvac duct markers.
4. Equipment nameplates.
5. Access panel markers.
6. Underground marking tape.
A. Contract closeout information:
1. Letter of transmittal indicating valve charts
installed and delivered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Pipe, valve and equipment markers:
a. Base:
(1) Seton Name Plate Corp.
b. Optional:
(1) W H Brady Co.
(2) EMED Company Inc.
(3) Kolbi Industries, Inc.
(4) 3M Co.
(5) Craftmark Identification Systems.
(6) Marking Services, Inc.
(7) Carlton Industries, Inc.
2. Underground marking tape:
a. Base:
(1) Reef Industries, Inc.
b. Optional:
(1) Seton Name Plate Corp.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15190-2
O1 (2) EMED Company, Inc.
02 3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
03 Document 00440.
04
05 2.02 PIPE MARKERS
06
07 A. Pipe markers: Conform to ANSI-A13.1.
08 1. Pressure sensitive vinyl (self-adhesive)
09 material.
10 2. Mechanically fastened type: Snap on or strap on.
11 a. For dirty greasy, oily pipe where pressure
12 sensitive markers may not perform
13 satisfactorily.
14 3. Provide with arrows indicating direction of flow.
15 4. Letter sizes: In accordance with table in Part
16 3.
17
18 2.03 VALVE TAGS
19
20 A. Valve tags: Brass or anodized aluminum type.
21 1. Brass: Minimum 19 gauge, polished, 1-1/2 IN
22 diameter with following lettering:
23 a. Service: 1/4 IN stamped black filled
24 letters.
25 b. Valve numbers: 1/2 IN stamped black filled
26 letters.
27 2. Aluminum: 2 IN diameter, 0.032 IN thick, with
28 following lettering:
29 a. Service: 1/4 IN engraved letters.
30 b. Valve numbers: 1/2 IN engraved letters.
31
32 B. Valve tag fasteners:
.33 1. 4 ply 0.018 IN copper or monel wire meter seals,
34 brass "S" hooks or No.16 brass jack chain.
35
36 2.04 HVAC DUCT MARKERS
37
38 A. HVAC duct markers:
39 1. 1-1/2 IN black stenciled letters denoting system
40 number (e.g., AHU-1, RF-3, EF-5), type (supply,
41 return, exhaust) and:flow direction.
42
43 2.05 EQUIPMENT NAME PLATES
44
45 A. Equipment name plates:
'46 1. 1/16 IN rigid plastic, "Setonply", "Emedolite" or
47 bakelite with 4 edges beveled; or engraved
48 aluminum with black enamel background and natural
49 aluminum border and letters.
50 a. Two 3/8 IN mounting holes.
51 b. Lettering size: Minimum 1/2 IN high.
52 c. Fasteners: Commercial quality, rust
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15190-3
01
resisting nuts and bolts with backwashers,
02
self -tapping screws or rivets.
03
04
2.06 ACCESS PANEL MARKERS
05
06
A. Access panel markers:
07
1.
Metal tack style: Use on acoustical tile
08
ceilings.
09
a. Seton style BCM or ECM.
10
2.
Engraved plastic style.
11
a. 3/4 IN square with center hole for small
12
screw.
13
b. Seton style CM75.
14
15
2.07 UNDERGROUND MARKING TAPE
16
17
A. Underground marking tape:
18
1.
4 mil inert plastic film for underground use.
19
2.
Resistant to alkalis, acids and other destructive
20
agents found in soil.
21
3.
Minimum tensile strength: 20 LBS per 3 IN width.
22
4.
Minimum elongation: 500 percent.
23
S.
Provide continuous printed message repeated every
24
16 to 36 IN warning of pipe buried below (e.g.:
25
"CAUTION GAS LINE BURIED BELOW").
26
6.
Color code:
27
a. Yellow: Natural gas and fuel oil systems.
28
b. Blue: Water systems, domestic and fire.
29
c. Green: Sanitary sewer system.
30
7.
Reef Industries, Inc., Standard Terra Tape.
31
32
B. Underground detectable marking tape:
33
1.
Lamination bond of 1 layer of aluminum foil
34
between 2 layers of inert plastic film.
35
a. Aluminum foil: Minimum 0.35 mils thick.
36
b. Inert plastic film: Minimum 4.3 mils thick.
37
2.
Resistant to alkalis, acids and other destructive
38
agents found in soil.
39
3.
Minimum tensile strength: 63 LBS per 3 .IN width.
40
4.
Minimum elongation: 500 percent.
41
S.
Provide continuous printed message repeated every
42
16 to 36 IN warning of pipe buried below (e.g.:
43
"CAUTION GAS LINE BURIED BELOW").
44
6.
Tape to be inductively locatable and conductively
45
traceable using a standard pipe and cable device
46
for minimum of 8 years after burial.
47
7.
Color code:
48
a. Yellow: Natural gas and fuel oil systems.
49
b. Blue: Water systems, domestic and fire.
50
c. Green: Sanitary sewer system.
51
8.
Reef Industries, Inc., Detectable Terra Tape.
(0001
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction...
15190-4
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
2.08 CHART AND DIAGRAM FRAMES
A. Chart and diagram frames:
1. Extruded aluminum with plexiglass or glass
windows.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
3.01 VALVE IDENTIFICATION'
10
11
A. Identify all valves, with appropriate service
12
designation and valve number designation on valve
13
tags.
14
1. Tagging of valves at unit heaters, fan coil
15
units, air terminal unit reheat coils and
16
plumbing fixture stops are not required.
17
18
B. Install tags on valves using valve tag fasteners in
19
manner for easy reading.
20
21
22
C. Furnish 4 charts including valve identification
23
number, location (room number, department) and
24
purpose.
25
1. Mount 1 chart in frame and secure on wall in
26
location directed by Owner.
27
2. Include remaining 3 sets in "Operation and
28
Maintenance Manuals". -
29
30
3.02 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Do not identify soil, waste and vent piping.
B. Fire -protection and sprinkler piping.
. 1. Painting not required.
31
32
33
34
35
36-
37
C. Identify piping systems with indicated lettering: 38
Drawing Pipe Identification 39
Symbol Lettering 40
CW
Domestic Cold Water
HW( )
Domestic Hot Water Supply (indicate
HWC
Domestic Hot Water Circulating
CD
Condensate Discharge
G
Natural Gas
A
Compressed Air
S
Sprinklers
F
Fire Protection
HWS
Heating Water Supply
HWR
Heating Water Return
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
41
42
temperature)43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52 ,^
15190-5
�.
01
D.
Locate identification lettering as follows:
01
02
1. Next to each valve and fitting, except on
02
03
plumbing fixtures and equipment.
03
04
2. At each branch or riser take off.
04
05
3. At each passage through walls, floors and
05
06
ceilings.
06
07
4. At each pipe passage to underground.
07
08
5. On horizontal pipe runs every 20 FT, at least
08
09
once in each room and each story traversed by
09
10
piping system.
10
11
6. Identify piping contents, flow direction, supply
11
12
and return.
12
13
7. So it is readable from access panels and not
13
14
obscured by other work.
14
15
15
16
E.
Size lettering, marker color fields, and arrows as
16
17
follows:
17
18
Length of
18
19
Outside Diameter of Color Field Size of Letters19
20
Pipe or Pipe Covering (Markers) and Arrows
20
21
IN IN IN
21
22
22
23
3/4 to 1-1/4 8 1/2
23
24
1-1/2 to 2 8 3/4
24
25
2-1/2 to 6 12 1-1/4
25
26
8 to 10 24 2-1/2
26
27
Over 10 32 3-1/2
27
28
28
29
F.
Pipe markers:
29
30
1. Install markers with tape color bands over each
30
31
end of marker, extending around pipe and
31
32
overlapping a minimum of 30 degrees.
32
33
33
34
34
35
G.
Where piping is heat traced, provide warning labels
35
36
on insulation adjacent to each piping system
36
37
identifier.
37
38
1. For heat tracing cable, coordinate with 15010.
38
39
2. For temperature maintenance cable, coordinate
39
40
with 15410.
40
41
41
42
3.03
DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
42
43
43
44
A.
Locate duct markers as follows:
44
45
1. At each branch or riser take -off.
45
46
2. Next to equipment.
46
47
47
48
B.
Stencil ductwork or exterior surface of insulation.
48
49
49
50
3.04
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
50
51
51
52
A.
Attach equipment nameplates in conspicuous location,
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15190-6
O1 directly on item of equipment or apparatus such as
02 starters, pumps, fans, HVAC units and control panels.
03 1. Secure nameplates with self -tapping screws, or
04 nuts and bolts.
05
06 B. For unsuitable surfaces, such as high temperature or
07 lack of space, use copper or brass rings or chains to
08 attach tags.
09
10 C. Identify devices located above ceilings with
11 additional identification.
12 1. Use access panel markers (metal tack style) for
13 acoustical tile ceilings, or engraved plastic
14 style, 3/4 IN square, for mounting on panel door;
15 or equipment nameplates.
16 2. Coordinate with Owner on identification method
17 and color codes.
18 3. Provide markers on all removable ceilings and
19 ceiling access panels to indicate locations of
20 valves, dampers, smoke detectors, etc., and other
21 mechanical items that may need servicing or
22 adjustment. Glue marking tacks in place to
23 prevent their falling out.
24 4. Where fire protection devices are located inside
25 ductwork, provide an additional tag on the duct
26 access door identifying device inside.
27 a. Identification letter size: 1-1/2 IN high
28 minimum.
29 5. Color code access panel markers as follows:
30 a. Red: Fire dampers, smoke detectors, sprinkler
31 shutoff valves and duct type smoke detectors.
32 (1) Notation:
33
34 D - Damper
35 V - Valve
36 S - Smoke Detector
37 H - Heat Detector
38
39 b. Yellow: Domestic Hot and Cold
40 water valves:
41 (1) Notation:
42
43 V - Valve
44
45 c. Gold: Automatic and balancing dampers:
46 (1) Notation:
47
48 V - Valve
49 D - Damper
50
51
52 3.05 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND MARKING TAPE
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15190-7
01
01
02
A. See Section 15021.
02
03
03
04
3.06 CONTROL DIAGRAMS AND INSTRUCTIONS
04
05
05
06
A. Provide HVAC control and systems instructions and
06
07
diagrams in wall mounted frames.
07
08
1. Mount framed diagrams in conspicuous, easily
08
09
accessible places in equipment rooms housing
09
10
appropriate HVAC system.
10
11
11
12
B. Diagrams and instructions may be reduced in size
12
13
provided they are easily readable and lettering is
13
14
not smaller than "elite" type of standard typewriter.
14
15
15
16
END OF SECTION
16
(0001111
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15250-1
01
OHO1,
6B04 SECTION 15250
02
03
PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Description of systems:
10
1. Pipe insulation, non -flexible and flexible.
11
2. Duct insulation, non -flexible and flexible.
12
3. Equipment insulation.
13
4. Insulation adhesives, mastics and caulking.
14
15
B.
Related sections:
16
1. General requirements: Division 1.
17
2. Special mechanical requirements: Section 15010.
18
3. Plumbing piping: Section 15410.
19
4. Refrigeration piping system: Section 15530.
20
S. Air distribution systems: Section 15880.
21
22
C.
Definitions:
23
1. Concealed insulated surfaces: Piping, ductwork
24
and equipment in walls, partitions, floors, pipe
25
chases, pipe shafts, duct shafts, sealed
26
alleyways, and above suspended ceilings.
27
2. Exposed insulated surfaces: Piping, ductwork and
28
equipment located in mechanical rooms, tunnels
29
and rooms without suspended ceilings.
30
31
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
32
33
A.
Comply with fire and smoke hazard ratings indicated.
34
1. Test by procedure ASTM-E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.
35
2. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements,
36
tapes, and glass fabric, same or better component
37
ratings.
38
3. Following are rating requirements:
39
40
Flame Spread (maximum): 25
41
Smoke Developed (maximum): 50 (fiberglass and
42
phenolic)
43
150 (elastomeric)
44
Water Vapor Transmission 0
45
Rate (maximum)
46
47
4. Properly identify products and/or their shipping
48
cartons for flame and smoke ratings.
49
50
1.03
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
51
52 A. Shop drawings: Not required for Architect review.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15250-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
`21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
.47
48
49
50
51
52
B. Product data:
1. Catalog cuts.
2. Performance data.
C. Samples: Not required for Architect review.
D. Project information: Not required for Architect
review.
E. Contract closeout information:
1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Guarantees.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Insulation materials:
a. Base:
(1) Certainteed (CSG).
b. Optional:
(1) Owens-Corning (O-C).
(2) Manville.
(3) Armstrong.
(4) Knauf. .
(5) PPG Industries.
(6) Insulation Materials Corp of America.
(7) Imcoa.
2. Insulated fitting covers:
a. Base:
(1) Certainteed
b. Optional:
(1) Manville.
(2) Knauf. .
3. Adhesives, mastics and coatings:
a. Base:
(1) Foster (B.F.Y.
b. Optional:
(1) Childers.
(2) Chicago (CMC) .
(3) Armstrong.
4. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
Document 00440.
B. Insulation`- General:
1. Provide fire and smoke hazard ratings as
indicated for entire composite (insulation,
jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere
facing or jacket to insulation).
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15250-3
01
2. Do not use material that exceeds specified flame
01
02
and smoke ratings.
02
03
3. Use permanent treatments to jackets or facings to
03
04
impart specified fire ratings.
04
05
4. At hangers and bracing: See Section 15140.
05
06
06
07
2.02 PIPE INSULATION, NON -FLEXIBLE
07
08
08
09
A. Pipe insulation, non -flexible: O-C Fiberglas
09
10
ASJ/SSL-II or Armstrong Accotherm phenolic pipe
10
11
insulation with service jacket (ASJ).
11
12
1. Thermal conductivity (K value): Not greater than
12
13
0.23 at mean temperature of 75 degF.
13
14
2. Apply to following piping in thickness indicated:
14
15
a. Domestic cold water piping:
15
16
(1) 3/4 to 2 IN -------------------------
16
17
1/2 IN.
17
18
(2) 2-1/2 IN and larger -------------------
18
19
1 1 IN.
19
20
b. Domestic hot/recirculating water (100-130
20
21
degF) :
21
22
(1) 3/4 to 2 IN ---------------------------
22
23
1 IN.
23
24
(2) 2-1/2 IN and larger ---------------
24
25
1-1/2 IN.
25
26
C. Cooling coil condensate drains (except drains
26
+ 27
outside of AHU in on -grade mechanical rooms):
27
28
(1) All sizes -----------------------------
28
29
1 IN.
29
30
d. Hot water and waste lines below handicap
30
31
lavatories. ---------------------------- 1/2
31
32
IN.
32
33
e. Refrigerant/brine piping (Below 40 degF):
33
34
(1) Runouts to 2 IN -----------------------
34
35
1 IN.
35
36
(2) 1 IN and smaller ----------------------
36
37
1 IN.
37
38
(3) 1-1/4 IN and larger ---------------
38
39
1-1/2 IN.
39
40
40
41
Note: Runouts are piping not more than 12 FT in
41
42
length.
42
43
43
44
44
45
2.03 PIPE INSULATION, FLEXIBLE
45
46
46
47
A. Pipe insulation, flexible: Armstrong self -seal
47
48
Armaflex 2000 flexible elastomeric pipe insulation.
48
49
1. Thermal conductivity (K value): Not greater than
49
50
0.27 at mean temperature of 75 degF.
50
51
2. Apply to following piping in thickness indicated:
51
52
a. Domestic cold water piping runouts less than
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15250-4
01 12 FT:
02 (1) 2 IN and smaller --------------------
03 1/2 IN.
04 b. Domestic hot/recirculating water piping
05 "runouts less than 12 FT.
06 (1) 2 IN and smaller --------------------
07 1/2 IN.
08 C. Cooling coil condensate:
09 (1) 2 IN and smaller -------------------
10 1/2 IN.
11 d. Waste piping from lab sinks to main stacks:
12 (1) All sizes ---------------------------
13 1/2 IN.
14 e. Waste piping from water coolers and drinking
15 fountains:
16 (1) All sizes ---------------------------
17 1/2 IN.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27 2.04 DUCTWORK INSULATION, FLEXIBLE
28
29 A. Ductwork insulation, flexible: O-C Fiberglas
30 Commercial Grade Faced Duct Wrap insulation with FRK
31 vapor barrier jacket and 2 IN tab.
32 1. Thermal conductivity (K value): Not greater than
33 0.28 at mean temperature of-75 degF.
34 2. Apply to following ductwork in thickness
35 indicated:
36 a. Outside air ductwork: 2 IN.
37 b. Supply air ductwork from air handling units
38 to terminal units: 1-1/2 IN.
39 c. Return air ductwork in non-airconditioned
40 areas (including utility shafts): 1 IN.
41 d. Return/relief air ductwork from relief plenum
42 at louver (or other outside opening) back to
43 relief air damper plus 36 IN: 1-1/2 IN.
44 3. Apply to ductwork from unit housing to ends of
45 duct runs, including diffuser necks and register
46 ducts.
47 4. Do not apply insulation over coil and damper
48 access panels or over internally lined ductwork.
49
50 2.05 INSULATION FASTENERS
51
52 A. Insulation adhesive: Childers CP-82.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15250-5
01
01
02
B.
Insulation mastic. Childers CP-30.
02
03
03
04
C.
Insulation caulking: Dow No 11.
04
05
05
06
06
07
PART
3 - EXECUTION
07
08
08
09
3.01
APPLICATION - GENERAL
09
10
10
11
A.
Do not insulate piping until satisfactory completion
11
12
of required pressure tests.
12
13
13
14
B.
Do not insulate piping below ground (covered with
14
15
earth) except domestic water and heating water
15
16
runouts to fixtures and terminal heating equipment
16
17
within 5 FT of outside walls.
17
18
18
19
C.
Apply insulation to clean, dry surfaces with pipe and
19
20
duct surfaces at room temperature.
20
21
21
22
D.
Butt insulation firmly together with longitudinal and
22
23
end joints sealed with compatible jackets, facings
23
24
and adhesives as specified.
24
25
25
26
E.
Apply adhesives, mastics and coatings per
26
27
manufacturer's recommendations and as specified.
27
28
28
29
F.
On cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are _
29
30
used, apply insulation with a continuous, unbroken
30
31
vapor seal.
31
32
1. Adequately insulate and vapor seal hangers,
32
33
supports, and anchors that are secured directly
33
34
to cold surfaces to prevent condensation.
34
35
35
36
G.
Continue insulation through sleeves and wall and
36
37
ceiling openings except insulation shall not continue
37
38
through fire rated partitions, walls, floor -ceiling
38
39
systems.
39
40
40
41
H.
Insulate fittings, valve bodies, flanges and other
41
42
pipeline accessories.
42
43
43
44
I.
At hangers and bracing, install in accord with
44
45
Section 15140.
45
46
46
47
J.
Provide 1 IN sound lining 10 FT downstream of all
47
48
exhaust fans.
48
49
49
50
3.02
APPLICATION OF NON -FLEXIBLE PIPE INSULATION
50
51
51
-�, 52
A.
On piping, install with lap joint attached using
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15250-6
O1
outward clinching staples, 3 IN centers, 1/4 IN from
01
02
edge on hot piping.
02
03
1. On cold piping use self-sealing lap system or
03
04
adhesive applied to both surfaces per
04
05
manufacturer's recommendation.
05
06
2. Do not staple cold piping.
06
07
3. Butt adjoining sections of insulation tightly
07
08
together and continue jacket by installing
08
09
self -adhering butt stripsoverentire
09
10
circumferential joint.
10
11
11
12
B. Installation of insulation of fittings:
12
13
1. For pipe sizes 2 IN and smaller finish with
13
14
mineral fiber cement to thickness of adjoining
14
15
pipe insulation.
15
16
2. Over 2 IN insulate with mitered pipe insulation
16
17
segments or preformed fiberglass fittings secured
17
18
with vinyl faced insulation strapping tape or 20
18
19
GA galvanized annealed wire and finished with one
19
20
coat of mineral fiber cement.
20
21
3. After cement is dry finish with Glass Fab and
21
22
seal with Foster 30-36 adhesive.
22
23
4. Prefabricated fitting covers approved for use at
23
24
pipe fittings may be used instead of finishing
24
25
method outlined above.
25
26
5. Install in accord with manufacturer's
26
27
recommendations.
27
28
28
29
C. Cover insulated piping exposed to weather with
29
30
additional jacket of 0.016 IN smooth aluminum with
30
31
moisture barrier.
31
32
1. Apply aluminum jacket with 0.020 IN x 3/8 IN
32
33
aluminum bands on 9 IN centers, minimum 2 IN lap
33
34
joint.
34
35
2. Protect fittings exposed to weather in like
35
36
manner.
36
37
3. Contractor option: Use Ceel-Co 300 series
37
38
plastic jacketing applied per manufacturer's
38
39
recommendations.
39
40
40
41
D. Provide flame resistant vapor barrier jacket with
41
42
aluminum facing over insulation. Steam, condensate
42
43
return, heating water and chilled water piping inside
43
44
built-up air handling units.
44
45
1. Extending jacket outside of unit enclosure.
45
46
2. Cover joints with 3 IN wide pressure sensitive
46
47
tape.
47
48
48
49
E. Reinforce jackets on insulated piping in mechanical
49
50
rooms and central plant less than 8 FT above floor.
50
51
1. Cover with 0.030 IN PVC jacket conforming to
51
52
25-50 fire requirements.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15250-7
01
f 02
3.03
APPLICATION OF FLEXIBLE PIPE INSULATION
03
04
A.
Install tubing wherever possible by slipping material
05
over piping. Otherwise slit pipe insulation, tightly
06
butt ends and seal butt joints and slit seams with
07
suitable adhesive.
08
09
B.
Insulate fittings and valve bodies with segments cut
10
from pipe insulation. Apply with adhesive.
11
12
C.
Insulate piping at hanger points with fiberglass
13
material protected with metal saddles.
14
15
16
3.04
APPLICATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK INSULATION
17
18
A.
Cold ductwork: Apply insulation with edges tightly
19
butted and secured to metal surface with 4 IN wide
20
strips of adhesive on 12 IN centers.
21
1. At joints lap facing tab over adjoining facing 2
22
IN and seal with lap adhesive or use 3 IN wide
23
pressure sensitive joint sealing tape to match
24
jacket.
25
2. Secure lap with staples on 6 IN centers.
26
3. Seal staples with mastic (Foster 35-00-GPM).
27
4. On ductwork over 24 IN wide (rectangular and flat
28
oval) impale insulation to bottom of duct over
29
mechanical fasteners such as welded pins and
30
secure with speed clips.
31
5. Space pins to hold insulation securely in place
32
but not over 18 IN centers.
33
6. Seal clips with 3 IN wide tape patches, staple
34
corners and seal with mastic.
35
36
B.
On hot ductwork: Apply insulation same as cold
37
ductwork but omit lap seal and staple only.
38
39
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15300-1
O1
91C18 SECTION 15300
02
03
FACILITY FUELING SYSTEM
04
05
06
PART 1 - GENERAL
07
08
1.01 SUMMARY
09
10
A. Section Includes:
11
1. Furnish and Install Aboveground Petroleum Storage
12
Tanks.
13
2. Furnish and Install Petroleum Dispensing Systems.
14
15
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily
16
limited to:
17
1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract
18
Forms, and Conditions of the Contract.
19
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
20
3. Section 11005 - Equipment: Basic Requirements.
21
4. Section 02110 - Excavation and Backfiring for
22
Utilities.
23
24
25
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
26
27
A. Referenced Standards:
28
1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
29
a. Standard 142, Steel Aboveground Storage Tanks
30
for Flammable and Combustible Liquids.
31
b. Standard 561, Pipe Connectors for Flammable
32
and Combustible Liquids and LP Gas.
33
C. Standard 842, Valves for Flammable Liquids.
34
d. Standard 860, Pipe Unions for Flammable and
35
Combustible Liquids and Fire -Protection
36
Service.
37
2. Steel Tank Institute (STI).
38
a. Standard F911-93, Diked Aboveground Storage
39
Tanks.
40
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
41
a. NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids
42
Code.
43
4. Petroleum Equipment Institute (PEI).
44
a. PEI RP 200-96, Recommended Practices for
45
Installation of Aboveground Storage Systems
46
for Motor Vehicle Fueling.
47
5. Texas Administrative Code (TAC).
48
a. Title 30, TAC, Chapter 334, Subchapter F:
49
Aboveground Storage Tanks.
50
51
B. Contractor shall provide certification(s) that each
/-�
52
major element of the system complies with this
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15300-2
01
Specification and all applicable Federal, State and
01
02
local laws and codes.
02
03
03
04
C.
Qualifications:
04
05
1. All tanks shall conform to UL Standard 142.
05
06
2. Manufacturer and installer must have, as a
06
07
minimum, three other projects of similar scope
07
08
and size completed within the last twelve months.
08
09
3. Methods of system installation shall be in
09
10
accordance with PEI RP200-96 and NFPA 30 (most
10
11
current edition).
11
12
12
13
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
13
14
14
15
A.
Contractor shall furnish and install all tanks,
15
16
pumps, valves, fittings, gauges, vents, corrosion
16
17
protection, concrete footings, integral dike and
17
18
associated equipment to provide a complete and
18
19
functional facility fueling station as described in
19
20
this Specification. All work and materials to be
20
21
performed in accordance with all standards referenced
21
22
above.
22
23
23
24
B.
Provide single source coordination responsibility
24
25
through the tank, pump and component manufacturers.
25
26
26
27
1.05
SUBMITTALS
27
28
28
29
A.
Shop Drawings:
29
30
1. See Section 01340.
30
31
2. Product technical data including:
31
32
a. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet
32
33
requirements of standards referenced.
33
34
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
34
35
C. Installer's Qualifications.
35
36
3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings.
36
37
4. Certifications.
37
38
5. Test reports.
38
39
39
40
B.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
40
41
1. See Section 01340.
41
42
42
43
C.
Miscellaneous:
43
44
1. Notification of TNRCC per 30 TAC 334.
44
45
2. Completion of AST form TNRCC-0659.
45
46
46
47
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
47
48
48
49
A.
Per Manufacturer's recommendations.
49
50
50
51
1.07
GUARANTEE
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15300-3
01
A.
Contractor shall guarantee for not less than one year
01
02
the performance of all components installed and
02
03
accepted by the Owner.
03
04
04
05
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
05
06
06
07
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
07
08
08
09
A.
Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
09
10
the following manufacturers are acceptable:
10
11
1. Steel Aboveground Storage Tanks:
it
12
a. Modern Welding Co. of Texas: (817)
12
13
636-2215.
13
14
b. J.L Houston Co.: (800) 852-8265.
14
15
C. Or approved equal.
15
16
2. Fuel Dispensers:
16
17
a. Fill -Rite 300 Series.
17
18
18
19
B.
Submit requests for substitution in accordance with
19
20
Specification Section 01640.
20
21
21
22
2.02
MATERIALS
22
23
23
24
A.
1000 and 5000 GAL Steel Aboveground Storage Tanks:
24
25
1. Walls and ends: 7GA or 3/16 IN structural carbon
25
26
steel.
26
27
2. Mina Openings: 1x6 IN, 4x2 IN.
27
28
3. Premium Paint: sandblast, prime and paint white.
28
29
29
30
B.
Pumps, Valves Fittings and other components as
30
31
recommended by PEI RP200-96.
31
32
32
33
2.03
PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
33
34
34
35
A.
Performance Requirements:
35
36
1. Dispenser and pump shall be capable of pumping 30
36
37
gpm.
37
38
2. As recommended in PEI RP200-96.
38
39
3. Provide and install one dispenser and pump for each
39
40
tank with 30 LF of 1 IN delivery hose.
40
41
4. Provide and install Husky XIII high flow nozzles or
41
42
equivalent on each dispenser.
42
43
5. Each dispenser shall include a Fill -Rite 807AT Flow
43
44
Meter, or equivalent.
44
45
45
46
PART
3 - EXECUTION
46
47
47
48
3.01
INSTALLATION
48
49
49
50
A.
Install tanks, pumps and components in accordance
50
51
with manufacturer's instructions.
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15300-4
O1 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
02
03 A. Employ and pay for services of equipment
04 manufacturer's field service representative(s) to:
05 1. Inspect equipment covered by these
06 Specifications.
07 2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks.
08 3. Provide test equipment, tools, and instruments
09 necessary to accomplish equipment testing.
10 4. Conduct startup of equipment and perform
11 operational checks per Section 01650.
12 5. Provide Owner with a written statement that
13 manufacturer's equipment has been installed
14 properly, has been started up, and is ready for
15 operation by Owner's personnel.
16
17
18 END OF SECTION
19
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
15410-1
O1
9D01,
7D30 SECTION 15410
02
03
PLUMBING PIPING
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Work includes:
10
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
11
and services for plumbing piping systems as
12
indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract
13
Documents.
14
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other
15
trades.
16
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
17
provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
18
appurtenances and devices incidental to or
19
necessary for a sound, secure and complete
20
installation.
21
22
B.
Description of system:
23
1. Domestic hot, cold and recirculating water
24
systems.
25
2. Sanitary waste and vent piping system within
26
building and to 5 FT outside of building wall.
27
28
C.
Related sections:
29
1. General requirements: Division 1.
30
2. Special mechanical requirements: Section 15010.
31
3. Pipe and fittings: Section 15060.
32
4. Pipe specialties: Section 15120.
33
5. Pipe supports, sleeves and seals: Section 15140.
34
6. Piping identification: Section 15190.
35
7. Plumbing fixtures: Section 15440.
36
8. Water heaters: Section 15450.
37
38
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
39
40
A.
Pipe and fittings standards: See Section 15060.
41
42
B.
Manual valve standards: See Section 15100 (for
43
valves labeled
44
45
C.
Standard for sterilization: AWWA C601.
46
47
1.03
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
48
49
A.
Shop drawings:
50
1. All items specified.
51
52
B.
Product data:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15410-2
O1
1. Catalog cuts.
02
2. Performance data.
03
3. Certified pump curves.
04
05
C.
Project information:
06
1. Pressure test reports.
07
2. Disinfection test report.
08
3. Certificate of local utility approval of water
09
meter.
10
4. Operating and maintenance data: (see Division
11
1) .
12
13
1.04
JOB CONDITIONS
14
15
A.
See Section 15010.
16
17
18
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
19
20
2.01
GENERAL
21
22
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
23
1. Service entrance wall casing:
24
a. Base: American Cast Iron Co.
25
2. Reduced pressure backflow preventers and double
26
check detector backflow preventer:
27
a. Watts and Febco.
28
3. Shock absorbers:
29
a. J R Smith; Wade; and Josam.
30
4. Floor, shower, roof and area drains and
31
cleanouts:
32
a. Wade; Josam; Smith; and Zurn.
33
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
34
Section 00440.
35
36
2.02
PIPE AND FITTINGS
37
38
A.
Domestic water piping, 4 IN and smaller: Copper,
39
type L, with solder joints, and wrought copper or
40
cast brass fittings.
41
1. T-drilled with brazed joints of 1 IN minimum main
42
size with two pipe size smaller branch
43
acceptable.
44
45
B.
Domestic water piping at service entrance (from 1 FT
46
inside building to 5 FT outside): Same as indicated
47
for outside utilities.
48
49
C.
Service entrance wall casting: Cast iron, 12 IN
50
long, with mechanical joint ends and ductile iron
51
retainer gland on each end.
52
1. Inside connection may be flanged, with tapped
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15410-3
01
bolt holes.
01
r 02
02
03
D.
Drainage piping below ground (soil, vent, roof and
03
04
area): 2 IN and larger.
04
05
1. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, with bell and
05
06
spigot joints.
06
07
07
08
E.
Drainage piping above grade (soil, vent, roof and
08
09
area) :
09
10
1. No -hub cast-iron pipe with elastomeric sealing
10
11
sleeve and stainless clamp; or:
11
12
2. Copper (type K or L), with soldered joints and
12
13
wrought copper or cast brass fittings (if allowed
13
14
by code).
14
15
3. Provide acid resistant piping from FD-5 to main.
15
16
16
17
F.
Piping exposed in finished areas: Chrome or nickel
17
18
plated brass to wall or floor.
18
19
1. Piping 2 IN and larger may be provided with
19
20
chrome or nickel plated brass sleeves to cover
20
21
pipe and fittings.
21
22
22
23'
2.03
VALVES
23
24
24
25
A.
General:
25
26
1. Valves, 2 IN and less: V713 or V-14.
26
27
2. Valves, 2-1/2 to 4 IN: V-33 or V-35, with 10
27
28
position locking, manual handle.
28
29
3. Valves, 6 IN and larger: V-33 or V-35, with -
29
30
totally enclosed gear operator and wheel handle.
30
31
a. Use lug type valves, V-33, at equipment.
31
32
b. Provide chain operators with chain to within
32
33
four feet of floor when valves are located
33
34
eight feet or more above floor.
34
35
4. Provide shut off valves shown on drawings and as
35
36
follows:
36
37
a. Provide valve on each branch coming off the
37
38
main in the corridors.
-38
39
b. Provide valve on each branch serving a
39
40
restroom.
40
41
C. Provide valve on inlet and outlet of each
41
42
equipment item.
42
43
d. Provide interior shut off and drain valve on
43
44
each branch to wall hydrant or hose bib.
44
45
5. Provide handle extensions for required insulation
45
46
thickness.
46
47
47
48
B.
Backflow preventer, reduced pressure: Two check
48
49
valves, test cocks, relief valve, and accessories all
49
50
assembled as an integral unit.
50
51
1. Pressure loss thru backflow preventer not
51
�., 52
exceeding 14 PSI at design flow.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15410-4
01
2. Watts Model Series 909.
02
3. Provide on domestic water line where indicated
03
and required by Code.
04
4. Threaded ends: 2 IN and smaller.
05
S. Flanged ends: 2-1/2 IN and larger.
06
07
C.
Double check detector assembly: Two check valves
08
with replaceable seats and seat discs, four test
09
cocks, bypass line with meter, small diameter double
10
check assembly with test cocks and isolation valves.
11
1. Watts 770 DCD.
-12
2. Provide in fire line where indicated and required
13
by code.
14
3. Threaded ends: 2 IN and smaller.
15
4. Flanged 'ends: 2-1/2 IN and larger.
16
17
D.
Check valves:
18
1. 2 IN and smaller: V-24 or V-25.
19
2. 2-1/2 IN and larger: V-28 or V-29.
20
21
E.
Balance cocks:
22
1. 1-1/2 IN and smaller: V-39 or V-40.
23
2. 2 to 3 IN: V-40.
24
3. 4 IN and larger: V-34.
25
26
F.
Balance valves (circulation):
27
1. Griswold control valve set at 1 GPM.
28
29
2.04
FLOOR AND SHOWER DRAINS
30
31
A.
Floor drain FD-1: Wade 1200 cast iron body, bottom
32
outlet, clamping seepage flanged weep holes, and
33
tractor type grate. Provide trap primer on all floor
34
drains.
35
36
B.
Floor drain FD-2: Wade W1100G with seepage flange
37
and clamping collar, square chrome'plated brass
38
strainer. Provide trap primers on all floor drains.
39
40
41
42
2.05
CLEANOUTS
43
'44
A.
Cleanouts:
45
1. For cast iron pipe: Tapped extra heavy cast iron
46
ferrule, caulked into cast iron fittings, and
47
extra heavy brass neoprene seal screw plug with
48
solid hexagonal nut.
49
2. For steel pipe: Extra heavy brass screw plug in
50
drainage fittings.
51
3. Cleanout plugs: Comply with Plumbing Code, with
52
American Standard pipe threads.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15410-5
`* 01
4. Cleanouts in floor with resilient tile and sheet
r 02
finish: Wade W6000D.
03
5. Cleanouts in floor with ceramic tile finish:
04
Wade W-6000TS.
05
6. Cleanouts in finished rooms flush with wall:
06
Wade W-8460 S stainless steel.
07
7. Cleanouts on lines in completely accessible pipe
08
chases or in equipment rooms where piping is
09
exposed do not require special covers.
10
8. Cleanouts.in floors with carpet: Wade W-6000 CM.
11
9. Cleanouts for concrete or terrazzo finish: Wade
12
W-6000.
13
14
B.
Pipe fittings at cleanouts: Make cleanouts turning
15
out through walls and up through floor by long sweep
16
ells or "y" and 1/8 bends.
17
18
C.
Cleanout cover plates: Provide face or deck plates
19
for concealed cleanouts to conform to architectural
20
finish in room.
21
1. Where no definite finish is indicated provide
22
chrome -plated cast brass wall plates and polished
23
brass floor plates.
24
25
2.06
TRAPS
26
27
A.
Traps: Cast brass, cast iron and/or galvanized cast
28
iron, one piece pattern, 3 IN minimum seal.
29
1. Same material and coating and/or finish as piping
30
system into which they are installed except traps
31
2 IN IPS and under, not buried in earth, shall be
32
cast brass.
33
2. Provide trap cleanouts in all accessible trap
34
locations.
35
36
B.
Traps for fixtures:
37
1. Cast brass "P° traps with 2 IN minimum seal and
38
gasketed cleanout plugs made of machined bar
39
stock.
40
2. Fixture trap modifications, where required, and
41
sizes: As indicated or specified.
42
43
C.
Traps for floor drains with outlet buried: Extra
44
heavy cast iron P-traps, unless otherwise indicated.
45
46
47
2.07
OTHER MATERIALS
48
49
A.
Lead flanges: 6 LB/SF, minimum, sheet.
50
1. Provide for each vent pipe passing through
51
built-up roofing (BUR) :
52
a. 18 IN square base with tubular vertical
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15410-6
01
sleeve surrounding pipe with l IN minimum
02
spacing, and turning in,2 IN at top.
03
b. Provide gasket seal between vent top and lead
04
sleeve.
05
2.
Provide for each roof drain in BUR:
06
a. 36 IN square.
07
b. Clamped under flashing ring of drain.
08
09
B. Pipe
flashings: See Section 15010.
10
1.
Premolded or pre -fabricated pipe flashings
11
furnished and installed under "Elastic Sheet
12
Roofing System" section.
13
14
C. Shock absorbers:
15
1.
Install on all hot and cold water lines.
16
a. At each fixture, or:
17
b. Between the last two fixtures on multiple
18
fixture branch lines up to 20 FT in length,
19
or:
20
C. Between the last two fixtures and at the
21
approximate midpoint on multiple fixture
22
branch lines over 20 FT in length.
23
d. At other equipment with solenoid or quick
24
closing shut-off valves.
25
2.
Size shock absorbers as recommended by
26
manufacturer.
27
28
D. Other specialties: See Section 15120.
29
1.
Thermometers: Provide where indicated. -
30
2.
Pressure gages: Provide where indicated.
31
3.
Automatic air relief vents: Provide at all high
32
points of piping.
33
34
35
36
E. Trap primers:
37
1.
TP-1: Trap primer valve: 1/2 IN brass trap
38
primer valve with vacuum breaker attaches to 1/2
39
IN cold water supply on lavatory or other small
40
water user, Wade Model W-2400 or approved equal;
41
Josam, J.R. Smith.
42
2.
TP-2: Trap primer valve: Trap primer shall
43
consist of heavy polished brass trap primer valve
44
with 110" ring seals. Line pressure adjustment
45
screw, 3-vacuum breather ports, 1/2 IN NPT male
46
inlet, 1/2 IN NPT female outlet. Primer valve
47
does not require water flow thru valve to
48
operate, drop in line pressure from upstream
49
water user activates valve; distribution unit may
50
be required. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.,
51
Model P-1 or P-2.
52
3.
Provide on all floor drains unless they receive
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15410-7
01
indirect waste or they are shower drains. Locate
01
02
canister in easily accessible area.
02
03
03
04
F.
Sand/Oil Inteceptor trap:
04
05
1. Pre -fabricated concrete basin and manholes.
05
06
a. Brooks Model BD-1000-200 GT and manholes.
06
07
(1) 1000 gallon capacity (see detail).
07
08
08
09
09
10
2.08
WATER HEATER (See Section 15450)
10
11
11
12
2.09
PLUMBING FIXTURES (See Section 15440)
12
13
13
14
14
15
PART
3 - EXECUTION
15
16
16
17
3.01
INSTALLATION OF WASTE AND DRAINAGE PIPING
17
18
18
19
A.
Install piping as indicated and to provide every
19
20
plumbing fixture and item of equipment requiring
20
21
water, etc., with suitable soil, waste or vent
21
22
connection, as required by governing code.
22
23
23
24
B.
Install horizontal soil or waste lines to produce a
24
25
flow of 2 FT per second or as indicated.
25
26
1. Hold as close to construction as possible to
26
27
maintain maximum head room.
27
28
28
29
C.
Make all changes of direction and junctions with Y
29
30
fittings and 1/8 bends.
30
31
1. Use short wye fittings in vertical pipe only.
31
32
32
33
D.
Install a handhole test tee at base,of each stack.
33
34
34.
35
E.
Install cleanouts at all deadends, at all changes of
35
36
direction and at 50 FT intervals on horizontal runs.
36
37
1. Where cleanouts occur in concealed spaces,
37
38
provide with extensions to floors above or to
38
39
walls as required.
39
40
40
41
F.
Connect equipment furnished by other divisions in
41
42
accord with Section 15010.
42
43
1. For each waste piping connection to equipment, if
43
44
waste is connected directly to building sewer
44
45
system, furnish and install a p-trap. Size trap
45
46
as required by Plumbing Code.
46
47
47
48
G.
Run a vent stack parallel to each soil or waste stack
48
49
to receive branch vents from fixtures.
49
50
1. Each vent stack shall originate from a soil or
50
51
waste pipe at its base.
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15410-8
O1
H.
Carry each soil or waste stack and each vent stack
02
through roof.
03
04
I.
Where possible combine soil, waste or vent stacks
05
before passing through roof so as to minimize roof
06
openings.
07
08
J.
Offset pipes running close to walls away from such
09
walls before passing through roof to permit proper
10
flashing.
11
-12
K.
Provide all pipes passing through roofs with cast
13
iron increasers minimum of 12 IN below roof one size
14
larger than pipe but in no case less than 4 IN.
15
16
L.
Terminate each vent with an approved frostproof
17
jacket.
18
19
M.
Carry vent stacks 4 IN and larger full size through
20
roof.
21
22
N.
Extend all vent stacks at least 12 IN above roofing.
23
24
O.
Consult manufacturer's data and large scale details
25
of rooms containing plumbing fixtures on
26
Architectural Drawings before roughing -in piping.
27
1. Plug or cap piping immediately after
-28
installation.
29
30
P.
Trap all fixtures as required by governing code.
-31
32
Q.
Stub all piping for equipment, sinks, vending
33
machines, lavatories, supply and drain fittings,
34
keystop, p-traps, plaster traps, miscellaneous traps
35
and all miscellaneous brass through wall or floor..
36
1. Cap and protect until such time as installation
37
is performed.
38
2. Exception: Upon approval of Architect, piping
39
mains and/or branches may be run in lab benches,
40
built in counters and cabinet work.
41
42
R.
Provide cleanouts on all waste and drain lines and
43
downspouts as indicated and as required by governing
44
code.
45
1. Use cleanouts same size as pipe up to 4 IN, and
46
not less than 4 IN for larger pipes.
47
2. Install cleanouts where specified and as
48
indicated, and as follows:
49
a. Above floor in each vertical riser that
50
connects to horizontal branch below the
51
floor.
52
3. As test tee to receive proper test plugs in each
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15410-9
01
vertical riser at least every other floor.
02
03
3.02
INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
04
05
A.
General: See Section 15060.
06
07
B.
Install piping as indicated and as required to
08
provide suitable supply connections to each fixture
09
and item of equipment requiring water supply.
10
11
C.
Install plumbing without any cross- or
12
interconnection between potable and non -potable
13
lines.
14
15
D.
Install pipe hangers as indicated in Section 15140.
16
17
E.
Install valves as indicated in Section 15100.
18
19
F.
Install escutcheons as indicated in Section 15440.
20
21
G.
Provide approved type vacuum breaker at plumbing
22
fixtures and equipment as indicated or as required by
23
Code.
24
25
H.
Connect equipment furnished by others, in accord with
26
Section 15010.
27
28
I.
Run all piping concealed wherever possible.
29
30
J.
Under no circumstances reduce pipe size indicated
31
without written consent of Engineer; size supply
32
branches to individual fixtures as indicated.
33
34
3.03
WATER SERVICE INSTALLATION
35
36
A.
Install wall casting in foundation wall.
37
38
B.
Continue service to 1 FT inside building using pipe,
39
fittings and methods specified for outside utilities
40
(Section 15020).
41
42
3.04
INSTALLATION OF FLOOR AND SHOWER DRAINS
43
44
A.
Drains with outlet above ground:
45
1. Provide 30 IN square lead flange.
46
2. Install drains in mortar set quarry tile floors
47
1-1/2 IN above structural slab; in thinset: 1/2
48
IN.
49
3. Set over drainage traps.
50
51
3.05
STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
.01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15410-10
A. Sterilize system as indicated, or in accord with AWWA
C601.
B. Thoroughly flush potable water systems.
C. After flushing, introduce chlorine or chlorine
compound into system with dosage sufficient to give
an -initial residual chlorine content of 50 PPM.
D. Collect samples from various taps and fixtures
throughout buildings during introduction of chlorine
to assure uniform distribution. Open and close
valves several times.
E. After a 24-hour contact period, flush all traces of
heavily chlorinated water from systems.
F. After flushing is complete, submit evidence of
effectiveness of disinfection.
1. Laboratory reports of bacteriological tests on
samples taken from system.
2. Number and locations of taking samples as
specified by Engineer.
G. If unsatisfactory results are obtained, repeat
disinfection process until satisfactory.
H. Do not put system into service until tests are
approved by City plumbing inspector.
3.06 TESTING OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
A. Upon completion of system or a section of system,
test piping hydrostatically to pressure not less than
50 percent in excess of maximum pressure to which
pipe will ordinarily be subjected, but in no case
less than 150 PSI.
B. Repair or replace any leaks or defective pipe
disclosed by tests.
C. Repeat tests until all piping shows tight.
3.07 TESTING OF WASTE SYSTEMS
A. Do not insulate, conceal or furrin pipe until it has
been tested to satisfaction of Owner.
1. If inspection or test shows defects, replace such
defective work or material and repeat inspection
and tests.
B. Test all piping at completion of installation of each
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15410-11
O1 stack or section of piping.
02 1. Fill system with water to highest point and check
03 joints and fittings for leaks..
04 2. Eliminate all leaks before proceeding with work
05 or concealing piping.
06 3. Minimum test height: 10 FT.
07 4. Make repairs to piping with new material.
08 5. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be
09 allowed.
10
11 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
15440-1
01
8J24,
7E01 SECTION 15440
02
03
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Work includes:
10
1. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
11
services for plumbing fixtures as indicated, in
12
accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
13
2. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
14
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated,
15
provide supplementary or miscellaneous items,
16
appurtenances and devices incidental to or
17
necessary for a sound, secure and complete
18
installation.
19
4. Contractor shall be responsible to follow
20
national, state and local �,lumbing codes.
21
22
B.
Description of systems:
23
1. Water closets, flush valves and seats.
24
2. Urinals and flush valves.
25
3. Lavatories and fittings.
26
4. Mop sinks and fittings.
27
5. Stainless steel sinks and fittings.
28
6. Hose bibbs.
29
7. Cast enameled sinks.
30
8. Fixture carriers.
31
32
C.
Related sections:
33
1. General requirements: Division 1.
34
2. Toilet accessories: Section 10800.
35
3. Special mechanical requirements: Section 15010.
36
4. Plumbing piping: Section 15410.
37
38
D.
Definitions:
39
1. Finished areas: Room or area that has finish
40
called for on Room Finish Schedule.
41
42
1.02
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
43
44
A.
Shop drawings: Not required.
45
46
B.
Product data:
47
1. Each item specified.
48
49
C.
Samples: Not required.
50
51
D.
Project information:
�. 52
1. Operating and maintenance data.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15440-2
01
2. Guarantees.
02
03
04
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
05
06
2.01
MATERIALS - GENERAL
07
08
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
09
1. Plumbing brass (general):
10
a. Sloan; Bradley; Brasscraft; Dearborn; Chicago
11
Faucet; American Standard.
12
2. Vitreous china plumbing fixtures: American
13
Standard; Kohler; and Eljer.
14
3. Janitor sinks: Fiat; Stern and Williams; and
15
Swan Corp.
16
4. Closet seats:
17
a. Church; Olsonite; Beneke.
18
5. Pressure balance mixing valves: Symmons; and
19
Powers.
20
6. Stainless steel plumbing fixtures:
21
a. Elkay; Just.
22
7. Carriers and wall hydrants: Josam; Smith; Wade;
23
Woodford; and Zurn.
24
8. Electric water coolers: Elkay; Oasis; and
25
Halsey -Taylor.
26
9. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
27
Section 00440.
28
-
29
B.
Plumbing fixtures - General: Constructed or equipped
30
with anti -siphon devices to prevent siphoning waste
31
material into potable water supply system.
32
33
C.
Escutcheons and plates: Conceal all holes where
34
pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings; use
35
plates or escutcheons."
36
37
D.
Piping exposed in finished areas (including fittings
38
and trim): Chromium plated or nickel plated brass
39
with polished bright surface.
40
41
E.
Trim for lavatories and sinks: Provide with
42
renewable cartridges.
43
44
F.
Vitreous caps: Provide for water closet bolts.
45
46
G.
Mixing valves:
47
1. Provide with "Off -Cold -Hot" marking in block type
48
letters, white on black field or black on white
49
field, minimum 7/32 IN high.
50
51
H.
Sealant: See Section 07900.
52
1. Silicone type.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15440-3
O1
02
2.02
WC-1
03
04
A.
Public/staff water closet: Siphon jet, low flow,
05
wall hung, elongated bowl, white vitreous china,
06
1-1/2 IN top spud.
07
1. American Standard Afwall 2257.103.
08
09
B.
Flush valve: Diaphragm type with vacuum breaker,
10
flush connection and spud coupling for 1-1/2 IN top
11
spud, 1 IN screwdriver back check angle stop.
12
1. Sloan Royal 111.
13
14
C.
Seat: Open front seat for elongated bowl, no cover,
15
stainless steel hinge with check, color white.
16
1. Church 295C (5334.024).
17
18
2.03
WC-2
19
20
A.
Public/staff barrier -free water closet: Siphon jet,
21
low flow, wall hung, elongated bowl, white vitreous
22
china, 1-1/2 IN top spud, mount rim 18 IN above
23
finished floor to accommodate ADA.
24
1. American Standard Afwall 2257.103.
25
26
B.
Flush valve: Diaphragm type with vacuum breaker,
27
flush connection and spud coupling for 1-1/2 IN top
28
spud, 1 IN screwdriver back check angle stop.
29
1. Sloan Royal 111.
30
31
C.
Seat: Open front seat for elongated bowl, no cover,
32
stainless steel hinge with check, color white.
33
1. Church 295C (5334.024).
34
35
2.04
UR-1
36
37
A.
Urinal: White vitreous china, wall hung, blow out,
38
flushing rim, 2 IN outlet connected, 3/4 IN top spud.
39
1. American Standard Washbrook 6501.010.
40
41
B.
Flush valve: Diaphragm type, with vacuum breaker,
42
flush connection and spud coupling for 3/4 IN top
43
spud, 1 IN screwdriver back check angle stop.
44
1. Sloan Royal 186-1.'
45
46
2.05
UR-2
47
48
A.
Urinal: Barrier -free, white vitreous china, wall
49
hung, blow out, flushing rim, 2 IN outlet connected,
50
3/4 IN top spud; mount at handicapped height.
51
1. American Standard Washbrook 6501.010.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15440-4
01
B.
Flush valve: Diaphragm type, with vacuum breaker,
02
flush connection and spud coupling for 3/4 IN top
03
spud, 1 IN screwdriver back check angle stop.
04
1. Sloan Royal 186-1.
05
06
2.06
L-1
07
08
A.
Barrier -free lavatory, wall hung: White vitreous
09
china, 20 x 18 IN, faucet holes 4 IN centers, front
10
overflow.
11
1. American Standard Lucerne 0355.012.
12
2. Mount lavatory at ADA height.
13
14
B.
Fittings: Chrome finish.
15
1. Combination faucet, renewable valve seats, ADA
16
cross handles and integral grid drain:
17
a. American Standard 4802-352H with 2.0 GPM flow
18
restrictor, 7723.018 offset grid drain.
19
2. Supply pipe with loose key stops.
20
a. Brasscraft.
21
3. Provide insulation kit for P-trap and supplies.
22
a. Truebro Model #102W with #105W accessories.
23
24
2.07
L-2
25
26
A.
Barrier -free lavatory, countertop: Bowl by others.
27
28
B.
-Fittings: Chrome finish.
29
1. Combination faucet, renewable valve seats, 2.0 -
30
flow restrictor, ADA cross handles and integral
31
grid drain:
32
a. American Standard 4802-352H with 2.0 GPM flow
33
restrictor, 7723.018 offset grid drain.
34
2. Supply pipe with loose key stops.
35
a. Brasscraft.
36
3. Provide insulation kit for P-trap and supplies.
37
a. Truebro Model #102W with #105W accessories.
38
39
2.08
L-3
40
41
A.
Barrier -free lavatory, countertop: Bowl by others.
42
oval, front overflow, self -rimming, 8 IN faucet hole
43
centers.
44
45
B.
Fittings: Chrome finish.
46
1. Metering faucet with 2.0 flow restrictor.
47
a. Bradley Model 90-75.
48
2. Supply pipe with loose key stops.
49
a. Brasscraft.
50
3. Mixing valve, undercounter, mounted in recessed
51
stainless steel lockable box.
52
a. Leonard Model 210. Thermostatic mixing
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15440-5
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
valve.
2.09 MS-1
A. Mop sink: Terrazzo, 24 x 36 IN basin one piece, cast
in drain with body and dome strainer.
1. Bumper guards.
2. Color as selected by Architect.
3. Combination service sink fitting with vacuum
breaker, 3/4 IN hose threads on spout, 4 arm
handles with adjustable wall brace, pail hook,
and 1/2 IN flanged female adjustable arms with
integral stops, polished chrome plated.
a. Chicago No.897.
2.10 ST-1
A. Sink: American Standard 7025.029 22" x 25" x 8" self
rimming enameled cast iron sink color by architects.
1. American Standard 6275.000 gooseneck, cross
handles, 2.0 GPM flow restrictor, quarter turn
valve chrome finish with escutcheon plate and
1-1/2 grid drain.
2. Brasscraft loose key stops, chrome finish.
3. McQuire 8912 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 IN cast brass P-trap
with clean out chrome finish.
2.11 ST-2
A. Just SLX-2019A-GR type 304 stainless steel sink self
rimming 8" faucet centers.
1. Chicago 201-GN8A-E3-317 gooseneck with 4 IN
wristblades. Chrome plated cast brass faucet and
Just strainer drain. Spout equipped with 2.0 GPM
laminar flow. No aerator included.
2. Brasscraft loose key stops, chrome finish.
3. McQuire 8912 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 IN cast brass P-trap
with clean out chrome finish.
2.12 ST-3
A. Just SLX-2219 A-GR type 304 stainless steel double
bowl sink self rimming 8" faucet centers.
1. Chicago 201-GN8A-E3-317 gooseneck with 4 IN
wristblades. Chrome plated cast brass faucet and
Just strainer drain. Spout equipped with 2.0 GPM
laminar flow. No aerator included.
2. Brasscraft loose key stops, chrome finish.
3. McQuire 8912 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 IN cast brass P-trap
with clean out chrome finish.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15440-6
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
2.13 HB-1
A. Hose bibb: Single faucet, compression valve, inlet
threaded 3/4 IN male thread, hose spout end, tee
handle, rough finish, Watts No.8 vacuum breaker.
1. Woodford.
2.14 WH-1
A. Wall hydrant: Wade W8625 non -freeze hydrant with
integral vacuum breaker, wall box, nylon seat
locking, nut and union ell tailpiece.
2.15 CHAIR CARRIERS
A. Carriers for water closets: Use cast iron couplings
where required by Code
1. Wade W-330 or 340 for vertical stacks. Wade
W-310 4 IN for horizontal lines.
2. Josam 10000, 11000, 12000.
3. Zurn ZR-1200.
B. Carriers for urinals:
1. Wade W-400 series
2. Josam 17800.
3. Zurn ZN-1221
for wall hung urinals.
C. Carriers for lavatories:
1. Wade W-520 series for wall hung lavatories and
Wade W-520-M24/M36 for handicapped lavatories.
2. Josam 17100, 17100-76.
3. Zurn Z-1224, Z-1231-79
PART.3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures in first class manner with proper
connections to water, drainage and vent systems.
B. Install all fixtures at manufactures height unless
noted otherwise.
C. See that proper grounds are set to form a secure base
for each fixture and an absolutely rigid setting.
D. Provide guards and boxing as may be required to
protect fixtures against damage from operations of
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15440-7
01
other trades.
01
02
02
03
E.
All fixtures except water closets shall have water
03
04
supply above rim with code approved backflow
04
05
preventers.
05
06
06
07
F.
Connect exposed traps and supply pipes for all
07
08
fixtures and equipment to rough piping systems at
08
09
wall, unless otherwise specified.
09
10
10
11
G.
Where plumbing fixtures abut to walls, floors, and
11
12
countertops, seal all joints with sealant.
12
13
13
14
3.02
ADJUST AND CLEAN
14
15
15
16
A.
Remove all labels from fixtures, and clean prior to
16
17
final acceptance.
17
18
18
19
B.
Remove all dirt from fixtures, fittings and traps.
19
20
20
21
C.
Secure all escutcheons against wall.
21
22
22
23
END OF SECTION
23
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15481-1
O1 5G21 SECTION 15481
02
03 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
04
05 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07 1.01 DESCRIPTION
08
09 A. Description of system: Operational compressed air
10 system:
11 1. Electric driven compressor.
12 2. Oil cooler.
13 3. Air/oil separator.
14 4. Air cooled after cooler.
15 5. Filter.
16 6. Refrigeration type dryer.
17 7. Air distribution piping.
18 8. Heat dissipation ductwork.
19
20 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
21
22 A. Pipe and fittings standards: Section 15060..
23
24 B. valve standards: Section 15100.
25
26 1.03 SUBMITTALS
27
28 A. Product data:
29 1. Compressed air system:
30 a. Electric driven compressor.
31 b. Oil cooler.
32 c. Air/oil separator.
33 d. Air cooled after cooler.
34 e. Filter.
35 f. Refrigeration type dryer.
36
37 B. Contract closeout information:
38 1. Operating and maintenance data.
39 2. Owner instruction report.
40
41
42 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
43
44 2.01 COMPONENTS
45
46 A. Acceptable manufacturers:
47 1. Compressed air components:
48 a. Base: Speedaire Model 5F231;Dryer=Speedaire
49 5Z656.
50 b. Optional:
51 (1) Allied Healthcare Products.
/"ti 52 (2) Ingersoll-Rand Air Compressor Group.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15481-2
O1
(3) Joy Compressors.
02
(4) Dunham -Bush.
03
(5) Davey Compressor. -
04
(6) Dayton Electric.
05
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
06
Document 00440.
07
08
B.
Compressor: Cast Iron, Pressure Lubricated with
09
modulating capacity control.
10
1. Minimum capacity: _17.1_ CFM at PSIG.
11
_175
12
C.
Motor: NEMA D, open drip proof, induction type,
13
460-3 volt with service factor of 1.15. Isolate
14
motor with elastomer mountings.
15
16
D.
Inlet air filter: Heavy duty dry type with service
17
indicator.
18
19
E.
Lubrication system: Providing positive filtered oil
20
flow to bearings.
21
22
F.
Air/oil reservoir: ASME code, stamped, complete with
23
safety relief valve and blow down valve with muffler.
24
25
G.
Oil separator: Replaceable element type mounted
26
vertically to prevent oil re -entrainment. Oil
27
carryover from separator maximum 2 ppm by weight.
28
29
H.
Oil cooler: Air cooled type with heavy duty radiator
30
with steel core. Totally enclosed fan drive motor
31
and fan guard.
32
33
I.
After cooler core section: Mount immediately
34
downstream of oil cooler radiator. Provide suitable
35
moisture separator and automatic condensate trap.
36
37
J.
Compressor control: Mount on compressorpackagebase
38
in NEMA 1 type enclosure with control panel.
39
1. Include start -stop switch, control voltage
40
transformer, hour meter, discharge air
41
temperature gauge, differential pressure gauge
42
for oil separator, discharge air pressure gauge
43
and service indicator for oil filter.
44
2. Include low oil pressure shut down switch and
45
high discharge air temperature shut down switch.
46
47
K.
Air dryer: Air cooled refrigeration type capable of
48
bringing SCFM at 175 PSIG, 180 degF
49
_24
inlet temperature, to a dew point
50
_35_ldegF
condition in a 100 degF ambient environment.
51
1. Unit shall have- hermetic compressor operating
52
on 115-1 volts. Rated at a working pressure
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15481-3
01
compatible with air compressor.
02
2. Include power -on light, high suction temperature
03
light control circuit on -off switch, air inlet
04
temperature gauge, refrigerant suction pressure
05
gauge, air outlet pressure gauge, low ambient
06
condenser fan cycling control, high -low
07
refrigeration pressure control, crankcase heater,
08
and compressor motor thermal overload protection.
09
10
2.02
PIPE AND FITTINGS
11
12
A.
Compressed air piping: Black steel.
13
1. 2-1/2 IN and larger: Grooved mechanical joints.
14
2. 2 IN and smaller: Threaded joints.
15
3. Use "Victaulic" type 72 fittings for branch
16
takeoffs and plugged valves as indicated.
17
18
2.03
VALVES
19
20
A.
In 2-1/2 IN and larger lines, use flanged ball or
21
gate valves in conjunction with grooved pipe to
22
flanged adapters.
23
24
B.
In 2 IN and smaller lines, use ball or gate valves
25
with screwed ends.
26
27
C.
Use valves suitable for compressed air service rated
28
at 150 PSI minimum.
29
30
D.
Ball valves:
31
1. 2 IN and smaller: V-11.
32
2. 2-1/2 to 4 IN: V-16.
33
34
E.
Butterfly valves (6 IN and larger): V-34.
35
36
F.
Check valves:
37
1. 2 IN and smaller: V-27.
38
2. 2-1/2 IN and larger: V-28.
39
40
2.04
VIBRATION ISOLATION
41
42
A.
Vibration Isolation: Section 15240.
43
44
45
PART
3 - EXECUTION
46
47
3.01
INSTALLATION
48
49
A.
Install air piping as indicated and as specified in
50
Section 15060.
51
�.,
52
B.
Install components as indicated and in accordance
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15481-4
01 with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 01 ^
02 02
03 3.02 VIBRATION ISOLATION 03
04 04
05 A. Vibration Isolation: Provide Neoprene Pads 05
06 06
07 END OF SECTION 07
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase I Construction
15484-1
O1
2L18
SECTION 15484
01
02
02
03
LIQUID PETROLEUM GAS SYSTEM
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
07
08
08
09
A.
Piping standards: See Section 15060.
09
10
10
11
B.
Manual valve standards: See Section 15100 (for
11
12
valves labeled "V-_" ) .
12
13
13
14
1.02
SUBMITTALS
14
15
15
16
A.
Contract closeout information:
16
17
1. Test reports.
17
18
18
19
19
20
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
20
21
21
22
2.01
LP GAS PIPING
22
23
23
24
A.
LP gas piping: Black steel, welded joints.
24
25
1. Below ground: Wrapped.
25
26
2. Equipment connections 1 IN and less: May use
26
27
malleable iron threaded fittings.
27
28
3. 2 IN and less: Use socket welding fittings.
28
29
4. 2-1/2 IN and larger: Use butt welding fittings.
29
30
30
31
B.
Pipe wrapping: Factory installed, Republic
31
32
X-Tru-Coat.
32
33
33
34
C.
Pipe field wrap: Republic X-Tru-Tape.
34
35
35
36
2.02
VALVES
36
37
37
38
A.
Ball valves (2 IN and smaller): V-16.
38
39
39
40
B.
Gate valves:
40
41
1. 2 IN and smaller: V-2.
41
42
2. 2-1/2 IN and larger: V-3.
42
43
43
44
C.
Plug valves:
44
45
1. 2 IN and smaller: V-60.
45
46
2. 2-1/2 IN and larger: V-41.
46
47
4.7
48
D.
Check valves:
48
49
1. 2 IN and smaller: V-27.
49
50
2. 2-1/2 IN and larger: V-28.
50
51
51
52
E.
Butterfly valves (2 IN and smaller): V-56 or V-57.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15484-2
O1
02
03 PART 3 - EXECUTION
04
05 3.01 LP GAS PIPING INSTALLATION
06
07 A. Install in accordance with local utility company
08 regulations, Codes and local ordinances, complete
09 with necessary appurtenances.
10
11
12 3.02 TESTING
13
14 A. After pipes have been installed temporarily cap vent
15 piping and test with 30 PSI of air pressure using
16 soap suds on joints.
17
18 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
15675-1
01
4E31,
7D24 SECTION 15675
02
03
SPLIT AIR CONDITIONERS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
08
09
A.
Units factory tested.
10
11
1.02
SUBMITTALS
12
-13
A.
Shop drawings.
14
15
B.
Product data.
16
17
C.
Contract closeout information:
18
1. Operating and maintenance data.
19
2. Owner instruction report.
20
3. Test report.
21
22
23
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
24
25
2.01
SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER
26
27
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
28
1. Split air conditioners:
29
a. Base:
30
(1) Carrier.
31
b. Optional:
32
(1) Trane.
33
(2) Lennox Inds.
34
(3) Bryant.
35
B.
Air conditioner: Unitary, split type, heating and
36
cooling unit with outdoor condensing unit, indoor
37
Natural gas furnace for upflow with evaporator and
38
accessories.
39
1. Sizes and capacities: As indicated.
40
41
42
2.02
CONDENSING UNIT - HEAT PUMP
43
44
A.
Condensing unit: Air-cooled condensing unit, factory
45
assembled, consisting of compressor, condenser coil
46
and fan, casing and controls.
47
1. Units: CSA and UL approved; conforming to ARI
48
Standard 210.
49
2. Operating range: 40-120 degF outdoor ambient.
50
3. Factory installed filter drier.
51
52 B. Compressor: Hermetic, welded shell -type.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15675-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
1. Motor: Wide operating range, dual voltage.
2. Internal spring isolation and 2-stage sound
isolation.
3. Winding thermostat and current overload device
coupled with pressure limiting valve.
4. Internal protection devices for:
a. Motor overload.
b. Locked rotor.
c. Extreme voltage supply.
d. Excessive winding temperatures.
e. Extreme pressures.
f. Loss of refrigerant charge.
g. Compressor cycling.
5. Off cycle crankcase heater.
C. Coil, condenser: Seamless aluminum tubes, 3/8 IN OD,
with aluminum fins mechanically bonded.
1. Two row.
2. Factory pressure and leak tested at 600 PSI.
3. Provide heavy duty protective grille on every
side.
D. Fan, condenser: Aluminum, aerodynamically designed,
statically balanced.
1. Motor: Single phase, direct drive, heavy duty,
permanently lubricated, with built in thermal
overload protection.
2. Mount fan and motor support to cabinet top.
3. Provide grille to protect fan.
E. Casing, condensing unit: 18 GA galvanized steel.
1. Finish: Phosphatized; epoxy resin primer;
acrylic finish coat.
2. Removable end panel for access to components and
connections.
3. Standard base size.
4. Mounting rails: Die formed; integral with base.
5. Drain holes in base pan.
6. Electrical and refrigeration connections in same
location on units.
2.03 FURNACE -BLOWER UNIT
A. Blower unit: Factory assembled; consisting of fan,
heat exchanger,filters, evaporator coil, controls and
casing.
B. Fan, blower: Centrifugal type, direct drive.
1. Motor: Two -speed, permanent split capacitor,
with built in thermal overload protection and run
capacitor.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15675-3
01
C.
Filter, blower: Throwaway type, slide-in/slide-out.
01
`
02
02
03
D.
Casing, blower unit: 20 GA steel.
03
04
1. Finish: Baked enamel.
04
05
2. Lined with 1/2 IN thick, 1/2 PCF density neoprene
05
06
coated insulation.
06
07
3. Removable access panels with quarter -turn
07
08
fasteners.
08
09
09
10
E.
Coil, evaporator: Seamless copper tubes with
10
11
aluminum fins mechanically bonded.
11
12
1. Quick -connect male couplers.
12
13
2. Expansion valve expansion device.
13
14
3. Operating charge of R-22.
14
15
15
16
F.
Heat Exchanger: Induced Draft unit with AFUE not
16
17
less than 80k.
17
18
1. Aluminized Steel with 20 year Warranty.
18
19
2. Suitable for operation on Propane.
19
20
.3. Capacity as Scheduled.
20
21
21
22
G.
Controls, blower unit:
22
23
1. Fan relay.
23
24
2. 50 VA transformer.
24
25
3. Thermostat: Electronic Htg-Clg, for remote
25
26
mounting.
26
27
27
28
2.04
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ELECTRICAL WORK
28
29
29
30
A.
Piping, refrigerant for quick -connect installations:
30
31
Pre -charged, factory assembled, in standard lengths.
31
32
1. Female couplings.
32
33
2. Provide gauge ports at condenser.
33
34
34
35
B.
Piping, refrigerant, for field assembled piping: See
35
36
Section 15530.
36
37
37
38
C.
Control wiring: Provide wiring between components
38
39
for control functions.
39
40
40
41
41
42
PART
3 - EXECUTION
42
43
43
44
3.01
INSTALLATION
44
45
45
46
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's
46
47
instructions and recommendations.
47
48
48
49
B.
Connect piping, wiring and control wiring. Start
49
50
unit and demonstrate proper operation in both Heating
50
51
and Cooling Cycle for Architect/Engineer and owners
51
52
representative. Make operating adjustments as needed
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15675-4
01 to 'obtain proper operation. For units where
02 operation does not perform- repair or replace
03 equipment and retest to obtain final acceptance by
04 owners representative.
05
06 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
15831-1
O1
2L18
SECTION 15831
02
03
GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
SUBMITTALS
06
09
A.
Product data:
10
1. Performance data.
11
12
B.
Contract closeout information:
13
1. Operating and maintenance data.
14
2. Owner instruction report.
15
16
17
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
18
19
2.01
MATERIALS
20
21
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
22
1. Gas fired unit heaters:
23
a. Base:
24
(1) Sterling Heating Equipment.
25
b. Optional:
26
(1) Reznor.
27
(2) Modine.
28
(3) Trane.
29
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
30
Document 00440.
31
32
B.
Gas fired unit heaters: Provide completely factory
33
assembled, piped, wired and test fired.
34
1. AGA Certified and conform with latest ANSI
35
Standards for safe and efficient performance.
36
2. Provide with 2 point suspension hangers.
37
3. Capacity: As indicated.
38
4. Casing:
39
a. Casings die formed, minimum 20 GA galvanized
40
steel and finished in baked enamel.
41
b. Bottom panel removable to provide service
42
access to burners, pilot and orifices.
43
C. Pilot accessible through side panel access
44
plate.
45
5. Heat exchanger:
46
a. Construction of seam welded 20 GA aluminized
47
steel tubes and 18 GA aluminized steel
48
headers.
49
b. Non -prorated warranty free from defective
50
material and workmanship for period of 10
51
years from date of Substantial Completion.
52
6. Draft diverter: Constructed of corrosion
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15831-2
01 resistant aluminized steel.
02 7. Burners: UNITS MUST BE ABLE TO BE ON PROPANE.
03 a. Die formed, corrosion resistant aluminized
04 steel, with stainless steel port protectors.
05 b. Individually removable.
06 C. Individually adjustable, manually rotated air
07 shutter adjustment.
08 8. Fans:
09 a. Fan blades constructed of aluminum with an
10 aerodynamic contour.
11 b. Dynamically balanced.
12 C. Rubber -in -shear isolators between fan/motor
13 combination and unit heater casing.
14 9. Motors: 115V/60 Hz/1P, totally enclosed with
15 built-in thermal overload protection.
16 10. Controls:
17 a. Factory installed junction box provided for
18 power connections.
19 b. 24 volt combination single stage automatic
20 gas valve.
21 (1) Main operating valve and pilot safety
22 shutoff.
23 (2) Pressure regulator.
24 (3) Manual main and pilot shutoff valve.
25 (4) Adjustable pilot valve.
26 (5) Suitable for maximum inlet pressure of
27 0.5 psi (14 IN WC) natural.gas.
28 C. 24 volt control transformer.
29 d. High limit.
30 e. Fan time delay relay.
31 f. Thermostat.
32 g. Wiring diagram (thermostat installed and
33 wired under MECHANICAL work).
34 h. Controls factory installed (except
35 thermostat) in unit to cycle fan to maintain
36 space setpoint temperature.
37 11. Intermittent pilot ignition:
38 a. Solid state ignition control system ignites
39 pilot by spark during each cycle of
40 operation.
41 b. When pilot flame is proven, main burner valve
42 opens to allow gas flow to burners.
43 C. Pilot and burners are extinguished during off
44 cycle.
45
46
47 PART 3 EXECUTION
48
49 3.01 INSTALLATION
50
51 A. Install as indicated and in accord with
52 manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15831-3
O1
02 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
15870-1
O1
6A26,
7D29 SECTION 15870
01
02
02
03
EXHAUST AND VENTILATING FANS
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Description of system:
09
10
1. Ceiling exhaust fans.
10
11
11
12
B.
Abbreviations:
12
13
1. AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
13
14
2. ADC: Air Diffusion Council.
14
15
3. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating,
15
16
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
16
17
17
18
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
18
19
19
20
A.
Standards:
20
21
1. ADC Standard 1062R2, Air Diffusing Equipment Test
21
22
Code.
22
23
2. AMCA Standard 210, Test Code for Air Moving
23
24
Devices.
24
25
3. ASHRAE Standard 70, Method of Testing for Rating
25
26
the air flow performance of outlets and inlets.
26
r
27
4. NFPA-90A, Standard for the Installation of Air
27
28
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 1980
28
29
edition.
29
30
30
31
1.03
SUBMITTALS
31
32
32
33
A.
Product data:
33
34
1. Ceiling exhaust fans.
34
35
a. Fan curves.
35
36
b. Sound data.
36
37
c. Vibration isolation.
37
38
38
39
B.
Contract closeout information:
39
40
1. Operating and maintenance data.
40
41
2. Owner instruction report.
41
42
42
43
43
44
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
44
45
45
46
2.01
GENERAL
46
47
47
48
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
48
49
1. Fans (General):
49
50
a. Base:
50
51
(1) Members of AMCA.
51
52
2. Ceiling exhaust fans:
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15870-2
01 a. Base:
02 b. Optional:
03 (1) Carnes.
04 (2) Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp.
05 (3) Greenheck.
06 (4) Loren Cook.
07 (5) Penn Ventilator Co.
08 3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
09 Document 00440.
10
11 B. Fans - General:
12 1. Performance ratings: Based on laboratory tests
13 conducted in accordance with latest edition of
14 ASHRAE/AMCA Standard Test Codes.
15 2. Ratings: As indicated.
16 13. Arrangement and drive: As indicated.
17 4. Provide removable belt guard.
18 5. Finish: Applied enamel.
19
20 C. Bearings: Extra heavy duty self -aligning ball,
21 roller, or sleeve type, grease lubricated.
22
23 D. Motors and control: As specified in Section 15010.
24
25 E. Housings:
26 1. Constructed of steel scroll and side sheets
27 conforming to standard gauges of National
28 Association of Fan Manufacturers.
29 2. Continuously welded construction.
30 3. Mount in heavy steel supports on both sides.
31 4. For outdoor installation provide hinged weather
32 hood that will cover both drive and motor.
33
34 2.02 CEILING EXHAUST FANS
35
36 A. Ceiling -exhaust fans:
37 1. Centrifugal, direct or belt driven type.
38 2. Capacity: As scheduled.
39 3. Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical
40 insulation.
41 a. Specifically designed and manufactured for
42 ceiling installation.
43 b. Integral backdraft damper at fan discharge.
44 c. Removable inlet grille mounted on housing.
45 4. Fan: Forward curved centrifugal wheel mounted on
46 motor with fan shrouds.
47 5. Motor: Permanent split capacitor or capacitor
48 start, induction run.
49 a. Permanently lubricated bearings.
50 b. Provide with overload protection.
51 C. Provide vibration isolation on motor fan
52 assembly.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15870-3
01
6. Electrical: Provide junction box for electrical
01
02
connection on housing and receptacle for motor
02
03
plug-in.
03
04
7. Provide duct collar connections.
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
08
09
09
10
10
11
PART
3 - EXECUTION
11
12
12
13
3.01
INSTALLATION
13
14
14
15
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's
15
16
recommendations and as specified.
16
17
17
18
3.02
VIBRATION ISOLATION
18
19
19
20
A.
Vibration isolation: Section 15240.
20
21
21
22
22
23
END OF SECTION
23
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15880-1
01
6C15
SECTION 15880
01
02
02
03
AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Description of system:
09
10
1. High and low pressure ductwork, fittings and
10
11
accessories.
11
12
2. Dampers.
12
13
3. Diffusers, registers and grilles.
13
14
14
15
B.
Work installed but not furnished:
15
16
16
17
C.
Definitions:
17
18
1. Low pressure ductwork: 2500 FPM velocity or less
18
19
and static pressure 3 IN WG or less.
19
20
2. High pressure ductwork: Over 2500 FPM velocity
20
21
and static pressure over 3 IN WG.
21
22
3. Gage:
22
23
a. Steel sheet and wire: U S Standard Gage.
23
24
b. Aluminum sheet: Browne & Sharpe Gage.
24
25
C. Steel wire: Washburn and,Moen Gage.
25
26
4. Concealed insulated surfaces: Piping, ductwork
26
'.
27
and equipment in walls, partitions, floors, pipe
27
28
chases, pipe shafts, duct shafts, sealed
28
29
alleyways, and above suspended ceilings.
29
30
5. Exposed insulated surfaces: Piping, ductwork and
30
31
equipment located in mechanical rooms, tunnels
31
32
and rooms without suspended ceilings.
32
33
33
34
D.
Location of diffusers, registers and grilles are
34
35
indicated on Architectural reflected ceiling plans.
35
36
36
37
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
37
38
38
39
A.
Design and installation standards:
39
40
1. ASHRAE Guide and Data Book - Equipment, current
40
41
chapter on duct construction.
41
42
2. ADC Standard 1062: GRD-84, Test Code for
42
43
Grilles, Registers and Diffusers.
43
44
3. ADC Test Code FD 72-R1, Flexible Air Duct Test
44
45
Code.
45
46
4. AMCA Standard 210, Test Code for Air Moving
46
47
Devices.
47
48
5. ASHRAE Standard 70-72, Method of Testing for
48
49
Rating the air flow performance of outlets and
49
50
inlets.
50
51
6. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal
51
52
And Flexible, First Edition, 1985.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15880-2
7. Uniform Mechanical Code (UBC) 1994 edition.
B. Fire and smoke rating test standards: ASTM-E84,
NFPA-255 and ANSI/UL-723.
C. Duct sizes indicated are internal sizes.
1. Where acoustical liner is applied to interior of
a duct, increase size to maintain interior
dimensions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Ductwork layout at 1/4 IN to 1 FT scale.
B. Product data:
1. Ductwork and fittings, high pressure.
2. Dampers, nonrated.
3. Diffusers, registers and grilles.
C. Contract closeout information:
1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Acceptable manufacturers:'
1. Ductwork, high or low pressure:
a. Base:
(1) United McGill Corp.
b. Optional:
(1) Semco.
(2) Sheet Metal Products Co.
(3) Monroe Metal Manufacturing Co.
(4) Spiral -Air.
(5) Spiral Pipe of Texas, Inc.
(6) Wesco.
2. Proprietary duct connection systems:
a. Base:
(1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Optional:
(1) Nexus.
(2) WDCI (Ward Duct Connector Inc.).
3. Duct sealer:
a. Base:
(1) Durkee -Atwood.
(2) Hardcast.
(3) United McGill Corp.
(4) Precision Adhesives HVACI Inc.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15880-3
01
b. Optional:
01
r
02
(1) Foster Products Division, H B Fuller Co.
02
03
4.
Duct sealing tape:
03
04
a. Base:
04
05
(1) Durkee -Atwood.
05
06
(2) Hardcast.
06
07
(3) United McGill Corp.
-07
08
5.
Turning vanes:
08
09
a. Base:
09
10
(1) Aero-Dyne.
10
11
b. Optional:
11
12
(1) Airsan.
12
13
(2) Tuttle and Bailey.
13
14
(3) Titus.
14
15
(4) Vent Products Co.
15
16
6.
Flexible fan connections:
16
17
a. Base:
17
18
(1) Duro-Dyne.
18
19
(2) Elgin.
19
20
(3) Ventfabrics.
20
21
7.
Flexible duct, preinsulated:
21
22
a. Base:
22
23
(1) Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp.
23
24
b. Optional:
24
25
(1) Clevepak Corp., Clevaflex Division.
25
26
(2) General Flex Corp.
26
27
(3) Goodman Manufacturing Corp.
27
28
(4) Flexible Technologies, Automation
28
29
Industries, Inc.
29
30
(5) H K Porter Co., Inc., Thermoid Division.
30
31
(6) Thermaflex.
31
32
8.
Access doors:
32
33
a. Base:
33
34
(1) Air Balance, Inc.
34
35
b. Optional:
35
36
(1) American Warming & Ventilating Co.
36
37
(2) Nailor-Hart.
37
38
(3) Prefco Products, Inc.
38
39
(4) Ruskin Manufacturing Co.
39
40
(5) United McGill Corp.
40
41
(6) Ventfabrics.
41
42
(7) Zurn.
42
43
9.
Calcium silicate fireproof board:
43
44
a. Base:
44
45
(1) Pabco, Division of Fibreboard Corp.
45
46
10.
Manual dampers:
46
47
a. Base:
47
48
(1) Air Balance, Inc.
48
49
b. Optional:
49
50
(1) American Warming & Ventilating Co.
50
51
(2) Carnes.
51
52
(3) Krueger.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15880-4
(4) Penn Ventilator Co.
(5) Prefco Products, Inc.
(6) Ruskin Manufacturing
(7) Safe -Air Inc.
(8) Vent Products Co.
11. Backdraft dampers:
a. Base:
(1) Air Balance, Inc.
b. Optional:
(1) American Warming & Ventilating Co.
(2) Carnes.
(3) Cesco Products.
(4) Penn Ventilator Co.
(5) Prefco Products, Inc.
(6) Ruskin Manufacturing Co.
(7) Safe -Air Inc.
12. Diffusers, registers and grilles:
a. Base:
(1) Titus.
b. Optional:
(1) Anemostat.
(2) Carnes.
(3) Tuttle and Bailey.
( 4 ) Krueger.
13. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply
with Document 00440.
Co.
B. Sheet metal:
1. Galvanized steel (G90): ASTM-A653/A653M,
F.S.QQ-I-716.
C. Duct sealer: NFPA rating of "Non -Combustible".
1. Flame spread rating: 25 or lower, in dry
condition.
2. Smoke developed rating: 50 or lower, in dry
condition.
3. Resistant to water and water vapors.
4. Pressure rupture rating: 16 IN WG, minimum.
5. Durkee -Atwood, Permatite Class I; Hardcast 601;
or United McGill, Uni-Grip Duct Sealer.
D. Duct sealing tape: NFPA rating of "Non -Combustible".
1. Flame spread rating: 25 or lower, in dry
condition.
2. Smoke developed rating: 50 or lower, in dry
condition.
3. Adhesive: Specifically compounded for maximum
adhesion to galvanized and stainless steel.
4. Durkee -Atwood "Insta-Seal" Class I; Hardcast
FTA-20 and RTA-50; Tremco 440; or United McGill,
Uni-Cast tape.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43.
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
15880-5
01
02
E. RTV foam: UL listed room temperature vulcanized
03
silicone rubber foam.
04
05
2.02 DUCTWORK
06
07
A. Ductwork - general: Constructed of galvanized steel
08
sheet.
09
1. Maintain full areas and suitable shapes at every
10
point.
11
2. Shapes may be changed to fit unusual space
12
conditions.
13
3. Provide necessary transitions and offsets to
14
complete systems.
15
16
B. Ductwork, low pressure, sheet metal:
17
1. Low pressure ductwork includes but is not limited
18
to:
19
a. Ductwork operating at 2500 fpm velocity or
20
less
21
b. Parts of return, exhaust and relief air
22
ductwork as indicated.
23
2. Construct in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
24
Construction Standard as follows:
25
a. Rectangular duct: Table 1-6, 4 IN WG static
26
pressure, positive or negative.
t
27
b. Round duct: Table 3-2, 10 IN WG static
28
pressure, positive or negative.
29
3. Transverse joints, rectangular:
30
a. Ducts with longest side 36 IN and longer:
31
Use proprietary flanged duct connection
32
systems (ie. Ductmate 35/25 slide on
33
systems) .
34
(1) Seal transverse flanged duct connections
35
with pressure sensitive, high density,
36
closed cell, neoprene or polyurethane
37
tape gasket or "Tremco 440".
38
b. Non-proprietary SMACNA T-22 flanged
39
connection may be used as defined on Page
40
1-25 and 1-37, of the
41
42
1985 SMACNA Manual, First Edition.
43
c. Non-proprietary T-24, proprietary TDC/TDF
44
flanges are not acceptable.
45
d. Ducts with longest side shorter than 35 IN:
46
(1) Proprietary flanged duct connection
47
systems are optional.
48
(2) Refer to SMACNA 1985 Manual, First
49
Edition, for proper duct construction.
50
(3) TDC/TDF duct connection system is not
51
acceptable.
f
52
4. Longitudinal seam: Use Pittsburgh lock seam
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15880-6
01
only.
01
02
5.
Seal sheet metal ducts to Seal Class A
02
03
requirements.
03
04
6.
Runouts to diffusers, register and grilles: May
04
05
use flexible ducts.
05
06
a. Exceptions:
06
07
(1) Flexible ducts may not pass through
07
08
smoke or fire rated walls, floors or
08
09
ceilings.
09
10
b. Maximum flexible duct length: 5 FT.
10
11
c. Minimum turning radius: As recommended by
11
12
manufacturer. 180 degree bends are not
12
13
allowed.
13
14
14
15
15
16
C. Duct
hangers and supports: In accordance with
16
17
following:
17
18
1.
High and low pressure ductwork (sheet metal):
18
19
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard, Section
19
20
IV.
.20
21
21
22
D. Duct fittings and joints on low pressure systems:
22
23
1.
Radius elbows without vanes: Radius ratio (R/W)
23
24
of 1.5 and greater.
24
25
2.
Radius elbows with vanes: Radius ratio (R/W)
25
26
less than 1.5; use where space limitations occur.
26 �-..
27
a. R/W = 0.75 to 1.0: Provide 3 vanes in elbow.
27
28
b. R/W = 1.0 to 1.25: Provide 2 vanes in elbow.
28
29
c. R/W = 1.25 to 1.5: Provide 1 vane in elbow.
29
30
d. Provide vane spacing per Figure 2-5, SMACNA
30
31
HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
31
32
3.
Where square elbows are indicated or required,
32
33
provide with turning vanes.
33
34
4.
Connections to diffusers, grilles and registers:
34
35
Fitted securely to necks or collars provided
35
36
behind diffuser, grille, or register face area.
36
37
5.
Branch connections:
37
38
a. Round: Factory built short cone or bellmouth
38
39
type.
39
40
b. Rectangular: 45 degree entry type or radius
40
41
elbow.
41
42
6.
Provide necessary transition pieces and duct
42
43
collars to make connections to ductwork from neck
43
44
sizes scheduled or indicated on drawings.
44
45
7.
Where building walls, floor and ceilings form
45
46
portions of duct or plenum, provide gasketed
46
47
angles or channels at junction points, securely
47
48
bolted to building. structure.
48
49
.49
50
50
51
E. Turning vanes: For square elbows.
51
52
1.
Velocities up to 2500 FPM: Single vane, runner
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15880-7
01
Type 2, with 3/4 IN trailing edge, 2 IN vane
O1
02
radius and 1.5
02
03
03
04
IN vane spacing, minimum 24 GA.
04
05
a. For widths over 36 IN install vanes in 2 or
05
06
more sections or use tie rods to limit
06
07
unbraced vane length.
07
08
2.
Where inlet and outlet dimensions of elbows are
08
09
not equal, set 2 or more sections at 45 degrees
09
10
angle to give optimum turning.
10
11
11
12
F. Partitions
and blank -off plates:
12
13
1.
Where used as part of an air handling unit,
13
14
construct of 14 GA sheet metal with 1-1/2 IN
14
15
standing seams.
15
16
2.
Partitions 8 FT long or less: Use 1-1/2 x 1/4 IN
16
17
angles spaced 2 FT on centers for additional
17
18
bracing.
18
19
3.
Partitions over 8 FT long: Use 2 x 1/4 IN
19
20
angles.
20
21
21
22
22
23
G. Flexible
fan connections:
23
24
1.
Material: Neoprene double coated closely woven
24
25
glass fabric flexible connections.
25
26
2.
Fasten fabric to sheet metal duct work and to fan
26
r
27
collar extension with 3/16 IN rivets spaced not
27
28
more than 5 IN OC.
28
29
3.
Locate in inlet and outlet of fans, as close to
29
30
fan as possible.
30
31
4.
Provide at ducts crossing building expansion
31
32
joints and as indicated on drawings.
32
33
5.
Connections shall not be under tension.
33
34
6.
Provide minimum separation distance of 1 IN
34
35
across the connection.
35
36
36
37
H. Flexible ducts, preinsulated:
37
38
1.
Low pressure construction:
38
39
a. Spiral wire or band, reinforced fabric liner.
39
40
b. Nominal 1 IN x 3/4 LB/CF fiberglass
40
41
insulation covered with vinyl, polyethylene
41
42
or reinforced metallized vapor barrier.
42
43
2.
Rated working pressure:
43
44
a. Low pressure duct: Positive 3 IN WG minimum;
44
45
negative 1-1/2 IN minimum, for return or
45
46
exhaust air connections.
46
47
3.
Fire resistant, self extinguishing, UL-181, Class
47
48
1, with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke
48
49
development not to exceed 50.
49
50
4.
Thermal conductance(C): 0.23 BTU/ h-FT2-F.
50
51
5.
Low pressure connections:
51
52
a. Secure duct to collar or sleeve with screws,
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15880-8
01
or metal or nylon clamps or bands.
01
02
b. Seal connection with 2 wraps of duct tape.
-02
03
6. Duct sealer: E Moore Co., Tuff -Bond No.12; or
03
04
Benjamin Foster No.30-02.
04
05
7. Turn radius: Not less than R/D equal to 1.0.
05
06
8. Provide flexible duct supports in accordance with
06
07
Figure 3-9 and 3-10, SMACNA HVAC Duct
07
08
Construction Standards.
08
09
09
10
10
11
2.03
DAMPERS
11
12
12
13
A.
Dampers - general:
13
14
1. Sizes and types: As indicated.
14
15
2. Locate as indicated.
15
16
3. Factory built and assembled dampers.
16
17
17
18
B.
Dampers, automatic:
18
19
1. Install as specified in this section.
19
20
20
21
C.
Dampers, manual (rectangle and square):
21
22
1. Opposed blade type, fitted with shank bolts,
22
23
marked for direction (open/closed).
23
24
2. Provide for.double socket wrenches.to fit square
24
25
shank and locking hex nut.
25
26
3. Construction: Heavy black iron frames, flat or
26
27
angle iron, with blades of 16 GA galvanized
27
28
steel, equipped with brass pin running on
28
29
stainless steel pivot for vertical axis.
29
30
30
31
D.
Damper, manual (round):
31
32
1. Butterfly type with circular blade mounted to
32
33
shaft.
33
34
2. Frame: Minimum 14 GA galvanized steel channel.
34
35
3. Blade: Minimum 16 GA galvanized steel.
35
36
4. Axle: 1/2 IN diameter.
36
37
5. Bearings: Self-lubricating nylon or stainless
37
38
steel sleeve.
38
39
39
40
E.
Dampers, backdraft, low pressure:
40
41
1. Counterbalanced, gravity operated.
41
42
2. Fabricate of aluminum.
42
43
3. Blades: Provided with common linkage rod and
43
44
felt seals.
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
2.04
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
49
50
50
51
A.
Diffusers, ceiling:
51
52
1. Square type.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15880-9
01
2. Size, type and manufacturer: As scheduled.
02
3. Finish of steel units: Factory applied, baked or
03
electrocoated enamel; color as selected by
04
Architect or as indicated.
05
4. Finish of aluminum units: Satin anodized.
06
5. Sponge rubber gasketed for ceiling diffusers.
07
6. Provide necessary screws, duct collars,
08
transitions and air pattern deflectors.
09
7. Paint interior of perforated supply and return
10
diffusers flat black.
11
S. Nominal 24 X 24 IN panel style diffusers:
12
a. Provide in areas with lay in ceilings.
13
9. 12 X 12 IN face diffusers with overlap style
14
mounting for 6 IN diameter neck sizes; and 24 X
15
24 IN face for neck sizes 8 IN and larger:
16
a. Provide for hard ceilings.
17
10. Use circular diffusers in areas where ductwork
18
is exposed and as indicated.
19
11. Provide easily removed inner core with a
20
positive lock.
21
22
23
B.
Air grilles and registers:
24
1. Size, type and manufacturer: As scheduled.
25
2. Finish of steel units: Prime coated for finish
26
painting on job site.
27
3. Finish of aluminum units: Satin anodized.
28
4. Sponge rubber gasketed for ceiling and wall
29
units.
30
5. Provide necessary screws, duct collars and
31
transitions.
32
33
34
35
36
PART 3
- EXECUTION
37
38
3.01
GENERAL
39
40
A.
Install and coordinate systems and components.
41
42
3.02
INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK
43
44
A.
Install generally as indicated.
45
46
B.
Conceal ductwork in finished spaces unless indicated
47
otherwise.
48
49
C.
Do not install ductwork in or allow to enter or pass
50
through electrical rooms, elevator machine rooms, or
51
spaces housing switchboards, panelboards or
52
distribution boards, except ductwork that serves
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15880-10
01
electrical rooms, elevator machine rooms, or spaces.
01
02
02
03
D.
Exercise special care to provide tight fitting well
03
04
fabricated, well braced ductwork systems.
04
05
05
06
E.
Field assemble rectangular, round or flat oval
06
07
ductwork as follows:
07
08
1. Use caulking grade joint sealer applied slip
08
09
joints, or:
09
10
2. Use slip joints, couplings, etc., sealed with
10
11
"shrink fit" plastic bands, with thermal setting
11
12
adhesives preapplied to plastic bands, or:
12
13
3. Use slip joints, couplings, etc., sealed with
13
14
pressure sensitive tape, or:
14
15
4. Use Ductmate Spiralmate or Ovalmate systems.
15
16
5. Isolate dissimilar metals with elastomeric
16
17
sealant tape or fiber gaskets, and gaskets and
17
18
washers for bolts.
18
19
19
20
F.
Install flanged duct connection systems in accordance
20
21
with manufacturer's construction standards.
21
22
22
23
23
24
G.
Make duct connections from hoods, openings, fans, and
24
25
other devices.
25
26
26
27
27
28
H.
Where ducts pass thru fire rated and smoke rated
28
29
construction, maintain rating indicated.
29
30
1. Where fire dampers are not used, seal around duct
30
31
with firestopping.
31
32
2. See Section 07270 for materials.
32
33
33
34
34
35
3.03
PERFORMANCE TESTS
35
36
36
37
37
38
A.
Test low pressure ductwork to 1.5 times listed fan
38
39
operating pressure with 2 IN WG minimum before
39
40
insulation is applied.
40
41
41
42
B.
Use a pressure blower to provide supply air for test.
42
43
43
44
C.
Submit reports to Architect.
44
45
45
46
46
47
3.04
NOTE REGARDING ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINER
47
48
48
49
A.
Acoustical duct liner:, Not allowed.
49
50
50
51
3.05
CLEANING
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15880-11
01
A.
At substantial completion, clean work installed under
02
this section.
03
04
3.06
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION
05
06
A.
At substantial completion, inspect and test, and
07
operate satisfactorily, in presence of Engineer and
08
representative of Owner, operation of each piece of
09
equipment and its accessories.
10
11
B.
If inspection or test indicates defects, replace
12
defective work or material.
13
14
C.
Repeat inspections and tests until defects are
15
eliminated.
16
17
END OF SECTION
w
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
15991-1
01
3K24
SECTION 15991
02
03
TESTING AND BALANCING
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
O8
09
A.
Test, balance and adjust following mechanical
10
systems:
11
1. Air distribution systems.
12
2. Air handling units and air moving equipment.
13
3. Heating and cooling coils.
14
15
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
16
17
A.
Agency qualifications: Independent test and balance
18
agency, member of Associated Air Balance Council
19
(AABC), or National Environmental Balancing Bureau
20
(NEBB) .
21
1. Work supervised by a certified Testing and
22
Balancing Engineer.
23
2. indicate at least 5 successfully completed
24
projects of similar size and scope.
25
26
B.
Testing and balancing standards: AABC or NEBB
27
standards and procedures.
28
29
1.03
RESPONSIBILITIES OF TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) AGENCY
30
31
A.
Directly responsible to Owner or Owners
32
representative.
33
1. Will not have a contractual relationship with
34
Installing Mechanical Contractor.
35
2. Report balancing problem to Architect for
36
resolution.
37
38
B.
Schedule work with trades involved.
39
40
C.
Check, adjust, and balance system components to
41
obtain optimum conditions for function and operation
42
of system.
43
44
D.
Evaluate operation of systems and advise installer of
45
necessary adjustments and corrective measures.
46
47
E.
Prepare and submit test reports.
48
49
1.04
RESPONSIBILITIES OF MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
50
51
A.
Startup system and keep in correct operation during
52
balancing operations.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15991-2
O1
02
B.
Make accessible, personnel to provide necessary
03
adjustments and corrections to systems as directed by
04
Testing and Balancing Agency.
05
06
C.
Maintain accessibility to test locations and devices
07
requiring adjustment.
08
09
D.
Provide additional sets of pulleys and belts as
10
required by Testing and Balancing Agency.
11
12
E.
Provide a complete set of approved
13
mechanical -equipment shop drawings to Testing and
14
Balancing Agency.
15
16
F.
Provide a complete set of "As -built" drawings to
17
Testing and Balancing Agency.
18
19
1.05
JOB CONDITIONS
20
21
A.
Balance at time directed by Owners representative.
22
1. If balancing is not done during peak cooling
23
season demonstrate satisfactory balancing during
24
next peak cooling season.
25
26
B.
Keep dust, dirt and debris to an absolute minimum and
27
reinstall all removed ceiling tiles to their original
28
positions at end of each day.
29
30
1.06
CORRECTIVE WORK
31
32
A.
Provide extended warranty of 90 days, after
33
completion of test and balance work, during which
34
time Engineer may at his discretion, request recheck
35
or resetting of equipment or system which is not
36
performing satisfactorily. Provide technicians to
37
assist as required in making such tests.
38
39
1.07
SUBMITTALS
40
41
A.
Project information:
42
1. Within 60 days of award of contract submit a
43
complete Submission Report including:
44
a. A company resume listing its personnel and
45
project experience in air and hydronic
46
balancing.
47
b. An inventory and calibration data of all
48
instruments and devices in possession of
49
balancing agency.
50
c. A working agenda that includes procedures for
51
testing and balancing each air and waterflow
52
system.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15991-3
i^ 01
d. All test and balance report forms and field
02
data sheets that will appear in final report,
03
with all design data already filled in.
04
e. A written, system -by -system description of
05
measurements, test locations and procedures
06
that will be employed during test and
07
balance.
08
09
B. Contract closeout information:
10
1. Final test and balance report(s):
it
a. Use forms similar to AABC or NEBB latest
12
editions.
13
b. Report(s) signed by TAB Engineer.
14
15
16
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
17
18
2.01 JOB SITE INSPECTIONS
19
20
A. Job site inspections:
21
1. During construction inspect installation of
22
piping, sheet metal work, temperature controls,
23
flow meters, pressure taps, strainers and other
24
components of HVAC system as specified in
25
contract documents.
26
2. Note any deficiencies and submit them, in
27
-writing, to Architect.
28
a. Include these inspection reports in final TAB
29
report.
30
31
2.02 FINAL TEST AND BALANCE REPORT
32
33
A. Using field data, test forms and procedures outlined
34
in Submission Report, perform and record measurements
35
and complete final TAB report including:
36
1. Preface:
37
a. A general discussion of system including any
38
abnormalities and problems encountered.
39
2. Instrumentation list:
40
a. List of instruments including type, model,
41
manufacturer, serial number and calibration
42
date.
43
3. System identification:
44
a. In each report number and/or letter air
45
terminal units, zones, supply, return and
46
exhaust openings and traverse points to
47
correspond to numbers and letters on report
48
data sheets.
49
4. Air handling equipment:
50
a. Manufacturer, model number, and serial
51
number.
52
b. All design and manufacturer related data.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
15991-4
O1
c. Total actual CFM by traverse if practical; if
01
02
not practical, sum of outlets may be used, or
02
03
a combination of each of these procedures.
03
04
(1) For specific systems, such as ones with
04
05
diversity, see AABC National Standards.
05
06
d. Suction and discharge static pressure of each
06
07
fan, as applicable.
07
08
e. Outside air and return air total CFM.
08
09
f. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake
09
10
horsepower of each fan motor.
10
11
g. Final RPM of each fan.
11
12
h. Fan and motor sheave manufacturer, model,
12
13
size, number of grooves and center distance.
13
14
i. Belt size and quantity.
14
15
j. Static pressure controls final operation set
15
16
points.
16
17
5. Heating and cooling coils:
17
18
a. Manufacturer.
18
19
b. All design and manufacturer's related data.
19
20
6. Air terminal units, diffusers, registers and
20
21
grilles:
21
22
a. Adjust air terminal units to deliver design
22
23
maximum and minimum volume conditions.
23
24
b. Each air outlet (diffuser) CFM.
24
25
C. Each return and exhaust air inlet (register
25
26
or grille) CFM.
26
27
27
28
28
29
PART 3 - EXECUTION
29
30
30
31
3.01 GENERAL
31
32
32
33
A. Accurately calibrate and maintain test instruments in
33
34
good working order.
34
35
1. If requested, conduct tests of instruments in
35
36
presence of Owners representative.
36
37
37
38
B. If requested, conduct balancing tests in presence of
38
39
Owners representative.
39
40
40
41
C. Do not begin balancing until system(s) have been
41
42
substantially completed and are in good working order
42
43
to permit preliminary measurements of total air or
43
44
water volumes and system pressures.
44
45
45
46
D. Proceed with final balancing and adjustments when
46
47
systems are 95 to 100 percent complete.
47
48
48
49
E. Record inspections, tests and adjustments.
49
50
50
51
3.02 AIR BALANCING METHODS
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase'1 Construction
15991-5
t,.,, 01
A.
Balance each air system that is served by air
02
filters, using artificial static loading of system,
03
to demonstrate, test and obtain system design
04
pressure drop data.
05
1. Provide dirty filter pressure drop conditions on
06
system.
07
2. Do not use high efficiency filters (75 percent
08
and above) in testing and balancing.
09
3. Static pressure losses may be simulated by using
10
wood or sheet steel blanking plates in high
11
efficiency filter racks and housings.
12
4. Do not install blanking plates within 2 FT of low
13
efficiency filter unit or rack.
14
15
3.03
AIR BALANCE TESTING PROCEDURE
16
17
A.
Perform tests and balance system in accordance with
18
approved Submission Report.
19
20
B.
Take readings of airflow stations if installed or
21
make pitot tube traverse of main supply, return and
22
exhaust air ducts.
23
1. Obtain CFM at fans at both maximum and minimum
24
outside air operation.
25
26
C.
Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register
27
served by an air terminal unit to within 10 percent
28
of design requirements.
29
30
D.
In cooperation with HVAC Controls Contractor, set
31
automatically operated dampers to operate as
32
indicated.
33
1. Check controls for proper calibration and list
34
controls requiring adjustment.
35
36
37
3.04
OPERATING TEST
38
39
A.
After systems are balanced, conduct operating test of
40
not less than 8 hours duration to demonstrate to
41
satisfaction of Architect that system(s) comply with
42
requirements of plans and specifications, and that
43
equipment and controls are functioning properly.
44
45
END OF SECTION
Q0
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16010-1
01
4D29,
7I19 SECTION 16010
02
03
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Drawings use and interpretation:
10
1. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general
11
arrangement of systems and equipment, except when
12
specifically dimensioned or detailed.
13
2. For exact locations of building elements, refer
14
to dimensioned architectural/structural drawings.
15
3. Field measurements take precedence over
16
dimensioned drawings.
17
4. Intention is to indicate size, capacity,
18
approximate location, direction and general
19
relationship of one work phase to another, but
20
not exact detail or arrangement.
21
22
B.
Installation of all systems and equipment is subject
23
to clarification as indicated in reviewed shop
24
drawings and field coordination drawings.
25
26
C.
Dimensions indicated are limiting dimensions.
f
27
28
D.
Do not use equipment exceeding dimensions indicated
29
or equipment or arrangements that reduce required -
30
clearances or exceed specified maximum dimensions.
31
32
E.
Description of systems:
33
1. Provide materials to provide functioning systems
34
in compliance with performance requirements
35
specified.
36
2. Provide modifications required by reviewed shop
37
drawings and field coordinated drawings.
38
39
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
40
41
A.
Perform all work in accordance with following codes:
42
1. Federal, state and local codes, regulations and
43
ordinances.
44
2. Underwriter's (UL) code requirements.
45
3. NFPA-70 1993 National Electrical Code (NEC).
46
4. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
47
5. All authorities having jurisdiction.
48
6. Factory Mutual System (FM) requirements.
49
7. UBC 1994 Uniform Building Code.
50
8. NFPA-30 1993: Flammable and combustible liquids
51
code.
52
9. NFPA-101 (1994): Life safety code.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16010-2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
10. ANSI/CABO-A117.1: Handicap code, Chapter 553 -
Part V (1986) .
11. Standard Building Code (1985).
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Specification comparison:
1. Submit copy of specification annotated on line by
line basis where proposed product or system
differs from specified product or system.
2. Explain differences.
3. No other submittal for product or system will be
reviewed without required specification
comparison.
4. Submit as product data.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
1. As indicated in each Division 16 section.
B. Product data:
1. Product list for Division 16 Equipment.
2. As indicated in each Division 16 section.
C. Samples:
1. As indicated in each Division 16 section.
D. Project information:
1. As indicated in each Division 16 section.
E. Contract closeout information:
1. As indicated in each Division 16 section.
1.05 PROTECTION
A. Provide covering and shielding for all equipment to
protect from damage.
B. Protect nameplates on motors and similar equipment,
to prevent defacing.
C. Repair, restore or replace damaged, corroded and
rejected items.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Examine Contract Documents to determine how other
work will affect execution of electrical work.
B. Make arrangements for and pay for necessary permits,
licenses, and inspections.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase I Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16010-3
01
01
02
C.
Cause as little interference or interruption of
02
03
existing utilities and services as possible.
03
04
1. Schedule work which will cause interference or
04
05
interruption in advance with Owner, Architect,
05
06
authorities having jurisdiction and all affected
06
07
trades.
07
08
08
09
D.
Determine and verify locations of all existing
09
10
utilities on or near site.
10
11
11
12
E.
Record drawings:
12
13
1. Keep a complete set of all electrical drawings in
13
14
job site office for indicating actual
14
15
installation of electrical systems and equipment.
15
16
2. Use this set of drawings for no other purpose.
16
17
3. Where any material, equipment, or system
17.
18
components are installed differently from that
18
19
indicated, indicate differences clearly and
19
20
neatly using ink or indelible pencil.
-20
21
4. At project completion, submit record set of
21
22
drawings
22
23
23
24
1.07
WEATHER PROOF EQUIPMENT
24
25
25
26
A.
Use NEMA weatherproof (WP) enclosures for all
26
27
exterior devices and equipment.
27
28
1. NEMA 3R.
28
29
29
30
30
31
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
31
32
32
33
2.01
MATERIALS
33
34
34
35
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
35
36
1. Individual items:
36
37
a. Base:
37
38
(1) As noted.
38
39
b. Optional:
39
40
(1) As noted.
40
41
2. Non -secure area access panels:
41
42
a. Base:
42
43
(1) JL Industries.
43
44
b. Optional:
44
45
(1) Ventfab.
45
46
(2) American Warming & Ventilating.
46
47
(3) Potter Roemer.
47
48
(4) Milcor.
48
49
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
49
50
Document 00440.
50
51
51
52
B.
Use only prime quality, new materials, apparatus and
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16010-4
O1
equipment.
01
02
02
03
C.
Use UL labeled electrical materials where listing has
03
04
been established for materials or devices in
04
05
question.
05
06
1. Manufactured items and fabricated assemblies of
06
07
electrically operating equipment: UL approval or
07
08
UL reexamination listing.
08
09
09
10
D.
Structural steel for supports: ASTM-A36/A36M.
10
11
1. Galvanize members installed in areas of high
11
12
humidity or condensation.
12
13
2. Furnish other members with shop coat of rust
13
14
inhibiting primer.
14
15
3. Shop fabricate for field assembly using bolts.
15
16
4. Minimize field welding.
16
17
5. Retouch primer and galvanizing after field
17
18
welding.
18
19
19
20
E.
Rain hoods and counter flashings exposed to view: As
20
21
specified in Section 07600.
21
22
22
23
F.
Access doors, panels and frames:
23
24
1. Style and type required for material in which
24
25
installed.
25
26
2. Provide in walls, floors, and ceilings to permit
26
27
access to all equipment requiring service,
27
28
adjustment or inspection.
28
29
a. Lighting fixtures shall not be used in lieu
29
30
of access panels.
30
31
3. Access panels:
31
32
a. Size: Minimum 12 x 12 IN, or larger as
32
33
required.
33
34
b. Minimum 14 GA sheet metal, cadmium plated or
34
35
galvanized after fabrication.
35
36
C. Key lock, keyed alike, for panels in public
36
37
areas.
37
38
d. Prime painted.
38
39
e. UL labeled in fire rated construction.
39
40
40
41
2.02
FIRESTOPPING
41
42
42
43
A.
Firestop all penetrations of fire rated walls, floors
43
44
and assemblies.
44
45
1. Penetrations shall comply with UL listing for
45
46
construction or assembly.
46
47
47
48
B.
Use materials and methods as specified in Section
48
49
07270.
49
50
50
-51
51
52
PART
3 - EXECUTION
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16010-5
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
t 27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
I''`1, 52
3.01 GENERAL
A. Use only thorough, highly skilled, and experienced
workmen.
B. When changes in location of any work are required,
obtain approval of Architect before making change.
1. Make changes at no extra cost.
C. Do not change indicated sizes without written
approval of Architect.
D. Provide all necessary offsets and crossovers in
conduits, raceways, cabletrays and ducts.
E. Install exposed conduits parallel to walls and
ceilings and vertically plumb, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Where electrical items penetrate fire and/or smoke
rated walls, ceilings and floors, comply with Section
07270.
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Provide cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and
finishing of installed work.
1. Include installed work of other sections where it
is necessary to disturb such work to permit
installation of electrical work.
2. Repair or replace existing or new work disturbed.
B. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves or
frames, and by requesting openings in advance.
C. Before cutting, obtain approval of Architect. See
Section 01044.
1. Use only approved methods.
2. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to
admit work.
3. Do not weaken walls or floors; locate holes in
concrete to miss structural sections.
D. Locate openings and sleeves to permit neat
installation of conduits and equipment.
E. Do not remove or damage fireproofing materials.
1. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors
prior to installation of fireproofing.
2. Repair or replace fireproofing removed or
damaged, at no extra cost.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16010-6
O1
01
02
3.03
EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
02
03
03
04
A.
Excavating, trenching, and backfilling:
04
05
1. See Section 16375.
05
06
06
07
3.04
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
07
08
08
09
A.
Install all equipment in accordance with
09
10
manufacturer's recommendations.
10
11
11
12
B.
Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports.
12
13
1. Use structural supports suitable for equipment.
13
14
2. Check loadings and dimensions of equipment with
14
15
shop drawings.
15
16
3. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural
16
17
members.
17
18
18
19
C.
Verify that equipment will fit support layouts
19
20
indicated.
20
21
1. Where substitute equipment is used, revise
21
22
indicated supports to fit at no additional cost.
22
23
23
24
D.
Arrange for necessary openings to allow entry of
24
25
equipment.
25
26
1. Where equipment cannot be installed as structure
26
27
is being erected, provide and arrange for
27
28
building -in of boxes,' sleeves or other devices to
28
29
allow later installation. -
29
30
30
31
E.
Make all penetrations through roofs prior to
31
32
installation of roofing. For penetrations required
32
33
after installation.of roofing:
33
34
1. In built-up roofing (BUR), provide all curbs,
34
35
cants and base flashings.
35
36
2. In elastic sheet roofing (ESR), arrange and pay
36
37
for flashing work by authorized roofer.
37
38
38
39
F.
Install rain hoods and metal counter flashings as
39
40
indicated and make all penetrations of electrical
40
41
work through walls and roofs water and weathertight.
41
42
1. Furnish all clamps, waterproofing material and
42
43
labor necessary.
43
44
2. Where metal (lashings are applied over concrete,
44
45
paint concrete with 1/8 IN of mastic cement
45
46
first.
46
47
3. Set flashing in mastic cement, watertight.
47
48
48
49
G.
Have repair and replacement of roof construction,
49
50
damaged by this work, done in manner which will not
50
51
nullify roof warranty.
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16010-7
01
H.
Provide equipment guards at all belts, couplings,
02
moving machinery and equipment provided under this
03
Division in accordance with OSHA.
04
1. Use suitable structural frames with 12 GA, 3/4 IN
05
maximum opening galvanized mesh, or expanded
06
metal mesh.
07
2. Attach to equipment by removable clips and bolts
08
with wing nuts, or other approved connectors.
09
10
I.
Install equipment to permit easy access for normal
11
maintenance.
12
1. Maintain easy access to switches,'motors, drives,
13
pull boxes, receptacles, etc.
14
2. Relocate items which interfere with access.
15
16
J.
Provide concrete foundations or pads for all floor
17
mounted electrical equipment.
18
1. Provide as indicated or as follows:
19
a. Where drawings do not indicate special
20
foundations, install 4 IN high concrete pads.
21
b. Use 3,000 PSI concrete.
22
C. Reinforce with 6 x 6 IN - W2.9 x W2.9 mesh,
23
with short dowels into floor at 12 IN OC
24
around perimeter.
25
d. Chamfer top edges 3/4 IN.
26
e. Make all faces smooth.
!�
27
f. Set anchor bolts for equipment. Consult with
28
user.
29
30
3.05
PAINTING (See Section 09900)
31
32
3.06
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
33
34
A.
Perform indicated tests to demonstrate workmanship,
35
operation, and performance.
36
1. Conduct tests in presence of Architect and, if
37
required inspectors of agencies having
38
jurisdiction.
39
2. Arrange date of tests in advance with Architect,
40
manufacturer and installer.
41
3. Give minimum of 24 hours notice to all
42
inspectors.
43
4. Furnish or arrange for use of electrical energy,
44
steam, water, diesel fuel, or gas required for
45
tests.
46
5. Furnish all lubricating materials required for
47
test.
48
49
B.
Repair or replace equipment and systems found
50
inoperative or defective and retest.
51
1. If equipment or system fails retest, replace it
52
with products conforming with Contract Documents.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16010-8
O1
2. Continue remedial measures and retests until
01
02
satisfactory results are obtained.
02
03
03
04
C.
Test equipment and systems as indicated for each
04
05
item, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
05
06
06
07
3.07
FINAL PERFORMANCE TEST
07
08
08
09
A.
Perform panel load balance, short circuit, and
09
10
freedom from ground, and ground test (including
10
11
ground fault protection where provided).
11
12
12
13
3.08
ADJUST AND CLEAN
13
14
14
15
A.
Inspect all equipment and put in good working order.
15
16
16
17
B.
Clean all exposed and concealed items.
17
18
18
19
C.
Where new work occurs in existing areas where no
19
20
other work has been done, clean area and restore to
20
21
original condition.
21
22
22
23
3.09
PUTTING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION - START UP
23
24
24
25
A.
Put all systems into satisfactory operation prior to
25
26
final acceptance, at time agreed to by General
26
27
Contractor, Owner and Architect.
27
28
28
29
B.
Operate all systems in good working order for period
29
30
of 5 working days.
30
31
31
32
3.10
DEVICE MOUNTING SCHEDULE
32
33
33
34
A.
Dimensions are to center of device unless otherwise
34
35
indicated. Coordinate outlet locations with all
35
36
architectural millwork and/or casework elevations.
36
37
Coordinate device mounting height with wainscoting
37
38
where provided. Where top of wainscot and device
38
39
mounting height overlaps, shift device down to
39
40
provide 2 IN gap between top of device and top of
40
41
wainscot.
41
42
42
43
B.
Mounting heights as indicated below:
43
44
44
45
Flush tumbler switch ----------------------- 48 IN
45
46
Flush tumbler switch in bathroom and toilets 44 IN
46
47
Flush tumbler switches and other control devices
47
48
above counters --------------------------- 44 IN
48
49
Dimmer ------------------------------------- 48 IN
49
50
Receptacle (in offices and corridors)_ ------ 18 IN
50
51
Receptacle above counter ---- 4 IN above backsplash
51
52
or 4 IN above work surface if no backsplash
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
M
16010-9
01
provided unless otherwise indicated.
01
02
Receptacle (in mechanical equipment rooms) - 48 IN
02
03
Receptacle for electric water cooler ---- center vertical03
04
and horizontally behind unit
04
05
Telephone outlets for desk phone ----------- 18 IN
05
06
Telephone outlet for wall mounted phone ---- 48 IN
06
07
Exit light (over door trim, center in space) 90 IN
07
08
Bracket light above lavatory --------------- 78 IN
08
09
Data processing outlets -------------------- 18 IN
09
10
Panelboard (to top) ------------------------ 72 IN
10
11
Motor starter ------------------------------ 54 IN
11
12
Push button motor control station----------- 48 IN
12
13
13
14
3.11
IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
14
15
15
16
A.
Provide engraved laminated nameplates with 1/2 IN
16
17
lettering for switchboards, disconnect switches,
17
18
transformers, panelboards, motor control centers and
18
19
starters, transfer switches, capacitors, etc.
19
20
1. Label text to include the following:
20
21
a. Equipment name and branch, i.e., "Panel XXXX
21
22
- Life Safety Branch".
22
23
b. Source, i.e., "Source - Switchboard XXXX".
23
24
2. Label text shall include load where device serves
24
25
one load, i.e., for disconnect switch, "Load -
25
26
AHU-XXX".
26
27
3. Color of nameplate shall coordinated with
27
28
paragraph below.
28
29
29
30
B.
Device plates: See Section 16140.
30
31
31
32
3.12
ITEMS NOT IN CONTRACT
32
33
33
34
A.
Items not in Contract:
34
35
1. Telephone equipment, wire and connections.
35
36
2. Data processing equipment, wire and connections.
36
37
37
38
END OF SECTION
38
W
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16013-1
01
2D15,
7I19 SECTION 16013
02
03
WIRING EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Provide all conduit, wiring, outlet boxes,
10
receptacles, circuit breakers, fittings, switches,
11
starters, (with overloads) etc., to make final
12
connections to all equipment.
13
14
B.
Connect:
15
1. Elevator equipment, (Division 14).
16
2. Heating, ventilation, cooling and plumbing system
17
equipment, (Division 15).
18
3. Food service equipment, (Division 11).
19
4. Automatic door equipment, (Division 8).
20
5. Projection screens, (Division 11).
21
6. Parking control equipment, (Division 11).
22
7. Electric signs, (Division 10).
23
8. Fixed and/or movable equipment, (Division 11).
24
9. Panel folding doors, (Division 8).
25
26
27
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
28
29
2.01
DIVISION 15 EQUIPMENT
30
31
A.
Provide all conduit, wire, and connect all Division
32
15 equipment.
33
34
B.
Provide all motor starters except in package or
35
prewired units as indicated in Mechanical Equipment
36
Schedule.
37
1. Connect all motors.
38
2. Provide starters with thermal overload protection
39
for all motors not having such protection, except
40
as otherwise indicated.
41
3. Starters: See Section 16480.
42
43
C.
Provide proper thermal overload heater elements in
44
all starters.
45
46
47
PART
3 - EXECUTION
48
49
3.01
INSTALLATION
50
51
A.
Perform work in accordance with applicable Division
52
16 sections.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16013-2
O1 01
02 B. Wire equipment complete properly connected and 02
03 energized. 03
04 04
05 C. Provide conduit and wiring as required for 05
06 directly -connected switches as indicated or required. 06
07 07
08 D. Perform explosion -proof wiring in accordance with 08
09 NEC. 09
10 10
11 END OF SECTION 11
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16110-1
01 5CO3, 7I19 SECTION 16110
02
03 RACEWAYS
04
05 PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07 1.01 DESCRIPTION
08
09 A. Conduit runs are diagrammatic. Verify locations in
10
field.
11
12
1.02
SUBMITTALS
13
14
A.
Shop drawings:
15
1. Cable trays.
16
2. Wall and floor trench ducts.
17
18
B.
Product data:
19
1. Sealers.
20
2. Surface raceway and telepower poles.
21
3. Wall and floor trench duct.
22
4. Cable tray.
23
24
25
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
26
27
2.01
MATERIALS
28
29
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
30
1. Steel conduit:
31
a. Base:
32
(1) Allied Tube & Conduit.
33
(2) LTV Conduit.
34
(3) Republic Steel Corporation.
35
(4) Triangle Wire & Cable.
36
(5) Wheatland Tube.
37
2. PVC coated steel conduit:
38
a. Base:
39
(1) Robroy Industries.
40
(2) Occidental Coating.
41
(3) Schuller International.
42
3. Neoprene coated flexible steel conduit:
43
a. Base:
44
(1) Anaconda.
45
(2) Electri-Flex.
46
(3) Kellems.
47
4. PVC conduit:
48
a. Base:
49
(1) Carlon Electrical Products.
50
(2) Ethyl.
51
(3) Cantex.
52
(4 ) Condux .
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16110-2
01
5.
Surface raceway and tele-power poles:
02
a. Base:
03
(1) Walker.
04
(2) Wiremold.
05
(3) Midland Ross.
06
6.
Cable tray:
07
a. Base:
08
(1) Globe.
09
(2) Cope, TJ/Aickinstrut.
10
(3) Unistrut.
11
(4) Husky Products.
12
(5) P W Industries.
13
(6) Chalfant Cable Trays.
14
(7) Mono -Systems.
15
7.
Wireway:
16
a. Base:
17
(1) Hoffman Engineering.
18
(2) Square D.
19
(3) General Electric.
20
8.
Wall and floor trench duct:
21
a. Base:
22
(1) Square D.
23
(2) Walker.
24
(3) Thomas & Betts.
25
9.
other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
26
Document 00440.
27
28
B. Conduit:
-29
1.
Rigid steel conduit: Hot dipped, sherardized or
30
galvanized after fabrication.
31
2.
Intermediate metal conduit (IMC): Galvanized
32
steel.
33
3.
Thinwall electrical metallic tubing (EMT):
34
Galvanized steel. -
35
4.
Flexible steel conduit for motor and equipment
36
connections: Galvanized with continuous copper
37
content or separate grounding conductor.
38
a. Neoprene -coated type: With approved
39
liquid -tight connectors; Anaconda Seal-Tite
40
type LIA.
41
5.
Rigid PVC conduit: High impact polyvinyl
42
chloride, meeting minimum requirements of NEC.
43
a. Direct burial type: Carlon Electric
44
Products, Type 40.
45
b. Concrete encased burial type: Carlon
46
Electric Products, Type EB.
47
c. Mark each length clearly and durably with
48
nominal trade size, type of material, and UL
49
label.
50
d. Fittings: PVC, solvent weld type, with
51
connectors and threaded adapters as required.
52
6.
Stamp each length with name or trade mark of
West Texas RegionDisposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16110-3
O1
manufacturer and affix UL label.
02
7. PVC coated steel conduit: Galvanized rigid steel
03
conduit with 40 mils minimum coating of PVC.
04
05
C.
Surface raceway: Include all couplings, elbows, and
06
boxes. Size to accommodate required number of
07
conductors.
08
09
D.
Cable tray: Basket or trough -type 12 IN wide x 3 IN
10
high with ventilated bottom, minimum 16 GA galvanized
11
steel, with cross struts at approximately 12 IN OC.
12
1. Allow no sharp edges protruding inward or outward
13
from tray to damage cables or injure workmen.
14
2. Provide with full width top opening, complete
15
with all required cable drop -outs, fitting,
16
supports, and vertical covers for a continuous
17
system.
18
3. All hardware hot -dip galvanized.
19
4. Conform to requirements of NEMA Standard.
20
5. Install and ground in accordance with NEC.
21
22
E.
Wireway: NEMA I lay -in wire -way of size indicated.
23
1. Arrange wireway cover for removal, hinging and
24
locking closed by captive type fasteners.
25
2. Finish: Gray baked -enamel, over phosphatized
26
surfaces.
27
3. With necessary fittings, with or without
28
knockouts, with solid cover where passing through
29
partitions, with manufacturer's name or trademark
30
visible after installation.
31
4. Designed for continuous grounding.
32
33
F.
Wall and floor trench ducts: Waterproof, with
34
gaskets, removable covers and suitable fittings.
35
1. Provide of sizes indicated in floors, walls and
36
ceilings in x-ray and other rooms as indicated.
37
2. Provide wiring barriers as indicated.
38
39
2.02
SUPPORTS, SLEEVES AND SEALS
40
41
A.
Conduit hangers - General: Threaded rods, with
42
straps or clamp conduit holder.
43
1. Do not use the following to support conduit:
44
a. Wire including ceiling support wires.
45
b. Perforated strap hangers.
46
C. Plastic or nylon tie wraps.
47
2. Use trapeze assemblies for multiple conduits.
48
3. Provide sufficient hangers for support of
49
electrical work and equipment to limit load on
50
single hanger to 25 LB, maximum; space not over 8
51
FT OC.
52
4. Hangers in metal roof deck: Do not extend above
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16110-4
O1
tops of ribs, or otherwise interfere with vapor
01
02
barrier, insulation or roofing.
02
03
03
04
B.
Hangers for joint between precast units:
04
05
1. Fehr Bros., T-Hanger.
05
06
2. Heckman Building Prod., No.480.
06
07
3. Dayton Superior, Sure -Grip, F-68.
07
08
4. Space minimum 4 IN from walls and minimum 2 IN
O8
09
apart.
09
10
10
11
C.
Hanger fasteners: Provide inserts or fasteners to
11
12
attach hangers to structure.
12
13
1. Do not use drilled or explosive driven inserts in
13
14
precast -prestressed concrete construction.
14
15
2. Drilled or explosive driven inserts may not
15
16
extend more than 1 IN into post -tensioned
16
17
concrete construction.
17
18
3. Attachment to metal roof deck may be by means of
18
19
prepunched tabs, prepunched holes, or with screws
19
20
in sides of ribs or toggle bolts in bottom of
20
21
ribs.
21
22
4. Do not use concrete nails in masonry walls.
22
23
23
24
D.
Sleeves: Black iron pipe, RGS or IMC sized to
24
25
accommodate work passing through.
25
26
26
27
E.
Sealer for sleeves and openings around conduit: UL
27
28
listed for assembly. See Section 07270.
28
29
29
30
F.
All penetrations of floor slab at mechanical rooms -
30
31
above grade shall be sealed off and waterproofed.
31
32
32
33
2.03
SCHEDULE OF CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
33
34
34
35
A.
Use rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit
35
36
in following locations:
36
37
1. Underground.
37
38
2. Outdoors.
38
39
3. In concrete.
39
40
4. Under concrete slabs on grade.
40
41
5. In exterior masonry walls.
41
42
6. In wet locations.
42
43
7. For exposed runs below 10 FT above floor unless
43
44
otherwise indicated.
44
45
8. For feeders over 600 volts.
45
46
9. In explosion -proof areas.
46
47
47
48
B.
Thinwall EMT may be used for other 600 volt and below
48
49
indoor dry applications.
49
50
50
51
C.
Exposed EMT may be used directly above panelboards
51
52
and other equipment with installed height of 6 FT or
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16110-5
O1
more above floor.
02
03
D.
PVC conduit may be used only as follows:
04
1. For 600 volt and below normal power circuits
05
serving non -patient care areas only, rigid PVC
06
conduit may be used underground and in or under
07
concrete slabs on grade.
08
a. Provide a green grounding conductor of proper
09
ampacity in each PVC conduit.
10
2. Exterior lighting: See Section 16530.
11
3. Underground distribution: See Section 16375.
12
4. 45 degree and greater bends in PVC conduit runs
13
shall be made with rigid steel conduit.
14
15
E.
Use no conduit smaller than 1/2 IN.
16
1. Size conduit in accordance with NEC unless
17
indicated larger.
18
19
F.
Provide green ground conductor of proper ampacity for
20
all conduit runs.
21
22
23
PART 3
- EXECUTION
24
25
3.01
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
26
27
A.
Install all conduits concealed within walls, floors
28
and above finished ceilings.
29
30
B.
Exposed overhead conduit may be used in mechanical,
31
electrical and other equipment rooms except conduit
32
drops to the following:
33
1. Wiring devices.
34
2. Telephone outlets.
35
36
C.
Run exposed conduit in straight lines at right angles
37
to or parallel with walls, beams or columns.
38
39
D.
Keep conduit away from waterlines or heating duct
40
lines. Where crossings are unavoidable, leave
41
minimum 6 IN clearance.
42
43
E.
Do not cross conduit in front of access door in HVAC
44
duct.
45
46
F.
Install no conduit larger than 3/4 IN in floor slabs
47
or concrete columns. Do not install multiple
48
conduits in a single concrete column without
49
Architects approval.
50
1. Where installed in composite floors, conduit runs
51
shall have no crossovers.
,� 52
2. Do not install conduit under pads for fans,
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16110-6
01
pumps, boilers, or other machinery.
01
02
02
03
3.02
UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS
03
04
04
05
A.
Encase underground PVC conduits in 2 IN minimum of
05
06
concrete where passing under roadways.
06
07
07
08
B.
Steel conduits in contact with earth or a vapor
08
09
barrier, that are not completely encased in concrete:
09
10
Coat with 2 coats asphaltum before installation, or
10
11
use PVC coated steel conduit.
11
12
12
13
C.
Install underground conduit 30 IN minimum below
13
14
grade. Do not backfill before observation by
14
15
Engineer. Concrete encasements: Provide 30 IN of
15
16
cover.
16
17
17
18
3.03
CONDUIT INSTALLATION
18
19
19
20
A.
Support all conduit systems from building structure
20
21
or walls with approved hangers.
21
22
1. Do not support from piping, ducts or support
22
23
systems for piping or ducts.
23
24
2. Do not install to prevent ready removal of
24
25
equipment, piping, ducts or ceiling tiles.
25
26
3. Do not support from ceiling or ceiling support
26
27
systems.
27
28
28
29
B.
Sum of angles in any conduit run shall not exceed 360
29
30
degrees.
30
31
1. Where more bends are necessary, install condulet
31
32
or pullbox.
32
33
2. Make all bends in 1/2 IN and 3/4 IN conduit 1 IN
33
34
EMT with a conduit bender.
34
35
3. Use machine bends for larger sizes.
35
36
36
37
C.
Make joints in threaded conduit watertight with white
37
38
nonleaded compound applied to male threads only.
38
39
1. Cut square, ream smooth, and properly thread
39
40
field joints to receive couplings.
40
41
2. Do not use running threads.
41
42
42
43
D.
Fit all conduit ends at switch and outlet boxes with
43
44
approved lock nuts and bushing forming approved tight
44
45
bond with box when screwed tightly in place.
45
46
46
47
E.
Remove moisture and debris from conduit before wire
47
48
is drawn into place. Tightly plug ends of conduit
48
49
with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts until wire
49
50
is pulled.
50
51
51
52
F.
Neatly seal openings around conduits, etc., where
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16110-7
01
they pass through fire rated construction or exterior
02
walls or roof.
03
04
3.04
CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS
05
06
A.
Above lay -in tile ceilings, make connections to
07
lay -in type fixtures with 3/8 or 1/2 IN x 6 FT long
08
flexible steel conduit.
09
1. Include No.12 branch and grounding conductors.
10
2. Arrange conduit and box systems for easy removal
11
of lay -in ceiling.
12
13
B.
Connect switch legs for narrow switches in hollow
14
metal jamb posts using 1/2 IN flexible steel conduit.
15
16
C.
Make motor and equipment connections with flexible
17
steel conduit not exceeding 24 IN length.
18
1. Use neoprene coated type with liquid tight
19
connectors in damp locations.
20
2. Damp locations include: Dietary production,
21
dishwashing, decontamination sterilizers,
22
mechanical equipment pumps on or below grade and
23
exterior applications.
24
25
D.
Install expansion joint fittings on conduit at all
26
building expansion joints where conduit is in slab or
27
rigidly attached to structure.
28
29
E.
Use sealing fittings on rigid galvanized conduit in
30
hazardous areas. Install in accordance with NEC.
31
32
F.
Use sealing fittings on refrigeration and freezer
33
room conduit runs in accordance with NEC.
34
35
G.
Install conduit to roof exhaust fans through fan
36
housing with no conduit exposed.
37
38
H.
Install conduit stub -ups terminating 6 IN above
39
corridor lift out ceiling. Terminate conduit with
40
insulating bushing.
41
42
END OF SECTION
roo"1
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
9GA09 SECTION 16111
02
03
CONDUIT, CONDUIT FITTINGS AND CONDUIT SUPPORTS
04
05
PART 1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01 SUMMARY
08
09
A. Section Includes:
10
1. Conduits, conduit fittings and conduit supports.
11
12
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily
13
limited to:
14
1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract
15
Forms, .and Conditions of the Contract.
16
2. Division 1 - General Requirements.
17
3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements.
18
4. Section 16115 - Underground Conduit.
19
5. Section 16130 - Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes.
20
6. Section 16450 - Grounding.
21
22
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24
A. Referenced Standards:
25
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
26
a. C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc -Coated.
27
2. American Society for Testing and Materials
28
(ASTM):
29
a. A36, Standard Specification for Structural _
30
Steel.
31
b. A153, Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and
32
Steel Hardware.
33
c. A307, Carbon Steel Externally Threaded
34
Standard Fasteners.
35
d. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel
36
Nuts.
37
e. A569, Steel Carbon, Hot -Rolled Sheet and
38
Strip, Commercial Quality.
39
f. A570, Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Structural
40
Quality.
41
g. A575, Merchant Quality Hot -Rolled Carbon
42
Steel Bars.
43
h. A635, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet
44
and Strip, Heavy -Thickness Coils, Carbon,
45
Hot -Rolled.
46
i. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid
47
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
48
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
49
Compounds.
50
j. D2564, Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic
51
Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings.
52
k. F512, Standard Specification for Smooth -Wall
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16111-2
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Conduit and
Fittings for Underground Installation.
3. ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc (ETL).
4. National Electric Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) :
a. RN-1, Polyvinyl -Chloride (PVC) Externally
Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit.
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL):
a. 6, Rigid Metal Conduit.
b. 360, Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
c. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
d. 651, Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
e. 886, Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in
Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Sections 01340 and 16010.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Rigid, Non -Metallic Conduit and Fittings:
1. Shall not be stored exposed to sunlight or other
UV rays.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
the listed manufacturers are acceptable.
2.02 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (RGS)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation.
2. Triangle PWC Inc.
3. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
4. Wheatland Tube Company.
5. LTV Steel Company.
B. Mild steel with continuous welded seam.
C. Metallic zinc applied by hot -dip galvanizing or
electro-galvanizing.'
1. Threads: Galvanized after cutting.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16111-3
01
D.
Internal Coating:
02
1. Baked lacquer, varnish or enamel for a smooth
03
surface.
04
05
E.
Standard:
06
1. ANSI C80.1.
07
08
2.03
PVC -COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (PVC-RGS)
09
10
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
11
1. Occidental Coating Company.
12
2. Perma-Cote.
13
3. Rob -Roy Ind.
14
15
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers of PVC Coating Repair Kits:
16
1. Occidental Coating Company.
17
2. Perma-Cote.
18
3. Rob -Roy Ind.
19
4. Raychem "Ge1Tek" tape.
20
21
C.
Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride Exterior Coating:
22
1. Coating: Bonded to hot -dipped galvanized rigid
23
steel conduit conforming to ANSI C80.1.
24
2. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit
25
surface: Greater than the tensile strength of
26
27
the coating.
28
D.
Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating.
29
30
E.
Urethane coating on threads.
31
32
F.
Conduit:
33
1. Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC
34
and urethane coatings.
35
36
G.
Female Ends: Have a plastic sleeve extending a
37
minimum of 1 pipe diameter or 2 IN, whichever is less
38
beyond the opening.
39
1. Inside diameter of the sleeve:
40
a. The same as the outside diameter of the
41
conduit to be used with it.
42
43
H.
Standards:
44
1. ANSI C80.1.
45
2. NEMA RN-1.
46
47
2.04
RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT
48
49
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
50
1. Poly -vinyl chloride (PVC) conduit:
51
a. Carlon.
52
b. Certainteed Corporation.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16111-4
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
-45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
c. Western Plastics Corporation.
B. Schedules 40 and 80:
1. Polyvinyl -chloride (PVC) plastic compound which
meets, as a minimum, ASTM D1784 cell
classification PVC 12233-A, B, or C.
2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure.
3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission.
4. Standards:
a. ANSI C33.91.
b. NEMA TC-2.
c. UL 651.
2.05 PVC -COATED FLEXIBLE GALVANIZED STEEL (LIQUID -TIGHT)
CONDUIT (FLEX -LT)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Anamet, Inc.
2. Electri-Flex Company.
3. International Metal Hose Company.
B. Core formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot -dip
galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions
securely interlocked.
C. Extruded PVC outer jacket positively locked to the
steel core.
D. Liquid and vaportight.
E. Standard:
1. UL 360.
2.06 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Adalet.
2. Appleton.
3. Carlon.
4. Certainteed.
5. Crouse -Hinds
6. Killark.
7. Occidental Coating Company.
8. OZ Gedney Company.
9. Perma-Cote.
10. RACO.
11. Rob -Roy Ind.
12. Steel City.
13. Thomas and Betts.
14. Western Plastics°Company.
B. Fittings for Use with RGS in Non -Hazardous and
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16111-5
01
Non -Corrosive Locations:
02
1.
Materials: The following are minimum
03
requirements unless otherwise noted.
04
a. Body: Malleable iron, zinc- or
05
cadmium -plated; steel, hot -dipped galvanized;
06
or steel zinc plated with aluminum lacquer or
07
aluminum enamel finish.
O8
b. Covers: Malleable iron, zinc plated.
09
c. Gaskets: Neoprene or PVC, integrally fused
10
to or recessed into the body.
11
d. Insulators -phenolic, thermosetting:
12
(1) Minimum 105 DegC UL rating.
13
e. Grounding saddles tin-plated copper or bronze
14
suitable for use with copper and aluminum
15
conductors.
16
f. Bonding jumpers: Tinned copper flexible
17
braid.
18
g. Locknuts: Malleable iron, zinc plated.
19
2.
All fittings: Threaded unless otherwise noted.
20
3.
All covers: Gasketed.
21
4.
Standards:
22
a. UL 6.
23
b. UL 467.
24
c. UL 514.
25
d. UL 1242.
26
5.
Hubs shall be raintight.
27
6.
Straight couplings: Same material and finish as
28
the conduit with which they are used.
29
7.
Expansion couplings:
30
a. 2 IN nominal straight-line conduit movement
31
in either direction.
32
b. Weathertight.
33
C. Insulating bushing.
34
d. Sleeve -steel, zinc plated.
35
8.
Expansion/deflection couplings:
36
a. 2 IN nominal straight-line conduit movement
37
in either direction.
38
b. 30-degree nominal deflection from the normal
39
in all directions.
40
c. Watertight.
41
d. Insulating bushing.
42
e. End couplings/hubs - bronze; or steel
43
zinc -plated with aluminum cellulose lacquer
44
finish.
45
f. Outer jacket -neoprene.
46
g. Jacket clamps -stainless steel.
47
h. Inner sleeve (when used) - molded plastic.
48
9.
Pulling elbows and tees:
49
a. Raintight.
50
b. Cover - steel, zinc -plated.
51
10.
Mogul pulling elbows:
52
a. Die cast copper free aluminum.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16111- 6
01
01
02
C. Fittings
For Use with RGS in Hazardous Locations:
02
03
1.
Materials: Following minimum requirements unless
03
04
otherwise noted:
-04
05
a. Malleable iron, zinc- or cadmium -plated;
05
06
steel, zinc plated with aluminum lacquer or
06
07
enamel finish; or copper -free aluminum.
07
08
b. Gaskets: Neoprene.
08
09
c. Bonding jumpers: Tinned copper flexible
09
10
braid or beryllium copper grounding spring.
10
11
2.
All fittings: Threaded.
11
12
3.
Standards:
12
13
a. UL 514.
13
14
b. UL 886.
14
15
4.
Listed for use in Class I, Groups C and D
.15
16
locations.
16
17
5.
Expansion fittings:
17
18
a. 1/2 to 1 IN straight-line total conduit
18
19
movement.
19
20
b. Steel, zinc -plated.
20
21
6.
Conduit seals:
21
22
a. Drain and breather: Stainless steel or
22
23
brass.
23
24
b. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for
24
25
use with the sealing fitting.
25
26
26
27
D. Fittings
for Use with PVC-RGS:
27
28
1.
In corrosive locations and direct buried:
28
29
a. The same material and construction as those _
29
30
fittings listed under paragraph "Fittings for
30
31
Use with RGS in Non -Hazardous and
31
32
Non -Corrosive Locations"; and coated as
32
33
defined under paragraph "PVC-RGS."
33
34
2.
In hazardous locations:
34
35
a. The same material and construction as those
35
36
fittings listed under paragraph "Conduit
36
37
Fittings for Use with RGS in Hazardous
37
38
Locations"; and coated as defined under
38
39
paragraph "PVC-RGS."
39
40
40
41
E. Fittings
for Use with Rigid Non -Metallic Conduit:
41
42
1.
Fittings shall be of the same material,
42
43
thickness, and construction as the conduits with
43
44
which they are used.
44
45
a. Standards:
45
46
(1) UL 651.
46
47
(2) NEMA TC-2-1978.
47
48
2.
Solvent cement for welding fittings shall be
48
49
supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit
49
50
and fittings.
50
51
a. Shall not be more than l year past date of
51
52
manufacture.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16111-7
O1
b. Standard: ASTM D2564.
02
03
F. Fittings for Use with FLEX -LT:
04
1.
Fittings shall meet the following minimum
05
requirements unless otherwise noted:
06
a. Body: Malleable iron, zinc -plated.
07
b. Ferrule: Steel, zinc -plated.
08
c. Locknuts and compression nuts: Malleable
09
iron, zinc -plated.
10
d. Sealing ring: Neoprene.
11
2.
Standard: UL 514.
12
13
2.07 CONDUIT SUPPORT SYSTEMS
14
15
A. For
Use with RGS:
16
1.
Acceptable manufacturers:
17
a. Unistrut Building Systems.
18
b. B-Line Systems Inc.
19
C. Kindorf.
20
2.
All components shall be hot -dipped galvanized.
21
a. Standard: ASTM A153.
22
3.
Channels and brackets:
23
a. Formed from hot rolled carbon steel sheet and
24
strip.
25
b. Standard: ASTM A570.
26
4.
Fittings:
27
a. Formed from structural steel or hot -rolled
28
carbon steel sheet and strip.
29
b. Standards:
30
(1) ASTM A36 and A635.
31
5.
Clamps:
32
a. Formed from low carbon hot rolled steel sheet
33
and strip.
34
b. Standard: ASTM A569.
35
6.
Channel nuts:
36
a. Formed from mild steel bar stock, case
37
hardened.
38
b. Standard: ASTM A575.
39
7.
Screws, nuts, bolts and continuous threaded rods.
40
a. Formed from mild steel bar stock.
41
b. Standards:
42
(1) ASTM A307 and A563.
43
44
B. For
Use with PVC-RGS:
45
1.
All components: Comply with the requirements of
46
paragraph "For Use with RGS"; and with the
47
coating requirements of paragraph "PVC-RGS";
48
except screws, nuts and bolts shall be stainless
49
steel.
50
a. Stainless steel channels, brackets, fittings,
51
clamps, channel nuts and continuous threaded
52
rod may be used in lieu of PVC coating these
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16111-8
01
components.
01
02
02
03
2.08
ALL CONDUIT FITTINGS
03
04
04
05
A.
Mark Products:
05
06
1. UL or ETL listed.
06
07
2. Identify the nominal trade size on the product.
07
08
3. Stamp with the name or trademark of the
08
09
manufacturer.
09
10
'10
11
B.
Substitution: Submit requests for substitution in
11
12
accordance with Specification Section 01640.
12
13
13
14
14
15
PART
3 - EXECUTION
15
16
16
17
3.01
INSTALLATION
17
18
18
19
A.
Conduits shall be routed in the field unless
19
20
otherwise indicated.
20
21
21
22
B.
Size of Raceways and Conduits:
22
23
1. Raceway sizes are normally shown on the Drawings.
23
24
If a size is not shown on the Drawings, or if a
24
25
minimum size is not stated in the Specifications,
25
26
then size in accordance with the NEC.
26
27
2. Conduits shall not be smaller than 3/4 IN trade
27
28
size, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
28
29
29
30
C.
Provide all required openings in walls for conduit
30
31
penetration.
31
32
1. New construction:
32
33
a. Sleeves and blockouts: Set in concrete
33
34
during forming.
34
35
(1) Aluminum: Not used.
35
-36
(2) Material: Not harmful to the concrete.
36
37
(3) Not considered to replace structurally the
37
38
displaced concrete.
38
39
39
40
D.
Conduit Runs:
40
41
1. All conduits within a structure shall be
41
42
installed exposed except as follows:
42
43
2. Expose exterior to structure conduits only where
43
44
shown on the Contract Drawings.
44
45
45
46
E.
Conduit:
46
47
1.. Shall not interfere with, or prevent access to,
47
48
piping, valves, ductwork, or other equipment for
48
49
operation, maintenance and repair.
49
50
50
51
F.
Total of Bends in a Conduit Run:
51
52
1. Less than 360 degrees.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16111-9
01
2. Provide pull boxes, condulets, or pulling elbows
f
02
or tees as needed.
03
04
G. Raceway runs, where shown, indicate the preferred
05
location. Site conditions may affect actual routing.
06
Coordinate routing and measurement with other trades
07
and with equipment suppliers to avoid interference
08
with equipment, piping, ductwork, etc.
09
10
H. Type of conduit which shall be installed in specified
11
areas is defined in the following tabulations:
12
13
TABLE 1. CLASSIFIED AREAS
14
15
16
TYPE WET CORROSIVE
17
18
19
Rigid RGS PVC-RGS
20
21
Flexible FLEX -LT FLEX -LT
22
23
24
TABLE 2. EXTERIOR - BURIED - RIGID ONLY
25
26
DIRECT BENDS LONG
27
BURIED DIRECT AT END SWEEP
28
POWER BURIED OF RUNS BENDS
29
AND INSTRU- DIRECT DIRECT
30
CONTROL MENTATION BURIED BURIED
31
32
33
PVC-80 PVC-RGS PVC-RGS PVC-RGS
34
35
I. FLEX -LT:
36
1. Install as the final conduit to motors,
37
electrically operated valves, primary elements
38
(instrumentation), and electrical equipment that
39
is liable to vibrate.
40
2. Shall not be used as a conduit run:
41
a. Maximum length shall not exceed:
42
(1) 36 IN to motors.
43
(2) 24 IN to all other equipment.
44
45
J. Conduit Seals:
46
1. Installed:
47
a. In each conduit in a Class I Division 1 area
48
entering or leaving an enclosure containing
49
switches, circuit breakers, fuses, relays,
50
resistors or other apparatus which may
51
produce arcs, sparks or high temperature.
52
b. In each conduit 2 IN or larger in a Class I
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phased Construction
16111-10
01
Division i area entering or leaving an
01
02
enclosure containing terminals, splices and
02
03
taps.
03
04
c. In each conduit in a Class I Division 2 area
04
05
entering or leaving an enclosure required to
05
06
be approved for use in Class I environments.
06
07
d. In each conduit in a corrosive area entering
07
08
or leaving that area and entering or leaving
08
09
an electrical equipment enclosure in that
09
10
area.
10
11
e. So that the filler plug and drain are
11
12
accessible.
12
13
f. Complete with sealing fiber and compound.
13
14
14
15
K. Conduit Support Systems:
15
16
1.
Compatible with the material and finish of the
16
17
conduit supported.
17
18
a. Hot -dipped galvanized steel for use with RGS.
18
19
b. PVC coated hot -dipped galvanized steel for
19
20
use with PVC-RGS.
20
21
21
22
L. Field Bending of Conduits:
22
23
1.
Utilize tools and equipment designed for the
23
24
purpose and for the material being processed to
24
25
make all field bends.
25
26
2.
Do not reduce the internal diameter of the
26
27
conduit when making conduit bends.
27
28
3.
RGS:
28
29
a. Use an EMT bending shoe to make bends in 1/2
29
30
IN and 3/4 IN conduit.
30
31
b. Use a hydraulic bender to make bends in 1 IN
31
32
and larger conduit.
32
33
4.
PVC-RGS:
33
34
a. 1/2 and 3/4 IN bends may be made using a
34
35
plastic -coated bending hickey or EMT bending
35
36
shoe.
36
37
b. Use a hydraulic bender to make bends in 1 IN
37
38
and larger conduit.
38
39
C. Prepare tools and equipment to prevent or
39
40
minimize damage to the PVC coating.
40
41
5.
Rigid non-metallic conduit:
41
42
a. Use a "hotbox" heater utilizing infrared heat
42
43
and a bending guide or jig to make bends in
43
44
all sizes of conduit.
44
45
45
46
M. Field Cutting and Threading Conduit:
46
47
1.
Utilize tools and equipment designed for the
47
48
purpose and for the material being processed when
48
49
cutting and threading.
49
50
2.
RGS:
50
51
a. Use pipe roller cutter for cutting to length.
51
52
b. Use reamer to debur, smooth, and evenly
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16111-11
01
chamfer the inside.
01
02
c. Use pipe threader to thread the conduit.
02
03
(1) Degrease threads after threading and
03
04
apply a zinc rich paint.
04
05
3.
PVC-RGS: 1
05
06
a. Use pipe roller cutter for cutting to length.
06
07
b. Use reamer to debur, smooth, and evenly
07
08
chamfer the inside.
08
09
c. Use pipe threader to thread the conduit.
09
10
(1) Degrease and apply a zinc rich paint after
10
11
threading the threads.
11
12
4.
Rigid non-metallic conduit:
12
13
a. Use fine tooth handsaw and miter box for
13
14
cutting to length.
14
15
b. Use reamer to debur, smooth, and evenly
15
16
chamfer the inside.
16
17
C. Smooth exterior to remove all burrs.
17
18
5.
FLEX -LT:
18
19
a. Use hacksaw and cutting vise or miter box for
19
20
cutting to length.
20
21,
b. Debur interior and exterior after cutting.
21
22
22
23
N. Conduit Installation:
23
24
1.
Install conduit and fittings, as required
24
25
(including offsets and crossovers), for a
25
26
complete system that has a neat appearance and is
26
27
in compliance with all applicable codes.
27
28
2.
Accessible conduit:
28
29
a. Run in straight lines parallel to or at right
29
30
angles to building lines. -
30
31
(1) Install conduit adjacent to walls and
31
32
floors.
32
33
(2) Maintain minimum 6 IN separation between
33
34
instrumentation and power conduits.
34
35
b. Maintain minimum 6 IN separation from
35
36
process, gas, air and water pipes.
36
37
3.
Conduit support systems:
37
38
a. Support conduit from the building structure.
38
39
(1) Do not support conduit from process, gas,
39
40
air or water piping; or from other conduits.
40
41
b. Provide hangers and brackets to limit the
41
42
maximum uniform load on a single support to
42
43
25 LBS; or to the maximum uniform load
43
44
recommended by the manufacturer if the
44
45
support is rated less than 25 LBS.
45
46
(1) Do not exceed maximum concentrated load
46
47
recommended by the manufacturer on any
47
48
support.
48
49
(2) Conduit hangers: Continuous threaded
49
50
rods combined with struts or conduit
50
51
clamps:
51
52
a) Do not use perforated strap hangers
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16111-12
01
and iron bailing wire.
01
02
(3) Do not use suspended ceiling support
02
03
systems to support raceways.
03
04
(4) Hangers in metal roof decks:
04
05
a) Utilize fender washers.
05
06
b) Not extend above top of ribs.
06
07
c) Not interfere with vapor barrier,
07
08
insulation, or roofing.
08
09
c. Conduit support system fasteners:
09
10
(1) Use sleeve -type expansion anchors as
10
11
fasteners in masonry wall construction.
11
12
Do not use concrete nails and powder -driven
12
13
fasteners.
13
14
d. Maximum spacing between conduit supports:
14
1S
(1) RGS: 10 FT.
15
16
e. Support all conduits within 3 FT of the
16
17
conduit termination.
17
18
f. Support all conduits at 90-degree bends and
18
19
at vertical drops.
19
20
g. Provide substantial vertical support for all
20
21
conduit drops for stability and to minimize
21
22
vibration.
22
23
4.
Underground conduit:
23
24
a. See Section 16115.
24
25
S.
Male threads of conduit systems shall be coated
25
26
with an electrically conductive anti -seize
26
27
compound.
27
28
6.
Threaded connections shall be made wrench -tight.
28
29
7.
Conduit joints shall be watertight.
29
30
a. Where exposed to possible submersion.
30
31
b. In areas classified as wet.
31
32
c. Underground.
32
33
S.
Conduits shall be installed to eliminate moisture
33
_34
pockets. Where water cannot drain to openings,
34
35
provide drain fittings in the low spots of the
35
36
conduit run.
36
37
9.
Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings shall be
37
38
joined utilizing solvent cement.
38
39
a. Immediately after installation of conduit and
39
40
fitting, the fitting or conduit shall be
40
41
rotated 1/4 turn to provide uniform contact.
41
42
10.
Install expansion fittings whenever conduits
42
43
span across a structural expansion joint.
43
44
a. Provide fittings with 2 IN straight-line
44
45
movement in either direction.
45
.46
11.
Expansion/deflection fittings shall be installed
46
47
on the exterior of the structure, whenever a
47
48
conduit enters a structure from outside and
48
49
elsewhere as identified on the Contract Drawings.
49
50
a. Provide fittings with 2 IN straight-line
50
51
movement in either direction.
51
52
b. Except when the conduit is in a ductbank that
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16111-13
01
is tied to the structure with reinforcing
02
steel.
03
12. Provide conduit seals:
04
a. Not more than 18 IN from where they are
05
required.
06
13. Terminate conduits:
07
a. In NEMA 3R, 4, 4X and 7/9 type enclosures:
08
(1) Into a threaded hub.
09
(2) With an insulating bushing, unless the hub
10
provides equivalent protection to the
11
conductors.
12
b. When stubbed up through the floor:
13
(1) With an insulated grounding bushing.
14
15
O. The protective coating integrity of conduits,
16
fittings, and accessories shall be maintained.
17
1. Repair RGS utilizing a zinc rich paint.
18
2. Repair PVC-RGS utilizing a patching compound, of
19
the same material as the coating, provided by the
20
manufacturer of the conduit; or a self-adhesive,
21
highly conformable, cross -linked silicone
22
composition strip, followed by a protective
23
coating of vinyl tape.
24
a. The total nominal thickness: 40 mil.
25
3. Repair surfaces which will be inaccessible after
26
installation prior to installation.
27
28
P. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before wire
29
is pulled into place.
30
1. Pull mandrel with diameter nominally 1/4 IN
31
smaller than the interior of the conduit, to
32
remove obstructions.
33
2. Swab conduit by pulling a clean, tight -fitting
34
rag through the conduit.
35
3. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood
36
plugs or plastic inserts until wire is pulled.
37
38
Q. only nylon or polyethylene rope shall be used to pull
39
wire and cable in conduit systems.
40
41
R. Fill openings in walls and finish flush with surface.
42
43
44
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16115-1
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
94C17
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
SECTION 16115
UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Section Includes:
1. Underground power, control, and instrumentation
conduits.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily
limited to:
1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and
Conditions of the Contract.
2. Division 1 - General Provisions.
3. Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling and
Compacting for Utilities.
4. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements.
5. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable - 600 Volt and
Below.
6. Section 16450 - Grounding.
I
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Association of State Highway &
Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
a. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron
Castings.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), 1996
Edition.
B. Miscellaneous:
1. Drawings indicate the intended routing of direct
buried conduit. Field conditions may affect
actual routing.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Direct -buried conduit means individual (single)
underground conduits without concrete encasement.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Sections 01340 and 16010.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16115-2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
1. See Section 01340.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents,
the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Conduit:
a. See Section 16111.
2. Warning Tape:
a. W. H. Brady Company.
gib. Seton Nameplate Company.
B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with
Specification Section 01640.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Conduit:
1. See Section 16111.
B. Warning Tape:
1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers:
a. W H Brady Company, Catalog'S-10, #91296.
2. Material: Polyethylene.
3. Thickness: 3.5 mils.
4. Tensile strength: 1750 psi.
S. Size: 6 IN wide (minimum).
6. Legend: Preprinted and permanently imbedded:
a. Message continuously printed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION`
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install products in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Comply with Section 02221 for trenching,
backfilling and compacting.
3. Buried conductor warning tape:
a. See Section 10400.
B. Underground Conduits:
1. Direct -buried conduit:
a. Provide electrical duct system consisting of
conduits directly buried in earth.
b. For circuits 600 V and below, install so that
top of conduit, at any point, is not less
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16115-3
01
than the minimum depths established by the
01
02
NEC (Table 300-5 and exceptions).
02
03
(1) RGS conduit: 6 IN.
03
04
(2) Rigid PVC conduit: 18 IN.
04
05
(3) Under areas subject to vehicular traffic:
05
06
a) All applications: 24 IN.
06
07
(4) Unless a greater depth is detailed on the
07
08
Drawings.
08
09
2. Underground conduits shall comply with the
09
10
following:
10
11
a.
Minimum grade shall be 4 IN per 100 FT or as
11
12
detailed on the Drawings.
12
13
(1) Low point shall be at one end of the
13
14
conduit run.
14
15
b.
During construction and after conduit
15
16
installation is complete, plug the ends of
16
17
all conduits.
17
18
C.
Stagger conduit joints at intervals of 6 IN
18
19
vertically.
19
20
d.
Make conduit joints watertight and in
20
21
accordance with manufacturer's
21
22
recommendations.
22
23
(1) Make plastic conduit joints by uniformly
23
24
brushing a plastic solvent cement on
24
25
inside of plastic coupling fitting and
25
26
outside of conduit ends. Slip conduit
26
27
and fitting together with a quick
27
28
one -quarter turn twist to set joint
28
29
tightly.
29
30
e.
Accomplish changes in direction of runs
30
31
exceeding a total of 5 degrees by long sweep
31
32
bends having a minimum radius of 25 FT.
32
33
(1) Sweep bends may be made up of one or more
33
34
curved or straight sections or combinations
34
35
thereof.
35
36
f.
Furnish manufactured bends at end of runs.
36
37
(1) Minimum radius of 18 IN for conduits less
37
38
than 3 IN trade size and 36 IN for conduits
38
39
3 IN trade size and larger.
39
40
g.
Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made
40
41
with the proper tools and shall match factory
41
42
tapers.
42
43
h.
After the conduit run has been completed,
43
44
pull a standard flexible mandrel having a
44
45
length of not less than 12 IN and a diameter
45
46
approximately 1/4 IN less than the inside
46
47
diameter of the conduit through each conduit.
47
48
Then pull a brush with stiff bristles through
48
49
each conduit to remove any foreign material
49
50
left in conduit.
50
51
i.
Pneumatic rodding may be used to draw in lead
51
52
wire.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16115-4
01
(1) Install a heavy nylon cord free of kinks
01
02
and splices in all unused new ducts.
02
03
(2) Extend cord 3 FT beyond ends of conduit.
03
04
j. Transition from PVC to RGS conduit a minimum
04
05
of 5 FT prior to entering a structure or
05
06
going above ground.
06
07
(1) Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
07
08
(2) PVC conduit may extended directly to
08
09
pull, junction and transformer boxes;
09
10
manholes and handholes.
10
11
k. Where conduits enter pull, junction and
it
12
transformer boxes; manholes and handholes:
12
13
(1) Terminate rigid PVC conduits in end bells.
13
14
(2) Terminate steel conduits in insulated
14
15
bushings.
15
16
16
17
C. Warning Tape:
17
18
1. Place warning tape in trench directly over
18
19
direct -buried conduit.
19
20
a. 6 IN below finished grade where conduit or
20
21
ductbank is 12 IN or more below finished
21
22
grade.
22
23
b. 3 IN below finished grade where conduit or
23
24
ductbank is less than 12 IN below finished
24
25
grade.
25
26
2. Provide warning tape as follows:
26
27
a. Electrical trenches or directly buried
27
28
conduit:
28
29
(1) Legend: CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION
29
30
(1st line), BURIED ELECTRIC LINE (2nd
30
31
line) .
31
32
(2) Letters: 1-1/4 IN minimum.
32
33
(3) Interval: Continuous.
33
34
(4) Color: Red and black letters.
34
35
35
36
END OF SECTION
36
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16120-1
4D29, 7I19 SECTION 16120
WIRE AND CABLE - 600 VOLT AND BELOW
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related sections:
1. General requirements: Division 11..
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
3. Fire alarm system conductors: Section 16720.
4. Fixture pigtails: Section 16110.
5. Isolated power conductors: Section 16471.
1.02 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
A. Shop drawings: Not required for Architect review.
B. Product data: Not required for Architect review.
C. Samples: Not required for Architect review.
D. Project information: Not required for Architect
review.
E. Contract closeout information: Not required for
Architect review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Splices and taps for smaller than No.6 AWG wire:
a. Base:
(1) 3M.
(2) Ideal Electric.
(3) Heyco Molded Products.
(4) Elastimold.
(5) Buchanan.
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
Document 00440.
B. Wire and cable for 600 volts and below: Single
conductor, soft drawn, copper wire with 600 volt
insulation, UL listed.
1. For feeders and branch circuits: Type THWN/THHN
or XHHW.
2. For exterior feeder and branch circuits: Type
XHHW.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16120-2
O1
3. For branch circuits served by GFCI circuit
01
02
breakers: Type.XHHW.
02
03
4. Use no wire smaller than No.12 AWG, except as
03
04
follows:
04
05
a. Smaller size wire may be used only where
05
06
specifically indicated.
06
07
b. No.14 AWG may be used for pilot control and
07
08
signal circuits.
08
09
5. Size conductors to match over current protective
09
10
device unless larger conductors are indicated.
10
11
11
12
C.
Splices and taps for smaller than No.6 AWG wire:
12
13
1. 3M, "Scotchlok" or "Hyflex".
13
14
2. Ideal "Wingnut" or "Wirenut".
14
15
3. Heyco.
15
16
4. Elastimold insulated conical spring -type
16
17
connectors.
17
18
18
19
D.
Splices and taps for No.6 AWG wire and larger: Use
19
20
compression connectors with prestretched insulation
20
21
to equal insulation of wire being spliced.
21
22
22
23
E.
Splices and taps - General: Do not make splices and
23
24
taps with crimp or indenter -type connectors.
24
25
25
26
F.
Pulling lubricant: Do not use cable pulling
26
27
lubrication compound containing petroleum or other
27
28
products which may deteriorate insulation.
28
29
29
30
G.
Color coding: Color code all conductors in
30
31
accordance with NEC as follows:
31
32
1. Color code all wiring.
32
33
2. Use following colors in lighting and power
33
34
wiring:
34
35
35
36
120/208 VOLT 277/480 VOLT
36
37
37
38
Phase 1 Black Brown
38
39
Phase 2 Red Orange
39
40
Phase 3 Blue Yellow
40
41
Neutrals White White
41
42
Ground Green Green
42
43
43
44
3. Color coding of ends only will be acceptable for
44
45
feeder phase conductors.
45
46
4. Color coding of ends only will be acceptable for
46
47
neutral and grounding conductors number 4 and
47
48
larger.
48
49
49
50
50
51
PART 3
- EXECUTION
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16120-3
^ 01
3.01
INSTALLATION
O1
( 02
02
03
A.
Install all line voltage wiring in conduit.
03
04
1. Lighting and receptacle home runs indicated are
04
05
for identification purposes only.
05
06
06
07
B.
Install no more than 6 conductors in one conduit.
07
08
This excludes ground wire. The neutral conductor
08
09
shall be considered as a current carrying conductor.
09
10
10
11
C.
Two or three branch circuits may be carried on one
11
12
neutral leg as permitted by NEC. See Section 16470
12
13
for circuits served by ground fault circuit
13
14
interrupter circuit breakers.
14
15
15
16
D.
Run panelboard and motor feeders in individual
16
17
conduits.
17
is
is
19
E.
Provide secondary feeders from K-rated transformers
19
20
with neutral conductors sized at 200 percent of the
20
21
phase conductor size.
21
22
22
23
END OF SECTION
23
d
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16130-1
01
6Al2,
7I19 SECTION 16130
01
02
02
03
BOXES AND FITTINGS
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION:
07
08
08
09
A.
Related sections:
09
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
10
11
2. General -electrical requirements: Section 16010.
11
12
12
13
1.02
SUBMITTALS
13
14
14
15
A.
Shop drawings: Not required for Architect review.
15
16
16
17
B.
Product data: Not required for Architect review.
17
18
18
19
C.
Samples: Not required for Architect review.
19
20
20
21
D.
Project information: No required for Architect
21
22
review.
22
23
23
24
E.
Contract closeout information: Not required for
24
25
Architect review.
25
26
26
27
27
28
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
28
29
29
30
2.01
MATERIALS
30
31
31
32
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
32
33
1. Galvanized boxes:
33
34
a. Base:
34
35
(1) Appleton Electric.
35
36
(2) Steel City.
3'6
37
(3) Raco.
37
38
2. Corrosion resistant boxes and fittings:
38
39
a. Base:
39
40
(1) Crouse -Hinds.
40
41
(2) Appleton Electric.
41
42
3. Conduit fittings:
42
43
a. Base:
43
44
(1) T & B.
44
45
(2) Appleton Electric.
45
46
(3) Steel City.
46
47
(4) Raco.
47
48
(5) O-Z/CO.
48
49
(6) ETP/Berger.
49
50
4. Box supporting brackets:
50
`
51
a. Base:
51
52
(1) Caddy.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16130-2
01
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
01
02
Document 00440.
02
03
03
04
B.
Galvanized boxes and fittings shall be galvanized
04
05
after fabrication.
05
06
06
07
C.
Lighting outlet boxes: Hot -dip galvanized,4 IN
07
08
octagon.
08
09
1. Use extension and plaster rings as required.
09
10
2. Verify proper depth with partition thickness.
10
11
3. Provide with proper fittings to support and
11
12
attach lighting fixtures.
12
13
4. Support outlet boxes for incandescent fixtures
13
-.14
and other ceiling -mounting devices in lay -in
14
15
acoustical tile ceilings by bar hangers anchored
15
16
to ceiling construction members which do not
16
17
interfere with tile removal.
17
18
18
19
D.
Switch and receptacle boxes for concealed wiring:
19
20
Hot -dip galvanized.
20
21
.1. Narrow switch boxes (for hollow metal jambs):
21
22
Ragland Manufacturing 426.
22
23
23
24
E.
Exposed switch and receptacle boxes: Corrosion
24
25
resistant, cast, ferrous metal, with threaded hubs;
25
26
Crouse -Hinds Type FS.
26
27
27
28
F.
Concealed gang -switch and junction boxes not
28
29
dimensioned: 4 IN square, hot -dip galvanized.
29
30
30
31
G.
Boxes for 277 volt switches on opposite phases:
31
32
Gang -switch type, with barriers between switches.
32
33
33
34
H.
Weatherproof receptacle boxes: Corrosion resistant
34
35
cast ferrous metal type, with threaded hubs and
35
36
neoprene gasket; Crouse -Hinds Type FS.
36
37
37
38
I.
Pull and junction boxes: Code -sized galvanized steel
38
39
boxes provided with plain blank removable covers held
39
40
in place with screws unless otherwise indicated.
40
41
1. Where sizes are not indicated, use 4 IN square or
41
42
NEC size.
42
43
43
44
J.
Fittings and boxes with PVC coated steel conduit:
44
45
Specified boxes and fittings with 40 mils minimum
45
46
coating of PVC.
46
47
47
48
K.
Pull and junction boxes in PVC conduit: 4 IN square
48
49
plastic boxes.
49
50
50
51
L.
Conduit bodies: Corrosion resistant conduit
51
52
fittings, cast ferrous metal type, with sharp clean
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16130-3
01
threads.
02
03
M.
EMT fittings: Compression -ring type, with cast
04
malleable iron or pressure -cast bodies with tempered
05
steel nuts. (Do not use indenter or set screw type
06
EMT fittings).
07
08
N.
Expansion joint fitting: Watertight deflection type,
09
O-Z , type "DX".
10
11
0.
Bushings: Threaded, galvanized, malleable iron.
12
13
P.
Bushings for conductors No.4 and larger: Separate
14
insulated bushings.
15
1. Use at all points where such conductors enter
16
boxes, raceways, cabinets, auxiliary gutter etc.,
17
and all other points required by NEC.
18
2. Do not use insulated throat connectors.
19
20
Q.
Grounding bushings: With screw termination for green
21
grounding wire.
22
1. Provide for feeders to panelboards serving
23
critical care areas, per NEC.
24
25
R.
Box supporting brackets: Caddy SGB Series.
26
27
28
PART 3
- EXECUTION
29
30
3.01
INSTALLATION
31
32
A.
Mounting of outlet boxes for concealed wiring.
33
1. Boxes mounted adjacent to studs shall be attached
34
directly to stud with a minimum of 4 metal
35
screws.
36
2. Boxes that are not attached directly to studs
37
shall be attached to bracket spanning studs.
38
Bracket shall be attached to studs with 2 screws
39
at each end. Attach box to bracket with 2 screws
40
minimum.
41
42
B.
When a'metallic junction box for electrical
43
receptacles or switches is contained within a 1 or
44
2-hour rated fire or smoke wall of gypsum drywall
45
construction and an opening is provided for the box
46
in the surface of that wall, the area of the opening
47
may not exceed 16 square inches, unless the junction
48
box is enclosed by a 115-sided box" (see details).
49
1. The aggregate area of all such junction boxes in
50
a rated wall not enclosed by 115-sided boxes"
51
described above shall not exceed 100 square
'
52
inches in 100 square feet of wall area as
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16130-4
01
measured from floor to structural deck or rated
01
02
membrane.
02
03
2. Junction boxes with openings on opposite faces of
03
04
rated walls shall have a horizontal separation of
04
05
24 inches as a minimum, regardless of box size,
05
06
unless enclosed by 115-sided boxes".
06
07
3. Locations of studs do not have any bearing on the
07
08
above requirements, nor does the use of mineral
08
09
wool fire safing alter these requirements.
09
10
10
11
C.
Thread fittings for rigid conduit and IMC.
11
12
12
13
D.
Install rigid conduits squarely into boxes. Rigidly
13
14
clamp to box with locknut on outside and inside and
14
15
provide bushing on inside.
15
16
16
17
E.
Fill unused punched -out openings in boxes with proper
17
18
closures.
18
19
19
20
F.
Use outlet boxes sized to accommodate quantity of
20
21
conductors enclosed.
21
22
22
23
G.
Provide pull boxes or junction boxes in conduit runs
23
24
where indicated or as required to facilitate pulling
24
25
of wires or making of connections. Make covers of
25
26
all boxes accessible.
26
27
27
28
H.
Spray paint inside of boxes and exposed conduits for
28
29
3 IN beyond the outlets with non-flammable paint per_
29
30
Section 16010.
30
31
31
32
I.
Stagger outlet boxes at patient room head walls
32
33
minimum of 4 IN to minimize sound transmission
33
34
between patient rooms.
34
35
35
36
END OF SECTION
36
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16140-1
01
6J31,
7I19 SECTION 16140
01
02
02
03
WIRING DEVICES.
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Related sections:
09
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
10
11
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
it
12
12
13
1.02
SUBMITTALS
13
14
14
15
A.
Shop drawings: Not required for Architect review.
15
16
16
17
B.
Product data: Not required for Architect review.
17
18
18
19
C.
Samples: Not required for Architect review.
19
20
20
21
D.
Project information:
21
22
1. Manufacturer of listed products.
22
23
23
24
E.
Contract closeout information:
24
25
1. Test report for patient care area receptacles.
25
26
26
27
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
27
28
28
29
A.
Provide wiring devices conforming to the following
29
30
standards:
30
31
1. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL).
31
32
a. Switches (UL 20).
32
33
b. Receptacles, plugs and connectors (UL 498).
33
34
c. Device plates (UL 514 and 514A).
34
35
d. Ground fault circuit interrupters (UL 943).
35
36
2. National Electric Manufacturers Association
36
37
(NEMA) .
37
38
a. General purpose wiring devices (NEMA WD-1).
38
39
b. Wiring devices dimensional requirements (NEMA
39
40
WD-6) .
40
41
3. US Federal Specifications.
41
42
a. Fed Spec switches (WS-896E).
42
43
b. Fed Spec receptacles (WC-596F).
43
44
c. Fed Spec device plates (W-P-455).
44
45
45
46
46
47
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
47
48
48
49
2.01
MATERIALS - GENERAL
49
50
50
51
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:.
51
52
1. Wiring devices:
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16140-2
a. Base:
(1) Hubbell.
(2) Bryant.
(3) Leviton.
(4) Pass & Seymour.
b. All wiring devices shall
same manufacturer.
2. Explosion proof switches:
a. Base:
(1) Crouse -Hinds.
(2) Appleton Electric.
3. Dimmers:
a. Base:
(1) Leviton.
(2) Lutron.
(3) Lithonia.
(4) Prescolite.
(5) Lightolier.
4. Plug-in strip:
a. Base:
(1) Wiremold.
5. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
Document 00440.
2.02 SWITCHES
be provided by the
A. Lighting switches:
1. Specification grade, quiet -operating toggle -type
with back and side wiring, 120-277 volts, AC
only, 20 amp rated unless otherwise indicated.
a. Switches shall be listed per UL 20 and
certified by UL to Federal Specification
WS-896E, and shall be visibly marked "Fed
Spec WS-89611.
b. All switches shall be equipped with a green
grounding terminal.
2. Use white devices.
B. Toggle -type switch:
1. Single -pole: Hubbell 1221.
2. Double -pole: Hubbell 1222.
3. Three-way: Hubbell 1223.
4. Four-way: Hubbell 1224.
5. Single -pole key switch: Hubbell 1221-L.
6. Red pilot light switch with illuminated toggle in
the ON position: Hubbell 1221-PL.
7. Momentary contact double -throw, three position,
center -off switch: Hubbell 1557.
8. Narrow switch for hollow metal jamb post, 15 amp
rated: Arrow Hart QST-91 with mounting strap
1657.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16140-3
01
C. Explosion -proof surface mounted switch:
02
1.
Single -pole: Crouse -Hinds EFS-1129.
03
2.
See Section 16010 for hazardous areas.
04
05
D. Wall -box lighting dimmers:
06
1.
All devices shall be UL listed specifically for
07
the required loads (i.e., incandescent,
08
fluorescent, low voltage, electronic low
09
voltage). Universal dimmers are not acceptable.
10
2.
Electronic solid state type, rated for load, 120
11
and 277 volts AC.
12
3.
All dimmers shall incorporate an air gap which
13
shall be accessible without removing the
14
faceplate. The air gap switch shall be capable
15
of meeting all applicable requirements of UL 20
16
for air gap switches in dimmers.
17
4.
All dimmers shall provide power failure memory.
18
Should power be interrupted and subsequently
19
returned, the light intensity will return to the
20
same levels set prior to the power interruption.
21
5.
Dimmers shall be tested to withstand voltage
22
surges of up to 600 V and current surges of up to
23
200 A without damage per ANSI/IEEE Standard
24
C62.41-1980.
25
6.
Dimmers shall meet the UL 20 limited short
26
circuit test requirement for snap switches.
27
7.
Dimmer control shall be linear slide. Dimmer
28
shall provide a smooth and continuous Square Law
29
dimming curve.
30
8.
Dimmer shall include voltage compensation
31
circuitry that adjusts the firing angle of the
32
dimmer in such a manner as to compensate light
33
output for variations in AC line voltage.
34
9.
Dimmer control slider shall not be capable of
35
being removed without first removing the
36
faceplate.
37.
10.
Faceplate shall snap on to the device with no
38
visible means of attachment. Metal heat
39
sink/mounting plate shall not be visible on
40
front, top, bottom, or sides of device. At
41
locations with multiple devices, one seamless,
42
multi -gang faceplate shall be provided.
43
Contractor is responsible for coordination of
44
proper faceplate size and type.
45
11.
Dimmers and faceplates shall be white.
46
12.
Wall -box dimmers shall be Lutron Nova T* Style.
47
48
2.03 DUPLEX AND SINGLE RECEPTACLES
49
50
A. Receptacle outlets:
51
1.
Specification grade.
52
a. Specification grade receptacles shall be
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16140-4
O1
listed per UL 498 for general use and
02
certified by UL to Fed Spec WC-596F, and
03
shall be visibly marked with the "UL-FS" mark
04
to confirm certification.
05
2. Flush, grounding convenience outlets for side
06
wiring, or side and back wiring.
07
3. Use white devices.
08
4. Refer to symbol legend.
09
10
11
B.
20A, 125V (HOSP), 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, duplex:
12
NEMA 5-20R; Hubbell 8300.
13
14
C.
20A, 125V (HOSP), 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, single:
15
NEMA 5-20R; Hubbell 8310.
16
17
D.
20A, 125V (HOSP only), 2 pole, 3 wire grounding,
18
single, non -explosion proof: Black, isolated power
19
type; Hubbell 23000 HG.
20
21
E.
20A, 125V (HOSP), 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, single,
22
explosion proof: Cast iron box, isolated power type;
23
Class I, Division 1, Group C for hazardous
24
anesthetizing locations; Hubbell 24301.
25
26
27
F.
20A, 125V, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, duplex: NEMA
28
5-20R; Hubbell 5362.
29
30
G.
20A, 125V, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, single; NEMA
31
5-20R; Hubbell 5361.
32
33
H.
Weatherproof receptacles: Type as indicated on
34
drawings.
35
1. Mount on "FS" cast metal box.
36
2. Suitable for wet location when receptacle is not
37
in use.
38
a. Gasketed and self -closing lift cover.
39
(1) Single outlets: Hubbell 7423 WO.
40
(2) Duplex outlets: Hubbell 5206 WO.
41
(3) Duplex GFI receptacles: Hubbell WPFS26.
42
43
I.
15A, 125V, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, duplex, safety
44
type: NEMA 5-15R; Hubbell SG-62. Use hospital grade
45
as indicated.
46
47
J.
GFI type duplex receptacles: With built-in ground
48
fault interruption, 5-mA sensitivity, indicator and
49
reset. UL listed.
50
1. 15A, 125V, 3 wire duplex: NEMA 5-15R; Hubbell
51
GF-5262.
52
2. 20A, 125V, 3 wire duplex: NEMA 5-20R; Hubbell
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 construction
r^�
16140-5
O1
GF-5362.
02
03
K.
Pedestal -type floor -mounted duplex receptacles: 20A,
04
125V, 3 wire, grounding, back and side wired, NEMA
05
5-20R.
06
1. Horizontal design housing with threaded conduit
07
fittings in base, with satin chromium finish.
08
2. Adjustable 4 IN round flush steel floor box:
09
Hubbell B-2529.
10
3. Round brass fitting cover, combination: Hubbell
11
5-2525.
12
4. Pedestal service fitting: Hubbell SC-3091.
13
14
L.
Flush in -floor receptacles: 20A, 125V, 3 wire,
15
grounding, back and side wired, NEMA 5-20R.
16
1. Dual level 4 IN round fully adjustable cast iron
17
box.
18
a. Floors over 3 IN deep: Hubbell B-2536.
19
b. Floors 3 IN deep or less: Hubbell B-2537.
20
2. Round brass carpet flange: Hubbell 5-3182.
21
3. Round brass fitting cover, duplex screw: Hubbell
22
5-3725.
23
24
M.
Table -top duplex receptacles: Similar to
25
floor -mounted pedestal type.
26
27
N.
Receptacle with integral surge protection: Device
28
type as indicated with integral surge protection
29
rated at 140 joules, minimum, in any mode. _
30
1. Power on indicator light.
31
2. Beeper to sound when protection is no longer
32
functioning.
33
3. Comply with UL-1449 and ANSI/IEEE-62.41.
34
4. Blue device with blue device plate.
35
5. Specification grade, Hubbell 5252-5 and 5352-5.
36
37
O.
Isolated ground receptacles: Device type as
38
indicated with receptacle ground isolated from
39
conduit grounding system.
40
1. Orange.device with orange device plate.
41
2. Specification grade, Hubbell IG-5262 and IG-5362.
42
43
2.04
SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLES
44
45
A.
NEMA 6-20R receptacle: 20A, 250V, 2 pole, 3 wire
46
grounding, side and back wired, single; white;
47
Hubbell 5461-I.
48
49
B.
NEMA 14-20R receptacle: 20A, 125/250V, 3 pole, 4
50
wire, 1 phase grounding, single; NEMA 14-20R; black;
51
Hubbell 8410.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16140-6
O1
C.
NEMA 15-20R receptacle:
20A, 250V, 3 pole, 4 wire, 3
01
02
phase grounding, single;
black; Hubbell 8420.
02
03
03
04
D.
NEMA 5-30R receptacle: 30A,
125V, 2 pole, 3 wire
04
05
grounding, single; black;
Hubbell 9308.
05
06
06
07
E.
NEMA 6-30R receptacle: 30A,
250V, 2 pole, 3 wire
07
08
grounding, single; black;
Hubbell 9330.
08
09
09
10
F..
NEMA 10730R receptacle:
30A, 125/250V, 3 pole, 3
10
11
wire, 1 phase, single; brown;
Hubbell 9350.
11
12
12
13
G.
NEMA 14-30R receptacle:
30A, 125/250V, 3 pole, 4
13
14
wire, 1 phase grounding,
single; black; Hubbell 9430.
14
15
15
16
H.
NEMA 15-30R receptacle:
30A, 250V, 3 pole, 4 wire, 3
16
17
phase, grounding, single;
black; Hubbell 8430.
17
18
-
18
19
I.
NEMA 6-50R receptacle: 50A,
250V, 2 pole, 3 wire, 1
19
20
phase, grounding, single;
black; Hubbell 9367.
20
21
21
22
J.
NEMA 10-50R receptacle:
50A, 125/250V, 3 pole, 3
22
23
wire, 1 phase; black; Hubbell
7962.
23
24
24
25
K.
NEMA 14-50R receptacle:
50A, 125/250V, 3 pole, 4
25
26
wire, 1 phase, grounding,
single; black; Hubbell
26
27
9450.
27
28
28
29
L.
NEMA L6-20R receptacle:
20A, 250V, 2 pole, 3 wire, 1
29
30
phase, grounding, single,
twist -lock; black; Hubbell
30
31
2320.
31
32
32
33
M.
NEMA L5-30R receptacle
30A, 125V, 2 pole, 3 wire, 1
33
34
phase, grounding, single,
twist -lock; black; Hubbell
34
35
2610.
35
36
36
37
N.
NEMA L6-30R receptacle:
30A, 250V, 2 pole, 3 wire, 1
37
38
phase grounding, single,
twist -lock; black; Hubbell
38
39
2620.
39
40
40
41
0.
NEMA L15-30R receptacle:
30A, 250V, 3 pole, 4 wire,
41
42
3 phase, grounding, single,
twist -lock; black;
42
43
Hubbell 2720.
43
44
44
45
2.05
DEVICE PLATES
45
46
46
47
A.
Device plates for concealed
wiring: Same
47
48
manufacturer as devices,
to suit device covered,
48
49
single or ganged in one piece
with beveled edges that
49
50
match faces of plates.
50
51
1. Flush impact resistant nylon hospital wall plate:
51
52
color to match device
covered.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16140-7
01
2. Narrow plates for hollow metal jamb posts:
02
Arrow -Hart No.T-1650 or Bryant, stainless steel.
03
04
B.
Labeling:
05
1. General:
06
a. Where labeling of device plates is required
07
provide engraved laminated nameplate or
08
engraved device plate.
09
10
C.
Device plates for surface type cast -metal boxes:
11
Corrosion resistant cast ferrous metal designed for
12
application.
13
14
2.06
PLUG-IN STRIP
15
16
A.
Plug-in strip: Surface steel raceway plug-in strip
17
with pre -wired receptacles.
18
1. Provide single 15 amp, 125V, 3 wire, grounding
19
type, specification grade receptacles.
20
2. Suitable fittings and snap -in cover.
21
3. Buff satin baked enamel.
22
4. Space receptacles 6 IN OC.
23
S. Nominal dimensions 1-1/4 IN wide x 3/4 IN deep.
24
6. Comply with NEC Articles 352A and 353.
25
7. UL listed under ANSI/UL-5.
26
8. Conductors: TW or THHN, 2 No.12 and 1 No.12 TW
27
green for connection to receptacle grounding
28
terminals. Effectively connect green grounding
29
conductor and raceway to building equipment
30
grounding system.
31
9. Wiremold Type 2000 Plugmold.
32
33
34
PART
3 - EXECUTION
35
36
3.01
POSITION OF DEVICES
37
38
A.
Locate devices as indicated and as scheduled in
39
Section 16010.
40
41
B.
Center outlets with regard to paneling, furring,
42
trim, etc.
43
44
C.
Where several outlets occur in a room, symmetrically
45
arrange them.
46
47
D.
Any outlet which is improperly located must be
48
corrected at Contractor's expense.
49
50
E.
Set outlets plumb or horizontal and extending to
51
finished surface of wall, ceiling or floor as case
52
may be without projecting beyond same.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16140-8
O1 01
02 F. Install receptacles, switches, etc., indicated on 02
03 wood trim, cases or other fixtures symmetrically. 03
04 Where necessary, set with long dimension of plate 04
05 horizontal, or gang in tandem. 05
06 06
07 END OF SECTION 07
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16440-1
01
6Al2,
7I19 SECTION 16440
01
02
02
03
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Related sections:
09
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
10
11
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
11
12
3. Overcurrent protective devices: Section 16475.
12
13
13
14
1.02
SUBMITTALS
14
15
15
16
A.
Product data:
16
17
1. Technical data on each type of disconnect switch.
17
18
2. Specification comparison.
18
19
19
20
B.
Contract closeout information:
20
21
1. Operating and maintenance data.
21
22
2. Maintenance materials: Spare fuses, 10 percent
22
23
or minimum of 3 of each type and rating of
23
24
installed fuses.
24
25
25
26
26
27
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
27
28
28
29
2.01
GENERAL
29
30
30
31
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
31
32
1. Safety switches:
32
33
a. Base:
33
34
(1) Cutler Hammer.
34
35
(2) Square D.
35
36
(3) Siemens Energy & Automation.
36
37
(4) General Electric.
37
38
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
38
39
Document 00440.
39
40
3. All fuses in fusible -type devices: Same
40
41
manufacturer.
41
42
42
43
2.02
SAFETY SWITCHES
43
44
44
45
A.
Safety switches: Fusible and non -fusible type, NEMA
45
46
Type HD Heavy Duty construction, unless otherwise
46
47
indicated.
47
48
1. Enclosure: NEMA 1 unless otherwise indicated.
48
49
Provide weatherproof disconnect switches as required
49
50
by Section 16010.
50
51
2. Switch blades fully visible in OFF position with
51
52
door open.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16440-2
O1 3. Contact operation quick -make and quick -break.
02 4. Switches for motor circuits to be horsepower
03 rated.
04 5. Provide padlocking provisions in OFF position.
05 6. Finish: Baked enamel over rust -inhibiting
06 primer.
07 7. Fuses for fusible switches: See Section 16475.
O8
09
10 PART 3 - EXECUTION
11
12 3.01. INSTALLATION
13
14 A. Install as indicated and in accordance with
15 manufacturers instructions and recommendations.
16
17 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16450-1
01
6Al2,
7I19 SECTION 16450
^
F
02
03
GROUNDING
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Related sections:
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
11
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
12
13
1.02
SUBMITTALS
14
15
A.
Product data:
16
1. Technical data on connectors.
17
18
19
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
20
21
2.01
MATERIALS
22
23
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
24
1. Exothermic weld kits:
25
a. Base:
26
(1) Cadweld.
27
2. Compression fittings:
28
a. Base:
29
(1) Burndy. .
30
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
31
Document 00440.
32
33
B.
Wire and cable: See Section 16120.
34
1. Main ground: Copper conductor, sized as required
35
by appropriate service grounding conductor table
36
of NEC.
37
2. Grounding copper conductor for non-metallic
38
conduit and ducts: Copper bar or insulated
39
conductor, sized in accordance with NEC or as
40
indicated.
41
3. Branch circuit ground in patient care areas:
42
Separate green insulated copper conductor
43
installed with circuit conductors except in
44
isolated power circuits.
45
46
C.
Conduit: See Section 16110.
47
48
D.
Grounding clamp connections: Clean contact surfaces,
49
tinned and sweated during bolting.
50
51
E.
Grounding type insulated bushings: See Section
52
16130.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16450-2
01
01
02
02
03
PART
3 - EXECUTION
03
04
04
05
3.01
GENERAL
05
06
06
07
A.
Ground all neutral conductors, conduit systems,
07
08
cabinets, equipment, motor frames, etc., in
08
09
accordance with NEC and applicable codes.
09
10
10
11
B.
Locate neutral ground disconnecting link or links in
11
12
main switchboard so that low -voltage neutral bar with
12
13
all interior secondary neutrals can be isolated from
13
14
common equipment grounding bus.
14
15
15
16
3.02
MAIN GROUND
16
17
17
18
A.
Install main grounding conductor in steel conduit and
18
19
connect to grounding electrode system using an
19
20
exothermic weld or UL listed compression fitting.
20
21
1. Unless otherwise indicated, install main ground
21
22
unspliced in exposed conduit.
22
23
2. Make connections easily accessible for
23
24
inspection, not underground or concealed in
24
25
floors or walls.
25
26
3. Provide grounding electrode system in accordance
26
27
with NEC.
27
28
4. Resistance to earth of the grounding electrode
28
29
system shall not exceed 25 ohms.
29
30
30
31
B.
Bond grounding conductor to conduit at entrance and
31
32
exit, of same type and quality as other conductors in
32
33
building.
33
34
34
35
C.
Install grounding jumper of same size around water
35
36
meter using ground clamps.'
36
37
37
38
3.03
DISTRIBUTION
38
39
39
40
A.
Make all metallic raceway fittings and grounding
40
41
clamps tight to insure that equipment grounding
41
42
system will operate continuously at ground potential
42
43
to provide low impedance current path to insure
43
44
proper operation of overcurrent devices during
44
45
possible ground fault currents.
45
46
46
47
B.
Do not solder grounding circuit connections.
47
48
48
49
C.
Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical
49
50
connection to metallic housing (switchboards, motor
50
51
control centers, etc.), provide each conduit with
51
52
grounding type insulated bushing.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16450-3
O1
1. Connect each bushing to grounding bus in
01
02
equipment with bare copper conductor.
02
03
03
04
D. In nonmetallic conduits or ducts maintain continuity
04
05
-of equipment grounding system by bar or conductor
05
06
installed and connected by approved method to
06
07
conductive noncurrent -carrying equipment at both
07
08
ends.
08
09
09
10
E. Ground all conduit, panelboards, receptacles,
10
11
accessible fixtures, switchgear, transformers, motors
11
12
and motor equipment.
12
13
13
14
F. Make ground continuity positive throughout entire
14
15
project.
15
16
16
17
END OF SECTION
17
W
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16460-1
01
6Al2,
7I19 SECTION 16460
02
03
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Related sections:
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
11
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
12
13
1.02
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
14
15
A.
Product data:
16
1. Technical data on each type of transformer.
17
2. Specification comparison.
18
19
B.
Contract closeout information:
20
1. Operating and maintenance data.
21
22
23
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
24
25
2.01
MATERIALS
26
27
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
28
1. Dry -type transformers:
29
a. Base: -
30
(1) Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse.
31
(2) General Electric.
32
(3) Cutler -Hammer.
33
(4) Siemens Energy & Automation.
34
( 5 ) Square D .
35
(6) Hevi-Duty/Nelson.
36
(7) Osram/Sylvania.
37
(8) Wide-Lite.
38
(9) ACME.
39
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
40
Document 00440.
41
42
B.
Non-K-rated dry -type transformers: Air cooled,
43
3-coil, two winding type.
44
1. Voltage rating: 480-208/120V wye, 60 cycle or as
45
indicated.
46
2. Three phase, 30-KVA and above: Four 2-1/2
47
percent FCBN taps and 2 above, suitable for
48
indoor service, arranged for floor or wall
49
mountings indicated.
50
a. Insulation: Class H with average temperature
51
rise not exceeding 115 °C (80 °C for
52
transformers above 112-1/2 KVA) based on 40
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16460-2
01
°C ambient at full load.
02
b. Westinghouse Type DT-3.
03
3. KVA rating as indicated.
04
4. Rated sound level equal to or below NEMA
05
maximums.
06
5. Three phase, below 30-KVA: Class B, F or H
07
insulation and two 5 percent FCBN taps; Cutler
08
Hammer/Westinghouse Type EPT.
09
6. Single phase: 480-240/120 volts, two winding;
10
Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse Type EP.
11
12
C.
Vibration isolation: Provide for all transformers:
13
1. Mount on rubber -in -shear vibration dampeners or
14
integral vibration dampeners.
15
16
D.
External wiring connections: Use flexible steel
17
conduit. See Section 16110.
18
19
20
PART 3
- EXECUTION
21
22
3.01
INSTALLATION
23
24
A.
Install as indicated and in accordance with
25
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
26
27
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16470-1
01
6Al2,
7I19 SECTION 16470
01
02
02
03
PANELBOARDS
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Related sections:
09
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
10
11
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
11
12
3. Overcurrent protective devices: Section 16475.
12
13
13
14
1.02
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
14
15
15
16
A.
Shop drawings:
16
17
1. Identify panelboards by alphanumeric designation
17
18
with branch circuit breaker sizes and types
18
19
indicated in panelboard schedules or
19
20
one -line -diagram.
20
21
21
22
B.
Product data:
22
23
1. Technical data on each type of panelboard.
23
24
2. Specification comparison.
24
25
25
^
26
C.
Contract closeout information:
26
f
27
1. Operating and maintenance data.
27
28
28
29
29
30
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
30
31
31
32
2.01
LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS
32
33
33
34
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
34
35
1. Panelboards:
35
36
a. Base: Same manufacturer for all panels on
36
37
project.
37
38
(1) Westinghouse.
38
39
(2) Square D.
39
40
(3) Siemens Energy & Automation.
40
41
(4) General Electric.
41
42
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
42
43
Document 00440.
43
44
3. Westinghouse types listed for quality and
44
45
performance reference.
45
46
46
47
B.
All panelboards: Dead front type.
47
48
1. Provide with non -insulated equipment grounding
48
49
terminal strip located in top or bottom gutter
49
50
including main grounding lug and individual
50
51
terminals for at least 50 percent of panel
51
52
circuits including spare circuits; increase
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16470-2
01 gutter space accordingly for grounding strip.
02 2. Provide lighting panelboards with branch circuit
03 connection to main bus arranged for sequence
04 phasing.
05 3. Provide feed-thru lugs or sub -feed lugs for 2 and
06 3 section panels.
07 4. Equip bus bars for panelboard with main lugs,
08 main fused switch or main circuit breaker,.
09 capacity as required or indicated.
10 5. Provide special features such as split bus,
it lighting contactors, extra -width gutters as
12 required.
13 6. Provide panelboard buses fully rated for
14 specified interrupting rating. Series rating of
15 panelboards and overcurrent':protective devices is
16 not acceptable.
17
18 C. Circuit breaker panelboards:
19 1. Bolted -on circuit breaker type. Plug-in circuit
20 breakers not acceptable.
21 2. In larger power and distribution panelboards,
22 provide main buses and back panels which permit
23 changing of circuit breakers without additional
24 machining, drilling or tapping.
25 3. All multi -pole breakers of single handle and
26 common trip.
27 4. Provide shunt trip mechanism on breakers where
28 indicated.
29 5. Provide ground fault protection as indicated
30 coordinated with upstream devices.
31 6. Design so a combination of one, two and three
32 pole circuit breaker can readily be assembled in
33 the same panelboard.
34 7. Provide single common trim for multi -section
35 panels.
36
37 D. Fused switch panelboards:
38 1. Provide three spare fuses for each size specified
39 in each panel.
40 2. Contact operation quick -make and quick -break.
41
42 E. Lighting and small power panelboards (600A maximum
43 buses 120/208 V, 3 phase, 4 wire): Type PRL1.
44
45 F. Equipment panelboards (600A maximum buses 277/480 V,
46 3 phase, 4 wire): Type PRL2.
47
48 G. Circuit breakers: Thermal -magnetic type unit
49 construction, employing quick -make and quick -break
50 toggle mechanisms for manual operation as well as
51 automatic operation.
52 1. 1, 2 and 3 pole circuit breaker ratings:
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1`Construction
16470-3
01
a. In 120/208 V panelboards: Minimum 10,000 AIC
02
symmetrical, or greater as indicated.
03
b. In 277/480 V panelboards: Minimum 14,000 AIC
04
symmetrical, or greater as indicated.
05
2.
Handles with three positions: "OFF", "ON", and
06
"TRIPPED".
07
3.
When circuit breaker opens on overload or short
08
circuit, operating handle shall automatically
09
assume "TRIPPED" position and clearly indicate
10
abnormal condition of circuit.
11
4.
Units operable in any position and removable from
12
front of panelboard without disturbing adjacent
13
units.
14
5.
Tandem or half-size circuit breakers not allowed.
15
16
H. Ground fault circuit interrupter circuit breakers:
17
1.
Operate on differential transformer principle;
18
rated 20A, 120V or 240V, Class A fault -trip
19
sensitivity of 5 milliamperes, UL approved, with
20
built-in testing switch and ON -OFF switch.
21
2.
Provide in panelboards in lieu of standard
22
circuit breakers to serve circuits in wet areas.
23
3.
Provide separate neutral for each interrupter
24
circuit where neutral is required.
25
26
I. Cabinets: Trim, door and box, of galvanized sheet
27
steel,
code thickness.
28
1.
5-3/4 IN deep with gutter space meeting NEC
29
Article 384 requirements for wire termination
30
space in panelboards.
31
2.
Distribution panelboards and fusible panelboards:
32
Cabinet depth not to exceed 12 IN, with gutter
33
space meeting NEC Article 384 requirements for
34
wire termination space in panelboards.
35
3.
Fasten trim to cabinet by means of approved
36
adjustable clamps.
37
4.
Equip door with chrome -plated combination lock
38
and catch; supply two milled keys with each lock;
39
key locks alike.
40
5.
Provide directory frame on inside of door.
41
6.
Finish: Primed, one coat gray lacquer.
42
7.
Identify all circuit locations in each respective
43
panel with load and location served.
44
a. Directory shall be typed.
45
b. Mechanical equipment identified in directory
46
shall be identified by Owner -furnished
47
designation and not designation indicated on
48
plans.
49
C. Room names and numbers in directory shall be
50
final building room names and numbers as
51
identified by Owner and not name or number
52
indicated on plans.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16470-4
O1
02
03
PART
3 - EXECUTION
04
05
3.01
INSTALLATION
06
07
A.
Install as indicated and in accordance with
08
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
09
10
B.
Support panelboard cabinets from wall studs or
11
unistrut cross members bolted to studs.
12
13
3.02
LABELING
14
15
A.
Provide panelboard labeling as specified in Section
16
16010.
17
18
B.
Permanently post, at each panelboard, the conductor
19
color coding scheme specified in Section 16120 as
20
required by NEC Article 210.
21
22
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase I Construction
16475-1
'
01
6Al2,
7I22 SECTION 16475
01
02
02
03
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Related sections:
09
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
10
11
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
11
12
3. Panelboards: Section 16470.
12
13
13
14
1.02
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
14
15
15
16
A.
Product data:
16
17
1. Technical data on each type of device.
17
18
2. Specification comparison.
18
19
3. Time -current curves for all devices on project.
19
20
4. Submit with associated switchboard, panelboard or
20
21
other assembly.
21
22
22
23
B.
Project information:
23
24
1. Coordination analysis.
24
25
25
26
26
27
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
27
28
28
29
2.01
GENERAL
29
30
30
31
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
31
32
1. Overcurrent protective devices.
32
33
a. Base:
33
34
(1) Westinghouse.
34
35
(2) Square D.
35
36
(3) Siemens Energy & Automation.
36
37
(4) General Electric.
37
38
2. Fuses:
38
39
a. Base:
39
40
(1) Bussmann.
40
41
(2) Shawmut.
41
42
(3) Brush.
42
43
(4) Littelfuse.
43
44
44
45
B.
Equipment and devices by same manufacturer.
45
46
46
47
C.
Westinghouse and Bussmann types listed for quality
47
48
and performance reference.
48
49
49
50
2.02
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
50
00_�"
51
51
52
A.
Molded case type: Unit construction, quick make,
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16475-2
01
quick break, manual and automatic operation, 3
01
02
position "on" "off" and "tripped". "Tripped"
02
03
condition clearly indicated. All poles open and
03
04
close simultaneously.
04
05
1. Thermal magnetic type providing inverse time
05
06
overload and instantaneous short circuit
06
07
protection by means of a thermal magnetic
07
08
element. Interchangeable trip as indicated.
08
09
a. 120/240V, 15A through 10OA:
09
10
(1) 10,000 AIC - Type BAB.
10
it
(2) 22,000 AIC —Type QBHW.
11
12
(3) 65,000 AIC - Type GB.
12
13
b. 240V, 125A through 225A:
13
14
(1) 10,000 AIC - Type CA.
14
15
(2) 22,000 AIC - Type CAH.
15
16
C. 240V, 125A through 40OA: 65,000 AIC - Type
16
17
KDB.
17
18
d. 277/480V, 15A through 10OA: 14,000 AIC -
18
19
Type GHB.
19
20
e. 277/480V, 15A through 150A:
20
21
(1) 25,000 AIC - Type FD.
21
22
(2) 65,000 AIC - Type HFD.
22
23
f. 480V, 100A through 40OA:
23
24
(1) 35,000 AIC - Type KDB.
24
25
(2) 65,000 AIC - Type HKD.
25
26
2. Solid State trip type providing inverse time
26
27
overload, adjustable instantaneous short circuit,
27
28
and short time delay protection by means of a
28
29
solid state trip element with associated current
29
30
monitors and flux transfer shunt trip. Provide
30
31
interchangeable rating plug and push -to -trip
31
32
button. Built-in adjustable ground fault
32
33
protection as indicated.
33
34
a. 240V, 75A through 400:
34
35
(1) 42,000 AIC - Type LC.
35
36
(2) 65,000 AIC - Type HLC.
36
37
b. 240V, 400A through 80OA:
37
38
(1) 42,000 AIC - Type MC.
38
39
(2) 65,000 AIC - Type HMC.
39
40
c. 240V, 800A through 120OA:
40
41
(1) 42,000 AIC - Type NC.
41
42
(2) 65,000 AIC - Type HNC.
42
43
d. 240V, 1000A through 3000A: 125,000 AIC -
43
44
Type PC.
44
45
e. 480V, 75A through 40OA: 35,000 AIC - Type
45
46
HLC.
46
47
f. 480V, 400A through 80OA: 50,000 AIC - Type
47
48
HMC.
48
49
g. 480V, 800A through 120OA: 50,000 AIC - Type
49
50
HNC.
50
51
h. 480V, 1000A through 3000A: 100,000 AIC -
51
52
Type PC.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16475-3
01
02
2.03
FUSES
03
04
A.
UL Class L fuses: Dual -element time -delay and
05
current -limiting type fuses; UL Class L listed for
06
200,000 rms AIC symmetrical; Bussmann "Low -Peak"
07
600V, 601-6000A, Type KRP-C.
08
1. Use for main and main feeder devices over 600A,
09
where fuses are indicated.
10
11
B.
UL Class RK-1 dual -element fuses: Dual -element
12
time -delay and current -limiting rejection type fuses;
13
UL Class RK-1 listed for 200,000 rms AIC symmetrical;
14
Bussmann "Low -Peak" 0-600A, 250V Type LPN-RK and 600V
15
Type LPS-RK.
16
1. Use for main feeder devices 600A and smaller
17
where fuses are indicated.
18
19
C.
UL Class RK-1 single -element fuses: Fast -acting
20
current -limiting rejection type fuses; UL Class RK-1
21
listed for 200,000 rms AIC symmetrical; Bussmann
22
"Limitron" 1/10-600A, 250V Type KTN-RK and 600V Type
23
KTS-RK.
24
1. Use as indicated.
25
26
D.
UL Class RK-5 fuses: Dual -element time -delay and
27
current -limiting rejection type fuses; UL Class RK-5
28
listed for 200,000 rms AIC; Bussmann "Fusetron"
29
1/10-600A, 250V Type FRN-RK and 600V FRS-RK.
30
1. Use for motor feeder and branch circuit devices
31
where fuses are indicated.
32
33
2.04
PROTECTIVE DEVICE TIME -CURRENT COORDINATION ANALYSIS
34
35
A.
Provide a protective device time -current coordination
36
analysis of the specified electrical power
37
distribution system.
38
39
B.
Analysis shall include:
40
1. A determination of settings, ratings, or types
41
for the overcurrent protective devices supplied.
42
Where necessary, an appropriate compromise shall
43
be made with system protection and service
44
continuity considered to be of equal importance.
45
The time -current coordination analysis shall be
46
performed with the aid of a digital computer.
47
2. Computer generated log -log plots containing the
48
time -current characteristics of series connected
49
overcurrent devices. A sufficient number of
50
log -log plots shall be provided to indicate the
51
degree of system protection and coordination.
52
The log -log plots shall include transformer ANSI
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
16475-4
withstand points and inrush currents of
transformers and motors where appropriate.
3. Computer printouts to accompany the log -log plots
containing descriptions for each of the devices
indicated on the plot, settings of the adjustable
devices, device numbers to simplify location of
the devices on the system one -line diagram and
short-circuit currents.
4. A tabular computer printout of the suggested
settings of the adjustable overcurrent protective
devices, the equipment where each device is
located, the device number corresponding to the
device on the system one -line diagram, and the
number of the time -current log -log plots where
they are illustrated.
5. A computer generated system one -line diagram
clearly identifying individual equipment buses,
the bus numbers, the device numbers and the
maximum available short-circuit current at each
bus which shall include short-circuit current
motor contributions.
6. A discussion section evaluating the degree of
system protection and system continuity with
overcurrent devices, with recommendations as
required for increased protection or
coordination.
7. Any inadequacies shall be call to the attention
of the Architect and recommendations shall be
made for improvements.
8. Six (6) bound copies of the completed protective
device time -current coordination analysis for the
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in switchboards, panelboards and motor
control centers as indicated in those sections.
B. Install individually enclosed as specified in other
sections or indicated. Use NEMA 1 enclosure unless
indicated otherwise.
END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
16510-1
s
01
6J31,
7I22 SECTION 16510
01
02
02
03
INTERIOR LIGHTING
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Related sections:
09
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
10
11
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
it
12
12
13
1.02
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
13
14
14
15
A.
Product data:
15
16
1. Lighting:
16
17
a. Names of manufacturers, cuts, catalog numbers
17
18
and photometric performance curves with
18
19
candlepower distribution and C.U. tables of
19
20
all lighting fixtures to be used on project.
20
21
b. Identify fixtures by Fixture Schedule number,
21
22
including special notations for finishes,
22
23
colors, and mountings.
23
24
C. Product data on ballasts for 4 FT fluorescent
24
25
lamps.
25
26
d. Product data for 4 FT fluorescent lamps.
26
27
2. Specification comparison.
27
28
28
29
B.
Samples:
29
30
1. Fluorescent lens sample.
30
31
31
32
32
33
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
33
34
34
35
2.01
LIGHTING FIXTURES - GENERAL
35
36
36
37
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
37
38
1. Lighting fixtures:
38
39
a. Base:
39
40
(1) As indicated on Fixture Schedule.
40
41
b. Optional:
41
42
(1) As indicated on Fixture Schedule.
42
43
2. Lamps:
43
44
a. Base:
44
45
(1) Osram.
45
46
(2) General Electric.
46
47
(3) Philips.
47
48
(4) Venture.
48
49
(5) Sylvania.
49
50
3. Lenses:
50
51
a. Base:
51
52
(1) K-Lite/ICI Acrylics, Inc.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16510-2
(2) As indicated.
4. Ballasts:
a. Base:
(1) Valmont.
(2) Magnetek.
(3) Advance.
(4) Motorola.
(5) Energy Savings.
5. Exit sign:
a. Base
(1) Dual-Lite.
(2) Prescolite.
(3) Emergi-Lite.
(4) Chloride.
6. Emergency battery units:
a. Base:
(1) Dual-lite.
(2) Emergi-Lite.
(3) Chloride.
7. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
Document 00440.
B. All lighting fixtures and electrical components: UL
labeled, complete with lamps.
C.- Provide all recessed fixtures with gaskets of rubber,
fiberglass, or equivalent material to prevent light
leaks around flush trim.
1. Provide recessed fixtures with trim gaskets
cemented in proper position.
D. Provide standard plaster frame for all recessed
lighting fixtures installed in plaster walls or
ceilings.
1. Design, finish and fabricate material to preclude
possibility of rust stain in plaster.
E. Coordinate fixture types with ceiling construction.
F. Provide pendant incandescent, compact fluorescent,
and/or HID fixtures with swivel hangers which will
allow fixture to swing in any direction but will not
permit stem to rotate.
1. Provide hangers with enclosure rating (NEMA 1, 4,
or 7) equal to enclosure requirements of area in
which they are installed.
2. Swivel hangers for fixtures in mechanical
equipment areas: Shock absorbing type.
G. Pendant mounted, open, industrial fluorescent
fixtures, not in continuous rows, shall be supported
by conduit or by approved chains with cord and plug
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16510-3
01
connection to ceiling mounted twistlock receptacle as
02
indicated on plans. Rigidly support continuous row
03
pendant mounted fluorescent fixtures with conduit and
04
fasten fixtures to each other or mount on continuous
05
metal channel similar to Unistrut. Provide reflector
06
alignment clips on all industrial fluorescent
07
fixtures mounted in continuous rows.
O8
09
2.02
LAMPS
10
11
A.
Incandescent lamps: As indicated in fixture
12
schedule.
13
1. Use only lamps that meet current Federal energy
14
standards (EPACT 1992).
15
16
B.
Fluorescent lamps: As indicated in fixture schedule.
17
1. Use lamps that meet current Federal energy
18
standards.
19
2. Energy saving SP35 (3500 Kelvin) tri-phosphor T-8
20
for 2, 3, and 4 FT lamps.
21
3. Energy saving SP35 (3500 Kelvin) tri-phosphor for
22
compact fluorescent (PL, PL-T 4 PIN, DTT and
23
BIAX) lamps up to 22-1/2 IN long.
24
4. As indicated in Fixture Schedule.
25
26
C.
High intensity discharge (HID) lamps:
27
1. Use lamps that meet current Federal energy
28
standards.
29
2. High pressure sodium (HPS).
30
31
2.03
BALLASTS
32
33
A.
Fluorescent electronic ballasts: UL listed Class
34
"P", series type, energy efficient, FCC certified,
35
better than sound level "A".
36
1. Total harmonic distortion (THD) of less than 15
37
percent at full light output.
38
2. Operate fluorescent lamps at a frequency of 20
39
kHz or higher with no visible lamp flicker.
40
3. Nominal power factor of 0.95 or higher.
41
4. Operate at nominal input voltage of 120 or 277
42
volts plus/minus 10 percent. Light output shall
43
remain constant for input voltage fluctuation of
44
plus/minus 5 percent.
45
5. Ballast shall withstand line transients as
46
defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A.
47
6. Lamp Current Crest Factor shall be less than 1.5.
48
7. Ballast case operating temperature: Not greater
49
than 150 degF in fixtures operating in ambient
50
temperature not exceeding 75 degF.
51
8. Ballasts for 4 FT, T8 lamps: Provide complete
52
lamp and ballast package for 2, 3 and 4 lamp
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16510-4
O1 fixtures meeting the following performance
02 criteria:
03 a. Two lamps plus ballast: 63 watts nominal
04 input, 5700 initial lumens.
05 b. Three lamps plus ballast: 95 watts nominal
06 input, 8550 initial lumens.
07 C. Four lamps plus ballast: 112 watts nominal
08 input, 11,400 initial lumens.
09 9. Ballasts for 40 watt compact fluorescent (BIAX)
10 lamps: Provide complete lamp and ballast package
11 for 2, 3 and 4 lamp fixtures meeting the
12 following performance criteria:
13 a. One lamp plus ballast: -37 watts nominal
14 input, 3150 initial lumens.
15 b. Two lamps plus ballast: 71 watts nominal
16 input, 6300 initial lumens.
17 c. Three lamps plus ballast: Use a two -lamp
18 ballast and a one -lamp ballast. At
19 Contractor's option, use three lamp ballasts
20 as manufactured by Magnetek.
21 d. Four lamps plus ballast: Use (2) two -lamp
22 ballasts.
23 10. Ballasts equal to Valmont Ultra -Miser, Advance
24 Mark V, Magnetek Ballaster or Motorola ",M"
25 Series.
26
27 B. Fluorescent high frequency electronic ballasts:
28 1. "High Frequency" electronic ballast shall operate
29 lamps at a frequency of 20 KHz or higher without
30 visible flicker.
31
32 C. HID ballasts: Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA)
33 or high reactance autotransformer (HX-HPF) type,
34 energy efficient ballasts.
35 1. High power factor, ETL approved.
36 2. Starting current shall be no greater,than
37 operating current.
38 3. Ballasts for interior use:
39 a. Encased and potted type.
40 b. Audible noise rating of B or better.
41 C. Built-in automatic resetting thermal
42 protection switch.
43 4. Ballasts for exterior use shall be capable of
44 operating at temperatures as low as -20 degF.
45
46 2.04 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
47
48 A. Fluorescent fixtures: Troffer type.
49 1. Major structural parts: Minimum 22 GA
50 electro-plated zinc -coated steel, bonderized for
51 paint adhesion and rust prevention.
52 a. Body of fixture and door frame shall be
West Texas.Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16510-5
01
painted after fabrication.
02
2.
Finish: Baked -on white enamel paint, 1.4 to 1.7
03
mil thick, with minimum reflection factor of 89
04
percent.
05
3.
Sizes: As indicated on schedule.
06
4.
Minimum efficiency: 65 percent.
07
5.
Lenses: Low brightness, clear prismatic lens
08
made of 100 percent virgin acrylic.
09
a. Conical shaped, female square -based prisms
10
for 2 x 4 FT fixtures and smaller.
11
(1) Nominal thickness: 0.125 IN.
12
(2) Maximum penetration: 0.080 IN.
13
(3) Average weight: 7.8 OZ per SQ FT.
14
b. KSH-12.
15
6.
Design door frames and lens assemblies to allow
16
complete removal for cleaning, and to hold lens
17
securely in position without light leaks.
18
7.
Door latches: Finish for corrosion -resistance
19
and fabricate of inconspicuous design, for
20
operation without tools.
21
a. Do not use slotted screws or thumb screws to
22
latch door.
23
b. Provide enclosed spring -loaded cam latches to
24
provide positive latching of door.
25
8.
Furnish hold-down clips for attachment to ceiling
�.
26
framing system as required.
27
28
2.05 HID
FIXTURES
29
30
A. HID
lighting fixtures: Provide with heavy-duty
31
porcelain sockets.
32
1.
Fixtures: As indicated in fixture schedule.
33
2.
Fixtures with quartz restrike feature: Fixture
34
shall be wired for single connection. Ballast
35
shall provide power to quartz lamp as well as HID
36
lamp.
37
38
2.06 EXIT
LIGHTS
39
40
A. LED
exit lights: 6 IN high letters on metal stencil
41
background.
42
1.
Letter color: Red.
43
2.
Provide directional arrows as indicated on plans.
44
3.
Provide downlight component.
45
4.
Provide long life nickel cadmium batteries.
46
5.
Provide DC flasher unit.
47
6.
Universal mount, single face: Dual-Lite
48
CXRNB-LEDE.
49
7.
Universal mount, double face: Dual-Lite
50
CXRNB-LEDE.
51
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16510-6
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
2.07 EMERGENCY BATTERY UNITS
A. Industrial type emergency battery units: Completely
self-contained, 90 minute operation, adjustable
lighting heads, fully automatic solid state charger
long life lead acid batteries, test switch and charge
rate indicator.
1. Dual-lite: ALC-X-30I-2 or equal.
2. Remote heads and mounting plate as indicated.
3. Provide mounting shelf.
2.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide 5 spare lamps of each type and size used on
project.
B. Provide four spare ballasts and transformers of each
size, type and voltage level used on project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten lighting fixtures supported by suspended
ceiling systems to ceiling framing system with hold
down clips.
B. Locate fixtures in accordance with reflected ceiling_
plans.
C. Locate in exact center of tile when indicated.
Relocate misplaced fixtures and replace damaged
ceiling materials.
D. Mount lighting fixtures at heights indicated in
Section 16010 and as detailed.
E. Provide access panels for recessed light fixtures
that require access for maintenance when such access
is not provided for in design of fixture. See
Section 16010.
F. Recessed fluorescent fixtures are specified without
trim type. Coordinate trim type with reflected
ceiling plans and/or room finished schedules prior to
submittals.
G. Where indicated provide 2-level control of 3 and/or 4
lamp fluorescent fixtures. Provide 2 ballasts per
fixture and control inside lamp(s) in each fixture by
one switch or set of switches and the outside 2 lamps
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16510-7
01
by a second switch or group of switches.
01
02
02
03
H.
Orientate the fluorescent lamps of all 2 FT x 2 FT
03
04
troffers and non -directional compact fluorescent
04
05
downlights within a single room in the same
05
06
direction.
06
07
07
08
3.02
ADJUST AND CLEAN
08
09
09
10
A.
Wipe all lighting fixture reflectors, lenses, lamps
10
11
and trims, clean, after installation. All fixtures
11
12
shall be installed with caution so as to avoid any
12
13
fingerprints or smudges on surfaces of parabolic
13
14
louvers and downlight reflectors. Any fixtures with
14
15
fingerprints or smudges shall be cleaned.
15
16
16
17
B.
Replace all lamps operated during construction period
17
18
with new lamps prior to final acceptance.
18
19
19
20
C.
Adjust all incandescent fixture sockets to match the
20
21
lamp specified.
21
22
22
23
D.
Aim all adjustable fixtures as directed by Architect.
23
24
24
25
END OF SECTION
25
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16510A-1
01
SECTION 16510A
01
02
02
03
LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
03
04
04
05
GENERAL: Lighting fixtures as hereinafter specified are
05
06
identified by type as noted on drawings. Fixture
06
07
specifications are based on construction and performance.
07
08
Manufacturer's catalogue numbers are of general nature
08
09
and indicate level of quality required, but do not
09
10
necessarily reflect complete options as specified.
10
11
Approval shall be based on description and specification
11
12
of fixture as well as catalogue number indicated. See
12
13
specifications for fixture, lens, lamp and ballast
13
14
requirements. Verify ballast voltage requirements with
14
15
circuitry indicated on drawings.
15
16
17
TYPE: A
17
18
Fluorescent troffer, recessed mounted, 2 x 4 FT, static, 3
18
19
lamps, 22 GA steel housing, baked enamel finish, painted after
19
20
fabrication, minimum 85% reflectance, black regressed aluminum
20
21
door, hinged and latched from either side, cam latches.
21
22
Prismatic acrylic lens. Electronic ballast.
22
23
23
24
Williams: #5223-RBKA-125-277V
24
25
Lithonia: #2SP-X-332-RM-A12125-GEB-227-PAF
25
26
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
26
27
TYPE: AE
27
28
Same as fixture Type "A" except with emergency battery pack.
28
29
29
30
Williams: #5223-RBKA125-277V-EM
30
31
Lithonia: #2SP-X-332-RM-A-12125-GEB-277EM-PAF
31
32
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
32
33
TYPE: B
33
34
Fluorescent troffer, recessed mounted, 2 x 4 FT, static, 3
34
35
lamps, 22 GA steel housing, baked enamel finish, painted after
35
36
fabrication, minimum 85k reflectance, black regressed aluminum
36
37
door, hinged and latched from either side, cam latches.
37
38
Prismatic acrylic lens. Electronic ballast. Gypboard
38
39
installation.
39
40
40
41
Williams: #5222-RBKA-125-277V
41
42
Lithonia: #2SP-X-232-RM-A12125-GEB-227-PAF
42
43
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
43
44
TYPE: BE
44
45
Same as fixture Type 'B' except with emergency battery pack.
45
46
46
47
Williams: #5222-RBKA125-277V-EM
47
48
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
48
49
TYPE: C
49
50
Chain hung 8 FT - 0 IN AFF industrial wide angle fluorescent
50
51
light fixture, 4 lamp, 22 GA steel reflector. Electronic
51
52
ballast.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16510A-2
O1
01
02
Williams: #82-8-432OC-E432OC-277
02
03
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
03
04
TYPE: CE
04
05
Same as fixture Type 'C' except with emergency battery pack.
05
06
06
07
Williams: #82-8-432OC-E432OC-EM-277
07
0$
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
08
09
TYPE: D
09
10
Surface mounted two lamp fluorescent strip.
10
11
11
12
Williams: #76-4-232OC-E232OC277
12
13
14
TYPE: E NOT USED
14
15
16
TYPE: F
16
17
Wall mounted fixture with shade. 13 watt quad lamp,
17
18
electromagnetic NPF ballast.
18
19
19
20
D'AC Lighting: #D1012-16
20
21
22
TYPE: G
22
23
Wall mounted perforated indirect fluorescent fixture, 1 lamp,
23
24
electronic ballast.
24
25
25
26
Zumtober: #ZX-W1/32
26
27
28
TYPE: GE
28
29
Same as fixture Type 'G' except with emergency battery pack.
29
30
30
31
Zumtober: #ZX-W1/32-EM
31
32
33
TYPE: H
33
34
Aircraft cable hung 8 FT - 0 IN AFF direct/indirect fluorescent
34
35
fixture.
35
36
36
37
Zumtober: #ZX-RC-AP/ZX-TRC-8'
37
38
39
TYPE: HE
39
40
Same as type 'H' except with emergency battery pack.
40
41
41
42
Zumtober: #ZX-RC-AP/ZX-TRC-8'-EM
42
43
44
TYPE: J
44.
45
Surface mounted damp location rated round bronze 28 watt
45
46
fluorescent fixture.
46
47
47
48
Hubbell: #BRF-01
48
49
50
TYPE: K
50
51
Industrial highbay H.I.D. fixture 400 watt metal halide lamp.
51
52
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16510A-3
01 Hubbell: #BL-400HX-SD O1
02
03 TYPE: X 03
04 LED exit sign with emergency battery back. 04
05 05
06 Dualite: #CWRNB-LEDE 06
07
08 END OF SECTION 08
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16530-1
01
6Al2,
7I22 SECTION 16530
01
02
02
03
EXTERIOR SITE LIGHTING
03
04
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
05
06
06
07.
1.01
DESCRIPTION
07
08
08
09
A.
Related sections:
09
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
10
11
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
11
12
12
-13
1.02
SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
13
14
14
15
A.
Shop drawings:
15
16
1. For special assemblies.
16
17
17
18
B.
Product data:
18
19
1. Lighting:
19
20
a. Names of manufacturers, cuts, catalog numbers
20
21
and photometric performance data and
21
22
isofootcandle plots where applicable of all
22
23
lighting fixtures to be used on project.
23
24
b. Identify fixtures by Fixture Schedule number,
24
25
including special notations for finishes,
25
^
26
colors, and mountings.
26
P
27
2. Specification comparison.
27
28
28
29
29
30
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
30
31
31
32
2.01
MATERIALS
32
33
33
34
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
34
35
1. Luminaires:
35
36
a. Base: As indicated on schedules.
36
37
2. Contactors:
37
38
a. Base:
38
39
(1) Square D.
39
40
(2) Westinghouse.
40
41
(3) General Electric.
41
42
(4) Allen-Bradley.
42
43
3. Selector switches:
43
44
a. Base:
44
45
(1) Allen-Bradley.
45
46
(2) Westinghouse.
46
47
(3) Square D.
47
48
(4) General Electric.
48
49
(5) Siemens Allis-ITE.
49
50
4. Photo cells and time switch:
50
51
a. Base:
51
52
(1) Tork.
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16530-2
O1
(2) Intermatic.
01
02
(3) Sangamo.
02
03
(4) Paragon Electric.
03
04
5. Rigid PVC conduit:
04
05
a. Base: As specified in Section 16110.
05
06
6. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
06
07
Document 00440.
07
08
08
.09
B.
Luminaire and pole assemblies: As scheduled.
09
10
10
11
C.
Poles: Steel, designed for 100 MPH constant velocity
11
12
wind load.
12
13
1. Include base template, 4 anchor bolts,
13
14
cadmium -plated hardware and pole grounding lug,
14
15
handhole, cast steel anchor base and bolt covers.
15
16
2. Finish: Factory primed. Finish with two coats
16
17
of exterior paint after installation.
17
18
18
19
D.
Pole foundations: As indicated.
19
20
20
21
E.
Underground wiring:
21
-22
1. Type XHHW or THW installed in rigid PVC conduit.
22
23
2. Provide all wiring runs with separate green
23
24
equipment grounding conductor, and ground all
24
25
pole bases.
25
26
26
27
F.
Ballasts for exterior HID and fluorescent lamps: UL
27
28
approved, high power factor, designed for -20 degF
28
29
temperature starting.
29
30
30
31
G.
Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic Plexiglas.
31
32
1. All hardware and fasteners corrosion resistant
32
33
finished.
33
34
2. Clear Plexiglas diffusers or lenses are required
34
35
for certain luminaires, see Schedule.
35
36
36
37
H.
Pole wiring from base to ballast: No.12 type TW,
37
38
each phase protected by a 30 A, 600.volt type Tron
38
39
waterproof fuseholder, Bussmann "Limitron" type, size
39
40
rating 3-times load current.
40
41
41
42
I.
Contactors: Electrically held type, rated at 480
42
43
volts AC, 30 ampere lighting load, minimum with
43
44
number of poles required, 120-volt operating coil,
44
45
designed for tungsten, fluorescent metal halide, high
45
46
pressure sodium or mercury lamp loads.
46
47
1. Provide NEMA 1 sheet metal case.
47
48
2. Square D, Class 8903.
48
49
49
50
J.
Exterior lighting control: Two photo electric cells
50
51
which will turn on 3 circuits at sunset and time
51
52
switch which will turn off Part Night circuit at time
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16530-3
01
desired by Owner.
01
02
1. Time switch circuits to receive 120 volt control
02
03
voltage from photo electric cell.
03
04
2. All Night and exterior emergency circuits turned
04
05
on and off by photo electric cells.
05
06
3. Control system: 120 volts.
06
07
4. Control wiring: No.14 AWG minimum.
07
08
08
09
K.
Photo -cells: 120 V, 60 cycles, enclosed weatherproof
09
10
type for outdoor application.
10
11
1. 1/2 IN conduit entrance.
11
12
2. Fail-safe operation.
12
13
3. Provide time delay device to eliminate nuisance
13
14
switching. 1
14
15
4. Controls: Temperature compensated, spectrum
15
16
response permitting cell to face any direction
16
17
except south.
17
18
5. Provide unit with surge protection.
18
19
6. Switch: SPST rated for 1,000-watts incandescent
19
20
lamp load.
20
21
7. Operating point field adjustable from 2 to 50
21
22
foot candles.
22
23
8. Tork Model No.2101.
23
24
24
25
L.
Time switch: 120 V, 60-cycle synchronous, motor
25
26
operated, 24-dial, one circuit type with switches
26
27
rated 40 A at 120/240 V.
27
28
1. 16 hour electric rewind reserve power.
28
29
2. Indoor flush mounting case.
29
30
3. Provide separate manual on and off levers and
30
31
arrange terminals to receive 120 volt control
31
32
voltage from photo cell for on operation.
32
33
4. Tork Model No.7100L.
33
34
34
35
M.
Time switch cabinet: 12 x 12 x 6 IN hinged door,
35
36
flush, steel, cabinet.
36
37
1. Provide with 2 terminal strips for distribution
37
38
of control wiring for 2 circuits, 1 All Night,
38
39
and 1 Part Night.
39
40
2. Provide heavy duty type H-O-A selector switch in
40
41
door and connect to control output lead from
41
42
photo -cell to serve as master control.
42
43
3. Selector switch: Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800.
43
44
4. Label selector switch Exterior Lighting with
44
45
engraved black phenolic nameplate.
45
46
46
47
47
48
PART
3 - EXECUTION
48
49
49
50
3.01
INSTALLATION
50
51
51
52
A.
Install all roadway, walkway and parking lighting,
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16530-4
01 and their wiring as indicated.
02
03 B. Make conduit bends without injuring conduit or
04 reducing internal diameter.
05
06 C. Install photo cells approximately 6 FT above roof
07 with cells facing north.
08
09 D. Exterior lighting control circuits as follows,
10 including various lighting systems as scheduled.
11 1. All Night circuit No.l.
12 2. Part Night circuit No.2.
13
14 END OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16670-1
O1
6Al2,
7I22 SECTION 16670
02
03
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Related sections:
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
11
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
12
13
B.
Provide complete system complying with the following:
14
1. Lightning Protection Components Standard LP1-176.
15
2. Lightning Protection Standard of Practice
16
LP1-175.
17
3. Must be reviewed for compliance with LP1-175 at
18
all stages of installation.
19
4. Must be certified by four signatures: Owner,
20
Agent, Installer/Manufacturer and LP1.
21
22
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
23
24
A.
System standards: ANSI/UL-96, and NFPA-780.
25
26
1.03
SUBMITTALS
27
28
A.
Shop drawings:
29
1. Lightning protection system:
30
a. Roof penetration details.
31
b. Complete layout indicating all connections,
32
down conductors and grounding tripads.
33
34
B.
Product data:
35
1. Technical data on each component.
36
37
C.
Contract closeout information:
38
1. UL Master label.
39
40
41
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
42
43
2.01
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
44
45
A.
Lightning protection system: Complete Master Label
46
lightning protection system.
47
48
B.
Acceptable manufacturers:
49
1. Lightning protection system:
50
a. Base: Listed in lightning protection section
51
of current edition of UL electrical equipment
52
test.
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16670-2
01
(1) Thompson Lightning Protection.
01
02
(2) Robbins Lightning Protection.
02
03
(3) Heary Brothers Lightning Protection.
03
04
(4) Independent Protection.
04
05
(5) AC Lightning Security.
05
06
2. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with
06
07
Document 00440.
07
08
08
09
2.02
MATERIALS
09
10
10
11
A.
Materials - General: Labeled for lightning
it
12
protection systems by UL.
12
13
1. All components designed to blend in with
13
14
appearance of building so that it appears as part
14
15
of building.
15
16
2. Maximum concealed, semi -concealed or totally
16
17
exposed system as required to meet Architect's
.17
18
requirements.
18
19
19
20
B.
Conductors: Copper or aluminum, grade ordinarily
20
21
used for commercial electric work and of weight
21
22
required by height of building.
22
23
23
24
C.
Air terminals: Solid copper or aluminum rod with
24
25
tapered point, of height required.
25
26
1. Attach rods to building with proper cast bronze
26
27
or copper base to adapt to building design.
27
28
28
29
D.
Ground rods: 3/4 IN x 10 FT copper weld. -
29
30
30
31
E.
Main ground connection fittings: See Section 16450.
31
32
32
33
33
34
PART
3 - EXECUTION
34
35
35
36
3.01
INSTALLATION
36
37
37
38
A.
Do not install copper conductors or fastenings in
38
39
contact with aluminum surfaces.
39
40
40
41
B.
Install down conductors in conduit.
41
42
42
43
C.
Terminate each downlead cable in grounding
43
44
arrangement suitable to local soil condition and
44
45
applicable codes.
45
46
1. Maximum ground resistance: 10 ohms.
46
47
2. Use tripods each containing three rods, located
47
48
as required.
48
49
3. Make connection to ground rods with Cadweld
49
50
method or UL listed compression fitting for all
50
51
connections buried in earth.
51
52
4. If necessary, drive additional ground rods to
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16670-3
O1
obtain 10 ohms.
01
02
5. Do not cover or bury ground rods until observed
02
03
by Architect.
03
04
04
05
D. Interconnect all metal items on roof (such as
05
06
ventilators, stacks, pipes, gutters, downspouts,
06
07
ducts, tracks, antennas, water pipes, ladders) to
07
08
main conductor system.
08
09
09
10
E. Provide connection to incoming electric and telephone
10
11
service ground per NEC for common bonding.
11
12
12
13
F. Provide roof flashings or other method approved by
13
14
roof manufacturer for down conductor or fittings
14
15
passing through roofs. Do not use pitch pockets.
15
16
16
17
G. Remove and replace any items found not in compliance
17
18
with specification requirements.
18
19
19
20
END OF SECTION
20
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16741-1
01
1D15,
7I22 SECTION 16741
02
03
EMPTY CONDUIT AND OUTLET BOXES
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Related sections:
10
1. General requirements: Division 1.
11
2. General electrical requirements: Section 16010.
12
13
B.
Work in this section is for following systems:
14
1. Data processing.
15
2. Telephone.
16
3. Telephone premises distribution system.
17
18
19
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
20
21
2.01
MATERIALS
22
23
A.
Conduit: As specified in Section 16110.
24
25
B.
Conduit stub -outs: From outlet box to 6 IN above
26
nearest lay -in type corridor ceiling, terminated with
27
insulated bushing.
28
1. Provide pulling wire or heavy nylon pulling cord
29
for conduit more than 25 FT long.
30
2. TV antenna stub -outs: 1/2 IN.
31
3. Central dictation stub -outs: 1 IN.
32
4. Data processing stub -outs: 1-1/4 IN.
33
5. Remote monitor terminal cabinet stub -outs: 1-1/4
34
IN, to concealed space in millwork at remote
35
monitors.
36
6. Remote monitor outlets: Provide 1-1/4 IN conduit
37
continuous to terminal cabinet.
38
7. Telephone stub -outs: 3/4 IN, unless indicated
39
larger.
40
41
C.
Outlet box - General: With extension ring, of proper
42
size and depth, with cover plate to match wiring
43
device cover.
44
45
D.
Telephone outlet boxes: Standard flush switch box
46
with plate with 3/8 IN bushed opening.
47
48
E.
Telephone backboards: 3/4 x 48 x 48 IN, fire
49
retardant plywood as specified in Section 06000,
50
painted black as specified in Section 09900.
51
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16741-2
O1
PART
3 - EXECUTION
02
03
3.01
INSTALLATION
04
05
A.
Install all
components
as indicated.
06
07
B.
Tag ends of
conduit with
system identification
08
letters.
09
10
C.
Test conduit
for clear
passage.
11
12
D.
Mark inside
of outlet
boxes with system
13
identification
letters
using black felt -ink mark.
14
15
END
OF SECTION
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
16750-1
01
5CO3
SECTION 16750
02
03
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
04
05
PART
1 - GENERAL
06
07
1.01
DESCRIPTION
08
09
A.
Communications systems:
10
1. Nurse call.
11
2. Intercom.
12
3. Doctors and staff register.
13
4. Public address and music.
14
5. Television/radio distribution.
15
16
17
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
18
19
2.01
GENERAL
20
21
A.
All systems shall be by same supplier which has
22
authorized installer and service organization within
23
75 roadway MI of project.
24
25
26
B.
Acceptable manufacturers: As indicated in individual
sections.
27
1. If requested by Architect/Engineer, supplier
28
shall submit names and addresses of four like
29
institutions being serviced by installer's
30
service organization.
31
2. If requested by Architect/Engineer, supplier
32
shall submit sample maintenance contract as
33
follows:
34
a. Name and address of authorized
35
installer/service organization.
36
b. Written to cover complete maintenance and 24
37
hour emergency service.
38
39
C.
Communications systems shall be factory -designed and
40
manufactured to operate as complete, coordinated
41
systems, including interfaces to other systems.
42
1. Include all components.
43
2. Include all wire, cable, conduit and fittings.
44
45
46
PART
3 - EXECUTION
47
48
3.01
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
49
50
A.
Provide manufacturer supervision of installation,
51
including electrical connections, cable -pulling,
52
testing and interfacing of systems (when required).
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
O8
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
16750-2
3.02 WIRING
A. All wiring within equipment: Point to point with
appropriate terminal connections for every wire and
component termination.
1. All connections mechanically secure.
2. All wiring and terminals clearly identified to
facilitate installation and maintenance.
B. All cable and wire: As specified by communication
systems manufacturer.
1. Standard type available from more than one cable
manufacturer.
2. Manufacturer and installer are responsible for
system performance; if wire and cable are
inadequate for performance specified, replace
wire and cable with adequate cable at no
additional cost.
C. All cabling, wiring, conduits and equipment housings:
In strict accordance with recommendations of
equipment manufacturer.
D. Furnish and install all cable, and perform all cable
splicing and equipment terminations.
1. Check each home run cabling system thoroughly for
opens, shorts, faults, or other discontinuities.
2. Test each nurse call receptacle for continuity
test, ground test, and voltage level check prior
to allowing plug-in of bedside station call cord
or pillow speaker unit.
E. Install communications wiring in conduit 3/4 IN
minimum in accordance with Section 16110, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.03 TESTING
A. Test each complete system for proper operation,
including all modes of operation.
3.04 OWNER PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. Provide technical training for Owner maintenance
personnel at manufacturer training school.
1. Include lodging and meals.
B. Instruct operating staff in proper operation,
including hands-on training.
END OF SECTION
O1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
West Texas Region Disposal Facility
Phase 1 Construction
APPENDIX A
EXHIBIT A - SHOP DRAWING TRANSMITTAL
EXHIBIT B - O & M MANUAL TRANSMITTAL
EXHIBIT C - SOIL AND LINER QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
r�11'
EXHIBIT A
Shop Drawing Transmittal No. -
(Spec Section) (Series)
roject Name:
Date Received:
roject Owner,
Checked By:
:ontractor
HDA Engineering, Inc.
Log Page:
Address:Address:
Attn:
HDR No.:
1st. Sub. Resub.
Previous Transmittal Date:
Date Transmitted:
o.
Copies
Description
Manufacturer
Dwg. or Data No,
Action Taken'
I-L-;uLT,Zii
The Action Designated Above is in Accordance with the Following Legend:
A - Furnish as Submitted
B - Fumish as Noted
C - Revise and Submit
1.
Not enough information for review.
2.
No reproducibles submitted.
3.
Copies illegible.
4.
Not enough copies submitted.
5.
Wrong sequence number.
6.
Wrong resubmittal number.
7.
Wrong spec. section.
8.
Wrong form used.
9.
See comments.
Comments:
D - Rejected
E - Engineers review not required
1. Submittal not required.
2. Supplemental Information. Submittal retained for
informational purposes only.
3. Information reviewed and approved on prior submittal.
4. See comments.
l I
By Date
Distribution: Contractor U Fie U Feld U Owner U Other U
FORM 111-2020-21Venion 1.0 Jun 90
Copyright 1991 HDR Engineering, Inc.
Tuk 2020
III-2020-2
EXHIBIT B
IDI O&M Manual Transmittal No. -
(Spec Section) (Series)
HDR Engineering, Inc.
Date:
The Action Designated Above is in Accordance with the Following Legend:
A - Acceptable, Provide five additional Copies
B - Furnish as Noted
C - Revise and Resubmit
This Operation and Maintenance Manual submittal is
deficient in the following area:
1. Equipment record sheets.
2. Functional description.
3. Assembly, disassembly, Installation, alignment,
adjustment & checkout instructions.
4. Operating instructions.
S. Lubrication & maintenance Instructions.
6. Troubleshooting guide.
7. Parts list and ordering instructions.
8. Organization (index and tabbing).
9. Wiring diagrams & schematics specific to installation.
10. Outline, cross section & assembly diagrams.
11. Test data & performance curves.
12. Tag or equipment identification numbers.
13. Other - see comments.
D - Rejected
By Date
Distribution: Contractor U File U Feld U Owner U Mer U
FORM 111-2030-3 (Venion 1.0 Jun 90) Task 2030
Copyright 1991 11DR Engineering, Inc.
111-2030.3
EXHIBIT C
SOIL LINER QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
�L
ATTACHMENT 10
SOIL AND LINER QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
(SLQCP)
WEST TEXAS REGION DISPOSAL FACILITY
LUBBOCK COUNTY, TEXAS
February 1996
ATTACHMENT 10
SOIL AND LINER QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
WEST TEXAS REGION DISPOSAL FACILITY
LUBBOCK COUNTY, TEXAS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Paqe
1.0 INTRODUCTION................................................................ .............................. 1
1.1 General......................................................................................................1
1.2 Definitions..................................................................................................2
2.0 GEOSYNTHETIC CLAY LINER(GCL)................................................................. 6
2.1
General......................................................................................................6
2.2
References................................................................................................ 6
2.3
Submittals..................................................................................................7
2.4
Delivery, Storage, and Handling..............................................................10
2.5
Materials..................................................................................................11
2.6
Manufacturer............................................................................................12
2.7
Warranty..................................................................................................
12
2.8
Execution.................................................................................................13
2.9
Equipment................................................................................................16
3.0 FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE LINING(FML)..............................................................18
3.1
General....................................................................................................18
3.2
Submittals................................................................................................18
3.3
Quality Assurance....................................................................................
20
3.4
Delivery, Storage and Handling...............................................................
22
3.5
Products.................................................................. .............................23
3.6
Installation Procedures............................................................................
26
3.7
Field Quality Control................................................................................
30
4.0 LEACHATE COLLECTION SYSTEM................................................................. 37
5.0 PROTECTIVE COVER....................................................................................... 41
6.0 MARKING AND IDENTIFYING OF EVALUATED AREAS ................................. 43
7.0 SLER, FMLER AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION ............................. 44
W'rRDF- 111-ATT10
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
Tables
2-1 Standard Tests on GCL Materials........................................................................ 9
3-1 Standard Tests on HDPE FML Material............................................................. 25
4-1 Standard Tests on Geotextile Materials............................................................. 39
4-2 Standard Tests on Geonet Material.................................................................... 40
WTRDF- III-A71`10
HDR Engineering, Inc. ��� February. 3996
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 General
This Soil and Liner Quality Control Plan
(SLQCP)
presents engineering and
quality
control requirements for construction of
the West
Texas Region Disposal
Facility
("Facility') composite lining system.
The SLQCP shall be used in conjunction with the final construction drawings and
specifications developed from the Site Development Plan Attachments. This SLQCP
shall address the following:
• A Quality Assurance Program and the Quality Assurance Procedures to
be implemented during the composite liner construction including field
observation, laboratory and field testing, and acceptance criteria for
constructed work.
• Recording and documenting procedures to demonstrate that the
constructed composite liner meets the requirements of project plans and
specifications.
• Lines of communication, responsibilities and the role of the Quality
Assurance team and other related project personnel.
WTRDF- Ill-ATr10
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
3
• Report submittals required by the Texas Natural Resource Conservation
Commission (TNRCC).
1.2 Definitions
This section provides the definitions for terms used in this SLQCP.
Y
"Quality Control" - Actions taken by the FML manufacturers and FML contractor to
ensure that the geosynthetic materials and workmanship meet the requirements of
project plans and specifications.
"Quality Assurance" - Actions taken by the Geotechnical Professional (GP) to assure
conformity of the liner system production and installation with the Quality Assurance
Plan, drawings and specifications. QA is provided by a party independent of
installation.
"Work" - All tools, equipment, supervision, labor and material or supplies necessary to
complete the project as specified herein and as shown on the plans.
"Geosynthetics" - A generic classification given to synthetic (man-made plastic)
materials used in geotechnical engineering applications. Included are flexible
membrane lining, geotextiles, geonets, geogrids, geocomposites and geocells.
VYTRDF- III-ATT10 2
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
"Flexible Membrane Lining (FML): - Essentially an impermeable synthetic material used
as an integral part of a lining system. It is sometimes referred to as a geomembrane,
sheet or panel. On this project, the FML will consist of a High Density Polyethylene
(HDPE) material.
"Geotextile" - A permeable synthetic textile used with soil, rock, sand, gravel or any
other similar materials as an integral part of the composite lining system. It provides
protection to the FML as a geosynthetic cushion and also serves as a filter interface
between two types of soil materials.
"Geosynthetic Clay Liners" (GCL): - Geosynthetic clay liners (GCLs) are factory
manufactured, hydraulic barriers typically consisting of bentonite clay or other very low
permeability clay materials, supported by geotextiles and/or geomembranes which are
held together by needling, stitching and/or chemical adhesives.
"Manufacturer" - Firm(s) responsible for the production of FML and geotextile from
resin.
"Earthwork Contractor" - The firm responsible for excavation and subgrade preparation
under the liner installation. The firm may also be responsible for placing protective
cover and granular drainage materials over the installed lining system.
WTRDF- III-ATT10 3
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
"FML Contractor' - The firm responsible for handling, storing, placing, seaming, and
other aspects of the installation of the FML, geosynthetic cushion and geotextiles as a
part of the composite lining system.
"Geotechnical Professional" (GP) - Person(s) of firm(s) authorized by the Owner to
manage and oversee the execution of the work. This includes a professional engineer
registered in this state who possesses professional experience in geotechnical
engineering and testing, or a graduate geologist who has a minimum of four years
experience in engineering geology and is experienced in geotechnical testing and its
interpretations. The Geotechnical Professional is also responsible for observing, testing
and documenting activities related to liner quality assurance during the installation of
the lining system, and for issuing the final report. All completed work' is subject to !�
approval of the Geotechnical Professional.
"Owner" - The City of Lubbock
"Qualified Engineering Technician" - The qualified representative of the Geotechnical
Professional who is NICET - Certified in Geotechnical Engineering Technology at Level
1 or higher, who is an engineering technician with a minimum of four years of directly
related experience or a graduate engineer/geologist with one year of directly related
experience.
"Quality Assurance Laboratory" - The firm responsible for conducting tests on samples
of liner system components taken from the site. The laboratory shall be independent of
WTRDF- III-AMO 4
HDR Engineering, Inc. February. 1996
i0"",
the Owner, Manufacturer, Lining Contractor and any party involved with the
manufacture and/or installation of any of the geosynthetics.
"Proiect Plans and Specifications" - All project related plans and specifications including
design modifications and "as -built" plans.
"Proiect Documents" - All contractor submittals, construction plans, "as -built' plans,
construction specifications, OA plan, safety plan and project schedule.
VYTRDF- III-ATf10
HDR Engineering, Inc.
February, 1996
2.0 GEOSYNTHETIC CLAY UNER (GCL)
2.1 General
This section includes the requirements for selection, installation, and protection of
geosynthetic clay liner (GCL).
2.2 References
The publications listed below form a part of this document to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. Use the latest
revision date available unless otherwise indicated.
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM E496, Test Method for Plate Water Absorption of Cohesive Soils.
2. ASTM D4643 (modified), Test Method for Determination of Water Content of Soil.
3. ASTM D5084, Test Method for Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity of Saturated
Porous Materials Using a Flexible Wall Permeameter (modified).
4. ASTM D5321, Test Method for Determining the Coefficient of Soil and Geosynthetic
or Geosynthetic and Geosynthetic Friction by the Direct Shear Method.
5. ASTM D5261, Test Method for Mass Per Unit Area of Textiles.
6. ASTM D4632, Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles.
7. ASTM D3786, Test Method for the Mullen Burst Strength of Textiles.
U.S. Pharmacopeia - National Formulary XVII, page 1210
WTRDF- III-ATT10 6
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
1. USP-NF-XVII, Test Method for the Free Swell of Bentonite Clay.
Geosynthetics Research Institute, Drexel University
1. GRI-GCL-1, Test Method for the Confined Swell of Geosynthetic Clay Liners.
2.3 Submittals
2.3.1 Pre -installation
Submit the following to the Geotechnical Professional for approval prior to GCL
deployment.
1. Manufacturer's Quality Control Test results for tests described in Table 2-
1.
2. Written certification that the GCL meets the properties listed in Table 2-1.
3. Written certification that GCL manufacturer has continuously inspected
GCL for the presence of needles and found GCL to be needle -free.
4. Written certification from the GCL manufacturer that the bentonite will not
shift during transportation or installation thereby causing thin spots in the
body of the GCL.
5. Quality control certificates signed by a responsible entity of the GCL
manufacturer. Each quality control certificate shall include roll
identification numbers, and results of quality control tests. At a minimum,
results shall be given for tests and corresponding methods specified in
Table 2-1. The bentonite and textile suppliers shall certify the respective
WTRDF- III-ATT10 7
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
properties under Manufacturer=s Quality Control. The GCL manufacturer
shall also perform the bentonite tests described under Manufacturer
Quality Control and third party tests.
VVTRDF- III-ATT10 8
HDR Engineering, Inc.
February, 1996
�1.
TABLE 2-1
Standard Tests on GCL Materials
Test
Type of Test
Standard
Frequency of
Minimum
Test Method
Testing
Acceptable
Properties
Manufacturer's
AFNTONITE
Plate Water Absorption
ASTM E946
per 100,000 ftz
750 %
Water Content
ASTM D2216
r 100,000 ftz
20-25% max
H
ASTM D4972
r 100,000 ftz
8-11
TEXTILE BACKINGS
Conformance
Bentonite Content ®
Weight 12'x
per 100,000 ftz
1 Ib/ftz
Testing by 3rd
20% Moisture Content
Roll Width
Parry
Independent
Laboratory
Confined Swell
GRI-GCL-1
per 100,000 ftz
150%
Permeability under 5 psi
ASTM D5084
per 100,000 ftz
5 x 10*9 cm/sec
effective confining
pressure
Overlap Seam
ASTM D5084
per 200,000 ftz
5 x 10*9 cm/sec
Permeability under 5 psi
effective confining
pressure
Hydrated Internal and
ASTM D5321
per 100,000 ftz
'
Interface Shear
Resistance
' Conformance shear testing by the 3rd parry needs to include both internal shear as well as shear
between the GCL and the adjoining soil or geosynthetic (all testing must be on site -specific
materials) under hydrated conditions and anticipated critical field loading conditions. The shear
testing must verify the parameters used in the stability analyses. If the shear testing indicates lower
strength parameters than assumed in the stability analyses, the stability should be re -analyzed as
part of the Liner Evaluation Report(s). The testing needs to be done once per material combination
type and does not need to be repeated as long as the material types do not change from cell to cell.
The direct testing should be repeated if either the GCL or adjoining material changes.
WTRDF- III-AMO
HDR Engineering, Inc.
February, 1996
2.3.2 Installation
Submit the following as installation proceeds: Subgrade surface acceptance,
signed by the Contractor for each area that will be covered directly by GCL.
2.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
2.4.1 Packing and Shipping
The GCL shall be supplied in rolls wrapped individually in relatively impermeable
and opaque protective covers.
The GCL rolls shall be marked or tagged with the following information:
a. Manufacturer's name
b. Product identification
C. Roll number
d. Roll dimensions
e. Roll weight
2.4.2 Storage and Protection
The Contractor will provide on -site storage area for GCL rolls from time of
delivery until installed. After Contractor mobilization, store and protect geotextile
from dirt, water, ultraviolet light exposure, and other sources of damage. Rolls
must not be stacked higher than recommended by the manufacturer to preclude
WTRDF- III-AMO
10 HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
thinning of bentonite at contact points. Preserve integrity and readability of GCL
roll labels.
2.5 Materials
The active ingredient of the GCL shall be natural sodium bentonite. The bentonite shall
be encapsulated between two geotextiles or attached to a geomembrane.
For side slopes steeper than 8H:1 V the geotextile-backed GCL shall be lock -stitched
with high strength polypropylene thread to provide internal shear strength reinforcing.
The internal shear reinforcing mechanism shall resist failure due to thread pull-out over
long-term creep situations. For side slopes steeper than 8H:1 V, geotextile backing
placed against textured FML (geomembrane) shall be a non -woven material.
Geomembrane-backed GCL's on side slopes shall be evaluated for stability prior to on -
site use.
The permeability of the GCL overlap seams shall be equal to or less than the
permeability of the body of the GCL sheet. Needle punched GCL's shall be passed
over by a metal detector in order to find and remove any broken needles.
The bentonite shall be continuously adhered to both geotextiles to ensure that the
bentonite will not be displaced during handling, transportation, storage and installation.
The bentonite sealing compound or bentonite granules used to seat 'penetrations and
tom'
VVTRDF- III-ATT10 l i
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
make repairs shall be made of the same natural sodium bentonite as the GCL and shall
v
be as recommended by the GCL manufacturer.
2.6 Manufacturer
2.6.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
The GCL shall be CLAYMAX (James Clem Corporation), Bentomat (CETCO), or
approved equal.
2.6.2 Manufacturing Experience
The Manufacturer of the GCL shall have a minimum of 2 years of continuous
experience in the manufacture of similar GCL products. The Manufacturer must
demonstrate, by submitting a list of previous projects, a minimum of 5 million
square feet of manufacturing experience of similar GCL products.
2.7 Warranty
The Manufacturer shall provide a five (5) year warranty to the Owner against
manufacturing defects. The warranty shall include defective product found to be not in
compliance with the requirements of this SLQCP. The warranty shall include the supply
and re -installation of the replacement GCL material. The warranty shall not include
defects or failures due to improper installation.
wTRDF- III-ATT10
2
HOR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
W
2.8 Execution
2.8.1 Examination
The Geotechnical Professional or his representative will collect samples of GCL
to be installed for conformance testing. The conformance testing by the third
party independent laboratory will be performed in accordance with Table 2-1.
2.8.2 Subgrade Preparation
The subgrade shall be prepared in a manner consistent with proper subgrade
preparation techniques for the installation of geosynthetic materials. The
subgrade shall be properly compacted so as not to settle and cause excessive
strains in the GCL or other synthetic liner materials. Prior to installation, ensure
a surface free of debris, roots, or angular stones larger than 3/4 inch. In
addition, ensure that the subgrade has been rolled to provide smooth surface.
During installation, ensure that rutting or ravelling is not caused by installation
equipment.
2.8.3 Installation
2.8.3.1 GCL Deployment: Handle GCL in a manner to ensure it is not
damaged. At a minimum, comply with the following:
WTRDF- III-ATT10 13
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
1. On slopes, anchor the GCL securely and deploy it down the slope in a
controlled manner.
2. Weight the GCL with sandbags or equivalent in the presence of wind.
3. Cut GCL with a geotextile cutter (hook blade), scissors, or other
approved device. Protect adjacent materials from potential damage
due to cutting of GCL.
4. Prevent damage to underlying layers during placement of GCL.
5. During GCL deployment, do not entrap in or beneath the GCL, stones,
trash, or moisture that could damage GCL.
6. Visually examine entire GCL surface. Ensure no potentially harmful
foreign objects, such as needles, are present.
7. Do not place GCL in the rain or at times of impending rain.
8. Do not place GCL in areas of ponded water.
9. Replace GCL that is hydrated before placement of overlying
geomembrane and a minimum of 12 inches of approved cover soil.
10. In general, only deploy GCL that can be covered during that day by
geomembrane or a minimum of 12 inches of approved cover soil.
11. For needle -punched GCLs, add granular bentonite to the overlapped
areas at the manufacturer's specified rate.
12. Face the woven carrier geotextile against soil of prepared subgrade on
sideslopes and against the geomembrane on the bottom.
13. For sideslopes steeper than 8H:1 V, face a non -woven carrier geotextile
against textured FML (geomembrane).
14. On side slopes, run GCL to the bottom of the slope as indicated.
wTRDF• III-ATT10 14
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
15. Installation personnel must not smoke or wear damaging shoes when
working on GCL.
16. Vehicle traffic other than low contact pressure vehicles such as smooth -
tired ATV's or golf carts must not be allowed on the GCL.
17. Dragging of GCL on the subgrade should be avoided.
2.8.3.2 Overlaps
Overlap GCL to the manufacturer's requirements which will vary according to
seam location and climatic conditions. In general, no horizontal seams are
allowed on side slopes. For needle -punched GCLs, apply granular bentonite to
overlapped area at a rate required by the manufacturer to assure a seam
essentially as impermeable as the GCL itself. At sumps, overlap GCLs at least 1
foot. At bottom of collection sumps, unroll an extra layer of GCL on top of
previously installed GCL. Avoid placing seams on top of underlying seams.
2.8.3.3 Defects and Repairs
Repair all flaws or damaged areas by placing a patch of the same material
extending at least 1 foot beyond the flaw or damaged area. For needle -punched
GCLs, add granular bentonite to the overlapped edges of the patch at the
manufacturers specified rate.
WTROF- III-ATT10 15
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
2.8.3.4 Interface with Other Products: Ensure the following when deploying
overlying material.
1. GCL and underlying materials are not damaged.
2. Minimal slippage of GCL on underlying layers occurs.
3. No folds or excess tensile stresses occur in GCL.
4. If necessary, approved adhesive can be used to keep overlap seams
and patches in place during placement of overlying materials.
2.9 Equipment
2.9.1 Storage
Use wooden pallets for above ground storage of GCL and heavy, waterproof
tarpaulin for protecting unused GCL.
2.9.2 Installation
1. Use front-end loader, crane or similar equipment for GCL deployment
with a spreader bar to prevent slings from damaging edges.
2. A 15 foot long, 3 inch outer diameter schedule 120 steel pipe will be
inserted into roll core for lifting.
3. Sand bags for securing tarpaulin.
4. 3 inch wide grips for moving GCL panels into place for each installation
technician.
wTRDF- III-ATT10 16
HDR Engineering, Inc, February, 1996
5. Glue for joining overlapped panels, or as dictated by project needs
requirements.
6. Bentonite Sealing Compound and/or Granular Bentonite for securing
around penetrations and structures as shown on the contract
documents.
7. Anchor bolts for securing around concrete structures, if required.
8. Utility knives and replacement blades.
WTRDF- III-ATT10 17
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
3.0 FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE LINING (FML)
3.1 General
This Section covers the work necessary to construct and test the flexible membrane
lining (FML) system, which will consist of a 60 mil High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
material. The overall objective is to provide an effective lining system at the completion
of the work.
3.2 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit written certification by the Manufacturer that the lining
materials conform to the requirements of the SLQCP; are similar and of same
formulation as that for which certification is submitted; and has been demonstrated by
actual usage to be satisfactory for the intended application.
The Manufacturer and the Contractor, each, shall submit a complete description of its
quality control program, as applicable, for manufacturing, handling, installing, testing,
repairing and providing a completed lining in accordance with requirements of the
SLQCP. The description shall include, but not be limited to, polymer resin supplier,
product identification, acceptance testing, fabrication and production testing, installation
testing, documentation of changes, alterations and repairs, retests and acceptance.
WTRDF- III-ATT10 (g
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
ro""' The Contractor shall submit installation drawings, description of installation procedures,
and a schedule for performing/completing the work. Installation drawings shall show a
lining sheet layout with proposed size, number, position, and sequence of placing of all
sheets and indicating the location of all field seams. Installation drawings shall also
show complete details and/or methods for anchoring the lining at its perimeter, making
field seams, and making anchors/seals to pipes and structures.
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Geotechnical Professional samples of
lining material(s) and field seams prior to start of construction.
The Contractor shall submit six (6) 8 inches x 10 inches samples of lining material(s)
(00�1% and six (6) samples of field seams. The field seam samples shall be fabricated by the
Contractor using the same materials, equipment and procedures for the lining. Samples
shall measure 12 inches plus seam width in width and 16 inches in length. The
samples shall be numbered and dated.
The Contractor shall submit a complete description of welding procedures for making
field seams and repairs. The welding procedures shall conform to the latest procedures
recommended by the lining Manufacturer and to the SLQCP.
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Geotechnical Professional certification
that the surface(s) on which the lining will be placed is acceptable. Installation of the
lining shall not commence until this certification is furnished to the Geotechnical
Professional.
WTRDF- III-ATT1U 19
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
The lining Manufacturer shall furnish a written lining material warranty on a prorata
basis for a period of 20 years. The warranty shall be against manufacturing defects or
workmanship and against deterioration due to ozone, ultraviolet or other normal
weather aging. The warranty shall be limited to replacement of material only, and shall
not cover installation of said material. It shall not cover damage due to vandalism, acts
of animals or acts of God.
The Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee that the entire lining work constructed
by him to be free of defects in material and workmanship and installed pursuant to the
SLQCP for a period of two (2) years following the date of acceptance of the work by the
Geotechnical Professional. During the 23rd month, a pre -guarantee expiration
inspection will be conducted to identify any necessary repair work covered by the
guarantee. The Contractor shall agree to make any repairs or replacements made
necessary by defects in materials or workmanship in the Work which become evident
within said guarantee period. The Contractor shall make repairs and/or replacements
promptly, the Owner may do so, and the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for the
cost of such repairs and/or replacements.
3.3 Quality Assurance
Prior to start of work, the lining Manufacturer and the Contractor, each, shall submit for
approval by the Geotechnical Professional documented evidence of its ability and
capacity to perform this Work. Each shall have successfully manufactured and/or
wTRDF- III-ATT10 20
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
installed a minimum of two (2) million square feet of similar lining material in solid waste
containment structures. The Contractor can meet these criteria by teaming with a
subcontractor who is identified in the bid along with the firm's experience.
The Contractor shall submit the name and qualifications of its project superintendent
that will be on the project whenever lining materials are being handled/installed plus the
names and qualifications of senior installation personnel on the project.
The Quality Control Plan(s) to be implemented for the Work by the lining Manufacturer
and the Contractor shall be in accordance with applicable paragraphs of the SLQCP.
The Manufacturer and Contractor, as applicable to each, shall submit for approval by
the Geotechnical Professional written certification that the lining system was installed in
accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendation, the SLQCP, project
specifications and drawings, and approved submittals.
The Geotechnical Professional will initiate a pre -installation meeting with the
Manufacturer and Contractor prior to installation of the lining system. Topics for
review/discussion shall include, as a minimum, project plans and specifications,
approved submittals, training and qualification procedures for Contractor personnel,
and demonstration of making a field welded Seam(s) including peel and shear tests.
Prior to installation of the lining system, the Contractor shall instruct the workmen of the
hazards of installation, such as handling sheets of lining material in high winds; use of
WTRDF- III-ATT10 21
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
equipment; application of solvents, adhesives and caulks; and walking on lining
surfaces. Work gloves, safety glasses, hard hats, and smooth -soled shoes are
minimum safety wear requirements when working on the FML. Safety shoes must be
wom when handling heavy objects.
The Geotechnical Professional shall have authority to order an immediate stoppage of
work because of improper installation procedures, safety infractions, or for any reason
which may result in a defective liner.
3.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Geotechnical Professional a method(s)
for handling and storage of lining material(s) which have been delivered to the project
site. These materials shall be stored in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendation.
Lining materials delivered to the site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and
stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground.
The storage area shall be such that all materials are protected from mud, soil, dirt and
debris. The stacking of lining shall not be higher than two rolls.
Under no circumstances shall the lining be subjected to materials, sandbags,
equipment or other items being dragged across its surface. Nor shall workmen and
others slide down slopes atop the lining. All scuffed surfaces resulting from 'abuse of
wTRDF- III-A1T10 22
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
any kind caused by the Contractor in performance of the Work shall be repaired at the
Geotechnical Professional's direction.
The Contractor shall be completely responsible for shipping, storage, handling, and
installation of all lining materials in compliance with the SLQCP.
3.5 Products
The High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) lining materials shall be new, first quality
products designed and manufactured specifically for the purposes of the Work and
shall have satisfactorily demonstrated, by prior use, to be suitable and durable for such
purposes. The flexible membrane shall be an unmodified HDPE containing no
plasticizers, fillers, chemical additives, reclaimed polymers, or extenders. For ultraviolet
resistance, the FML material shall contain not less than 2.0 percent carbon black as
determined by ASTM D 1603. The only other compound ingredients to be added to the
FML resin shall be anti -oxidants and heat stabilizers required for manufacturing. The
FML shall be supplied as a single ply continuous sheet with no factory seams and in
rolls with a minimum width of 15 FT. The roll length shall be maximized to provide the
largest manageable sheet for the fewest field seams.
The FML lining materials shall be as manufactured by Gundle Lining Systems, Inc.,
Houston, Texas; Poly -America, Inc., Grand Prairie, Texas; National Seal Company,
Galesburg, Illinois; SLT North America, Inc., Conroe, Texas, or approved equal.
W7RDF- III-ATT10 23
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
Extrusion resin used for fusion welding with extrudate (to make field seams between
FML sheets and for repairs) shall be HDPE produced from the same HDPE sheet resin.
Physical properties shall be same as HDPE lining sheets.
HVTRDF- III-ATT10 24
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
' The standard tests described in Table 3-1 will be performed on the FML material.
TABLE 3-1
Standard Tests on HDPE FML Material
Test
Type of Test
Standard
Test Method
Frequency of Testing
Resin
Flow Index
ASTIA-13 1238
everyMelt
per 100.000 Wand i
Manufacturer's
Thickness
ASTM D 5199 (smooth
per manufactuEar'slicontrol
ific Gravitv/Densftv
ASTM D 1505
oer 100.000 Wand everyresin
Carbon Olack Contentvresin
lot
BlackCarbon i
e
i)er 100,000 Wand every resin
Tensilec
per 100,000 fe gnd every resin
Tear
ASTM D 1004
r 100,000 ft2and every resin
resin
Dimensional il'resin
Conformance
ThickneSSD
r 100,GW fe gnd every resin
Specific GraNdWIDensity
ASTM D 1505
per 100.000 ft2gnd every resin
Black Content
ASTM D 1603
100,000 ft2and every resin lot
DispersionCarbon
Carbon Black
--or
B
r 100,000 Wand every resinlot
Tensile Properties
ASTM D 638°
per 100,000 Wand every resin lot
Notes:
A - For textured liners acceptable alternative procedure in accordance with industry standard is to
use micrometer with 1/32- radius points
B - NSF 54 Modified (microtome sample preparation procedure)
C - NSF 54 Modified with 2' initial gauge length assumed for elongation at break
D - Field thickness measurements for each panel must be conducted. Use ASTM D374 and
perform one series of measurements along the leading edge of each panel, with individual
measurements no greater than five feet apart. No single measurements shall be less than
10% below the required nominal thickness in order for the panel to be acceptable.
wTRDF- III-ATT10
HDR Engineering, Inc.
25
February, 1996
nT,
3.6 Installation Procedures
Prior to installation of the FML, a site inspection will be conducted by the Geotechnical
Professional and the Contractor to verify measurements, structures and surface
conditions to support the FML.
The Contractor will provide written documentation to the Geotechnical Professional that
surfaces to receive the FML have been inspected and are acceptable for installation of
the lining.
Before the work begins, the Contractor will inspect all lining materials for damage from /--11
transit. Materials that cannot be repaired will be rejected and removed from the work
area and site.
During unwrapping of lining materials for use and placement, the Contractor will visually
inspect all materials, particularly surfaces of lining sheets, for imperfections and faulty
areas. All such defective places will be marked and repaired in accordance with
approved methods.
The FML will be installed as shown on the project plans and approved installation
drawings. Placement of the FML will be done such that a good fit, without bridging, is
provided on all covers and grade changes. Excessive slack will be avoided to minimize
rippling during the soil cover operation.
WTRDF- 111-ATT10 26
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
Sheets of FML materials will be of such lengths and widths and will be placed in such a
manner as to reduce field seaming to a minimum. The lining will be anchored in
accordance with details shown on approved plans and drawings. The lining will be
anchored and sealed to structures, pipes and other types of penetrations, (if any), in
accordance with details shown on approved plans and drawings. All changes in
approved installation drawings and procedures must be approved by the Geotechnical
Professional.
Extreme care will be taken during installation of the lining to be certain no damage is
done to any part of the lining. Dragging of the FML material on the subgrade will be
avoided. Smoking by installation personnel will be prohibited. All handling and
installation procedures will be performed by workers wearing shoes with smooth soles.
Shoes with soles that have patterns in relief shall be prohibited. No foot traffic will be
allowed on the FML except with approved shoes. No vehicular traffic will be allowed on
the lining. All motor driven equipment using fuel will have spark arrestors. No gasoline
driven generators or cans of gas or solvent will be placed directly on the lining material.
Under no circumstances will the lining be used as a work area to prepare patches or to
store tools and supplies. If needed, a tarpaulin of approved material will be spread out
as a work area.
During installation, the Contractor will be responsible for protecting the lining against
adverse effects of high winds such as uplift. Sand bags will be used as required to hold
the lining material in position during installation. Sand bags will be sufficiently close-knit
VYTRDF- III-ATT10 27
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
to preclude fines from working through the bottom, sides or seams. Paper bags, -�
whether or not lined with plastic, will not be permitted. Burlap bags, if used, must be
lined with plastic. Bags will contain not less than 40, nor more than 60 pounds of sand
having 100 percent passing a number 8 screen and will be tied closed after filling, using
only plastic ties. Bags that are split, tom, or otherwise losing their contents will be
immediately removed from the work area and any spills immediately cleaned up. Metal
or wire ties will not be used.
During installation, water shall not be allowed to pond on the FML material. The
contractor shall have available appropriate pumps to immediately remove ponding
water.
The FML material will not be installed under adverse climatic conditions, unless the
Contractor can demonstrate that his installation techniques adequately compensate for
such adverse conditions and quality of workmanship is not compromised. Adverse
climatic conditions occur when the air temperature measured 6 inches above the FML
surface is less than 32EF and decreasing, or more than 90EF; when the relative
humidity is more than 80 percent; when it is raining; or when there is frost on the
ground; or during conditions of excessive winds.
FML field seams will be lap seams as shown on approved plans and drawings. The lap
seams will be formed by lapping the edges of FML sheets a minimum of 4 inches. The
contact surfaces of the sheets will be wiped clean to remove dirt, dust, moisture, and
other foreign materials. For fillet weld seams, bevel edge of FML and clean oxidation
WrRDF-111-ATT10 28
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
from surfaces to receive extrudate by disk grinding or equivalent not more than one
hour before seaming.
Lap seam intersections involving more than 3 thicknesses of lining material will be
avoided, and all seam intersections will be offset at least 2 FT. No horizontal field
seams will be allowed on the slope and sheets of lining material on the slopes will
extend down slope out onto bottom a minimum of 5 FT from toe of slope.
Field seams between sheets of FML material will be made using approved fusion
welding systems, equipment and techniques. Approved fusion welding systems include
fillet weld using extrudate, lap weld using extrudate, and lap weld using single or double
(10�1 wedge welder.
tr~°
Any necessary repairs to the FML will be made with the lining material itself, using
approved fusion welding systems, equipment and techniques. The patch size will be 4
inches larger in all directions than the area to be patched. All comers of the patch will
be rounded with a 1 inch minimum radius.
All seams and seals of the FML will be tightly bonded on completion of the work. Any
lining surface showing injury due to scuffing or penetration by foreign objects or
showing distress will be replaced or repaired as directed by the Geotechnical
Professional.
WTRDF- 111-AT710 29
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
Cleanup within the work area will be an ongoing responsibility of the Contractor.
Particular care will be taken to insure that no trash, tools, and other unwanted materials
are trapped beneath the lining. Care will be taken to insure that all scraps of lining
material are removed from the work area prior to completion of the installation.
3.7 Field Quality Control
Inspection and testing will involve the full time observation of the installation of the FML,
including the making and testing of lining seams and patches and periodic
measurement of the liner material thickness to insure compliance. Field thickness
measurements must be taken for each panel before it is seamed. The material
thickness shall be checked using a micrometer at a minimum frequency of one
measurement per five feet along the leading edge of each panel but at least, at a
minimum, five measurements along the leading edge of the panel. No single
measurement shall be less than 10% below the required nominal thickness in order for
the panel to be accepted.
Test seams will be made to verify that adequate conditions exist for field seaming to
proceed. For extrusion welding, each seamer and machine will produce a test seam at
the beginning of each shift to determine the peel and tensile strength of the seam.
Fusion welding only requires testing of the machine only at the beginning of each shift.
The Geotechnical Professional may require a sample field seam be made at any time
during seaming production to verify equipment/operator performance and seam -�
integrity. In addition, if a seaming operation has been suspended for more than 1/2
WTRDF- III-ATT10 30
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
hour or if a breakdown of the seaming equipment occurs, a test seam will be produced
prior to resumption of seaming operations.
During the field seaming operation, representative, non-destructive samples will be
made for field seams by the Contractor. These samples will be made of the same
HDPE sheet and fusion weld materials using the same installation procedures as the
FML installation itself. Samples will have a width of 12 inches plus the seam width and
length of 42 to 48 inches. A minimum of one sample per crew each morning and each
afternoon, will be made. All field seams will have a film tear bond in peel and shear and
a minimum pounds per inch width seam strength in shear when tested as specified in
Specifications. At the very least, the peel adhesion and bonded shear strength must be
62% and 95%, respectively, of the strength of the parent material, but no less than 78
ppi and 120 ppi respectively. Sample testing will be conducted by an independent
testing agency paid for by the Owner. The independent testing agency will save all test
samples including specimens tested until notified by the Geotechnical Professional
relative to their disposal. All specimens which have failed under test will be shipped
immediately by express delivery to the Geotechnical Professional for determination of
corrective measures to be taken.
During the field seaming operation, destructive samples will be removed from field
seams by the Contractor at locations selected by the Geotechnical Professional.
Repairs to the field seams will be made in accordance with repair procedures specified
in these Specifications. The samples will have a width of 12 inches plus the seam
width and length of 42 to 48 inches. A minimum of one stratified sample per 500 feet of
VYrROF- III-ATT10 31
HDR Engineering. Inc. February, 1996
field seam will be made. All field seams will have a film tear bond in peel and shear
and a minimum pound per inch width seam strength in shear when tested as specified
in the previous paragraph for non-destructive samples. A sufficient amount of the seam
must be removed in order to conduct field testing, independent laboratory testing, and
archiving of enough material in order to retest the seam when necessary. Field testing
shall include at least two peel tests (four when possible for testing both tracks on dual -
track fusion welded seams). Independent laboratory testing shall consist of five shear
tests and five peel tests (ten when possible for both tracks of dual -track fusion welded
seams). Destructive seam -testing locations shall be cap -stripped and the cap
completely seamed by extrusion welding to the FML. Capped sections shall be non-
destructively tested. Additional destructive test samples may be taken if deemed
necessary by the Geotechnical Professional or his representative.
All field-tested samples from a destructive -test location must be passing in both shear
and peel for the seam to be considered as passing. The independent laboratory testing
must confirm these field results. The passing criterion for independent laboratory
testing is that four of five samples must pass in shear and four of five must pass in peel
(four of five samples from each dual track fusion welded seam, when possible to test
each seam, must be passing) before the seam is considered as passing. Sample
testing will be conducted by an independent testing agency paid for by the Owner. The
independent testing agency will save all test samples including specimens tested until
notified by the Geotechnical Professional relative to their disposal. All specimens which
have failed under test will be shipped immediately by express delivery to the
wTRDF- III-ATT10 32
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
Geotechnical Professional for determination of corrective measures to be taken, which
includes retest or repair of failed section.
For nondestructive samples which have failed, the Contractor will cap all field seams
represented by the failed sample and a new test sample submitted for retest. The
decision of the Geotechnical Professional will be final.
For destructive samples which have failed the passing criterion, the Contractor will
reconstruct all the field seams between any two previous passed seam locations which
include the failed seam or will go on both sides of the failed seam location (10 feet
minimum), take another sample each side and test both. If both pass, the Contractor
will reconstruct the field seam between the two locations. If either fails, the Contractor
will repeat the process of taking samples for test. In all cases, acceptable field seams
must be bounded by two passed test locations. The decision of the Geotechnical
Professional will be final.
In the event capping of a field seam is required, the Contractor will use a cover strip of
the same thickness as the lining (and from the same roll, if available) and of 8 inches
minimum width. It will be positioned over the center of the field seam and welded to the
lining using a fillet weld each side.
All FML sheets, seams, anchors, seals, and repairs will be visually inspected by the
Contractor for defects. In addition, all seams and repairs will be further checked by a
wTRDF- III-ATT10 33
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
metal probe. Depending on seam welding equipment used, all seams and repairs will '�
be tested by a vacuum testing device, a spark testing device and/or air pressure.
A visual inspection of the lining sheets, seams, anchors and seals will be made by the
Contractor as the installation progresses and again on completion of the installation.
Defective and questionable areas will be clearly marked and repaired. Final approval of
repairs will be given by the Geotechnical Professional.
The Contractor will run a metal probe, such as a dull -pointed ice pick, along the length
of all seams and repairs to insure that the seam is continuous and absent of leak paths.
Defects will be clearly marked and repaired.
If the fillet weld, extrusion lap weld or single hot -wedge fusion lap weld is used to weld
seams, the Contractor will further test all seams and repairs in the FML by vacuum box.
All vacuum box testing will be done in the presence of the Geotechnical Professional.
The area to be tested will be cleaned of all dust, debris, dirt and other foreign matter. A
soap solution will be applied to the test area with a paint roller and the vacuum of 10
inches Mercury (Hg) will be induced and held at least ten seconds to mark for repair
any suspicious areas as evidenced by bubbles in the soap solution.
If the fillet weld is used to weld seams, the Contractor will further test all seams and
repairs in the FML by using a high voltage spark detector. The setting of the detector
will be 20,000 volts. In order to conduct this test, all seams to be tested will be provided �--
with not less than gauge 24-30 copper wires properly embedded in the seams and
WTRDF- III-A7T10 34
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
grounded. All spark testing will be done in the presence of the Geotechnical
Professional. All defective areas will be marked for repair.
If the double hot -wedge is used, the Contractor will further test all seams in the FML by
using the air pressure test which consists of inserting a needle with gauge in the air
space between welds. Air will be pumped into space to 30 psi and held for 5 minutes. If
pressure does not drop more than 4 psi, then the seam is acceptable.
All costs of retesting of the FML including reruns of field weld tests and all repairs will
be at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor will retain responsibility for the integrity of the FML system until
acceptance by the Geotechnical Professional. The FML will be accepted by the
Geotechnical Professional when:
a) Written certification letters including "as built" drawings, have been received by the
Geotechnical Professional.
b) 'Installation is completed.
c) Documentation of completed installation, including all reports, is complete.
d) Verification of adequacy of field seams and repairs, including associated testing, is
complete.
WTRDF- III-ATT10 35
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
Acceptance of the completed work will include receipt of all submittals and all work
completed to the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Professional.
WTRDF- III-ATT10 36
HDR Engineering, Inc. February. 1996
4.0 LEACHATE COLLECTION SYSTEM
A leachate collection system (LCS) will be placed above the Flexible Membrane Liner.
The LCS will consist of a heat bonded HDPE geonet/geotextile drainage composite
(geocomposite) on the floor and side walls with granular (gravel) embedded leachate
collection pipes in the sump and pipe trench areas. The leachate collection pipes will
consist of six inch diameter pipe with 1/2 inch diameter holes. To avoid piping losses
into the collection pipes, the granular material layer shall consist of rounded, river -run
gravel meeting the requirements of ASTM C-33 for coarse aggregate. Crushed
material will not be acceptable. The gravel should meet the gradation requirements of
Size No. 67 (Nominal size 3/4 inch to No. 4) or coarser. In addition, the gravel will have
a permeability of 1 cm/sec or greater and the percent of calcium carbonate by weight
will not exceed 15 percent. The gravel in the sump and pipe trench areas will be
wrapped with a minimum 8-once geotextile to prevent fines from entering the gravel. A
minimum 8-ounce non -woven geotextile (Nicolon S Series or equivalent) will be used in
the drainage geocomposite. The geocomposite materials will be hand placed.
Placement of gravel drainage materials over geosynthetics will generally not proceed at
ambient temperatures below 32EF or above 104EF, but should be conducted at the
coolest part of the day to minimize the development of wrinkles or folding of the
geosynthetic materials. A minimum of one foot of gravel material is required between
low ground pressure dozers (i.e. track pressure less than 5 psi) and the geosynthetics.
Greater material thickness must be maintained above the geosynthetics if heavier
spreading equipment and hauling vehicles are used. In such cases, a minimum of 2
WTRDF- III-ATT10 37
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
feet of gravel drainage material thickness will be used unless otherwise specified in the
F
design. The placement of the gravel will be controlled to avoid damage to the liner;
however, the gravel drainage layer in the trenches and sump does not need to be
density controlled.
Granular drainage materials will be selected to meet the specifications described
above. At least one set of pre -construction tests will be conducted for each drainage
media from each proposed source. Gravel and sand sources will include a complete
grain -size analysis, including Minus No. 200 Sieve, by ASTM D 422. Hydraulic
conductivity may be correlated from the grain -size distribution to determine the gravel's
or sand's suitability. Granular drainage materials selected for use will be tested at
regular intervals for conformance during construction. Minimum testing frequency will
be one grain -size analysis for every 3,000 cubic yards (minimum 1 test) for each
material being used. The required thickness of gravel drainage materials will be verified
by survey methods on an established grid system with not less than one verification
point per 5,000 square feet of surface area.
The geotextile materials in the geocomposite drainage layer will include an 8-ounce
non -woven fabric heat bonded on top and bottom of the geonet. The following tests
described in Table 4-1 will be required on the geotextile materials.
WTRDF- III-ATT10 38
HDR Engineering, Inc. February. 1996
TABLE 4-1
Standard Tests on Geotextile Materials
Test
Type of Test
Standard
Test Method
Frequency of Testing
Manufacturers
Thickness
ASTM D1777
per 100,000 If
Grab Tensile Strenoth
ASTM D4632
per 100,000 L=
Puncture Resistance
ASTM D4833
nor 100,000 fe
Permeability
ASTM D4491
oer 100,000
Conformance
Testing by 3rd
Party
Independent
Laboratory
Thickness
ASTM D1777
per 100,000 ft2
Fabric Weight
ASTM D3776
per 100,000 ft2
Grab Tensile Strength
ASTM D4632
per 100,000 ft2
Grab Elonglation
ASTM D4632
per 100,000 ft2
Puncture Resistance
ASTM D4833
per 100,000 ft2
Permeability
ASTM D 4491
per 100,000 ft2
1. MD/CD = MD - Machine Direction/CD - Cross Direction
WTRDF-111-AMO
HDR Engineering, Inc.
39
February, 1996
Geonets will be tested as described in Table 4-2 below.
TABLE 4-2
Standard Tests on Geonet Material
Test
Type of Test
Standard
Test Method
Frequency of Testing
Resin
Specific Gravity/Density
ASTM D 1505
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Melt Flow Index
ASTM D 1238
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Manufacturers
Quality Control
Thickness
ASTM D 1777
per manufacturer's quality control
specifications
Mass per Unit Area
ASTM D 3776
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Polyethylene Content
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Dens' black resin
ASTM D 1505
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Carbon Black Content
ASTM D 1603
per 100,000 111:2 and every resin lot
Melt Index
ASTM D 1238
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Tensile Strength
ASTM D 1682
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Transmissivity
ASTM D 4716
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Conformance
Testing by 3rd
Party
Independent
Laboratory
Thickness
ASTM D 751
per 100,000 111:2 and every resin lot
Mass per unit area
ASTM D 3776
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Carbon black content
ASTM D 1603
per 100,000 111:2 and every resin lot
Tensile Strength
ASTM D 1682
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Transmissivity
ASTM D 4716
per 100,000 ft2 and every resin lot
Protective cover will be carefully spread on top of the geocomposite to avoid damage to
the liner system.
r-�
WTRDF- III-ATT10 40
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
' 5.0 PROTECTIVE COVER
A minimum 2-foot thick protective cover will be placed above the LCS. The protective
cover may use on site gravels and sands with a permeability of 1 x 1 0-4cm/sec or
greater.,. The maximum gravel size shall not exceed two inches. Pre -construction and
conformance testing for the protective cover soils will include permeability and full
gradation with a minimum conformance testing frequency of one grain -size analysis
(ASTM D422) and permeability test (ASTM D5084) per 5,000 cubic yards of in -place
material.
Protective cover does not require compaction control; however, it should be stable for
("0" construction and disposal traffic. Care will be exercised in placement so as not to shift,
wrinkle or damage the underlying geosynthetic layers, and the placement methods will
be documented. Protective cover will be placed such that the top surface, while
spreading, is a least 2 ft above the geosynthetic layers at all times, unless low ground
pressure dozers are used (i.e. track pressure less than 5 psi), in which case as least
one foot should be maintained between the dozer and the geosynthetics. A greater
thickness will be maintained to support loaded hauling trucks and trailers and for turning
areas. Drivers will proceed with caution when on the overlying soil and prevent
spinning of tires or sharp turns.
Protective cover will generally be placed in an up -slope direction for sidewalls as long
as the same material is being used. Where the top few feet of sidewall (typically less
than 5 feet vertically) is to be protected by a different soil type, such as clay for tying in
WTRDF- III-ATT10 41
HDR Engineering, Inc. February. 1996
the final cover soil liner, this material may be place from the top, if adequate care is
taken to protect the synthetic liner components.
The required thickness of protective cover will be verified by survey methods on an
established grid system with not less than one verification point per 5,000 square feet of
surface area.
WTRDF- III-ATT10 42
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
r'�" 6.0 MARKING AND IDENTIFYING OF EVALUATED AREAS
Red markers will be placed so that all areas for which Soil and Liner Evaluation Report
(SLER) and Flexible Membrane Liner Evaluation Report (FMLER) have been submitted
and approved by the TNRCC are readily identifiable. Such markers are to provide site
workers immediate knowledge of the extent of approved disposal areas.
Red markers will be steel or wooden posts and will extend at least six feet above
ground level. Markers will not be obscured by vegetation and will be placed so that they
are not destroyed during operations. Sufficient intermediate markers will be installed to
show the required boundary. Lost markers will be promptly replaced. Limits of the
evaluated area will be referenced to the site grid system. Markers will not be placed
inside the evaluated area.
WTRDF- III-ATT10 43
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
7.0 SLER, FMLER AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION
Upon completion of all required liner construction and evaluation, the Geotechnical
Professional will prepare and submit both the Soil Liner Evaluation Report (SLER) and
Flexible Membrane Liner Evaluation Report (FMLER) to the Commission for review and
approval. These will be submitted along with a construction documentation report.
Multiple submittals of the reports or documentation during the project may be made, if
they may facilitate review of the project by the TNRCC. The SLER and FMLER will be
signed and sealed by the Geotechnical Professional performing the evaluation and
counter -signed by the site operator or his authorized representative.
The construction documentation will contain a narrative describing the conduct of work and testing programs required by the SLQCP, "as -built' or record drawings, and
appendices of field and laboratory data. Because the volume of data for these projects
can be quite large, the documents may be subdivided for ease of review. The preferred
document format will include the SLER, FMLER, narrative, as -built drawings, and
summaries of test results in a single volume. The remaining appendices will be placed
in accompanying volumes. SLER/FMLER submittals will include test documentation in
a form as recommended in TNRCC technical guides. The SLER/FMLER submittals
should also contain the revised stability analyses reflecting actual field shear strength
values if different from original assumptions.
Specifically, the construction documentation report will contain or discuss the following r
information, at a minimum, for geomembrane liners:
wTRDF- III-ATT10 44
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
• Roll shipment and receipt information
• Manufacturer's quality control certificates and results
• Storage and handling information
• Conformance test sampling and test results
• Seamer's names and resume of experience and qualifications
• Subgrade acceptance
• Anchor trench preparation and backfilling
• Panel deployment, identification and placement
• Panel wrinkling, fishmouthing, and manufacturer's creases
• Seam preparation, orientation and identification
• Weather and ambient/sheet temperatures
• Equipment placed or operated on geomembrane
• 100 percent visual inspection for defects, damage, etc.
• Trial seam tests for each combination of seaming equipment and personnel
• Seaming methods, times, temperature, equipment shutdowns and startups
• Continuous 100 percent non-destructive seam testing, methods, criteria and
results
• Destructive testing methods, criteria and results
• Repairs, including preparation and procedures, failure delineation, patch size
and shape, and retesting
• Material properties and placement of drainage materials and protective covers
WTRDF- 111-ATT10 45
HDR Engineering, Inc. February, 1996
The report will also include pertinent record drawings including:
Sectorized fill layout plan,
• Location of the subject trench or cell with SLER/FMLER markers,
• Previous filled and active areas,
• As -built panel layout drawings, showing location of destructive test samples,
patches and repairs, and
• As -built drawings showing elevations of protective cover to confirm its thickness.
VVTRDF- III-ATT10 46
HDR Engineering, Inc. February. 1996
EXHIBIT C
CONTINUED
APPROVED REVISIONS
TO THE
SOIL LINER QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
3
5.0 PROTECTIVE COVER
5.1 GENERAL
This section covers the work necessary for construction of the protective cover
system over the LCS. Two protective cover systems are proposed for use at
the landfill. One system uses available soil on -site as the cover material. This
system is described in Section 5.2. The other system uses on -site soil material
for the lower 12-inches and tire chips in the upper 12-inches. The alternative
system of soil/tire chips is described in Section 5.3.
5.2 PROTECTIVE COVER - SOIL
A minimum 2-foot thick protective cover will be placed above the LCS. The
protective cover may use on site gravels and sands with a permeability of 1 x
1W cm/sec or greater. The maximum gravel size shall not exceed two inches.
Pre -construction and conformance testing for the protective cover soils will
include permeability and full gradation with a minimum conformance testing
frequency of one grain -size analysis (ASTM D422) and permeability test (ASTM
D5084) per 5,000 cubic yards of in -place mated
ial.
N.
e
ROB uY' Eft
+� 59052
assTE
a�a��� ��19 s�ONat.
VVTRDF-III-ATT 10 41
HDR Engineering, Inc.
Original Issue February, 1996
Revised October 1997
Protective cover does not require compaction control; however, it should be
stable for construction and disposal traffic. Care will be exercised in placement
so as not to shift, wrinkle or damage the underlying geosynthetic layers, and
the placement methods will be documented. Protective cover will be placed
such that the top surface, while spreading, is at least 2 ft. above the
geosynthetic layers at all times, unless low ground pressure dozers are used
(i.e. track pressure less than 5 psi), in which case at least one foot should be
maintained between the dozer and the geosynthetics. A greater thickness will
be maintained to support loaded hauling trucks and trailers and for turning
areas. Drivers will proceed with caution when on the overlying soil and
prevent spinning of tires or sharp turns.
Protective cover will generally be placed in an up -slope direction for sidewalls
as long as the same material is being used. Where the top few feet of sidewall
(typically less than 5 feet vertically) is to be protected by a different soil type,
such as clay for tying in the final cover soil liner, this material may be placed
from the top, if adequate care is taken to protect the synthetic liner
components.
The required thickness of protective cover will be verified by survey methods
on an established grid system with not less than one verification point per
5,000 square feet of surface area.
WTRDF-III-ATT10 42 Original Issue February, 1996
HDR Engineering, Inc. Revised October 1997
5.3 PROTECTIVE COVER - SOIL/TIRE CHIPS
As shown on Figure III.ATT.1.16, tire chips may be used to construct the
protective cover's upper 12-inch thick layer. The tire chips are to be placed
on top of a soil layer that is a minimum 12-inches in thickness. The onsite soil
layer is necessary to prevent direct contact between the HDPE geomembrane
and the tire chips.
Tire chips must be inspected prior to installation for verification that the
following criteria is met:
a) Maximum size of tire chip, 2-inches measured in any direction;
b) Tire chips are free of organic material, angular rock, or deleterious
materials;
c) Steel wire protruding from tire chip is not excessive and does not
extend 3-inches beyond edge of tire chip.
Prior to placement of tire chips, the lower 12-inch thick layer of soil will be
verified using the procedure outlined in Section 5.2 of this SLQCP. Any areas
that do not meet the required 12-inch thickness shall receive additional soil
material and the new thickness verified by additional survey for minimum
requirements.
WTRDF-111-ATT10
HDR Engineering, Inc.
43
Original Issue February, 1996
Revised October 1997
Upon verification that the lower soil level is at the required thickness,
placement of tire chips may begin. Tire chips will be placed using similar
equipment employed with the soil cover placement operation. Tire chips will
be spread over the required area to a minimum thickness of 12-inches. Care
must be taken at all times to avoid direct contact between the tire chips and
geomembrane.
Following placement of tire chips, the area will be surveyed for thickness
verification. A minimum of one measured survey point per 5,000 ft' of
constructed surface area will be taken. The surveyed .locations will coincide
with the locations surveyed to verify lower soil layer thickness. Any locations
that are not at the required thickness will receive additional tire chips until the
proper thickness is obtained and verified by field survey. The results of the
survey will be included in the Flexible Membrane Liner Evaluation Report
(FMLER).
WTRDF-111-ATT10 44 Original Issue February, 1996
HDR Engineering, Inc. Revised October 1997
6
N
0
_J
i
4.Yn �L-fmcr%f%E-n -nmr, f�u1f1l�
TYPICAL BOTTOM
LINER DETAIL
NO SCALE
m
alk is—
WBBOGC 7E7U�S
TYPICAL SIDE SLOPE
LINER DETAIL
NO SCALE
� �1
ram:
ROBERT HOLLY HOLDER
�.:•::...59052 ;•w4O.
�+ ��FSFcisrER���?�"
/?9 7
WEST TEXAS REGION DISPOSAL FACILITY
PERMIT NO. 2252
ALTERNATIVE PROTECTIVE COVER
SHREDDED TIRE CHIPS
TYPICAL DETAILS
DATE.
AUG. 1997
FIGURE:
III.ATT.1.161
rA
��*. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
NONE IDENTIFIED